Google SketchUp 7 Help
Welcome to SketchUp
Developed for the conceptual stages of design. and welcome to the SketchUp user community. SketchUp is powerful yet easy-to-learn 3D software. 2008
. SketchUp is being used by anyone with the desire to Dream.
Page 21
Copyright Google Inc. thank you for trying SketchUp. yet robust tool-set that streamlines and simplifies 3D design inside your computer. This award-winning software combines a simple. Design and Communicate in 3D! From the entire SketchUp team. We think of it as the pencil of digital design.

directly into your SketchUp drawing window. Pan Hold down the Shift key along with Control and Command. to orbit using a one-button mouse. SketchUp uses these features of your Macintosh by automatically running in accelerated OpenGL mode. 2008
. to pan using a one-button mouse. SketchUp modifies this color picker to enable texture image management and to easily keep track of materials specified in your model. while clicking the mouse button.skp) into the drawing window.skp files will be placed in your model as components.
Page 22
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
SketchUp for Mac OS X
SketchUp for Mac OS X has been designed and developed as a native Macintosh OS X application. Every Macintosh computer shipping today comes with incredibly powerful 3D graphics hardware providing you with the best possible user experience. Cocoa Application Programmer's Interface (API). You can also drag SketchUp files (. while clicking the mouse button. This key combination temporarily invokes the Pan Tool. object-oriented.
Apple Color System
SketchUp for MacOS X has a completely redesigned color and materials management system based on Apple Computer's System Color Picker.
Portable Document Format (PDF)
SketchUp leverages Mac OS X built-in support for Adobe® Portable Document Format (PFD) which is the worldwide standard for electronic document distribution.
Drag and Drop
SketchUp leverages the Macintosh drag and drop feature. This feature can help you quickly organize and locate your files in the Finder.
One Button Mouse
Macintosh computers traditionally ship with a one-button mouse. you can drag image files. SketchUp provides features and performance exclusive to MacOS X by taking advantage of the Macintosh Aqua user interface and dynamic. from the Finder.
Fast OpenGL 3D Rendering
Mac OS X is a state-of-the-art operating system designed to support intensive 2D and 3D graphics. This key combination temporarily invokes the Orbit Tool. These . For example.
Document Icons
Your SketchUp documents can be saved in such a way that they contain a thumbnail view of their contents. SketchUp has been designed to allow you to be effective using a one-button mouse through the use of keyboard shortcuts as follows: Orbit Hold down the Control and Command keys. Below are some examples of the SketchUp and MacOS X integration. such as scans or digital photos.

google. Receive free email technical support for two years after purchase
Google SketchUp and Google SketchUp Pro 7 Documentation
This documentation represents all of the functionality in both Google SketchUp and Google SketchUp Pro 7. and FBX file formats Use the LayOut tools to create page and screen-based presentations of your models.com/gsu6/buy. Google SketchUp Pro is available to purchase at http://sketchup.
Page 23
Copyright Google Inc. DXF.html.Google SketchUp 7 Help
SketchUp Versions
SketchUp is available in personal and professional versions. 2008
. DWG. OBJ. VRML. Google SketchUp is available for free on sketchup. You need Google SketchUp Pro if you want to: • • • Export models in 3DS.google. Functionality that is specific to Google SketchUp Pro 7 is identified with the pro icon ( ) in this documentation.com. XSI.

Click on the Dynamic Component with the Interact Tool ( see if parts animate or change. and select "Dynamic Components > Component Options" to ) to view configurable behavior. You can even download a Google 3D Warehouse collection or the results of a search to a local collection on your hard drive for easy access. Select "File > Generate Report" to create an attribute report.
Improved GEO-referencing Workflow
SketchUp 7 has an improved the user interface for managing geo-location in the model. such as a stair component that. context-click on the component. automatically adds more steps.
Components Browser Enhancements
You can search and download models from the Google 3D Warehouse directly to your modeling space with the SketchUp 7 enhanced Component Browser. initial view. attempt to scale the Dynamic Component using the Scale Tool to see if it has special scaling attributes.
Page 24
Copyright Google Inc. style. Select "File > Save As Template" to save your current file as a template. Google SketchUp Pro 7 users have the ability to create dynamic components using the new Component Attributes dialog box. Context-click on any component and select "Dynamic Components > Component Attributes" to author a Dynamic Component. and so on. These components are identified by a small icon ( ) indicating that the component has parametric behaviors. or a cabinet component whose doors can open and close. and save it as a reusable Template (containing thumbnail view and description). When you have a big project and you want to take advantage of the wealth of models in the 3D Warehouse. Insert a Dynamic Component. Google SketchUp and Google SketchUp Pro 7 contain the following enhancements and new features:
Dynamic Components
Dynamic components are components that have parametric behaviors. The Components Browser is available by selecting "Window > Components. Or."
Save Custom Templates
SketchUp 7's "Save As Template" menu item allows you to configure a file with units. The new Google 3D Warehouse search feature allows you to save and bookmark your searches or 3D Warehouse collections as “Favorites” for faster access to the items you need. Google SketchUp Pro 7 users have the ability to create attribute reports for Dynamic Components.Google SketchUp 7 Help
What's New in this Release?
Google listens to your requests and attempts to implement many into SketchUp enhancements and new features. 2008
. This dialog box is similar to a two-column spreadsheet in appearance and functionality. All SketchUp users can use Dynamic Component available in SketchUp's Component Browser or in the Google 3D Warehouse. including a new status bar icon (See following VCB and Status Bar Improvements section) and a new "Use georeferencing checkbox" in the Location panel of the Model Info dialog box (Window > Model Info). when resized. the new Component Browser lets you do it without losing focus on your design.

Google account login.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Credits
SketchUp 7 Credits feature allows you to take credit for the models you create and for model contributions. and Template. including improvements in Match Photo and the Position Texture Tool." Or. and warns of impending demo expiration. The Welcome to SketchUp dialog box is divided into three sections: Learn. License. Credits are available from the status bar or by selecting the "Credits" tab from the Model Info dialog box (Window > Model Info). Select "Help > Help Center" to access all SketchUp learning resources. texture the color of the face is created. context-click on a textured face and select "Texture > Edit Texture Image. Context-click on a face with a texture and select "Make Unique Texture. with thumbnail views and descriptions. of all available templates. displays remaining demo time. The Template section contains a list. Credits. This feature works with texture images as well as with plain colors. Edit Texture The Edit Texture Image button sends the selected texture image to the user's default image editor for modification. A new.
VCB and Status Bar Improvements
The Value Control Box (VCB) has been renamed to the "Measurements Toolbar" and can now be repositioned on the screen. unique. Project Texture Textures are now projected only onto visible faces and faces within grouped entities. Context click on a texture in the Materials Browser and select "Edit Texture Image. simplifies license entry for Google SketchUp Pro users. Additional buttons have also been added to the status prompt to provide access to and status for the following features: Georeferencing. and the Instructor. Credits require you to log in to a Google account." The default image editing program used with this feature can be configured in the Applications tab of SketchUp Preferences. • • • The Learn section contains links to all learning resources into the Help Center. These changes are: Make Unique Texture The Make Unique Texture menu item makes the selected texture image unique and crops it to fit the selected face.
Page 25
Copyright Google Inc.
Help Center Integration
All of the SketchUp 7 learning resources are consolidated in the Help Center which is accessible through the Welcome Dialog and the Help menu.
Texture Handling Enhancements
Google SketchUp 7 contains incremental improvements to texture handling. The License section displays license status. 2008
. As with the Google 3D Warehouse." Selecting "Make Unique Texture" on a face without a texture displays a Texture Size dialog box.
Welcome to SketchUp
The Welcome to SketchUp dialog box provides you with an opportunity to choose essential first-run options and prepares you for success in your first experience with SketchUp.

with at least one face having a texture. The result is smoother looking textures and faster display because less memory must be used when smaller texture images are swapped out.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Combine Textures The Combine Textures menu item combines separate textures on adjacent co-planar faces into a single larger texture.
Style Builder 1
SketchUp 7 contains the first official release of the Style Builder application for creating custom sketchy edge styles for SketchUp.google. LayOut 2 contains numerous improvements over LayOut 1 (beta). Refer to code. The Use maximum texture size checkbox is in the OpenGL panel of the Preferences dialog box (Window > Preferences on Microsoft Windows or SketchUp > Preferences on Mac OS X). takes a texture at full size and creates smaller versions of the texture which are swapped out for the appropriate view size. Previously.
New Inference Icons
Google SketchUp 7 has new. This option. Refer to the What's New section in the LayOut documentation for further information.
LayOut 2
Google SketchUp 7 Pro contains the first official release of LayOut.com for information about the SketchUp Ruby API. crossing lines would have to be explicitly broken. These icons are also consistent with the inference icons in LayOut 2. Style Builder is accessible through a desktop shortcut (Microsoft Windows) or within the Applications folder (Mac OS X). This is true for all drawing and modification operations.
Page 26
Copyright Google Inc. This feature also. also known as mipmapping. and select "Combine Textures" to create a texture which is unique to that set of faces. inference icons. 2008
. This option might result in a slowing of SketchUp unless your graphics card and computer can handle what is advertised.
Ruby API Changes
New Ruby APIs have been added. LayOut 2 is accessible through a desktop shortcut (Microsoft Windows) or within the Applications folder (Mac OS X). Use Anti-Aliased Textures SketchUp has a Use Anti-Aliased Textures option in Model Info's Rendering tab. removes edges between co-planar faces to reduce the polygon count for the model as a whole. Context-click on multiple selected parallel faces.
Edge Merging Behavior
Two lines crossing in a single plane will now break into four segments at their point of intersection. titled LayOut 2. optionally. easier to distinguish. Maximum Texture Size Check the "Use maximum texture size" checkbox to use the maximum texture size supported by your graphics card.

Post a question in our user forum. Review the following technical support explanation for your product. such as OS X 10.
Google SketchUp Free
SketchUp Free is a self-supporting product.3. 2008
.
Visit the Online Help Center by clicking on the Online Help Center menu item in the Help menu (Help > Online Help Center).
Google SketchUp Pro
In addition to the self-supporting options for Google SketchUp Free. There are several options available to find answers to SketchUp issues: • • • Use the online user's guide index to find a topic. and the exact release of your operating system. Search the knowledge base to find a topic. You must be connected to the Internet to access the user forums. video card details.9 or Windows XP Professional with Service Pack 2) A detailed description of your question or issue
•
Page 27
Copyright Google Inc. Please include the following with your email: • A list of your computer system's resources (CPU type.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Technical Support
Google SketchUp (Free) and Google SketchUp Pro users have different levels of technical support. RAM. Google SketchUp Pro users can request installation and configuration help using email through the Online Help Center (your serial number will be required).

Getting Started Guide: Read the Getting Started Guide if you are new to SketchUp and want to try introductory operations. User's Guide: Refer to the User's Guide for all of your questions on how to use SketchUp. just search on a common term or phrase in your question. These guides differ in their intended audience. You must be connected to the Internet to access the help center. The Help Center contains SketchUp documentation. Select "Help > Help Center" to visit the SketchUp Help Center. View these tutorials through the View Tutorials menu item in the Help menu (Help > Help Center).
Help Center
You can find answers to many questions in this Google SketchUp Help Center. The Reference Guide covers all "What is XYZ option" questions. SketchUp Documentation There are several written guides covering the use of SketchUp. quick reference card. there is a minimum level of learning you must do to attain proficiency with SketchUp. Video Tutorials Google has created several video tutorials to facilitate learning of the SketchUp tools and drawing procedures. video tutorials..
Page 28
Copyright Google Inc. Reference Guide: Refer to the Reference Guide for all of your questions regarding specific SketchUp User Interface features.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Learning SketchUp
As with any software tool. This guide will help you better understand information presented in the User's Guide and Reference Guide." questions. The User's Guide covers all "How Do I.. Concepts Guide: Read the Concepts Guide if you are new to SketchUp and want to understand common SketchUp terms and concepts. 2008
. You must be connected to the Internet to access these tutorials. or browse through the categories. The following information can help you learn how to use SketchUp. and a Google SketchUp Group.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Quick Reference Card The SketchUp Quick Reference Card (in the Help Center) contains a list of all of Toolbar tools and their modifier keys. The Status Bar The Status Bar. ask questions. You must be connected to the Internet to access SketchUp user group. Proceed to the Quick Reference Card Google SketchUp Group The Google SketchUp Group is an excellent place to find answers. Proceed to the Google SketchUp Group SketchUp Training Google provides training courses for users who want extra assistance with SketchUp from the experts at Google.com/group/sketchup-Pro-Groups/topics. located at the bottom of the SketchUp Drawing Area. Examine the SketchUp Quick Reference Card to become familiar with using SketchUp's tools. Examine SketchUp's menus to become familiar with the breadth of features. 2008
.
Page 29
Copyright Google Inc. Visit the SketchUp user group through the SketchUp Help Center (Help > Help Center) or by tying the following URL in your browser: http://groups. including special functions accessible using keyboard shortcuts. Instructor Enable the Instructor (Window > Instructor) to display information related to the currently selected tool. Visit the Help Center for further information on SketchUp training classes in your area.google. and share your expertise. Watch the status bar while you are working in SketchUp to discover advanced capabilities of each of the SketchUp tools. displays tips for the active tool. Menus Most SketchUp commands are accessible using both tool buttons and drop-down menus.
The SketchUp User Interface
Following are three additional options for learning SketchUp built into the SketchUp user interface.

2008
.
Page 30
Copyright Google Inc.Presents concepts related to the presentation of your models to clients. Modeling Terrain and Organic Shapes .Introduces you to SketchUp tools and concepts necessary to draw quickly. Presenting Your Models .Introduces you to mechanisms to quickly add realism to your SketchUp models. Adding Detail to Your Models .Presents concepts related to working with mesh tools to create both terrain and organic shapes. Drawing Quickly .Presents the concept of the camera and manipulation of a model in 3D space. Viewing Models in 3D .
This section is organized into the following topics: • • • • • • Designing in SketchUp .Introduces you to the basic concepts behind drawing accurately in SketchUp.This section does not cover how to do something in SketchUp.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Concepts Guide
This guide covers the numerous 3D design and SketchUp concepts found within the product and in the user community. This section was primarily written for users who are new to 3D modeling or SketchUp. but covers important concepts necessary to model in 3D. Note .

Note . The following image shows three unconnected coplanar lines. These lines were drawn with the Line Tool (this tool looks like a pencil). face. 2 dimensional.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Designing in SketchUp
SketchUp models are fundamentally created by joining lines as the edges of the model. To create a 3D model. The coordinate system (axes) is covered later in this section.Everything you draw in SketchUp is generically referred to as geometry.
Page 31
Copyright Google Inc.
The following image shows four connected coplanar lines and the subsequently created flat. or coplanar. Faces are automatically created when any three or more lines or edges are in the same plane (an infinite flat 2D space). simply draw up or down in the blue direction (parallel to the blue axes). and form a closed loop. 2008
. These edge and face combinations are combined to create 3D models. The following image shows the first line created in 3D space.

green. faces are created. The following image shows four faces created simply by drawing lines parallel to the three axes directions (red. two faces are created (the top and front faces). following the colored axes. and blue).
Page 32
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
As you continue to draw lines. Notice that when this one line is drawn in. 2008
.
There is one line left to draw to finish a 3 dimensional box.

Additionally. at a point. CAD applications are designed specifically for representing concrete information. and so on). everything has edges that bound the face.Google SketchUp 7 Help
You can do a lot in SketchUp simply by drawing lines to form faces using the Line Tool. while SketchUp is for exploration and design of concepts and ideas (though you are not prohibited from designing models that are as concrete or accurate as those designed in CAD). 2008
. some might be flat. And. SketchUp files can be imported into several different CAD applications for further processing and several different CAD files can be imported into SketchUp to quickly create 3D models. Notice how everything you look at has faces. on a face. Can you recognize the previous 3D box within the model of the following house?
Look around the room you are in. you can draw lines starting anywhere (on another line. Note .SketchUp is not the same as Computer Assisted Design or CAD.
Page 33
Copyright Google Inc. such as the edge of a shelf in a bookshelf. Some faces might be rounded.

though sometime you might have to tell SketchUp the direction for your faces. A full list of SketchUp entities follows. 2008
. The plane where the red and green axes lines lie is called the ground plane.
An imported raster.
The SketchUp Coordinate Systems
SketchUp uses a 3D coordinate system whereby points in space are identified by position along three drawing axes: plus or minus X. Circle. lines are combined to create faces in SketchUp. Surface entities are the result of combining a number of faces to give the impression of smoothness. and curves are comprised of several lines or edges. arcs. are the most basic building block for all SketchUp models. SketchUp attempts to put the front side of all faces on the outside (facing out) of all of your models. plus or minus Y are represented by a solid green and dotted green axis lines respectively. plus or minus X is represented by solid red and dotted red lines respectively. are just two of the many building blocks (called entities) used for creating models in SketchUp. Faces have a front side and a back side.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Introduction to Entities
As mentioned previously. Y. and Z (above ground/below ground) values. Components are just SketchUp models used within other SketchUp models. plus or minus Z (above and below the ground plane) are represented by solid blue and dotted blue lines respectively. Component entities are like groups but can be reused in all of your SketchUp models. Finally. or pixel-based. Text can be unattached (floating) or attached to a specific entity using a leader line. In SketchUp. Lines. also referred to as edges. Faces are created automatically when three or more coplanar edges form a closed loop. the term origin is used to define the place where all of axes lines start or originate. A Guide Line entity is a temporary line used as a drawing guide.
Page 34
Copyright Google Inc. image.
Circle Arc Polygon Curve Polyline Group Component
Group entities are used to combine two or more entities in your model for quick operations such as a copy. Name Line Face Notes Lines in SketchUp are straight. Lines (also called edges) and faces.
Guide Line
Dimension Surface Section Plane Image Text
A notation indicating length of an edge or a radius.

a line that is perpendicular to the ground plane.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The following image shows the drawing axes in SketchUp (the lines have been thickened to make the axes easier to read). The inference engine locates or infers points from other points in your model. SketchUp notifies you of these points by using both color indicators and tool tips. and so on. including inference types. The first step to drawing in SketchUp is to learn how to draw accurately by following the cues of the inference engine.
Additional information on the inference engine. is in the User Interface section of this guide. SketchUp displays the string “On Face" when the cursor is touching a face. Pay attention to the on-screen tool tips from the inference
Page 35
Copyright Google Inc. such as the center of a circle. a point on a face. The black circle represents the origin.
Following the Inference Engine
SketchUp has an invisible inference engine to help you draw accurate and realistic models. the midpoint of a line.
Understanding SketchUp’s coordinate system is important because SketchUp’s inference engine (explained next) provides you help with drawing accurately. For example. which are on-screen messages indicating the location of the cursor as you draw an entity. a point on an edge. Simply select the Line Tool (it looks like a pencil in the Toolbar or tool pallet) and start drawing. 2008
. The following image contains five common inference tool tips .

You can move on to learning how to draw quickly after you master using the inference engine. = Functionality only available in SketchUp Pro
Page 36
Copyright Google Inc. Most everything you will create in SketchUp can be created by inference using the Line Tool.Google SketchUp 7 Help
engine as you draw. 2008
.

while the image on the right has two independent faces when split with a line. you can use the Line Tool and the inference engine.
Dividing and Healing Geometry
Some tools speed up design dramatically by allowing you to perform modifications on existing geometry. and intersections. For example. Note four edges bounding the face in the left image. Tip . This concept is similar to cutting a piece of paper in half and having two separate remaining pieces.Learn to draw accurately before you learn to draw quickly and you will master SketchUp in a shorter amount of time. sticky geometry.
Page 37
Copyright Google Inc. Notice the image on the left has one solid top face.
The following image shows how the edges at each end of the face have been split to create additional edges.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing Quickly
As mentioned in the Design in SketchUp topic. pushing and pulling. the Line Tool allows you to split faces and edges to create additional independent faces and edges. autofold. The following image shows how two faces are created when dividing the face with a line. Simply divide the face or edge with another edge. Note that the dividing line does not cut through the model from top to bottom. while four edges bounding each of two faces in the image on the right (the middle edge being common to both top faces). to draw just about anything in SketchUp. 2008
. but just cuts the top face in half. SketchUp implements several concepts which you will use to help you draw quickly. It is recommended that you use the Line Tool and inference engine to create your initial models. These are dividing and healing.

the two faces will be glued back together or healed back into one face.
In the previous image.Google SketchUp 7 Help
If you remove the line that shared by the two faces in the image on the right.
Pushing and Pulling
The Push/Pull Tool allows you to take any non-curved face in SketchUp and push it away or pull it toward a starting point (these operations are also referred to as extrusions). It is common in SketchUp to perform these dividing and healing operations to your model. can you find them (some are hidden out of view)? Pulling is the process of expanding a portion of your model away from the starting point along a single axis.
Page 38
Copyright Google Inc. Any face in SketchUp can be pushed and pulled (with some minor limitations). 2008
. The following image shows the same face having been pulled up toward the sky. The following image shows the right-most face of the split face (shown earlier) pushed down toward the ground plane. Pushing is the process of reshaping a portion of your model by shrinking the portion away from its starting point and along a single axis. there are eight faces that can be pushed.

while the right side was pushed and pulled (shrunk and expanded) independently. or folded) by selecting an edge or face and moving the edge or face with the Move Tool (causing all entities attached or "stuck" to the edge or face to move too). 2008
.
Manipulating Connected Faces
Geometry in SketchUp is sticky meaning that it can be manipulated (skewed.
The following image shows the left-most top face being moved down in the blue direction. Following are three examples of sticky geometry in SketchUp: 1. The Push/Pull Tool is one of the most commonly used tools in SketchUp to add the sense of volume to your model. The faces that were connected to the middle line followed the line as it was moved to create a roof-like effect. the left side of the cube remained the same size.
Page 39
Copyright Google Inc.
2.Google SketchUp 7 Help
In both of the images. This action causes the right-most top face to angle to create a slant on one side. distorted. The following image shows a line dividing the top face of a box being moved up with a Move Tool.

Be sure to use the Move Tool to grab and move edges and faces while you begin to experiment with modeling in SketchUp. Therefore.
Autofold
Faces must remain planar at all times in SketchUp. SketchUp will Autofold.
In the left-most image above. Tip . 2008
. Because of SketchUp's sticky nature. a six-sided polygon volume's top face (created with the Polygon Tool followed by the Push/Pull Tool) was rotated using Rotate Tool.Experimentation and play is highly important in learning how to draw in SketchUp! Learn how to draw accurately first. twisted and folded with the rotate operation (right-most image). which share common edges with the top face.
Finally.
Page 40
Copyright Google Inc. or score.Google SketchUp 7 Help
3. The model is skewed into a trapazoid-like shape. the sides of the shape. the following image shows the left-most top-edge being moved to the left. faces as necessary to accommodate any operation that will result in warped faces. then learn how to draw quickly using the concepts in this portion of the user's guide.

In the left-most image above. the resulting curved face is left within the cube creating a new complex geometrical shape (right image). Notice. 2008
. merging the geometry. called the Intersect with Model Tool. A special tool. Notice that each twisted faces are actually comprised of two triangular faces. is used to create intersection lines (the middle image).Google SketchUp 7 Help
What you are not seeing is that SketchUp has created hidden geometry when performing this Autofold operation. the cylinder shape is deleted (using the eraser tool on the cylinder's edges) and because the intersection lines were created. merging the two shapes together to form one new shape. creating new edges where the elements intersect. a cylinder shape was moved into a cube shape. that no lines appear where the two shapes intersect. indicating that the shapes have not truly merged. and subtracting parts of the combined geometry. such as a box and a tube.
Page 41
Copyright Google Inc.
Intersections (Boolean Operations)
SketchUp allows you to easily create complex geometry by intersecting two geometrical forms. Finally. The following image shows the 3 dimensional shape with the hidden geometry shown (dotted lines).

intersect. modification tools (tools used to modify existing geometry). intersect. or divide a face or other line (edge) Can be used to create. intersect. polygon. The following table lists all of the Drawing and Modification tools: Tool Line Arc Freehand Rectangle Circle Polygon Select Eraser Paint Bucket Position Texture* Move Rotate Scale Push/Pull Follow Me Intersect With Model* Offset 3D TextModificati Type Drawing Drawing Drawing Drawing Drawing Drawing Principal Principal Principal Modification Modification Modification Modification Modification Modification Modification Modification Modification Used to draw 3 dimensional text geometry Used to expand and shrink geometry Used to duplicate a profile along a path Used to create complex geometry by piecing together separate geometry Notes Can be used to create. Thankfully. or divide a face or other line (edge) Can be used to create. and walkthrough tools (tools to explore your model). discussed later). including arcs and circles. or divide a face or other line (edge) Can be used to create. Instead. Some of these tools are for creating common entities such as a circle. or divide a face or other line (edge) Can be used to create. Used to move. skewing. construction tools (tools used to create construction lines or points.Google SketchUp 7 Help
SketchUp Tools
Most entities in SketchUp. intersect. arc. camera tools (tools used to view geometry. distort (autofold). are actually just a combination of small lines or edges. and document your model). 2008
. SketchUp provides many other tools to help you draw quickly. or freehand line. and copy entities
Page 42
Copyright Google Inc. drawing tools (tools used to create geometry). or divide a face or other line (edge) Can be used to create. and even merging geometry together). or divide a face or other line (edge) Used to select entities Used to delete geometry and heal faces Used to apply materials (combinations of color and texture) Used to manipulate materials painted on a surface. intersect. intersect. you do not have to use only the Line Tool to sketch your models. Tools in SketchUp are divided into five categories: principal tools (tools that are used a lot to select and modify geometry). Other tools allow you to quickly draw complex models by modifying your models (splitting.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
onGuide Tape MeasureGuide ProtractorGuide AxesGuide DimensionsGuid e TextGuide Section PlaneGuide Used to create section cut effects Used to calculate and display a dimension Used to get a measurement and create construction line entities Used to set angles
*These menu items are available in menus.Most drawing tools can perform modifications as well. not from the Toolbar (Microsoft Windows) or tool palette (Mac OS X). followed by the Orbit Tool (discussed in the next section).
Page 43
Copyright Google Inc. As a recommendation. 2008
. however. and are discussed in the tools sections of this user's guide. Note . Each of these tools is discussed further in this guide. and Move Tools. Push/Pull. such as the Line Tool being used to draw a line to divide a face. learn the Line Tool and Eraser Tool first.

Axonometric means “measurable from the axes” and an axonometric projection is a view of a model in which lines appear parallel in both 3 dimensional and 2 dimensional space. The first. 2008
. you (the user) are treated as though you were a camera looking at your model as you work. In this case. and wall lines appear parallel. Simply. SketchUp allows you to change your point of view to a specific height and angle to the model and walk through the model as though it were real. This concept is particularly important when your model is something that you want to tour.
Manipulating the Camera
You can manipulate the camera (your view) in a number of ways to aid you in your designing. including zooming in and out and panning. as though you were walking through it in the real world.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Viewing Models in 3 Dimensions
SketchUp implements the concept of a camera to represent your point of view of the model. notice how the roof. called an orbit. Also. you can view items in SketchUp in a paraline (also called axonometric) projection or in a perspective projection. such as a house.
Page 44
Copyright Google Inc. The following table lists all of the camera tools in SketchUp: Tool Orbit Pan Zoom Zoom Window Zoom Extents Position Camera Walk Look Around Type Camera Camera Camera Camera Camera Walkthrough Walkthrough Walkthrough
Perspective and Paraline Projections
In addition to your point of view. lines have a length that is to some scale in an axonometric projection when printed (for example 4' in SketchUp = 1" on paper).
Camera Tools
There are other ways to manipulate the camera (your point of view) in SketchUp. The following image shows a axonometric or paraline projection.

all Component entities that are chairs can be assigned to the "Chairs" layer.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Perspective. Note . A SketchUp layer is an attribute with a name. such as "Layer0.
Layers
SketchUp layers are used to control the visibility of geometry within large models. 2008
." or "Chairs. distorts the view such that it represents the model as though the lines were vanishing to a horizon (certain items appear closer while other items appear to be far away." "Layer9. For example.
SketchUp defaults to a perspective view. however.
Page 45
Copyright Google Inc.Geometry on one layer is not separated from geometry on another layer. but can be toggled into a paraline view for those who prefer a point of view that is similar to what you would see when drawing 3D objects in a 2D space (such as when drawing a cube on flat paper). Note . This layer can be then be hidden temporarily to hide everything on the layer from view. y or z axis are in proportion.The iso camera view in SketchUp is not the same as an isometric projection in which anything along the x. faces sharing a common edge will both be affected by a modification to that edge regardless of what layer the faces are on. The following image shows a perspective projection. This view simply shows you ¾ of your model and is a standard camera angle for viewing models in a 3D space." Elements can be assigned different layers. entities are not to scale). For example.

by default. All entities are automatically placed on this layer unless you create another layer. in SketchUp.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Default "Layer0" There is one Layer.
Page 46
Copyright Google Inc. designate the new layer as the active layer. Layer0. 2008
. and create entities on the new layer.

or by importing texture-like images (such as the image of a wood flooring). and styles. and manipulate it over your 3D model to give your model a truly realistic appearance. you can create your own materials within SketchUp (using the color wheel). Additionally. In fact. a siding material with the color of grey and an appearance or texture simulating real overlapped composite siding. shadows. Default Material Geometry in SketchUp is assigned a default material as it is created.
Materials
SketchUp allows you to paint materials on faces to add detail and realism to your models.
Page 47
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. These features include components. The default material can be changed by painting the geometry with a material. materials. You can paint these materials on your models using the Paint Bucket Tool. you can import an entire image of a real-world object (such as a picture of a car).
As with components. Following is a building painted with grey composite siding and grey shingle roofing materials. A grass material is also used on the ground. SketchUp contains several features allowing you to quickly create detailed or life-like models. For example. Materials are essentially paints that have a color and optional texture (defined within a image file).Google SketchUp 7 Help
Adding Detail to Your Models
You will likely want to create progressively more detailed models as you become more proficient with SketchUp. SketchUp comes with a library of materials.

For example. it is possible to have transparent faces that can have different colors and levels of transparency on each side. The characteristics of groups are: • • • • Quick selection. 2008
. Entities within groups are protected from the rest of the model. Groups have a special behavior that allows them to properly align themselves and stick to faces on which they are placed (as well as cut holes in those faces). See the Materials section within this topic for further information. If the back side of a face has already been painted with some nontransparent material. group the entities that compose model and move the entire model. Paint these materials on faces to create windows. Group material. all elements within that group are selected as well. Isolation of geometry.
Groups and Components
Groups and components are entities that can hold other entities. Groups can be nested within other groups resulting in hierarchical collection of subgroups. you might draw a model. Thus. Groups are commonly used to combine several entities into a single entity for the purposes of performing a quick operation on the group (such as a copy or move). Groups maintain their own internal drawing axes. by specifically applying a material to both sides. When you select a Group. which is separate from the materials painted on individual entities within the group. Geometry outside of the group does not affect the geometry within the group Model organization. it will not effect the front side. Likewise.
Faces have two sides. applying a transparent material to the front side will not cause the back side to also display as transparent. Drawing Axes. if you paint the back side of a face with a different transparent material. Alignment and Hole Cutting.
• •
Page 48
Copyright Google Inc. Painting a default colored side with transparent material will result in both sides of that face being treated as transparent allowing the surface to be transparent when viewed from both sides. The group as a whole can be assigned a material of its own. SketchUp materials are normally applied to a single side of a face at a time.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Material Transparency Materials also have a opacity property (a number between 0 and 100%) allowing you to create materials that behave like glass.

•
• •
Page 49
Copyright Google Inc. Drawing Axes.
Components have the following characteristics. You can modify a group or component as a whole (affecting all of the entities within the group or component) or edit the group or component's individual entities (within the group or component's context). only affects the instance itself. The component definition is the blueprint that defines the appearance and behavior of all component instances (created when you insert the component in the model). The following image shows a shelf component has been selected (as indicated by the yellow selection color) using the Select Tool. some actions. Additionally. Alignment and Hole Cutting. such as scaling an instance. Any models you create can be a component. namely behaviors allowing them to be inserted in other models. you can nest components within other components. Components allow SketchUp to more efficiently use your computer's resources because the information necessary to describe a component is only stored once. you might create a model of a car that you want to bring into other SketchUp models. Each copy of a component that you insert into a model is considered an instance of a component definition. Improved Performance. such as the model of a house. groups within components.You can define the characteristics of the component during component creation. in the component definition. You can define alignment and hole cutting behavior when creating components (it is automatically defined for groups).Google SketchUp 7 Help
Components are just a group with special behaviors. Note . However. in addition to the characteristics of groups: • Instancing Behavior. Components display their own internal drawing axes when you are editing the component. For example. This shelf is composed of several subcomponents. and then referenced for every component instance. Group and Component Context Entities within a group or component are said to exist within the group or component's scope or context. Editing a component instance edits the definition and all instances accordingly. 2008
. such as slats. components within groups and so on.

The entities. one of the slats in the shelf. Notice now that there is a dashed bounding box around the component. and around the slat being edited.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The following image shows the shelf component being edited. Notice that it has a dashed bounding box to indicate you are in the component's context.
Page 50
Copyright Google Inc. Also notice that the component's axes are displayed in the lower left-hand corner. That slat is within the context of the shelf. that compose that individual slat are said to be in the context of the slat. has been selected.
Finally. In this case. a subcomponent. 2008
. such as the lines and face. the following image shows the slate component being edited.

are aligned to the global axes in the drawing area. You can also create your own collections of components from pre-existing components or components you create yourself. Groups and Components are used to isolate geometry as submodels within an overall model. such as a component of a chair within a model of a room. Additionally. These axes can be moved affecting component placement in the model.Entities within a group or component can be on several different layers. and geometric shapes. This behavior is referred to as the cutting behavior of a component. Groups and Components Layers are a mechanism for controlling the visibility of entities within a model. 2008
. such as in the case of a window component being able to cut a hole in a wall. Entities can be assigned to different layers in a model and those layers. by default. Layers.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Component Collections Component collections have been created and included with SketchUp to allow you to easily add detail to your models. Note . can be designed such that they can be placed on specifically-oriented surfaces such as vertical wall surfaces. Cutting and Gluing Behavior Components. can be displayed independently.
Page 51
Copyright Google Inc. and so on) to people.Individual components and collections of components are available on the Google 3D Warehouse. trees. This behavior is referred to as the gluing behavior of a component. such as doors and windows. and their contents. components can be designed to automatically cut holes in surfaces. cars. Component Axes Components have their own axes which. These components range from standard architectural components (doors. windows.
Note .

a pre-defined style might have an edge type of jitter edges. face type. a face type of hidden line mode. Watermarks Watermarks are images placed in the background or foreground of the drawing area and span the entire area just as sky and ground. unlike other pre-defined edge types. a background color of white. SketchUp has multiple styles. For example. Watermarks are great for creating backgrounds. others are best suited for printing or presenting a model (because they use rendering effects to give a model a hand-drawn appearance). Sketchy edges are edges that can be unique from any other edge style in SketchUp because. give the a model a unique hand-drawn appearance.
Page 52
Copyright Google Inc. some best used while drawing a model (because they don't use any intensive rendering effects). to your model. 2008
. Sketchy Edges SketchUp allows you to apply various edge types. and other drawing area effects (such as the color used to represent selected geometry). a ground color of brown. Watermarks can also be used to place logos and other graphics directly on the screen. including hand-drawn sketchy edges. watermark. you can create your own sketchy edge using a drawing program like PhotoShop. and so on. a sky color of blue. when combined and applied to model. and the drawing area. such as simulating paper textures beneath a model. Sketchy edges are simply a collection of different hand-drawn strokes that. A style can consist of a specific edge type. to give it a specific look-andfeel.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Styles
A style is a predefined set of display settings that can be applied to a model. sky and background color.

2008
. the rendering effect is not intended to be photo-realisitc. Finally.While SketchUp's projected shadow angles are accurate. December 10. Fortunately. The shadow casting feature in SketchUp is a great way to give your models a better sense of depth and realism. SketchUp's shadows are designed to provide dynamic feedback as you change geometry and your camera viewpoint. For example. which is the default location. SketchUp can export models to other many other applications that excel at photorealistic renderings.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Shadows
SketchUp allows you to cast shadows on your model as though the model were in a realworld environment. These shadows can be cast based on time of day and virtual location of the model in the real-world.
Page 53
Copyright Google Inc. in Boulder.
Note . you can set shadows to see exactly what a model of a house would look like at 10:20 am. Colorado.

based on the face of the vertical 3d rectangle. however.Ground shadows create unexpected geometry. Although faster than face shadows. For example. and will slow down performance with large models. and do not cast shadows.
Page 54
Copyright Google Inc.Faces with less than 70 percent opacity are considered transparent.
Note . called artifacts.
Note . The calculation used to create face shadows is processor-intensive. Ground shadows works well for models with solid color backgrounds and in which all geometry is above the ground plane. These faces are colored and positioned based on the background color and the angle of the sun. a shadow is cast on the stairs in the following figure. the illusion that ground shadows provide only works on the ground plane. 2008
. Face Shadows Face shadows use the sun angle to project shadows based on the location of faces relative to other faces. Transparent faces cannot receive shadows.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Ground Shadows Ground shadows use the faces in your model to create a flattened set of faces on the ground plane. when your model contains geometry beneath the ground plane. The following figure shows a model whose geometry all lies on or above the ground plane. The following image shows a transparent (less than 70% opacity) rectangle that does not cast a shadow (left) and a opaque (70% or greater opacity) rectangle that does cast a shadow (right). Faces with 70 percent opacity or greater cast shadows.

2008
. and you may often wish to have both types enabled simultaneously.
Page 55
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The two shadow systems are designed to be complimentary.

section cut effects.
Page 56
Copyright Google Inc. The following image shows a model of a building with a section cut affect active allowing the designer to work inside the model or present interior detail to a client. 2008
. You can print your model You can export all or portions (such as a section slice) of the model for post processing in another application
Section Cut Effects
SketchUp allows you to create section cut effects which are the result of slicing through your model to see and work inside its interior.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Presenting Your Models
There are several things you can do after you create a model. For example: • • • • You can add dimensions. and other entities to your model for use in documenting the actual physical item. You can present the model within SketchUp as an animation.

Section planes are generated using the Section Plane Tool. placement. orientation. direction. of the section slice.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The following model shows the section cut effect resulting from slicing through the model of a cup.
Section Planes Section cut effects are created by section planes which are special entities used to control the selection. 2008
.
The previous image shows a section plane entity intersecting the cup and creating a section slice through the cup.
Page 57
Copyright Google Inc.

to create a wire frame of the model (such the outline of a floor plan).Google SketchUp 7 Help
Section Slices The term section slice refers to the edges that are highlighted after intersecting geometry with a section plane. You can create a group from these edges. and so on).
Page 58
Copyright Google Inc. similar to slides in traditional presentation software. The following image shows a section slice in red. Then.
These edges act as dynamic virtual edges in that they continually change as you move the section plane through your model with the Move Tool. These scenes can be combined and executed sequentially as an animation. section cut effects. each containing different settings for your model (point of view. export this section slice for use in a CAD program to add additional detail (such as wall construction detail). The animation engine can be set to gradually transition between effects on different scenes for a truly dynamic presentation. such as when slicing horizontally through a house. 2008
.
Animations
SketchUp allows you to create different scenes.

you might create a person's face.This documentation uses the term TIN. you can create other organic shapes (shapes that appear to be crafted by hand) using these tools. Note . appear like one continuos smooth surface. Sandbox tools are those tools that are included in SketchUp for creating and manipulating TINs. The following image shows a TIN in SketchUp with hidden geometry displayed (so you can see the triangles that are the foundation of the TIN). when smoothed. but you can import a polygon mesh or create a polygon mesh (manually) using other SketchUp tools. Note that you are not limited to creating terrain with the sandbox tools. The following image shows a TIN (sandbox) in SketchUp. it is simply several connected triangular faces that. which the sandbox tools can work with. A polygon mesh is similar to a TIN. and terrain interchangeably. or a swimming pool using the sandbox tools.SketchUp's Sandbox From Scratch Tool and Sandbox From Contours Tool only create TINs. Another type of TIN-like surface. sandbox. A sandbox in SketchUp (and in other 3D modeling tools) is commonly referred to as a triangulated irregular network or TIN in terrain modeling terminology.
Note . but contains faces with more than three vertices.
There is nothing special about a TIN. a bowl.
Page 59
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Modeling Terrain and Organic Shapes
SketchUp implements the concept of a sandbox which refers to a surface that can be generated and manipulated using sandbox tools. is called a polygon mesh. For example. A TIN is like a sandbox because it has a boundary and contains a sculpted surface (sand).

sketchup. detailed.
Creating a TIN
There are several ways to obtain a starting TIN as the foundation of your model. Allows you to sculpt or make small. adjust the contours to their proper elevation and use the Sandbox From Contours Tool to create a TIN.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Triangulation
Triangles in a TIN can be oriented in different directions. ArcGIS is an industry standard application suite or Geographic Information System for working with geographical information such as the location of buildings within a world-wide global coordinate system. Allows you to drape the outlines of roads.com/markets/gis. This concept is important because some sandbox tools allow you to change the direction of the triangles as a way to further smooth TINs. Notes Creates a flat. Import a digital terrain model (DTM) file. 2008
. Modificati ons Small. Detailed. The orientation of triangles is referred to as triangulation. Import a TIN using the SketchUp ArcGIS Plug-in available at www.
Stamp
Drape
Add Detail
Flip Edge
Allows you to sculpt or make small. modifications to the a TIN by adding additional triangles to a TIN. These are: • • Create or import contour lines and use the Sandbox From Contours Tool to create a TIN. Detailed. Tool Sandbox From Scratch Sandbox From Contours Smoove Type Create TIN Create TIN Large Modificati ons Large Modificati ons Large Modificati ons Small.http://www. TIN or sandbox that can be modified by other sandbox tools. or other features.php. The following table lists all of the sandbox tools in SketchUp. Then. Allows you to sculpt or make large modifications to a TIN by stamping footprints into the TIN. rectangular shaped. Import an image of a site plan or contour map and trace its contours with the Freehand Tool.
Allows you sculpt or make large modifications to a TIN by moving groupings of vertices to create hills. Creates TIN or a sandbox from contour lines at various elevations. modifications to the
Page 60
Copyright Google Inc. berms. Create sandbox (TIN) using the Sandbox From Scratch Tool. drawn on a flat plane. paths and buildings.
•
• •
Modifying a TIN
SketchUp contains several tools for modifying TINs. onto a TIN. detailed. such as the footprint of a building. Notice in the previous image that some triangles are oriented vertically while others are oriented horizontally.

The sandbox tools can also be used to create organic geometry or geometry that appears to be hand-crafted.
Functional Terrain
The term functional terrain is used to describe terrain that has no portion bending back upon itself creating overhangs. underhangs. your terrain is functional.
Note .Google SketchUp 7 Help
Modificati ons
TIN by adjusting the triangulation of a TIN. can create unexpected results when working on nonfunctional terrain (the neighboring points included in the sculpting operation by the Smoove Tool are often undesirable). 2008
. If you draw a vertical line through your terrain at any point and the line only touches the terrain at one point. such as the Smoove Tool. This concept is important because certain tools. or caves.
Page 61
Copyright Google Inc.

Page 62
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Welcome to the SketchUp Getting Started Guide
The SketchUp Getting Started Guide contains step-by-step instructions on the basics of SketchUp. 2008
.

The majority of SketchUp tools. 2008
. View.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Introduction to the SketchUp User Interface (Microsoft Windows)
The main parts of the SketchUp user interface are the title bar. and settings are available within these menus. status bar. Edit. The following image shows the SketchUp user interface. Camera. Window. Toolbars. commands. and maximize) on the right. menus. The title bar displays the name of the blank file as "Untitled. contain a user-defined set of tools and controls." indicating that you have not yet saved your work. and the name of the currently opened file.
Toolbars
The Toolbars appear below the menus and along the left side of the application. minimize. Draw. and the Measurements Toolbar.
Title Bar
The title bar contains the standard Microsoft Windows controls (close. drawing area.
Page 63
Copyright Google Inc. The menus are: File. and Help. A blank drawing area appears when you start SketchUp. Tools.
Menus
Menus appear below the title bar.

SketchUp starts with the Getting Started Toolbar. You can also enter values into the Measurements Toolbar to manipulate currently selected entities.
The left side of the status bar displays tips for the currently used drawing tools.
Drawing Area
The drawing area is where you create your model. The 3D space of the drawing area is identified visually by the drawing axes. such as creating a line of a specific length. 2008
. Additional Toolbars can be displayed by selecting the Toolbars under the View > Toolbars menu item. Watch the status bar to discover advanced capabilities of each of the SketchUp tools.Watch the following video to learn a bit more about the SketchUp user interface.
Status Bar
The status bar is the long gray rectangular area below drawing area. Measurements Toolbar The Measurements Toolbar is located on the right side of the status bar. The Measurements Toolbar displays dimensional information while you draw. The drawing axes are three colored lines. Window Resize Handle To the right of the Measurements Toolbar is the window resize handle which is used to change the size of the application window.
Video . The drawing area also contains a simple model of a person to give you a sense of 3D space.
Page 64
Copyright Google Inc. These axes are helpful in providing a sense of direction in 3D space while you work. including special functions accessible using keyboard shortcuts.Use the resize handle to make the drawing area larger so you can see the entire message in the status bar. Note .Google SketchUp 7 Help
Note . perpendicular to each other.

Note . and the Measurements Toolbar. The majority of SketchUp tools. The menus that appear by default are: SketchUp. status bar. Camera. appearing below the menus. and settings are available within these menus. In the middle of the title bar is the name of the currently opened file.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Introduction to the SketchUp User Interface (Mac OS X)
The SketchUp user interface is designed to be simple and easy to use. The Google SketchUp application looks the same. and a title bar collapse/expand button on the right. 2008
. Window. Additional tool palettes are found in the View > Tool Palettes submenu. Toolbars and tool palettes. the Toolbar contains the basic set of SketchUp tools. and maximize) on the left. The main parts of the SketchUp user interface are the title bar.
Toolbars and tool pallets
The Toolbar. menus. minimize. Tools.
Page 65
Copyright Google Inc. commands.
Menus
Menus appear below the title bar.The previous image contains a screenshot of the Google SketchUp Pro application. . File. Draw. drawing area. contains a set of user-defined controls. A blank drawing area appears when you start SketchUp and the name of the currently opened file is "Untitled" in the title bar. View. By default. and Help.
Title Bar
The title bar (at the top of SketchUp) contains the standard Macintosh OS X window controls (close. Edit. indicating that you have not yet saved your work. referred to as the getting started tools.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing Area
The drawing area is where you create your model.
Video . such as creating a line of a specific length. Window Resize Handle To the right of the Measurements Toolbar is the window resize handle which is used to change the size of the drawing area.
Status Bar
The status bar is the long gray rectangular area at the bottom of the drawing area. 2008
. You can also enter values into the Measurements Toolbar to manipulate currently selected entities.
The left side of the status bar displays tips for the currently used drawing tools. The 3D space of the drawing area is identified visually by the drawing axes.Watch the following video to learn a bit more about the SketchUp user interface.Use the resize handle to make the drawing area larger so you can see the entire message in the status bar.
Page 66
Copyright Google Inc. The drawing area also contains a simple model of a person to give you a sense of 3D space. The drawing axes are three colored lines. Measurements Toolbar The Measurements Toolbar is located on the right side of the status bar. The Measurements Toolbar displays dimensional information while you draw. These axes are helpful in providing a sense of direction in 3D space while you work. perpendicular to each other. Watch the status bar to discover advanced capabilities of each of the SketchUp tools. Note . including special functions accessible using keyboard shortcuts.

Click and hold . Context menus are menus whose contents vary depending on the context in which they are invoked (usually on one or more entities in the drawing area or within a user interface component. drag . 2008
.A context-click refers to pressing and holding the right-mouse button.A click. and drag operation refers to the user pressing and holding down the left-mouse button and then moving the cursor. hold.A scroll refers to a user spinning the middle mouse wheel. hold.A click and hold refers to the user pressing and holding down the leftmouse button. The following is an overview of the different mouse operations commonly performed in SketchUp with a three-button mouse: • • • • • • Click . Context-clicks are usually used to display context menus.A middle click. a middle-mouse button (also called the scroll wheel) and a right-mouse button. drag operation refers to the user pressing and holding down the middle-mouse button and them moving the cursor. such as a dialog box). Scroll .
Using a 3-Button Mouse
A three-button mouse consists of a left mouse button.
Page 67
Copyright Google Inc. Context-click .Google SketchUp 7 Help
Using the Mouse in SketchUp
SketchUp can work with both 3-button and 1 button (commonly found on Mac computers) mice. hold. A 3-button mouse is preferred as it will greatly increase your efficiency with SketchUp. hold. drag .A click refers to the user quickly pressing the releasing the left-mouse button. You must learn different mouse operations before you can begin drawing in SketchUp. Middle click. Click. The following image shows a context menu for a Face entity.

and drag operation refers to the user pressing and holding down the mouse button and then moving the cursor.A click refers to the user quickly pressing the releasing the mouse button.A click and hold refers to the user pressing and holding down the mouse button. The following image shows a context menu for a Face entity. Click. such as a dialog box).A click.
Page 68
Copyright Google Inc.
Video . Context menus are menus whose contents vary depending on the context in which they are invoked (usually on one or more entities in the drawing area or within a user interface component.Watch the following video to learn a bit more about using the mouse in SketchUp. drag .A context-click refers to pressing and holding the control key while simultaneously pressing clicking the mouse button. Scroll . hold. hold.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Using a 1-Button Mouse
The following is an overview of the different mouse operations commonly performed in SketchUp with a one-button mouse: • • • • • Click . Click and hold .A scroll refers to a user spinning the mouse ball (found on some Mac computers). 2008
. Context-clicks are usually used to display context menus. Context-click .

and pan) Creating 2D faces or shapes and transforming 2D faces. zoom.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Working in 3D
Creating models in SketchUp primarily consists of two operations: • • Viewing models in 3D space using the camera tools (rotate.
Video . using the Push/Pull Tool. into a 3D geoemtry. 2008
. out.
Page 69
Copyright Google Inc.Watch the following video covering these two operations. zoom in.

Click on "Window > Components. You can use that model for the purposes of these exercises.
Using the Orbit Tool
Use the Orbit Tool to rotate the camera about the model and is often used while drawing to quickly change your view in between drawing operations. The cursor changes to the Orbit Tool cursor ( ). Activate the Orbit Tool from either the Camera Toolbar or the Camera menu. Simply.
3. Or.
Using the Orbit Tool (3-Button Mouse)
A 3-button mouse allows you to orbit a model without exiting the current drawing tool. Move your cursor into the drawing area. ).
Preparing to Use the Viewing Tools
You must have a model in the drawing area before we can practice viewing. you (the user) are treated as though you were a camera looking at your model as you work. Click on the "Pencil Tool" ( ) in the Toolbar. follow these steps to place one of SketchUp's pre-built models into the drawing area: 1. The model will be positioned in the drawing area. and Zoom extents tool. The most commonly used camera tools are the Orbit tool. 2. To orbit with a 3-button mouse: 1. Move your cursor in any direction to rotate around the center of the drawing area. The cursor changes to two interconnected
Click anywhere in the drawing area.
Move your cursor in any direction to rotate around the center of the drawing area (continue to keep your finger pressed on the middle mouse button). Click on the "Collections and Searches" drop-down list identified by a downward arrow ( 3. 6. Pan tool.
Click on the Architecture collection. By default. There are several tools in SketchUp for viewing your model in 3D space. The model you choose will follow the cursor. such as the bed. ). 5. 2008
. speeding up your drawing. Zoom tool. The cursor changes to a pencil ( ). SketchUp contains a model of a person at the origin of the axes. Click anywhere in the drawing area to place the model. Click on one of the pre-built architectural models.
Page 70
Copyright Google Inc." The Component Browser is displayed. Architectural components are listed. 3. 2. Click on the "Orbit Tool" ( perpendicular ovals ( 2.
Click and hold the middle-mouse button. ) in the Toolbar. 4. To orbit your model: 1.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Viewing a Model in 3D Space
SketchUp implements the concept of a camera to represent your point of view of the model.

) in the Toolbar. Activate the Pan Tool from either the Camera Toolbar or the Camera menu. 3. Drag the cursor up to zoom in (closer to the model) and down to zoom out (farther from the model). The cursor changes to a pencil ( ).
Using the Pan Tool (3-Button Mouse)
A 3-button mouse allows you to pan your view without exiting the current drawing tool.
Click anywhere in the drawing area. Click on the "Pan Tool" ( ).
Using the Zoom Tool
Use the Zoom Tool to move the camera (your view) in or out.Google SketchUp 7 Help
4. Click on the "Zoom Tool" ( ( 2. Press and hold the middle-mouse button. Click on the "Pencil Tool" ( ) in the Toolbar. Roll the scroll wheel (middle-mouse button) back to zoom out from your model. 3.
Using the Zoom Tool (3-Button Mouse)
A 3-button mouse allows you to zoom in or out without exiting the current drawing tool. 1. To pan using the Pan Tool: 1. Activate the Zoom Tool from either the Camera Toolbar or the Camera menu.
Page 71
Copyright Google Inc. ) in the Toolbar. Click on the "Pencil Tool" ( Press and hold the "Shift" key. 2. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass
Click and hold anywhere in the drawing area. The cursor changes to a pencil ( ). 2.
Roll the scroll wheel (middle-mouse button) forward to zoom in on your model. The cursor changes to the Pan Tool cursor ( 4.
(optionally) Press and hold the left mouse button while pressing and holding the middle mouse button (scroll wheel) to activate the Pan Tool. ). 2008
. Move the cursor in any direction to pan. To orbit with a 3-button mouse: 1. speeding up your drawing. The cursor changes back to a pencil ( )
Using the Pan Tool
Use the Pan Tool to move the camera (your view) vertically and horizontally. The cursor changes to a hand ( ). To zoom with a 3-button mouse: 1. 3. speeding up your drawing. 3. ). 2.
Release the middle-mouse button to return to the Pencil Tool.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Using the Zoom Extents Tool
Use the Zoom Extents Tool to zoom your view to a distance where the whole model is visible and centered in the drawing area.
Page 72
Copyright Google Inc. Click on the "Zoom Extents Tool" ( ) in the Toolbar. The Zoom Extents Tool is often used when your model goes off screen or you find yourself confused about the view of your model. Your model is centered in the drawing area. 2008
. Activate the Zoom Extents Tool from either the Camera Toolbar or the Camera menu.

Activate the Push/Pull Tool from either the Toolbar or the Tools menu. blank. The cursor changes to a pencil with a rectangle
Click anywhere in the drawing area to set the first corner point of the rectangle. drawing area appears.
Click again to set the second corner of the rectangle. To start a new file: 1. and abstract faces. rectangular.
6. The cursor will change to a 3D rectangle with an up
Page 73
Copyright Google Inc. A rectangular face is created bordered by four edges. You can use push/pull to create volume out of any face type. Select "File > New. Click on the "Push/Pull Tool" ( arrow ( ). Move the cursor diagonally." A dialog box is displayed asking if you want to save your changes. A new. ) ). A rectangle will expand out from the first corner point.
Using the Push/Pull Tool
To push or pull a face: 1. Click on the No button. 2. ). including circular. 5. Click on the "Rectangle Tool" ( ( 4. 2008
. 3.
Preparing to Use the Push/Pull Tool
Start a new file before continuing with the next exercise.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating Geometry With the Push/Pull Tool
Use the Push/Pull Tool to push and pull faces to add volume to or subtract volume from your models.

Click when the volume has reached the desired size.You can also press and hold the mouse button.Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over.
Move the cursor to create (or decrease) volume. 2008
.
Note .
Click on the rectangular face created in the previous exercise. Following are some examples of Push/Pull operations. drag the mouse. whether it be an abstract shape drawn using the Freehand Tool or a shape drawn on another piece of 3D geometry.
Note .
Page 74
Copyright Google Inc.
4. and release the mouse button to create a volume.Google SketchUp 7 Help
2. 5. You can use the Push/Pull Tool to create volume from any shape.

but are comprised of a number of faces or a curved face set. 2008
. Surfaces can be adjusted as a whole.
Page 75
Copyright Google Inc. The curved face that results from the push/pull operation is called a Surface entity.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Pushing and Pulling a Curved Face
You can use the Push/Pull Tool on faces that have an arc as an edge similarly to using the Push/Pull Tool on regular faces.

The following three images demonstrate how to push/pull a 2D face that is drawn on 3D geometry to create a void. simply by drawing a 2D shape on 3D geometry and using the Push/Pull Tool to push the 2D face until it meets the back face of the 3D geometry.Watch the following video for a little more on using the Push/Pull tool.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating Voids with Push/Pull
You can create a void.
Video .
Page 76
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. or empty space.

Click to place the ending point of your arc. 4. 4. and Rectangle Tool. The cursor changes to a pencil with a circle. Activate the Arc Tool from the Toolbar or from the Draw menu. Move the cursor to the ending point of your chord. comprised of multiple line segments (which can be edited as a single arc). are designed to speed up what can be drawn using the Pencil Tool. Click to finish the circle.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing Shapes with the Circle. To draw an arc: 1.You can also click and hold the mouse button to set the center of the circle.Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over. 2. As you move the cursor. and Rectangle Tools
The majority of drawing tools in SketchUp. the ending point and the bulge distance. Select the "Arc Tool" ( ). Release the mouse button to complete the circle.
Click to place the starting point of your arc. 2.
Drawing Circles
Use the Circle Tool to draw circle entities. To draw a circle: 1. and drag outward without releasing the button to set the radius. such as the Circle. Activate the Circle Tool from the Toolbar or the Draw menu. 3.
Page 77
Copyright Google Inc.
Note . 2008
. Arc.
Tip . Arc entities consist of three parts: the starting point. The distance between the starting point and the ending point is also known as the chord length. the radius value is displayed dynamically in the Measurements Toolbar and can be specified by typing in a length value followed by pressing the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key. Select the "Circle Tool" ( ).
Drawing Arcs
Use the Arc Tool to draw Arc entities.
Click to place the center point of the circle. Arc. A straight line is created. Move the cursor out from the center point to define the radius of your circle. 3. You can also specify the segmentation for the circle in the Measurements Toolbar. The cursor changes to a pencil with an arc.

specified by clicking at two opposite corners of the desired shape. The cursor changes to a pencil with a rectangle.Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over.
Note .
Drawing Rectangles
Use the Rectangle Tool to draw rectangular Face entities. Activate the Rectangle Tool from either the Toolbar or Draw menu.
Click to set the first corner point of the rectangle. 2008
. Rectangles can be placed on existing faces or separate from existing geometry (aligned to an axes plane). Click to set the bulge distance.
Note .
Page 78
Copyright Google Inc. Move the cursor diagonally. 4. 2. 3. Select the "Rectangle Tool" ( ).Google SketchUp 7 Help
5.Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over. To draw a rectangle: 1. A straight line will extend perpendicular from the straight line. 6.
Move your cursor perpendicular to the straight line to adjust the bulge distance. Click again to set the second corner point of the rectangle.

2008
.
Zoom. 4. orbit. Move the cursor diagonally. This exercise is accomplished by creating the profile of a chair on a 3D form and then using the Push/Pull tool to remove the pieces of the form that will not be in the final model. Type "18. 2. The cursor changes to a pencil with a rectangle (
Click to set the first corner point of the rectangle.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating Your First Model
It will take some time to master SketchUp as with any new software. 3. following is a project to help you learn the tools and concepts covered in this document.
Page 79
Copyright Google Inc. To crate a chair using a subtractive approach: 1. Your dimensions appear in the Measurements Toolbar and the rectangle will snap to 18 by 18 inches. Refer to Viewing a Model in 3D Space for further information.18" and press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key. ).
Creating a Chair in SketchUp: The Subtractive Approach
You will create a chair by subtracting volume from a 3D form in this exercise. Select the "Rectangle Tool" ( ).
5. However. and pan to such that your rectangle is large enough to push/pull with the Push/Pull Tool.

2008
. Draw a line from the ending point of the last line horizontally until you meet a vertical edge.Google SketchUp 7 Help
11. Draw a line from a top.
Page 81
Copyright Google Inc. (vertically) about half-way down your model. edge. horizontal.
12.

The cursor changes to a pencil with a rectangle (
14. Select the "Push/Pull Tool" ( arrow ( ). The profile of a chair is now drawn on one side of your model. The cursor will change to a 3D rectangle with an up
Page 82
Copyright Google Inc.
).
15.
). 2008
. Draw a rectangle to represent the space between the legs of the chair.Google SketchUp 7 Help
13. Select the "Rectangle Tool" ( ).

Push the rectangular face until it meets the back of the model. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
16. The tool tip should say "on face" when the cursor has met the back face of the model. Click on the rectangular face you just drew between the legs.
17.
Page 83
Copyright Google Inc.

Click to remove the area below the seat of your chair. 2008
. You're model should now closely resemble a 3D chair (without individual legs).Google SketchUp 7 Help
18.
Page 84
Copyright Google Inc.
19. The area below the seat of your chair should disappear. Remove the area above the seat and against the back by repeating the process you just used to remove the area below the seat.

and pan under the chair so that you are facing the back legs. orbit. Zoom.Google SketchUp 7 Help
20.
Page 85
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
21. 2008
. Use the "Rectangle Tool" to draw a rectangle that represents the space between the two back legs.
Page 86
Copyright Google Inc.

Draw an arc across the top of the back starting just below the left side of the back of the chair. A separate face will be created at each corner of the top of the chair. Use the "Push/Pull Tool" to remove the area between the back legs. 24. Repeat the three previous steps with the front legs.
Page 87
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
22. 2008
.
23.

25. The cursor changes to a pencil with a rectangle (
Click to set the first corner point of the rectangle.18" and press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key. Type "18. To crate a chair using a additive approach: 1. Zoom.
Video .Watch the following video to learn a bit more about the steps in this project. You are creating a chair seat. 2. orbit. 3. upright. 2008
. ). Select the "Rectangle Tool" ( ). and pan to such that you can view the chair in its normal.
Page 88
Copyright Google Inc. position. Refer to Viewing a Model in 3D Space for further information.Google SketchUp 7 Help
24. Move the cursor diagonally. Use the "Push/Pull Tool" to remove the two areas at the top of the chair and create a rounded chair back. Your dimensions appear in the Measurements Toolbar and the rectangle will snap to 18 by 18 inches.
Creating a Chair in SketchUp: The Additive Approach
You will create a chair by starting with a chair seat and adding the legs and back. 4.

Refer to Viewing a Model in 3D Space for further information. orbit.
Click on the rectangular face.
Page 89
Copyright Google Inc. The cursor will change to a 3D rectangle with an up
7.
Zoom.Google SketchUp 7 Help
5. Move the cursor to create the seat thickness. and pan to such that your rectangle is large enough to push/pull with the Push/Pull Tool. 8.
Select the "Push/Pull Tool" ( arrow ( ).
6.
).
Draw a line toward the back of the seat to represent the profile of the seat back.
9. 2008
.

Use the "Push/Pull Tool" on this rectangle to create the seat back. Draw an arc across the top of the back starting just below the left side of the back of the chair.
Page 90
Copyright Google Inc.
11.Google SketchUp 7 Help
10. 2008
. Two separate faces will be created at each corner of the top of the chair.

Google SketchUp 7 Help

12. Use the "Push/Pull Tool" to remove the two areas at the top of the chair and create a rounded chair back.

13. Zoom, orbit, and pan to such that you can view the bottom of the chair seat. Refer to Viewing a Model in 3D Space for further information. 14. Select the "Tape Measure Tool" ( sign ( ). ). The cursor changes to a tape measure with a plus

15. Click on one edge of the chair bottom. 16. Move the cursor to away from the edge. A guide line will be drawn perpendicular to the line. Guide lines help you draw geometry to a specific dimension.

Page 91

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

17. Type "2"" and press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X)key. Your dimensions appear in the Measurements Toolbar and a guide will be created 2" away from the edge. 18. Repeat steps 15-17 to create three more guides. Your model should look like the following:

Page 92

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

19. Use the "Rectangle Tool" to create the profiles of each chair leg within each corner of the chair bottom. The Rectangle Tool will snap to each guide in the corner to make accurate 2" x 2" legs. The following picture shows the resulting four rectangular faces in each corner of the chair bottom.

Page 93

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

20. Use the "Push/Pull Tool" to create the legs from the four faces created in the previous step. You can use inference to align length of the second through fourth leg to the length of the first leg.

Page 94

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

21. Use the "Eraser Tool" to erase all of your guide lines.

Page 95

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

22. Zoom, orbit, and pan to such that you can view the chair in its normal, upright, position. Refer to Viewing a Model in 3D Space for further information.

Video - Watch the following video to learn a bit more about the steps in this project.

Page 96

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Next Steps
All of the principles used in creating the chair are also used to creating models of houses, people, cars, and anything else in SketchUp. For Further Help: • • • Watch Video Tutorials Read the User's Guide and Reference Guide Participate in the Google SketchUp Online Group

Page 97

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Welcome to the Dynamic Components Getting Started Guide
The Dynamic Components Getting Started Guide contains an overview of dynamic components from both end-user (someone who uses these components in their scenes) and developer (someone who develops these components) perspectives.

Page 98

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Dynamic Components
Components are pre-built models that you can reuse within your SketchUp models and scenes. Pre-built components are available from the Component Browser (Window > Component Browser). Any model you create can be a component. Dynamic components are components that have parametrics, such as a stair component that, when resized, automatically adds more steps, or a cabinet component whose doors can open and close. Components are made "dynamic" by attaching attributes to the component. Attributes are items such as the component's name, description, size, location, and number of copies. Some attributes, such as those mentioned previously, are predefined attributes, meaning they are automatically available for every dynamic component. Conversely, custom attributes are unique attributes defined by the developer of the dynamic component. Refer to Dynamic Components Predefined Attributes for further information. Every component attribute has a value which can be a textual string, a number, or the result of a formula (which is usually a number or text). For example, the attribute called "Name" might have the value of "Fence," or the attribute called "LenX" might have the value of "4," or the attribute "TotalCost" might have the value equal to the result of "SquareFeet * CostPerFoot).Each attribute and associated value is called an attribute name/value pair. Formulas can consist of predefined functions, mathematical operators (*, -, +, /, <, >, and so on), or the values of other attributes. Functions are shortcuts that perform some operation, such as calculating the square root of a number. Refer to Dynamic Components Supported Functions and Dynamic Components Supported Operators for further information. Note - All SketchUp users can use dynamic components. However, only SketchUp Pro users can develop dynamic components. Note - A component is only dynamic when it has parametric data. Dynamic Components will display a special badge when it contains parametric data. Refer to Identifying Dynamic Components for further information. Tip - Experience with spreadsheet formulas will be helpful in developing dynamic components.

Common Features of Dynamic Components
Following are six common features of dynamic components. Most dynamic components will implement one or more of these features..

Page 99

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Constrained Dynamic components can have values (such as size values) that are constrained, yielding a component whose parts might not be scalable (using the Scale Tool), or only scalable in a certain direction. For example, a dynamic cabinet door component might have a frame of a set size (such as 3 inches). The following image shows a cabinet door with a 3" thick frame:

Page 100

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

The following picture shows the same cabinet door after it has been scaled larger. Notice that the frame around the door has maintained its size (it is constrained to 3 inches).

Constraints are usually placed on components that represent manufactured products that come in a series of pre-defined sizes (such as doors, cabinets, appliances, mattresses, windows, or even bicycle frames).

Page 101

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Repetitive A dynamic component can have sub-components that repeat when the component is scaled, such as a stair component that automatically adds steps when scaled. Following is an image of a repeating stair component before it has been scaled:

Following is the repeating stair component after it has been scaled using the Scale Tool. Notice that additional stairs have automatically been added as the size increased.

Page 102

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Repetition might be used in a variety of dynamic components such as stairs (number of steps), couches (number of cushions), fences (number of pickets), construction framing (number of studs), and so on. Configurable A dynamic component can have a pre-defined set of values that are configurable by the user, such as lengths for a couch or amount of spacing between pickets in a fence component. The following is an example of the Component Options dialog box that is displayed for a dynamic component that is configurable.

Page 103

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Animated A dynamic component can have animated sub-components that move when the user clicks on the component with the Interaction Tool. The following image shows a door frame and door.

The following image shows the door opened after it has been clicked on with the Interaction Tool.

Animations can be found in components that represent real-world objects that have moving parts. These objects include doors, windows, and appliances.

Page 104

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Configuring a Dynamic Component
Some dynamic components are configurable by users through the Component Options dialog box. To configure a component: 1. 2. Context-click on the component. The component's context menu is displayed. Select the "Dynamic Components > Component Options" menu item. The Component Options dialog box is displayed. The following is an image of the Component Options dialog box for a Fence dynamic component:

3.

Type values in fields or select options from drop-down menus as applicable. For example, the Fence component has a Slat Spacing drop-down list. Select one of the four options from this list. Click the Apply button to apply your configuration changes to the component. The component's geometry should reflect changes in the Component Options dialog box.

4.

Page 105

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Developing a Dynamic Component
Google SketchUp Pro users can develop dynamic components for use by any SketchUp user. Developing a dynamic component consists of the following high-level steps: 1. 2. 3. Create a new component that is comprised entirely from groups or sub-component instances, each with a unique name. Context-click on the component. The component's context menu is displayed. Select the "Dynamic Components > Component Attributes" menu item. The Component Attributes dialog box is displayed. This dialog box is a two-column spreadsheet of attribute name and value pairs. This spreadsheet follows general spreadsheet rules: 1. 2. 3. Use the Tab key to tab between fields or to accept a value. Use the equals sign (=) to assign a value or formula to a variable Use an exclamation point (!) to refer to a value outside of the current subcomponent. For example, Fence!spacing refers to the value of the spacing variable in the Fence component.

4. 5. 6.

Add variables and values to your component to make it dynamic. Test your component to ensure it works correctly. Save your component to a component file.

This concludes the Dynamic Component Getting Started Guide.

Page 106

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Welcome to the SketchUp User's Guide
The SketchUp User's Guide contains step-by-step instructions on how to perform most all basic SketchUp tasks. The content in this guide answers the "How Do I..." questions of endusers.

Page 107

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Press the "Delete" key on your keyboard. The 2D person component is deleted.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Deleting 2D Person Component
SketchUp opens with a 2D person standing at the origin of the axes." The icon turns to an arrow. To delete this 2D person component: 1. Click on the "Select Tool.
Page 108
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. Click on the 2D person component. The component is highlighted. 3. 2.

2008
. and reattached or docked to the edge of the drawing area to suit your preferences.
Page 109
Copyright Google Inc. resized by dragging the corners.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Detaching Toolbars (Microsoft Windows)
These Toolbars can be detached by clicking and dragging the move handle (thin line at the top) of the Toolbar.

when nothing is selected. 2008
.
Page 110
Copyright Google Inc.
Change the Layer Assignment of Entities
Select an entity and then a layer from the Layer Toolbar to change the layer of an entity. control their visibility.
View Entity's Layer
Select an entity.
Display the Current Layer
When nothing is selected.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Using the Layers Toolbar (Microsoft Windows)
The Layers Toolbar provides quick access to several often used layer operations. to change the current layer.
Display the Layers Manager
The button on the right hand side displays the Layers Manager allowing you to create new layers.
Change the Current Layer
Select a layer from the Layers Toolbar. in the Layers Toolbar. The layer for the entity will be displayed. the current layer name is displayed in the Toolbar and has a check mark next to it. Any new entities you draw will be assigned to the current layer. with a check mark. and more.

2008
.
Page 111
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Viewing Tool Tips (Microsoft Windows)
Hover over a tool to display a tool tip with the name of the tool. A longer tip will appear in the Status Bar when you activate a tool.

within the Toolbar." or Context-click on the Toolbar and select "Customize Toolbar" from the context menu. The Customize Toolbar dialog box appears. To customize your Toolbar: 1. Drag a control from the Toolbar and drop it anywhere outside of the Toolbar to delete a control. Select "View > Customize Toolbar. Note . and repositioning controls within the Toolbar. to customize the controls that are visible in the Toolbar.
Click the "Done" button in the Customize Toolbar dialog box when you have finished customizing your Toolbar.Remove all of the controls from your Toolbar and drag the default set of controls to your Toolbar to reset the Toolbar controls to its original state. to the desired position in the Toolbar. Perform one of the following Toolbar customizations: • • Drag the controls from the Customize Toolbar dialog box.
2.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Customizing the Toolbar (Mac OS X)
You can modify the Toolbar by adding. to add a control to the Toolbar. 2008
. removing. to reposition the control.
• 3. Drag a control left or right.
Page 112
Copyright Google Inc. A smoke cloud will appear indicating that the control has been removed.

" The Tool Palettes sub-menu displays.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Showing and Hiding Tool Palettes (Mac OS X)
SketchUp displays the Getting Started tool palettes by default. 2. To show or hide other tool palettes: 1. Select any Toolbar to show or hide.
Page 113
Copyright Google Inc. Toolbars with a checkmark are currently displayed. Select " View > Tool Palettes. Toolbars without a checkmark are not currently displayed. 2008
.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Viewing Tool Tips (Mac OS X)
Hover the mouse cursor over a tool to display the name of the tool. A longer help tip will appear in the Status Bar when you activate a tool.
Page 114
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.

The drawing axes context menu is displayed.
Page 115
Copyright Google Inc. To align the point of view to the current view: 1.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Aligning the Point of View to the Current View
You can align SketchUp's point of view to be perfectly aligned with the current view. Select "Align View" from the context menu. 2. 2008
. Context-click on the drawing axes.

2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Determining Axis Relationship to Real-World 3D Space
Each axis has a solid line on one side of the origin and a dotted line on the other side of the origin. The dotted blue line leads down from the origin. The dotted green line leads south from the origin. Following is an explanation for each line that make up the origin: • • • • • • The solid blue line leads up from the origin up.
Page 116
Copyright Google Inc.
A Real-World 3D understanding of the axis is important when you placing models in Google Earth or casting realistic shadows. The dotted red line leads west from the origin. The solid red line leads east from the origin. The solid green line leads north from the origin.

Page 117
Copyright Google Inc. You can also hide the drawing axes from the drawing axes's context menu (when the drawing axes are visible).Google SketchUp 7 Help
Hiding the Drawing Axes
You can display or hide the drawing axes from the View menu. 2008
.

Specify displacement and rotation values in the units specified under the Units panel of the Model Info dialog box. Select "Move" from the context menu. To move and rotate the drawing axes: 1. The drawing axes context menu is displayed. 2008
.
Page 118
Copyright Google Inc. Click the "OK" button. The following image shows the Move Sketching Context dialog box on Microsoft Windows:
The following image shows the Move Axes dialog box on Mac OS X:
3. The Move Sketching Context (Microsoft Windows) or Move Axes (Mac OS X) dialog box is displayed. 2. 4. Context-click on the drawing axes.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Moving and Rotating the Drawing Axes Relative to Current Position
You can quickly and accurately move and rotate the drawing axes relative to their current position using the Move Sketching Context dialog box.

5. Move your cursor to the point in your model to be the new coordinate origin. Context-click on the Drawing Axes and select "Place" from the context menu. Move your cursor away from the origin to set an alignment for the green axis. 6. Use inference tool tips again to make sure you are aligned precisely. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Moving the Drawing Axes
The drawing axes can be manipulated (moved. Drag your cursor away from the origin to set an alignment for the red axis. 4.
Page 119
Copyright Google Inc. Click again to accept the alignment. 7. Click to accept the alignment. To move the drawing axes: 1. Click to accept the new coordinate origin. You will see the axes snap to inferred alignments and points as you move around your model. Use the inference tool tips to make sure you are aligned precisely. The cursor changes to a collection of axes. 2. 3. and hidden) through their context menu. moved and rotated.

Context menus are invoked on user interface components.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Invoking a Context Menu
Context menus are invoked on entities by selecting one or more entities. holding down the Control key. This operation is referred to as a context-click. such as a dialog box. Users with three-button or scroll-wheel mice can select one or more entities and click the right mouse button to invoke a context menu. by clicking the right mouse button while the cursor is on the component (three button mouse) or holding down the Controlkey and clicking the mouse button (single button mouse). and clicking the mouse button (single button mouse). 2008
.
Page 120
Copyright Google Inc.

Mid-line creation. A dotted line. to encourage SketchUp to create a line to match another. line (such as when drawing the third line of a rectangle): 1. As you begin to move the Line Tool. Move the Line Tool to the approximate location where the end of the third line should appear. the line should appear in red. Create the first two edges of a rectangle with the first edge being parallel to the red axes.
6. 2008
. the inference you need may not come up immediately or SketchUp might choose alignments with the wrong geometry. 5. Click when the line you are drawing is indicated by an axes color (red) and is directly perpendicular to the green dotted line. Click on the start point of the third edge and move the line tool as though you were creating the third line parallel to first line. Your line will extend diagonally to this point. Leave the tool over this point until the Endpoint visual cue displays. When the visual cue appears.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Encouraging an Inference
At times.
Page 121
Copyright Google Inc. with the color of the corresponding axes (green) will follow the Line Tool to indicate you are directly inline with the start point of the first line. parallel. move the Line Tool over the start point of the start point of the first line you created for the rectangle. you can increase the chances of a particular alignment by pausing your mouse cursor over the particular location that you want SketchUp to infer from. In these cases. 2. 4.
3. SketchUp will briefly prioritize that alignment as you continue drawing. For example.

making it difficult to draw accurately. which tells SketchUp not to waver from the direction it is currently inferring from. along an axis direction. parallel or perpendicular to an edge. and so on. The alignment will remain locked. to solve this problem. To use the inference lock. Use an inference lock.
Page 122
Copyright Google Inc. even as you move the mouse and/or pick a secondary inference point. 2008
. geometry might interfere with your ability to infer points from other points. from a point.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Locking an Inference
At times. press and hold the "Shift" key when SketchUp infers the desired alignment (the inference line will bold).
Any of the inference conditions may be locked. on a face. along an edge direction. The following image shows the inference locked in the blue direction to ensure that a new line is exactly perpendicular to the face.

The following is an image of a dialog stack on Microsoft Windows:
The following is an image of a dialog stack on Mac OS X:
You can manipulate the dialog boxes in a dialog box stack in the following ways: • • • Move the entire dialog box stack by clicking. down to break it from the stack. 2008
. Snap the entire dialog box stack to the application window or screen by moving it to the outer edge of the application window or screen. holding. The following image contains a dialog box stack with the Shadow Settings dialog box opened in the middle.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Manipulating Dialog Boxes in a Dialog Box Stack
A dialog box stack refers to a series of dialog boxes snapped together at their bottom and top edges such that they form a stack. residing at the bottom of the stack. Move a dialog box.
• • •
Page 123
Copyright Google Inc. respectively. Reinsert the dialog box in the middle of the stack by moving sideways into a middle position. to the right or left to break it from the stack. Move a dialog box. Reinsert the dialog box at the beginning or end of the stack by snapping the dialog box to the bottom or top edge of the stack. and moving the top-most dialog box's title bar. Click on any dialog box's title bar to minimize or maximize a dialog box within the stack. residing in the middle of the stack.

Page 124
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Minimizing Dialog Boxes
Click on any dialog box's title bar to minimize or maximize the dialog box (even those that can not be placed in a dialog box stack). 2008
.

Move the cursor around the dialog box's edges to display a resize cursor (two arrows). 2008
. such as the Components Browser dialog box. Click on the edge and move the edge to resize the dialog box.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Resizing Dialog Boxes
Some SketchUp dialog boxes.
Page 125
Copyright Google Inc. can be resized.

automatically snap to the outside edges of the application window. Dialog boxes in a dialog box stack move with the stack when the top-most dialog box's title bar is moved. The dialog box will snap to and align with the edge. 2. Note . To snap a dialog box to another user interface component: 1. such as the "Window > Styles" dialog box.Snap several dialog boxes together at their top and bottom edges to form a dialog box stack. 2008
. Tip . Move the dialog box to the outside edge of the application window. with the top and bottom of other dialog boxes to create a dialog stack. Click and hold on the dialog box's title bar.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Snapping Dialog Boxes to Other User Interface Components
Some dialog boxes.
Page 126
Copyright Google Inc. or top or bottom edge of another dialog box (such as the Shadow Settings dialog box). the outer edge of the screen. outside edge of the screen.Dialog boxes that have been snapped to the application window do not move when the application window is moved (they are not stuck to the window). such as the Styles Browser dialog box. Display a dialog box. 3.

2008
. useful for drafting quick concepts. Models that are not created based on some scale can be rescaled when accuracy becomes important. The values accepted by Measurements Toolbar depend on the tool you are using.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating Models to Scale
You can create models that are not based on any scale. See Scaling an Entire Model for further information. or are based on some scale.
Page 127
Copyright Google Inc. useful for creating a final produced product. Use the Measurements Toolbar to provide specific dimensions as you draw. • • Use the Measure Tape Tool to rescale an entire model to a specific scale. See the Measurements Toolbar for further information.

2. 5. To save a SketchUp file in a format compatible with earlier SketchUp versions: 1. Navigate to the directory where you want to save your file. Click on the "Save" button. The file is saved. 4. 4. 3." The Save As dialog box appears. or 3. 5. Open the file in SketchUp 7. The file appears in the drawing area.
Page 128
Copyright Google Inc. Select "File > Save As. 2008
. Select the file type from the Save as type drop-down list.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Sharing Files Between SketchUp 7 and Other Versions of SketchUp
You can save SketchUp 7 files as SketchUp 6.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Principal Tools
This section of the user's guide covers the principal tools within SketchUp. Principal tools are those tools that tend to be used most often in SketchUp.
Page 129
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. Tools in this section are covered in the order they appear within the Tools menu.

Changing Selection Status for an Entity (Shift)
Press and hold the "Shift" key (The cursor will change to an arrow with plus and minus signs) while clicking on entities to invert the selection status of the entity (currently selected entities will become unselected. Or. oneby-one. to the selection set.
Adding to the Selection Set
Press and hold the "Ctrl" (Microsoft Windows) or "Option" (Mac OS X)key (the cursor will change to an arrow with a plus sign) while clicking on additional entities to add entities.Use the Group entity to group items within a selection set as a temporary way of quickly reselecting the same group of items. one-by-one. unselected entities will be come selected). Tip . to the selection set.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Adding and Subtracting From a Selection Set
The Select Tool can be used with one or more keyboard modifiers to add or remove entities from a selection set.
Page 130
Copyright Google Inc. Or. oneby-one. See the Group entity for additional information. 2008
. press and hold the "Shift" key (the cursor will change to a plus sign and minus sign) while clicking on currently selected entities to remove the entities.
Subtracting from the Selection Set
Press and hold the "Shift" and "Ctrl" (Microsoft Windows) or "Option" (Mac OS X)keys simultaneously (the cursor will change to an arrow with a minus sign) while clicking on currently selected entities to remove entities from the selection set. press and hold the "Shift" key (the cursor will change to an arrow with a plus and minus signs) while clicking on additional entities to add entities. from the selection set.

Click three times (triple-click) on an entity. All Connected. namely an edge or face. to select corresponding faces or edges respectively. Connected Faces.
Page 131
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. Click rapidly twice (double-click) on an entity. namely an edge or face. Many context menus have a Select submenu allowing you to expand a selection using one of the following commands: Bounding Edges. and All with same material. All on same layer. Click once on an entity to select that entity.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Expanding the Selection Set Using the Mouse
You can automatically add to a selection set by clicking the mouse button (while in the Select tool) multiple times in rapid succession. The following image shows this click/selection sequence. to select the edge or face and all entities physically connected to that edge or face.Use a context-click to invoke the context menu for an entity.
Tip .

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Page 132
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.

called a crossing selection. though none are completely within the bounds of the selection box. The following images show a right-to-left selection selecting two components.
Click and hold the mouse button a short distance away from the entities you want to select to start a selection box. selects any elements within the selection rectangle.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Selecting Multiple Entities
There are multiple ways to select multiple entities in SketchUp. These ways are: • • • Selecting multiple entities with a selection box Selecting connected entities using rapid mouse clicking Selecting connected entities using the Select context-menu item
Selecting Multiple Entities With a Selection Box
A selection box is an expandable temporary box used to select multiple entities. 2. 2008
. Select the "Select Tool" ( ).
Page 133
Copyright Google Inc. including those that are only partially contained in the rectangle. The cursor will change to an arrow. To select multiple entities: 1. Drag the mouse to expand the selection box over the elements you want to select. Selection box selections are useful when you want to perform a single operation on several connected or disconnected entities (the selection set). 3. • Clicking to the right-side and dragging to the left.

2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Page 134
Copyright Google Inc.

The cursor will change to an arrow.
Selecting Connected Entities Using Rapid Mouse Clicking
Rapidly clicking the mouse button will select one or more additional connected entities. called a window selection. The selected entities are highlighted yellow.
4.Google SketchUp 7 Help
•
Clicking to the left-side of the entities and dragging right.
Double-click on an edge to select the connected face. Select the "Select Tool" ( ). 2. The cursor will change to an arrow.
Page 135
Copyright Google Inc.
Double-click on a face to select the face and all of its bounding edges. 2. The selected entities are highlighted yellow. The following image shows a left-to-right selection selecting one component because only one component (the left speaker) is completely within the bounds of the selection box.
Release the mouse button when all of the elements are either partially included (right-toleft selection) or fully included (left-to-right selection) in the selection box. Select the "Select Tool" ( ). selects only those elements completely within the selection rectangle. To select a face and its bounding edges: 1.
To select just a face and an edge: 1. 2008
.

The entity's context-menu appears. Selected entities are highlighted in yellow. • • • • • Select the "Select Tool" ( ). Select "Connected Faces" to select all of the faces connected to the selected entity. the entire cube is selected.
Triple-click rapidly on any entity. For example. 2.
Selecting Connected Entities Using the Select Context-Menu Item
Use the Select context-menu item to select entities based on their specific relationship to the currently selected entity. The cursor will change to an arrow. Select the "Select" menu item. The cursor will change to an arrow. if you triple-click a face in a cube.Google SketchUp 7 Help
To select all entities connected to a single entity: 1. to select all of the connected entities. 2. 3. A sub-menu appears.
Page 136
Copyright Google Inc. Select one of the Select sub-menu items: Select "Bounding Edges" if you want to select all the bounding edges of a selected face. such as an edge or face.
Context-click on a single entity. 2008
. 4. Select the "Select Tool" ( ). Select "All on same Layer" to select all the entities on the same layer as the selected entity. Select "All with same Material" to select all the entities on with the same material as the selected entity. Select All "Connected" to select all entities connected to the selected entity (this is identical to performing a triple-click on the entity). in a set of connected entities. To use the Select men item: 1.

Select the "Select Tool" ( ).
Page 138
Copyright Google Inc.
Click on an entity. To select a single entity: 1. 2008
. 2.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Selecting a Single Entity
SketchUp allows you to make both single-entity and multiple-entity selections. The selected entity is highlighted in yellow. The cursor changes to an arrow.

Hiding Lines
Press and hold the "Shift" key and use the Eraser Tool to hide lines (instead of erasing lines). 2. the Eraser Tool does not allow you to erase faces (faces are erased after their bounding edges are erased). Select the "Eraser Tool" ( ).Try erasing entities slowly if you continuously skip over entities you want to erase.
Page 139
Copyright Google Inc. erase several entities at once by holding down the mouse button and dragging it over several entities to be erased.
If you accidentally select geometry you do not wish to delete. To erase entities: 1. the Eraser Tool is used to erase entities in the drawing area. Alternatively. Note. 2008
. You can also delete selected items by selecting Erase from the Edit menu. The cursor changes to an eraser with a small box. All selected geometry will be erased once you release the mouse button. Tip . Tip .Google SketchUp 7 Help
Erasing Entities
As mentioned previously.
Click on an entity to erase it.It is usually faster to erase a large number of entities by selecting the entities with the Select Tool and pressing the Delete key on your keyboard. press the Esc key to cancel the erase operation before it deletes your selection.

Page 141
Copyright Google Inc. 4. The material is assigned to the face.Ensure that the Shaded with Textures display style is selected to see the materials that you have applied to entities. Click the Paint Bucket Tool's cursor over the entity or selection set you wish to color. Note . (Mac OS X) Select several entities with the Select Tool and then click and drag a swatch from the library and drop it on one of the selected entities.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Applying Materials and Color
Ensure you are using either the Shaded or Shaded with Textures style so that you can see materials as they are applied to your model. SketchUp contains several default materials libraries.
3. Select the material you want to use and then select the Paint Bucket Tool. The cursor will change to a paint bucket and the Select the "Paint Bucket Tool" ( Material Browser is activated. 2008
. Select a materials library using the drop down list in the Materials Browser. and transparent materials. The Materials Browser contains libraries of materials you can paint on faces in your model. ). Click on the faces to paint. To apply materials: 1. roofing.
2.
Alternatively: • • • (Mac OS X) Click and drag a material swatch from the Texture Pallet Picker and drop it on a single entity you want to color. Select a material from the materials library. including landscape.

SketchUp contains several default materials libraries. Select a materials library using the drop down list box. roofing. and transparent materials. For example. and tires maintained their original material.
Note . the windshields. Select a material from the library of materials. bumpers.Exploding a group or component assigns the object materials to any elements assigned the default material. the face will not adopt the new material. Therefore. thus making the material override permanent. before applying a material to the entire group or component. 4. If you select multiple groups or components using the Select Tool.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Painting Groups and Components
Materials can be painted on entire Group entities or Component entities or to the individual entities within the group or component. Select the "Paint Bucket Tool. The Materials Browser contains libraries of materials you can paint on faces in your model. Note .
Page 142
Copyright Google Inc. bumpers.If a face within a group or component is already painted with a material (other than the default material). clicking on the selection with the Paint Tool will paint all of them with a single click. the windshields.
2." The cursor will change to a paint bucket and the Material Browser is activated. 3. The faces will receive the material. 2008
. To assign materials to an entire group or component: 1. 5. Click on the group or component you want to paint. and tires in the following image were already painted before a material was applied to these components. including landscape.

all back faces will be painted. 2008
. No edges are painted when you select a face and all edges and paint the back of one face. These rules follow: • The side of the faces that will be painted depends on the side initially painted when more than one face is selected. if all faces are selected and you paint the back of one face. the front of all faces will be painted. if all faces are selected and you paint the front of one face. For example. Ensure you have the color set to the "By material" style settting to see the painted effect applied to edges.
•
Page 143
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Face Painting Rules
There are several face painting rules that apply when painting multiple faces or edges at the same time. All selected edges will be painted when you select a face and all edges and paint the front of the face. Conversely.

modified.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Sampling a Material
Press and hold the "Alt" (Microsoft Windows) or "Command" (Mac OS X) key to change from the Paint Bucket Tool to a Sample Tool for sampling materials within your model. or used as the basis of a new material (Mac OS X).
Note . Release the "Alt" (Microsoft Windows) or "Command" (Mac OS X) key to return to the Paint Bucket Tool. Paint the sampled material on a face.
Page 144
Copyright Google Inc. The cursor will change to an eye dropper. where it can be painted on new entities.The sampled material is placed in the Active Color Well of the Color Picker. Click on the face whose material you want to sample. 2008
.

Tools in this section are covered in the order they appear within the Draw menu. 2008
. Drawing tools are those tools used to create new geometry. These tools include the Line Tool. Rectangle Tool. and Freehand Tool.
Page 145
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing Tools
This section of the user's guide covers the drawing tools within SketchUp.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing a Line
Lines can be placed on existing faces or separate from existing geometry. This ending point can also be the starting point of another line. Note . and drag outward without releasing the button to set the length. See the Drawing panel of the Preferences dialog box for further information on setting drawing behavior.
Page 146
Copyright Google Inc. Release the mouse button to complete the line. you can click and hold the mouse button to set the starting point of the line. the length is displayed dynamically in the Measurements Toolbar.Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over. 4. Click to draw your line. Tip . The cursor changes to a pencil. See Creating Precise Lines for further information on using the Measurements Toolbar with Line entities.
Click to set the starting point of your line. As you draw a line.
Move the cursor to the ending point of your line.
The line length can be specified precisely using the Measurements Toolbar either before clicking the second point or immediately after the line has been drawn. Select the "Line Tool" ( ).Alternately. To draw a Line: 1. 2008
.
3. 2.

These two lines are said to be coplanar. The Line Tool is released but is still active after a face has been created. Three or more coplanar lines. Ensure that the Endpoint inference tool tip is visible whenever you close a Face entity to ensure that any lines you draw are continuous. This end point is automatically treated as a starting point for another line. intersecting lines (intersecting at starting and ending points).
Page 147
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. generate a Face entity. intersecting at their ending and starting points (forming a loop). You can create another line by moving the cursor and clicking again from this new starting point.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating a Face
The Line Tool will remain at the ending point of every line you create.

right arrow equals red.
Locking a Line to a Specific Inference Direction
Press and hold either the up arrow. made by the inference engine.
Page 148
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing Lines by Inference
The Line Tool uses SketchUp's sophisticated geometric inference engine to help you place your lines in 3D space. to lock drawing operation to that axis. while the line you are drawing is the specific color of an axis. are displayed in the drawing area as inference lines and inference points. The inference decisions. while drawing a line to lock the line to a specific axis. Refer to the inference engine topic for additional information. These lines and points show precise alignment between the line you are drawing and the geometry of your model. where the up arrow equals blue.
Locking a Line to the Current Inference Direction
Press and hold the "Shift" key. left arrow equals green. or right arrow keys. left arrow. 2008
.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating Precise Lines
The Measurements Toolbar displays the length of your line while you are drawing lines. SketchUp will use the current document units setting if you only type in a numerical value. For European users. z].
Entering a Length Value
The Measurements Toolbar label indicates "Length" after you place the starting point of a line.y. Note . You can also specify either Imperial (1'6”) or Metric (3. y.The exact format for Measurements Toolbar entries will vary depending on your computer's Regional Settings. The following image shows the length value in the Measurements Toolbar. y. the list separator symbol may be a semi-colon instead of a comma. You can also specify a line length value using the Measurements Toolbar. y.
Note .
Page 149
Copyright Google Inc. where x.
Entering a Relative Coordinate Type the coordinate points enclosed by angle brackets. 2008
.652m) units at any time. in the format <x. and press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OSX) key.
Entering a 3D Coordinate
The Measurements Toolbar can also be used to place the end of the line at an exact coordinate in space. and z values are relative distances from the starting point of your line. such as [x.z]. to get absolute coordinates relative to the current axes. after placing the starting point of the line. so the format would be [x.The Line Tool will snap to any previously entered length within the Measurements Toolbar. z>. Entering an Absolute Coordinate Type in the coordinates of a point in 3D space enclosed by brackets. regardless the model units setting.
Type the length into the Measurements Toolbar.

2. 3. Context-click on a line. Move the cursor toward the center of the line to reduce the number of segments. 2008
.
Page 150
Copyright Google Inc. Click on the line when the number of segments you would like is shown. Select "Divide" from the context menu. SketchUp will place points on the line to show where the line will be divided.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Dividing a Line into Equal Segments
Line segments can be divided into any number of equal line segments. The line will be divided into an equal number of joined line segments. Move cursor toward either end of the line to increase the number of segments. 4. To divide a line into equal segments: 1.

Any lines that are not part of a face perimeter will be displayed with a thicker line (left-most image below) .
Page 151
Copyright Google Inc.
Integrating Lines
Occasionally. SketchUp will re-analyze your geometry and attempt to reintegrate the line. The following images show a bold line that did not effectively split a face (left-most image). The Profile Edge rendering style must be enabled in the style to see this behavior. Use the "Line Tool" to trace along an existing line to attempt to split overlapping lines.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Splitting a Face
Draw a line with starting and ending points on the face's edges to split a face. The following image shows a rectangle being split when a line is drawn from one edge of a face to another opposite edge. 2008
. The line was traced (middle-image) and the line became thin indicating that the line was reintegrated. overlapping lines will not be split or integrate with a face.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Splitting a Line
SketchUp automatically splits line segments when new lines are drawn perpendicular to a line. draw a new line to the midpoint (identified by a cyan square) of another line to split a line in half. The following example shows one line being intersected at the midpoint. For example.
Page 152
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.
Select the original line to verify that the line has been split into two equal segments. resulting in two lines.

2. 3. The cursor will change to a four-way arrow. that does not yet bound a face.
Page 153
Copyright Google Inc. Move the cursor to adjust the length of the Line entity. 4.
You can also adjust the length using the Line entity's Entity Info dialog box.
Move over the Line entity to locate an endpoint of the Line entity.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Editing a Line Entity
You can edit the length the of a Line entity. Click and hold on the endpoint of the Line entity. Select the "Move Tool" ( ). To edit an Line entity: 1. by using the Move Tool. 2008
.

Move the cursor to the ending point of your chord. Select the "Arc Tool" ( ). To draw an arc: 1. 3.
Click to place the starting point of your arc. and number of segments can be specified using the Measurements Toolbar immediately after a arc is drawn. A straight line will extend perpendicular from the straight line. Click to place the ending point of your arc. 4. 6. Move your cursor perpendicular to the straight line to adjust the bulge distance.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing an Arc
Arc entities consist of three parts: the starting point. A straight line is created.
Page 154
Copyright Google Inc. The cursor changes to a pencil with an arc.
Note .Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over. The distance between the starting point and the ending point is also known as the chord length. Bulge distance. Click to set the bulge distance. radius. 5. See Creating Precise Arcs for more information on manipulating arcs using the Measurements Toolbar. 2008
. the ending point and the bulge distance. 2.
Chord length can be specified after you place the ending point of your arc.

2008
. Watch for the half-circle inference tool tip indicating when your arc is a half-circle.
Page 155
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing a Half-Circle
The arc temporarily snaps to a half-circle as you pull out a bulge distance.

Specifying a Radius
You can specify an arc radius instead of a bulge distance. radius value.
Page 156
Copyright Google Inc. and press the Enter (Microsoft Windows) or Return (Mac OS X) key. followed by the letter 'r' and press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) Key. For example: 20s. Type the desired radius in the Measurements Toolbar. after placing the starting point of the arc. 2008
. For example: 24r or 3'6"r or 5mr. such as -6.SketchUp will use the current file units setting if you only type in a numerical value. Note . Specify a negative value.652m) units at any time.5". Units are set within the Units panel of the Model Info dialog box. followed by the letter 's'. Type the number of segments in the Measurements Toolbar. and number of segments. Type the chord length into the Measurements Toolbar. after placing an ending point.
Specifying the Number of Segments
You can also specify the number of segments in an arc. then the bulge distance (after setting the ending point). Type the bulge length in the Measurements Toolbar. bulge distance. and press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or Return (Mac OSX) key. You can perform this action either during or immediately following the creation of the arc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating Precise Arcs
The Measurements Toolbar displays the chord length of the arc (after setting the starting point).
Specifying a Bulge Distance
The Measurements Toolbar's label indicates "Bulge" after you place the ending point of an arc. regardless the file's units setting. and press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key. Use the Measurements Toolbar to enter exact lengths for the chord length.
Entering a Chord Length
The Measurements Toolbar's label indicates "Length" after you place the starting point of an arc. You can also enter the bulge distance after the creation of the arc as long as "Bulge" is displayed as the Measurements Toolbar label. Negative bulge values can also be used to create an arc in an opposite direction to the current drawing direction. to indicate that you want the length to apply in an opposite direction to the current drawing direction. You can also specify either Imperial (1'6”) or Metric (3. You can perform this action either during or immediately following the creation of the arc.

Page 157
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing Tangent Arcs
The Arc Tool displays a cyan tangent arc while you are drawing from an unconnected end or start point of an existing arc. 2008
.

You can also adjust the radius and number of segments using the Arc entity's Entity Info dialog box.
5. The cursor will change to an four-way arrow.
Move over the Arc entity to locate the midpoint of the Arc entity. 4. Move the cursor to adjust the bulge of the Arc entity.
Page 158
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. 6. 3.
Click and hold on the starting or ending point of the Arc. To edit an Arc entity: 1. 2. Select the "Move Tool" ( ). Click and hold on the midpoint of the Arc entity. The radius attempts to stay proportional to the base chord length.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Editing an Arc Entity
You can edit the radius of an Arc entity by using the Move Tool. Move the mouse to adjust the radius and length of the arc entity.

2008
.
Page 159
Copyright Google Inc. and the arc curved face set (as well as the midpoints of the two arc entities that define it) will move accordingly. Use the Move Tool to reposition the midpoint edge. it extrudes a special arc Surface entity which can also have its radius edited.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Editing an Extruded Arc
When you use the Push/Pull Tool to extrude a 2D face that includes an arc.

The cursor will change to a pencil with a curve.
Page 160
Copyright Google Inc. Select the "Freehand Tool" ( ).
(optional) End your curve at point where you started drawing to draw a closed shape. 3. 4. Release the mouse button to stop drawing.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing Curves
Curves can be placed on existing faces or separate from existing geometry (aligned to an axes plane). To draw a curve: 1.
5.
Click and hold to place the starting point of your curve. 2. 2008
. Drag the cursor to draw.

or for decorating your model. 3D polylines are usually used for tracing imported drawings.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing 3D Polyline Entities
3D polylines do not generate inference snaps or affect geometry in any way. before you begin drawing.
Page 161
Copyright Google Inc. Press and hold the "Shift" key. to draw a 3D polyline. 2008
.Select Explode from the 3D polyline's context menu to convert a Freehand Sketch into regular edge geometry. Note . 2D sketching.

Select the "Move Tool" ( ). To edit a curve: 1. that does not yet bound a face.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Editing a Curve Entity
You can change the length of a Curve entity. 3.
Page 162
Copyright Google Inc. Click and hold on the endpoint of the Curve entity. Move the cursor to adjust the length of the Curve entity.
Move over the Curve entity to locate an endpoint of the Curve entity. 2008
. by using the Move Tool. 2. The cursor will change to an four-way arrow. 4.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing a Rectangle
Rectangles can be placed on existing faces or separate from existing geometry (aligned to an axes plane). The cursor changes to a pencil with a rectangle.Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over. 2008
.
Click again to set the second corner point of the rectangle. Note .
4.
Page 163
Copyright Google Inc. Select the "Rectangle Tool" ( ).
Click to set the first corner point of the rectangle. Move the cursor diagonally. 3. To draw a rectangle: 1. 2.

2008
. These lines and points show precise alignment between the rectangle you are drawing and the geometry of your model. made by the inference engine. if you move your mouse over an endpoint of an existing edge and then move away in the direction of an axis. You can also use a From Point inference to draw rectangles vertically or at non-orthogonal planes. a dotted inference line with a From Point tool tip will appear. For example.
Page 164
Copyright Google Inc. are displayed in the drawing area as inference lines and inference points.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing Rectangles by Inference
The Rectangle Tool uses SketchUp's geometric inference engine to help you place your rectangles in 3D space.
This tool tip indicates that you are aligned to that end point. The inference decisions.

while the rectangle you are drawing is the specific color of an axis.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Locking a Rectangle to the Current Inference Direction
Press and hold the "Shift" key. to lock drawing operation to that axis. 2008
.
Page 165
Copyright Google Inc.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating Precise Rectangles
A rectangle's dimensions dynamically appear in the Measurements Toolbar as you draw. 2008
. and the second dimension will be retained from before.652m) units at any time." Mac OS X) either after the first corner is clicked or immediately after the rectangle is drawn. If you enter a value and a comma (3'. Similarly. SketchUp will apply that value in a direction opposite to the one you indicated while drawing and accept any new values in the new direction.If you enter a negative value (-24. the new value will be applied to the first dimension. You can also specify either Imperial (such as 1'6”) or Metric (such as 3. Tip . -24). Specify exact length and width dimensions by typing them in the Measurements Toolbar. regardless the document units setting. if you type a comma and then a value (.3').
Page 166
Copyright Google Inc.
SketchUp will use the current document units setting if you only type in a numerical value.). You can also type one dimension at a time in the Measurements Toolbar. and pressing "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return. only the second dimension will be changed.

Click to set the first corner point of the rectangle. 3. 2008
. The cursor changes to a pencil with a rectangle. and release the mouse button.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing a Square
Squares are created with the rectangle tool in conjunction with the Square tool tip. A diagonal dotted line will appear. when you are in a position that will create a square. 2.
Click to finish.Use the Axes tool to re-align the axes.A dotted line and Golden Section tool tip appears when you are in a position to create a Golden Section. prior to drawing your rectangle. along with a Square tool tip. Move your mouse to the opposite corner. if you want to draw a rectangle that is not aligned with the default drawing axes orientation. Select the "Rectangle Tool" ( ). you can press your mouse button on the first corner of your rectangle. Tip . Tip .
3.
Page 167
Copyright Google Inc. drag to the opposite corner.
Alternately. Note .Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over. To draw a Square: 1.

See Specifying Precise Circle Values for more information on setting the radius and segment values with the Measurements Toolbar. and drag outward without releasing the button to set the radius. Click to finish the circle. the radius value is displayed dynamically in the Measurements Toolbar and can be specified by typing in a length value followed by the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key.You can also click and hold the mouse button to set the center of the circle. Release the mouse button to complete the circle.
Page 168
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. Move the cursor out from the center point to define the radius of your circle. As you move the cursor. You can also specify the segmentation for the circle in the Measurements Toolbar. Tip .Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing a Circle
Circles can be placed on existing faces or separate from existing geometry. To draw a circle: 1. The cursor changes to a pencil with a circle. 4.Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over.
Note . Radius and segment values can be specified using the Measurements Toolbar immediately after a circle is drawn. 2.
Click to place the center point of the circle. 3. Select the "Circle Tool" ( ).

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Locking a Circle to its Current Orientation
Press and hold the "Shift" key. before you begin drawing a circle. 2008
.
Page 169
Copyright Google Inc. to lock drawing operation to that orientation.

Specifying a Radius
The Measurements Toolbar's label indicates "Radius" after you place the center point of the circle. and press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key. For example: 20s. Note . Type the number of sides in the Measurements Toolbar. This number will be applied to any future circles. after placing the center point. Type the radius size in the Measurements Toolbar. Note .The Circle Tool will snap to any previously entered radius within the Measurements Toolbar.The default number of segments for a circle is 24. For example: 24r or 3'6"r or 5mr. 2008
. followed by the letter 's'. Specify the number of sides in the Measurements Toolbar.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating Precise Circles
The Measurements Toolbar displays the radius after setting the center point of a circle. For example: 100. and press the "Enter" (Mac OS X) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key.
Specifying the Number of Sides
The Measurements Toolbar's label indicates "Sides" when the Circle Tool is initially activated. and press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key. Use the Measurements Toolbar to enter an exact radius and number of segments.
Page 170
Copyright Google Inc. before clicking to set the center point of the circle. You can also specify the number of sides in a circle immediately after the creation of the circle. You can perform this action either during or immediately following the creation of the circle.

more line segments increases the size of your model and degrades performance.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Editing an Extruded Circle
When you use the Push/Pull Tool to extrude a 2D circle. Polyline curves can no longer be edited as arcs. 2. such as with a non-uniform scale operation. 2008
.
Circle Segmentation
Circles with more line segments appear to have smoother curvature than circles with fewer line segments. You can often achieve acceptable results by indicating small segmentation and using smoothing and edge softening to create the impression of smoothness.
Click on one of the four cardinal points (indicated by a vertical dashed line) on the side of the extruded circle. Select the "Move" Tool ( ).
Circle Deformation
If an Arc is deformed in a way that destroys its radial definition. it will become a non-parametric Curve entity.
Move the cursor inward to decrease the size of the extruded circle or outward to increase the size of the extruded circle. To change the size of the extruded circle: 1. The cursor will change to a four-way arrow.
3.
Page 171
Copyright Google Inc. a special cylindrical Surface entity is created. However.

you can click once to set the center of the polygon. See Creating Precise Polygons for more information on setting the radius and segment values with the Measurements Toolbar. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing a Polygon
Polygons can be placed on existing faces or separate from existing geometry. 4. the radius value is displayed dynamically in the Measurements Toolbar and can be specified by typing in a length value followed by the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key.Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over.)
Radius and segment values can be specified using the Measurements Toolbar immediately after a polygon is drawn. 3. 2. The cursor changes to a pencil with a polygon. To draw a polygon: 1. Click a second time to finish the polygon. and drag outward without releasing the button to set the radius. (Alternately.
Page 172
Copyright Google Inc. Move the cursor out from the center point to define the radius of your polygon. Select the "Polygon Tool" ( ). As you move the cursor. Release the mouse button to complete the polygon.
Click to place the center point of the polygon.
Note .

Page 173
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Locking a Polygon to its Current Orientation
Press and hold the "Shift" key. to lock drawing operation to that orientation. before you begin drawing a polygon.

Specify the number of sides in the Measurements Toolbar.
Specifying a Radius
The Measurements Toolbar's label indicates "Radius" after you place the center point of the polygon. Note . You can also specify the number of sides in a polygon immediately after the creation of the polygon. Use the Measurements Toolbar to enter an exact radius and number of segments.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing Precise Polygons
The Measurements Toolbar displays the radius after setting the center point of a polygon. Type the radius size in the Measurements Toolbar. Type the number of sides in the Measurements Toolbar. For example: 24r or 3'6"r or 5mr.The Polygon Tool will snap to any previously entered radius within the Measurements Toolbar. 2008
. This number will be applied to any future polygons.
Page 174
Copyright Google Inc. and press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key. after placing the center point. For example: 6s. For example: 10. before clicking to set the center point of the polygon.
Specifying the Number of Sides
The Measurements Toolbar's label indicates "Sides" when the Polygon Tool is initially activated. followed by the letter 's'. You can perform this action either during or immediately following the creation of the polygon. and press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key. and press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key.

Click and hold on the midpoint of the Polygon entity. 2. by using the Move Tool.
Page 175
Copyright Google Inc.
Move over the Polygon entity to locate the midpoint of a side. Move the cursor to adjust the radius of the Polygon entity. Select the "Move Tool" ( ). 3. that does not yet bound a face.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Editing a Polygon Entity
You can edit the radius of a circle in which the polygon is inscribed. Click and hold on another midpoint if the polygon does not resize. 2008
. At least one midpoint of the polygon will allow you to resize the entity. Try each midpoint until you find the midpoint that will resize the entity. 4.
You can also adjust the radius and number of segments using the Polygon entity's Entity Info dialog box. The cursor will change to a four-way arrow. To edit a Polygon entity: 1.

it will become a non-parametric polyline curve. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Editing an Extruded Polygon
When you use the Push/Pull Tool to extrude a 2D face that includes a polygon. Polyline curves can no longer be edited as polygons.
Page 176
Copyright Google Inc. and the polygonal curved face set radius (as well as the radii of the two polygon entities that define it) will be adjusted accordingly. it extrudes a special polygonal curved face set which can also have its radius edited.
Polygon Deformation
If a polygon is deformed in a way that destroys its radial definition. Use the Move Tool to reposition one of the control edges. such as with a nonuniform scale operation.

These tools include the Push/Pull Tool. and Select Tool. Tools in this section are covered in the order they appear within the Tools menu. Eraser Tool. Modification tools are those tools used to modify existing geometry.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Modification Tools
This section of the user's guide covers the modification tools within SketchUp. 2008
.
Page 177
Copyright Google Inc.

4. For example. Type a multiplier value to create additional multiple copies. Move your mouse to copy the entities. 2008
. 6. The cursor will change to a four-way arrow.
5. 8. 3. A copy of the selected entities will follow as you move your mouse. Click at the destination point to finish your copy operation. The cursor will change to an arrow. Select the "Select Tool" ( ). The copied entities are now selected and the original entities are deselected. the one you manually copied plus one you automatically copied using this step) instead of just one.
Select the entities to be copied. 7.
Page 178
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating Multiple Copies (Linear Arrays)
The Move Tool can also be used to create arrays. The cursor will change to an arrow with a plus sign. Click on the selected entities to copy. To create multiple copies of one or more entities: 1.
Press and release the "Ctrl" (Microsoft Windows) or "Option" (Mac OS X) key on your keyboard. 2. typing in 2x (or *2) will create one additional copy (or 2 copies total. or a series of copies of geometry. This action informs SketchUp that you want to duplicate the selected entities. Select the "Move Tool" ( ).

and decks. 2008
. where you might want several posts or beams an equal distance apart.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating Copies at an Equal Distance Apart
You can divide the distance between the copy and the original by typing in a divisor value. You can keep typing in distances and multipliers until you perform another operation. typing 5/ (or /5) will create five copies evenly distributed between the original and the first copy.
Tip . bridges.
Page 179
Copyright Google Inc. For example.This feature is particularly useful in creating models of items such as fences.

You can override this behavior by pressing and releasing the "Alt" (Microsoft Windows) or "Command" (Mac OS X) key before performing the move operation.
Forcing Autofold Behavior
There are times when SketchUp constrains an operation in favor of keeping all faces planar and not creating additional fold lines. For example. clicking on the corner of a box with the Move Tool and move down in the blue direction causes SketchUp to create a fold line along the box's top face. 2008
.
Page 180
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Moving/Stretching With Autofold
SketchUp will Autofold faces automatically when a move or stretch operation will create nonplanar faces. For example. but not vertically (blue). clicking on the edge of a box with the Move Tool only allows you to move the edge in a horizontal direction (red and green). This key sequence enables Autofold allowing geometry to move freely in any direction.

Click on the selected entities to copy. 2008
. Move the cursor to copy the entities.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Making Copies
As mentioned previously. 3.
Press and release the "Ctrl" (Microsoft Windows) or "Option" (Mac OS X) key on your keyboard. The cursor will change to an arrow. The copied entities are now selected and the original entities are deselected. To make copies of an entity using the Move Tool: 1. Select the "Select Tool" ( ). 7. 4. Click at the destination point to finish your copy operation. The cursor will change to a four-way arrow with a plus sign. 6. A copy of the selected entities will follow as you move your mouse. the Move Tool can be used to make copies of entities within your model. Note .
Select the entities to be copied.
Page 181
Copyright Google Inc. The cursor will change to a four-way arrow.You can press and release the "Ctrl" (Microsoft Windows) or "Option" (Mac OS X) key on your keyboard at any time during a move operation to perform a copy (not just at the start). Select the "Move Tool" ( ). 2. This action informs SketchUp that you want to duplicate the selected entities.
5.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Moving Groups and Components
If a component is glued to a face. the component will stay in the plane of that face when moved unless it is unglued. Copies of a glued component will also be glued to the originating plane. 2008
.
Page 182
Copyright Google Inc.

to lock move operation to that axis.
Locking a Move to the Current Inference Direction
Press and hold the "Shift" key. while moving to lock the move to a specific axis. and right arrow equals red. The inference decisions. Refer to the inference engine topic for additional information. while the move you are performing is the specific color of an axis. These lines and points show precise alignment between the move operation and the geometry of your model.
Locking a Line to a Specific Inference Direction
Press and hold the up arrow.
Page 183
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Moving by Inference
The Move Tool uses SketchUp's sophisticated geometric inference engine to help you place entities in 3D space. or right arrow keys. are displayed in the drawing area as inference lines and inference points. left arrow equals green. left arrow. 2008
. where up arrow equals blue. made by the inference engine.

The cursor will change to an arrow. copying. 2. Select the "Select Tool" ( ). as specified under the Units panel of the Model Info dialog box. an inference line will appear between the start and ending points of the move. and the distance of the move is displayed dynamically in the Measurements Toolbar. an inference line will appear between the start and ending points of the move. For example.
Click once to select the start point of the move operation. or immediately after. 4. z] of the current Sketch Axes:
6. 5. SketchUp will convert the value to the default system. Select the "Move Tool" ( ). In addition to creating arrays.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Moving Precisely
The Measurements Toolbar at the bottom right corner of the SketchUp window displays the length of the move operation (displacement) in the default units. The selected entities will follow as you move your mouse. a move operation. The cursor will change to a four-way arrow.You can type values in the Measurements Toolbar using an alternate measuring system than the default system. Global Coordinates: [x.
Select the entities to be moved.
Entering a Displacement Value
You can specify a new displacement length during or directly following a move operation. 3. 2008
. To enter a displacement value during a move operation: 1. Note . 5. and the distance of the move is displayed dynamically in the Measurements Toolbar. or stretching entities. Select the "Select Tool" ( ). 4. Move your mouse to begin moving the entities in the correct direction.
Click once to select the start point of the move operation. while moving. Also.
Entering a 3D Coordinate
SketchUp can move your entities to exact (using []) or relative (using <>) coordinates in 3D space. The cursor will change to an arrow. To enter a 3D coordinate during a move operation: 1. you can also specify an exact displacement or a relative or absolute 3D coordinate for the finishing point during. 3.
Page 184
Copyright Google Inc. 2. y.
6. Also. Type the exact or relative coordinate. The selected entities will follow as you move your mouse. Move your mouse to begin moving the entities in the correct direction. Select the "Move Tool" ( ). you can type in 3' 6" even if you are using metric system as your default. Type the positive or negative displacement value (such as 20' or -35mm) in the Measurements Toolbar and press the Enter (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key. The cursor will change to a four-way arrow.
Select the entities to be moved.

[x.You can define only one or two values as part of your 3D coordinate. For some European users. z> relative to the start point:
Note .The exact format for values typed in the Measurements Toolbar will vary depending on your computer's regional settings. to move geometry to 2 feet in the z or blue direction enter the following in the Measurements Toolbar: [. the list separator symbol is a semi-colon instead of a comma.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Relative Coordinates: <x. y. For example. For example.. 2008
.2'] Note . y. z]
Page 185
Copyright Google Inc.

The cursor will change to a four-way arrow. To preselect and move entities: 1.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Moving Several Entities
You can preselect several entities to move prior to performing a move operation. 6. Move your mouse to move the entities. Also. The selected entities will follow as you move your mouse. 3. Select the "Move Tool" ( ).Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over. 2. 5. The cursor will change to an arrow. Note . an inference line will appear between the start and ending points of the move.Follow inference lines to easily align items in 3D space. You can also type in a specific distance as described below. 4.
Page 186
Copyright Google Inc.
Click once on an entity to begin the move operation. Click at the destination point to finish your move operation. Select corners of components as your move point and align to corners of other components when aligning components side-by-side (such as when aligning kitchen cabinet components). The point where you click on the entity is called the move point. The following image shows a component being moved:
Tip . Select the "Select Tool" ( ). and the distance of the move is displayed dynamically in the Measurements Toolbar.
Select the entities to be moved. 2008
.

2008
. The selected entity will follow as you move the cursor. To select and move a single entity: 1. 4.
Page 187
Copyright Google Inc. 3.If the entity you are moving is connected to other entities. Note . Click at the destination point to finish your move operation. the other entities will be moved or modified accordingly. 2. Select the "Move" Tool ( ). The selection click point becomes the base point for the move operation. See the Stretching Geometry section for further information on this behavior. The cursor will change to a four-way arrow.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Moving a Single Entity
You can activate the Move Tool when nothing is selected to select a single entity to move. Move the cursor to move the entity.
Click on an entity to begin the move operation.

Page 188
Copyright Google Inc. the following Face entity can be moved back in the negative red direction or up in the positive blue direction:
You can also move single line segments to stretch an object. In the following example. a line is selected and moved up in the blue direction to form a sloped roof. You can move points. and faces in this manner. For example. SketchUp will stretch geometry as necessary. edges. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Stretching Geometry
When you move an element that is interconnected with others.

. If the Enable angle snapping checkbox is checked in the Units Panel of the Model Info dialog box. 2. the one you manually copied plus one you automatically copied using this step) instead of just one.
Page 189
Copyright Google Inc.
Creating Copies at an Equal Distance Apart
You can divide the distance between the copy and the original by typing in a divisor value in the Measurements Toolbar. This action informs SketchUp that you want to duplicate the entity. A copy of the entity appears and is rotated about the starting point. Click to set the starting point of the rotation. 3. 6. Move the cursor until it as at the ending point of the rotation. For example. The cursor will change to a protractor with a circular arrow. movements close to the protractor result in angle snaps. Press and release the "Ctrl" (Microsoft Windows) or "Option" (Mac OS X) key on your keyboard. To create a radial array: 1. You can enter distances and multipliers until you perform another operation. The cursor will change to a protractor with a plus sign.
7. Use the inference tool tips to help you to find the center of the rotation.
4. 8. while those further away from the protractor allow free rotation. For example. 2008
. Move the cursor in a circle until it is at the starting point of the rotation. typing 5/ (or /5) will create five copies evenly distributed between the original and the first copy.Press and hold the "Ctrl" (Microsoft Windows) or "Option" (Mac OS X) key at any time during a rotate operation to perform a copy (not just at the start).Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating Multiple Rotated Copies (Radial Arrays)
The Rotate Tool can also be used to create radial arrays. 5. or a series of copies around a rotate point. typing in 2x (or *2) will create one additional copy (or 2 copies total. Select the "Rotate Tool" ( Click on the entity to rotate. Type a multiplier value to create additional multiple copies. ). Click to complete the rotation. Note .

Move the cursor until it as at the ending point of the rotation. 2. Select the "Rotate Tool. The cursor will change to a protractor with a plus sign. This action informs SketchUp that you want to duplicate the entity." The cursor will change to a protractor with a circular arrow.
7. Click to set the starting point of the rotation.Press and hold the "Ctrl" (Microsoft Windows) or "Option" (Mac OS X) key at any time during a move operation to perform a copy (not just at the start). while those further away from the protractor allow free rotation.
4. Click on the entity to rotate. Click to complete the rotation. Move the cursor in a circle until it is at the starting point of the rotation.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Making Rotated Copies
The Rotate Tool can be used to make rotated copies of entities within your model. A copy of the entity appears and is rotated about the starting point. Press and release the "Ctrl" (Microsoft Windows) or "Option" (Mac OS X) key on your keyboard. Note . movements close to the protractor result in angle snaps. If the Enable angle snapping checkbox is checked in the Units Panel of the Model Info dialog box.
Page 190
Copyright Google Inc. Use the inference tool tips to help you to find the center of the rotation. 3. 6. 5. To make copies of an entity using the Rotate Tool: 1. 2008
.

3. The bottom of the triangle will act as a fold line. Drag the cursor along the fold line to align the protractor to the fold line (the bottom of the triangle). The cursor will change to a protractor with a circular arrow. Select the "Select Tool" ( ). 4. The cursor will change to an arrow.
Click and hold on one end of the fold line or edge where the fold will appear in your geometry. 5.
Select the "Rotate Tool" (
).
Page 191
Copyright Google Inc. 2.
Release the mouse button to set the rotation point or the point upon which the geometry will rotate.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Folding Along an Axis of Rotation
You can fold geometry by setting the protractor along an edge that will act like a fold line and then folding geometry at that line.
Select the geometry to rotate. 2008
.
6. To fold geometry along an axis of rotation: 1.

2008
.
Click the mouse again to set the starting point of the rotation.
Move the mouse to rotate. If angle snaps are active under preferences.
9.
Click a third time at the ending point of the rotation (to complete the rotation).
8. movements close to the protractor will result in angle snaps.Google SketchUp 7 Help
7. you'll notice that as you move the mouse.
Page 192
Copyright Google Inc. while those further away from the protractor will allow free rotation.

to lock the operation to that orientation. 2008
.
Page 193
Copyright Google Inc. before you click on an entity.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Locking the Rotate Tool to its Current Orientation
Press and hold the "Shift" key.

Entering a Slope Value
To specify a new angle as a slope. You can specify an exact angular value either during or immediately after your rotation operation. For example. such as "8:12. typing in "34. type a decimal value into the Measurements Toolbar while rotating the cursor around the protractor.
Entering an Angular Rotation Value
To specify an exact angle in degrees. You can specify an exact angular value either during or immediately after your rotation operation. 2008
.1 degree angle.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Rotating Precisely
The degree of rotation you have indicated appears in angular degrees in the Measurements Toolbar while rotating. Negative values will move angle in a counter-clockwise direction." Negative values will move angle in a counterclockwise direction.1" will give you an exact 34. You can also manually enter in angular rotation or slope values directly into the Measurements Toolbar while rotating geometry.
Page 194
Copyright Google Inc. type in the two values separated by a colon in the Measurements Toolbar.

5.Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over. while those further away from the protractor allow free rotation.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Rotating Geometry
You can rotate geometry in three different planes in a 3D environment. Use the inference tool tips to help you to find the center of the rotation.
Click to complete the rotation. To rotate geometry using the Rotate Tool: 1.
Click to set the starting point of the rotation. Move the cursor in a circle until it is at the starting point of the rotation.
4. 3. Select the" Rotate Tool" ( Click on the entity to rotate. 2008
. movements close to the protractor result in angle snaps. If the Enable angle snapping checkbox is checked in the Units Panel of the Model Info dialog box. ). 2.
Page 195
Copyright Google Inc. Move the cursor until it as at the ending point of the rotation.
6. The cursor will change to a protractor with a circular arrow. Note .

Page 196
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. Any rotational movement that would cause a face to twist in on itself or otherwise become non-planar will activate SketchUp's Auto-Fold feature.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Rotational Stretching with Auto-Fold
The Rotate Tool can also be used to stretch geometry by selecting and rotating a portion of the geometry.

The Scale Tool's bounding box contains nine scaling grips when scaling a 2D face. The bounding box is a 2D rectangle when scaling a single 2D surface that lies in the redgreen plane.
Page 197
Copyright Google Inc. The bounding box will be a 3D volume if the surface to be scaled is out of plane with the current red-green plane. and also work with the Ctrl (Microsoft Windows) or Option (Mac OS X) and Shift modifiers. You can ensure a 2D scale by aligning the Drawing Axes to a surface prior to scaling. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Scaling 2D Surfaces or Image Entities
Two-dimensional surfaces and Image entities can be scaled just as easily as threedimensional geometry. These operate in a similar manner to the grips in a 3D bounding box.

click on any of the other scaling grips.
Page 198
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. Press and hold the "Ctrl" (Microsoft Windows) or "Option" (Mac OS X) key at any time during a scale operation to display the geometry's center point.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Scaling About the Geometry Center
The Scale Tool allows you to scale outward from geometry's center point. and drag outward or inward to scale accordingly.

Page 199
Copyright Google Inc. This feature allows you to have many differently scaled versions of the same component in your model. therefore. Scale operations within a component's context (such as scaling a Line entity within a component) affect the component definition and.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Scaling Components
Scaling a Component entity scales the individual instance. 2008
. all instances of the component are scaled to match (all instances of the same Line entity in all component instances). All other instances of the component will retain their individual scales.

after the axes are repositioned. The Scale Tool will use the new red. green.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Controlling Scaling Direction With The Axis Tool
You can precisely control the direction of scaling by first repositioning the drawing axes with the Axes Tool.
Page 200
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. and blue directions to orient itself. and control grip direction.

(To scale objects based on a particular edge or known distance. typing in multiple values separated by commas will resize the object(s) based on the entire bounding box dimension(s). Click on a scaling grip to select the grip. not the objects individually. The cursor will change to an arrow.
Mirroring Geometry using the Scale Tool
The Scale Tool can also be used to mirror geometry by pulling a grip towards and then beyond the point about which you are scaling.
6. You can force a mirror by typing in a negative value or dimension. -1. Move the mouse to scale the geometry.
Select the geometry to scale. A 1D scaling operation requires one value. a dashed line appears between the scaling point and the grip you've selected. and -2) just as they do in the positive direction. Type the dimensional length value (such as 2' 6" for two feet and six inches or 2m for two meters) in the Measurements Toolbar and press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key. This operation allows you to pull geometry inside out. 2. When scaling in multiple directions. 2D. To enter a dimensional length value during a scaling operation: 1. regardless of which mode (1D. 2008
. Note that the grips snap to certain negative values (such as -1. separated by a comma.5. The selected grip and the opposite scaling grip will highlight in red.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Scaling Precisely
The Measurements Toolbar at the bottom right corner of the SketchUp window displays the axis dimensions that are being scaled. you can use the Tape Measure Tool.
5. 4. 3D) is active. ).
Entering Multiple Scale Values
The Measurements Toolbar always indicates the scaling factors associated with a particular operation. in the default units (as specified under the Units panel of the Model Info dialog box) during a scaling operation. Scaling Select the "Scale Tool" ( grips will appear around the selected geometry. and the value of the scale itself. Entering a single value or distance in the Measurements Toolbar tells SketchUp adjust the anchor to grip distance to be that scale value or distance. The cursor will change to a box within another box. A Uniform 3D scaling operation requires only one value whereas a Non Uniform 3D scaling operation requires three values. You'll notice that during the scale operation. A 2D scaling operation requires two values. 3. See Scaling Options section for further information.)
Page 201
Copyright Google Inc. Each scaling grip provides a different scaling operation. You can enter the desired scale dimensions after the scale operation is complete. Select the "Select Tool" ( ). Type a scale value into the Measurements Toolbar to directly scale geometry during or immediately after a scaling operation. The Measurements Toolbar displays relative size of the item as you scale the item. each separated by a comma.
Entering a Scale Multiplier Value
You can specify a new dimensional length value during or directly following a scaling operation.

The cursor will change to a box within another box. Each scaling grip provides a different scaling operation. Scaling grips will appear around the selected geometry. Note . The Measurements Toolbar displays relative size of the item as you scale the item.
3. SketchUp will create folding lines as necessary to maintain planar faces. Select the "Scale Tool" ( ).
Page 202
Copyright Google Inc.
Scaling Auto-Folding Geometry
SketchUp's Auto-fold feature works automatically with all Scale operations.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Scaling Geometry
To scale geometry: 1.
Click on the entity.
Click to finish scale operation. Move the cursor to scale the entity. The selected grip and the opposite scaling grip will highlight in red. 2.
5. 2008
.Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over.
Click on a scaling grip. You can enter the desired scale dimensions after the scale operation is complete.
4. See Scaling Options section for further information.

Note .Use the "Ctrl" (Microsoft Windows) or "Option" (Mac OS X) and "Shift" keys to allow uniform and non-uniform scaling from the center of the selected geometry.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Scaling Uniformly
You might need to maintain the uniformity of geometry as it is being scaled. despite performing nonuniform scaling. 2008
.
Page 203
Copyright Google Inc. The Shift key toggles to uniform scaling operation (from a nonuniform scaling operation) and to nonuniform scaling operation (from a uniform scaling operation).

but are comprised of a number of faces or a curved face set.
Page 204
Copyright Google Inc. Surfaces can be adjusted as a whole.Select View > Hidden Geometry to view and manipulate the individual faces in the surface. The curved face that results from the push/pull operation is called a Surface entity.
Tip . 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Pushing and Pulling a Curved Face
You can use the Push/Pull Tool on faces that have an arc as an edge similarly to using the Push/Pull Tool on regular faces.

The following image shows a face that was pulled up (left).
This operation is particularly useful for creating quick space planning diagrams (such as for an office building). 2008
. Simply use a combination of push/pull and push/pull with Ctrl to create offices. The lines that represent the edges of the top-most face will remain as the starting point for a new push/pull operation.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating a New Push/Pull Starting Face
Push/pull a face (click on the face. This mechanism is useful for creating quick multilevel buildings. move. and then click again) and then press and release "Ctrl" (Microsoft Windows) or "Option" (Mac OS X) (the cursor will contain a plus sign) and push/pull again.
Page 205
Copyright Google Inc. meeting rooms and so on (with walls created when Ctrl is pressed). then the user pressed and released Ctrl (Microsoft Windows) or Option (Mac OS X)and pulled again (middle) and then the user pressed and released Ctrl (Microsoft Windows) or Option (Mac OS X) and pulled again (right). halls. break rooms.

2008
. You can specify an exact push/pull value either during or immediately after your push/pull operation. Negative values will perform the push/pull in the opposite direction.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Pushing and Pulling Precisely
The displacement of a push/pull operation is displayed in the Measurements Toolbar.
Page 206
Copyright Google Inc.

of the same amount.The side of the face that you double-click on affects the direction of the repeated push/pull operation. If your last push/pull was on a front face. Note . and you double-click on the back side face.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Repeating a Push/Pull Operation
Double-clicking on another face immediately after a push/pull operation will automatically apply another push/pull operation. to the other face.
Page 207
Copyright Google Inc. the push/pull will occur in the opposite direction. 2008
.

2008
.
Note .Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating Voids
Push/pull will implode the shape into the volume and toward the back face of the volume when you use push/pull on a shape that is part of another volume.This operation only works when the front and back faces are parallel. SketchUp will subtract the shape and create a 3D void if the shape is pushed completely out of the back of the volume as in the following example.
Page 208
Copyright Google Inc. Such as when you have two parallel walls in a house and you want to create a void for a door or window.

and release the mouse button to create a volume. The front of the face (gray) points down and the back of the face (purple) points up. ). Note . The positive blue direction temporarily acts as the "below ground" or negative blue direction.Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over. 2. A double-click.
Page 209
Copyright Google Inc. To push or pull faces: 1. after performing the initial push/pull. applies a positive amount and returns the entity to the single face you started with. as shown previously in step 4. drag the mouse.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating a Volume
Push/Pull Tool is used to expand or decrease the volume of geometry in your models. 4.You can also press and hold the mouse button. SketchUp assumes you are going to be using that face as the floor of a structure.
Move the cursor to create (or decrease) volume. 2008
. you are really pulling up from the back of the face. The cursor will change to a 3D rectangle with an up
Click on the face that you want to expand or decrease.
Note . Note . Click when the volume has reached the desired size. on the ground plane (the red/green plane). When you use the Push/Pull Tool on this single face (in the blue direction).
3. Select the "Push/Pull Tool" ( arrow.When you create a single face.

Move the mouse cursor to define the offset dimension. 2.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Offsetting a Face
The most common use of the Offset Tool is to offset the edges that bound a face.
Page 210
Copyright Google Inc. The offset distance is displayed in the Measurements Toolbar. 2008
.Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over. To perform a face offset: 1.
Note .
3. on rectangular face or circular face.
Click on the face to be offset. Click to finish the offset operation. The cursor will change to two offset corners. You can offset inside or outside of the edges. 4. Select the "Offset Tool" ( ).

Tip .
Page 211
Copyright Google Inc. drag to set the offset while holding down the mouse button. can still be edited after this operation.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Offsetting Lines
You can also select and offset connected. however.
Click on one of your selected line segments. The cursor will change to two offset corners. 2. You must select two or more connected lines. co-planar. 4.
Click to finish the offset operation. Move the cursor to define the offset dimension. lines (and arcs) for an offset. The original Arc. 5. and all your lines must be coplanar.
6. Select the "Select Tool" ( ).
3. 2008
.You can click once on the selected line segments. To offset lines: 1.Offsetting an Arc entity will create a Curve entity that cannot be edited.
Select the "Offset Tool" (
). Note . The cursor will change to an arrow. The cursor will automatically snap to the nearest line segment. and release the button to accept.
Select the lines to be offset.

" The cursor will change to an arrow." Click on one of your selected line segments. For example. Click your mouse to accept the offset lines. To enter an offset value during an offset operation: 1.
3.
Page 212
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. while offsetting entities. and all your lines must be coplanar. Select the lines to be offset. 7.
Entering an Offset Value
You can specify a new offset length during or directly following an offset operation. or immediately after. Move the mouse to define the offset dimension. Select the "Select Tool. 2. Select the "Offset Tool. Use the "Ctrl" (Microsoft Windows) or "Option" (Mac OS X) and/or "Shift" key to change your selection. 5. You must select two or more connected lines.You can type values in the Measurements Toolbar using an alternate measuring system than the default system.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Offsetting Precisely
The Measurements Toolbar at the bottom right corner of the SketchUp window displays the length of the offset in the units as specified under the Units panel of the Model Info dialog box. you can type in 3' 6" even if you are using metric system as your default. You can also specify an exact offset during. Type the positive or negative offset value (such as 20' or -35mm) in the Measurements Toolbar and press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X). SketchUp will convert the value to the default system. an offset operation. 4. The cursor will automatically snap to the nearest line segment. 6. Note .

to the face.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Repeating an Offset Operation
Double-clicking on another face immediately after a offset operation will automatically apply another offset operation. 2008
. of the same amount.
Page 213
Copyright Google Inc.

Move the cursor off the profile surface onto the surface around which you wish to sweep.
3.
Page 214
Copyright Google Inc. To automatically extrude a face along a path on a single surface using the Follow Me Tool: 1." Press and hold the "Alt" (Microsoft Windows) or "Command" (Mac OS X) Key. 4. 2. you can select the surface and then the Follow Me Tool to automatically follow the edges around the surface. Identify the edge of the geometry you want to modify.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Automatically Extruding a Face Along a Single Surface Path
The simplest and most accurate way to extrude a face along a path is to have the Follow Me Tool automatically select and follow a path on a single coplanar surface.
Select the "Tools > Follow Me. 6. Click on the profile that you created. 5. The path will automatically close. This edge will be your path. 2008
. Draw a profile of the face that you want to follow the path.
Note .If your path consists of the edges around a single surface. Make sure that this profile is approximately perpendicular to the path.

Draw a face perpendicular to the circle.
Page 216
Copyright Google Inc. To create a lathed shape: 1. The cursor will change to a slanted box with an arrow.
3. 2. Draw a circle whose edge will represent the path.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating a Lathed Shape
You can use the Follow Me Tool to create full lathed shapes using circular paths.
Select "Follow Me Tool" (
).
Follow the edge of the circle with the face using one of the methods above. 2008
. The face does not have to be on or even touch the circle's path. 4.

Page 217
Copyright Google Inc. 5. 4. Draw a face that you want to follow the path. as your starting edge. Make sure that this profile is approximately perpendicular to the path. 2. If you select an edge.Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over. You must touch the segment of the path immediately adjacent to the profile for the Follow Me to start in the correct location.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Manually Extruding a Face Along a Path
The manual method for extruding a face along a path allows you to control the direction the face will travel while performing the extrusion. To manually extrude a face along a path using the Follow Me Tool: 1. This edge will be your path. 2008
. SketchUp will highlight the path.
3.
Note . in red. not from the profile to that edge. you are following as you drag your cursor around the model.
Select the "Follow Me Tool" ( arrow. Identify the edge of the geometry you want to modify. that is not touching the profile. Click on the face that you created. The cursor will change to a slanted cylinder with an
Drag the cursor along the path. Follow Me will start extruding at that edge.
).

Click to complete the Follow Me operation when you reach the end of the path. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
6.
Page 218
Copyright Google Inc.

The surface will be extruded continuously along your pre-selected path. ) (the edges should still be selected). To extrude a face along a pre-selected path: 1. Select the continuous set of edges that represent the path. Click on the profile that you created. 2. Make sure that this profile is approximately perpendicular to the path. 2008
. 3.
Page 219
Copyright Google Inc. Draw a profile of the face that you want to follow the path.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Preselecting the Path
You can preselect the path using the Select Tool to help the Follow Me Tool follow the correct path. 4. The cursor will Select the "Follow Me Tool" ( change to a slanted box with an arrow.

2008
.
Select the "Select Tool" (
). Select Intersect With Model from the context commands menu. The tube should remain selected although it is within the box.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating Complex Geometry
To create complex geometry using the Intersect With Model Tool: 1. 5. such as a box and a tube. The cursor changes to an arrow.
Triple-click on the tube to select all of the entities of the tube Select the "Move Tool" ( ). 4. The tool creates edges where the tube intersects the box.
Context-click on the selected tube. The cursor will change to a four-way arrow. Notice that no edges exist where the tube meets the faces of the box on the box's top face. 7.
Page 220
Copyright Google Inc. Create two distinct geometries.
6. 3.
2.
Move the tube such that it intersects the box completely in any way you like.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
8. Notice that SketchUp will have created new subdivided faces where the tube intersected the box.
Page 221
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.
Delete or move the portions of the tube that you do not want to keep.

2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Using Intersect With Model with Groups and Components
Edges created by the Intersect With Model Tool are drawn in the current context. the intersection lines will be applied within the group (right-most image below).
Page 222
Copyright Google Inc. For example. and you perform the Intersect with Model while editing that group (such as while editing the tube). if one of your intersecting entities is a group.

" A matrix of dotted lines is displayed on the material to indicate the materials individual tiles." or just click outside the texture to exit the Position Texture Tool. Note . Colored icons appear next to each pin.
Fixed Pin Mode Options
Move Icon and Pin: Drag (click and hold) the Move icon or pin to reposition the texture. shear and distort a texture.
5. To manipulate a material using Fixed Pin Mode: 1. context-click and select Done.
Page 223
Copyright Google Inc. The cursor also changes to a hand and four pins are displayed. while constraining or "fixing" one or more pins. and dragging on one of the pins. Or you can simply press the Enter (Microsoft Windows) or Return (Mac OS X) key when finished.Single-clicking on a pin grabs the pin allowing you to move the pin to a different location on the texture. 4. 2008
. Fixed pin mode is best for materials that tile like brick or roofing textures. or just click outside the texture to close it. This action works in both Fixed Pin and Free Pin modes. Context-click on the material Select the Fixed Pins menu item if there is not a check mark next to the item.
When you are finished modifying the texture.
6. This new position will be the starting point for any of the fixed pin mode operations. See Fixed Pin Mode Options in this topic for additional information. holding.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Manipulating a Material Using Fixed Pin Mode
Fixed pin mode allows you to scale.
3. Context-click on the material to display its context menu. Select "Texture > Position. 2. context-click and select "Done.
Manipulate the material by clicking. each icon representing a specific position texture operation. When you are finished modifying the texture. skew.

Be forewarned that selecting Reset also resets the rotation as well as the scale. based on the fixed pin location of the move pin. Scale / Shear Icon and Pin: The Scale/Shear icon or pin is used to simultaneously slant or shear and resize the material. 2008
. Or you can select Reset from the Context menu. Notice that the dots along the dashed lines and arcs show you the current size and the original size of the texture for reference.
Page 224
Copyright Google Inc. A dashed arc is created in the direction that you rotate the material. If you hold the cursor over the dashed arc. the base pin will scale the material. Dragging the cursor closer to. This feature is useful for applying image photos to geometry. Dragging the pin icon around the base pin causes SketchUp to rotate the material. Notice that the two bottom pins are fixed during this operation. the material will rotate. You can change back to the original size by moving the cursor to the original arc and line. but not scale. Distort Icon and Pin: The Distort icon or pin is used to perform a perspective correction on the material. or farther from.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Scale / Rotate Icon and Pin: The Scale/ Rotate icon or pin is used to scale and rotate the material to any angle.

Context-click on the material. 2.
Page 225
Copyright Google Inc. Four pins appear." or just click outside the texture to exit the Position Texture Tool. To manipulate a material using Free Pin Mode: 1.
5.
When you are finished modifying the texture. holding. context-click and select "Done. and dragging on one of the pins. 4. This action works in both Fixed Pin and Free Pin modes. Free pin mode is best for positioning and removing the distortion from photographs. Context-click on the material to display its context menu. Note . This new position will be the starting point for any of the fixed pin mode operations. Select the "Fixed Pins" menu item if there is a check mark next to the item.
3.
Manipulate the material by clicking.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Manipulating a Material Using Free Pin Mode
Pins are not constrained to other pins in Free Pin Mode allowing you to drag pins anywhere to distort the material just as you might distort a material as you stretch it over a drum. 2008
.
6. Select "Texture > Position. The cursor also changes to a hand and four pins are displayed.Single-clicking on a pin grabs the pin allowing you to move the pin to a different location on the texture." A matrix of dotted lines is displayed on the material to indicate the materials individual tiles.

repositioned. 6. or using the "Alt" key with the Paint Bucket Tool. The cursor changes to the Select Tool with the image. The Face entity's context menu appears.
Page 226
Copyright Google Inc. The cursor changes to the Paint Bucket Tool. Click the "Open" button. 11. repeating itself as necessary to wrap the entire model. For example. Select an image format from the Files of type drop-down list. Paint the sampled. Context-click on the selected face. and then repaint the adjust texture across the entire curved surface of the cylinder." The image appears in the Colors In Model material library within the Materials Browser. Paint the Material on the cylinder. 14. 2008
. 2. Drag the cursor away from the starting point so that the image is resized. texture on the remainder of the cylinder.
10. 4. Click on the material in the Materials Browser. 15. Select one of the faces of the cylinder 12. 13. Context-click on the image. Click in the drawing area to place the starting point of the image. Select the image file. Select the "Texture > Position" menu item. Reposition the texture on the face. Your texture now appears as though it has been repositioned on the entire cylinder. 8.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Repositioning a Material on Hidden Geometry
You can adjust textures on a face. 7. Sample the repositioned texture using the eyedropper button on the material browser. 11. Select "Use as Material. Create a cylinder. The Image entity's context menu appears. 12. 10. Click on "Display > Hidden Geometry" to turn off Hidden Geometry. 16. The material will automatically wrap around the cylinder. Select the "Display > Hidden Geometry" menu item. to adjust a texture on a cylinder: 1. 5. Click again to place the image. Select the "File > Import" menu item to insert an image. 17. 9. such as the faces of a cylinder. 3.

Select the image file. 7. Click on the "Open" button. and dragging on one of the pins. Select the "File > Import" to insert an image. 5. This action works in both Fixed Pin and Free Pin modes. To manipulate an image using Free Pin Mode: 1. 11. Note . 9. you can use a picture containing a door as the foundation for a photo-realistic door in a SketchUp model. Drag the cursor away from the starting point so that the texture is resized over the rectangular face. 11. The Open dialog box is displayed. 4. This new position will be the starting point for any of the fixed pin mode operations. The cursor also changes to a hand and four pins are displayed. For example. Select an image format from the Files of type drop-down list. holding. When you are finished modifying the texture. Click again to place the texture on the rectangular face." A matrix of dotted lines is displayed on the material to indicate the materials individual tiles. 6. The cursor changes to the Paint Bucket Tool with the image.
Page 227
Copyright Google Inc. such as the image of a real door. Context-click on the texture 14. 13. Select the "Fixed Pins" menu item if there is a check mark next to the item.
10. 8. Manipulate the material by clicking. Select "Texture > Position. context-click and select "Done.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Manipulating an Image as Material Using Free Pin Mode
Free pin mode is especially useful when using an image as the foundation for geometry.Single-clicking on a pin grabs the pin allowing you to move the pin to a different location on the texture. 2. 12. 15. Click on one corner of the face to place the starting point of the texture. 2008
. Context-click on the material to display its context menu." or just click outside the texture to exit the Position Texture Tool. 3. Click on the "Use as texture" radio button. Create a rectangular face.

Select the image file. 2. Click again to place the image. 8. 16. just as you might wrap a package with wrapping paper. 7. 13.
Page 228
Copyright Google Inc. 12. Select the "Paint Bucket Tool". Click on the painted material using the eye dropper to sample the material. 22. Select "Texture > Position." Don't position anything! 18. Release the "Alt" (Microsoft Windows) or "Command" (Mac OS X) key. Click and hold the "Alt" (Microsoft Windows) or "Command" (Mac OS X) key while using the Paint Bucket Tool to change to the eye dropper.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Wrapping Material Around Corners
The texture can be wrapped around a corner. Click and hold the "Alt" (Microsoft Windows) or "Command" (Mac OS X) key while using the Paint Bucket Tool to change to the eye dropper. Context-click on the image. The Image entity's context menu appears. 21. Context-click again. 4. 20. Select "Position Texture Tool > Done. Context-click on the material to display its context menu. 3. Create a three-dimensional cube.". 17. 15. Click on a face of your model and paint the material. 14. Drag the cursor away from the starting point so that the image is resized. 19. Click in the drawing area to place the starting point of the image. 5. 6. Select "Use as Material. Select an image format from the Files of type drop-down list. Release the "Alt" (Microsoft Windows) or "Command" (Mac OS X) key. To wrap textures around corners: 1." The image appears in the In Model (Microsoft Windows) or Colors in Model (Mac OS X) materials library within the Materials Browser. The cursor will change to a paint bucket and the Materials Browser is activated. Click the "Open" button. Click on the thumbnail of your image in the In Model (Microsoft Windows) or Colors in Model (Mac OS X) material library within the Materials Browser. Select "File > Import" to insert an image. 9. The cursor changes to the Select Tool with the image. 2008
.
10. 11.

Paint the sampled texture on the remainder of the model. 2008
. The texture is wrapped around corners.Google SketchUp 7 Help
23.
Page 229
Copyright Google Inc.

repeating itself as necessary to wrap the entire model." The image appears in the In Model (Microsoft Windows) or Colors in Model (Mac OS X) material library within the Materials Browser. 9. 12. 8. Context-click on the image. To wrap a texture. Click on the material in the Materials Browser. The cursor changes to the Paint Bucket Tool.
10. such as an image texture. The material will automatically wrap around the cylinder. Click in the drawing area to place the starting point of the image. 2. Select the image file. Select "Use as Material. 7. Paint the Material on the cylinder. The cursor changes to the Select Tool with the image. Select an image format from the Files of type drop-down list. 4. around a cylinder: 1. 2008
. 6. Drag the cursor away from the starting point so that the image is resized. 3. Create a cylinder. The Image entity's context menu appears. Click again to place the image.
Page 230
Copyright Google Inc. Click the "Open" button. 5.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Wrapping Material Around a Cylinder
A texture can also be wrapped around a cylinder. Select "File > Import" to insert an image. 11.

" The cursor changes to the Select Tool with the image. 2. Select "File > Import. This feature is particularly useful if you wish to project a topographic image over a site model.
7. This square indicates that you are in projected texture mode (Microsoft Windows). or an image of a building onto a model representing the building. Size the image so it is large enough to cover the entire model. Paint the texture onto the faces of the model. 2008
. Note . adjusting to the contours of model. 5. or building front. Place the image in front of the model that will receive the projection. The image will appear as though it were projected directly on the faces.Turn on x-ray display mode for the image to ensure the image is positioned such that it will cover the entire model. Select the "Sample Paint Tool" (eyedropper) from the Materials Browser. topography. 4. 8. Sample the projected texture with the Sample Paint Tool. a square appears on the tip of the tool.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Projecting a Material
SketchUp's Texturing Positioning feature also lets you project materials or images onto faces as though projected using a slide projector. when you drag the Sample Paint Tool over the image.
Page 231
Copyright Google Inc. Context-click on the image and select "Explode" to turn the image into a projected texture. 6. This model will receive the projected image. Create a model. such as a cone. 3. To project an image over a model: 1. Notice.

2. Press Esc twice to cancel the entire texture positioning operation.
Page 232
Copyright Google Inc. The cursor also changes to a hand and four pins are displayed.
3. Context-click on the material to display its context menu. you can back up a step at anytime by context-clicking and selecting Undo from the context menu. If you want to rotate the tiled image. context-click and select "Done.Press the "Esc" key anytime during editing to reset the material's position to its previous position. To reposition a material: 1.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Repositioning a Material
Repositioning the material is the easiest of position texture operations. Drag the cursor on the surface to reposition the texture on that surface." or just click outside the texture to exit the Position Texture Tool. 4. 2008
. When you are finished modifying the texture." A matrix of dotted lines is displayed on the material to indicate the material's individual tiles. Select "Texture > Position. While positioning a texture. Tip . context-click on the surface again and select Rotate or Flip.

resize. rotate. and so on) using the Position Texture Tool.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Reorienting Materials
You can reorient materials (skew.
Page 233
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. See Position Texture Tool for more information.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Construction Tools
This section of the user's guide covers the construction tools within SketchUp. and Dimension Tool. These tools include the Measure Tool. Guide tools are those tools used to create construction geometry and prepare physical documentation.
Page 234
Copyright Google Inc. Tools in this section are covered in the order they appear within the Tools menu. Text Tool. 2008
.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating Guide Lines and Guide Points
Guide Line entities and Guide Point entities are useful for drawing precisely.Start from an "On Edge" point inference and move across a face to generate an infinite parallel guide line. The cursor changes to a tape measure. A temporary measuring tape line and a guide line will stretch out from your starting point. Tip .
Press and release the "Ctrl" (Microsoft Windows) or "Option" (Mac OS X) key.
Click again at the point where you want to set your guide line.
3.Starting from an endpoint or midpoint results in a Guide Point. Move the cursor the direction you want to measure. Note .
Page 235
Copyright Google Inc. You must click on an "On Edge" or "Midpoint" point between the start and end points in the line segment. Select the "Tape Measure Tool" ( ). The final distance is displayed in the Measurements Toolbar. to set the starting point of your measurement. 2008
.
Click on a line that will be parallel to the guide line.
4. 4. Start from an "Endpoint" to create a finite guide line with a guide point at the end. 2. To create an infinite parallel guide line using the Tape Measure Tool: 1.

2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Page 236
Copyright Google Inc.

while measuring to lock a specific axis. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Locking a Line to a Specific Inference Direction
Press and hold the up arrow. left arrow. where up arrow equals blue. left arrow equals green. or right arrow keys. and right arrow equals red.
Page 237
Copyright Google Inc.

drag the mouse to the endpoint of the measurement. 2008
. Use the inference tool tip to make sure you click on the exact point. The final distance is displayed.
Note .
Click at the starting point of your measurement. Move the cursor in the direction you want to measure. The Measurements Toolbar dynamically displays the length of your measuring tape as you move the mouse around your model. will stretch out from your starting point as you move the mouse. 3.
Page 238
Copyright Google Inc. with arrows at each end. Select the "Tape Measure Tool" ( ).Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over. 4. The cursor changes to a tape measure. A temporary measuring tape line. Tip . To measure a distance between two points: 1. The Tape Measure Tool's measuring tape line functions like an inference line and will change color to match axes colors when it is parallel to any axes. Click at the ending point of your measurement.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Measuring Distance
The Tape Measure Tool is primarily used to measure distances between two points. and release the mouse to obtain a measurement.You can also click and hold on the starting point of the distance you wish to measure. 2.

Specify a negative length to draw the line in the direction opposite the one indicated.
Page 239
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Placing Precise Guide Lines and Guide Points
The Measurements Toolbar displays the distance that a guide line is from the starting point. 2008
. Specify a different distance simply by typing it in the Measurements Toolbar.

A temporary measuring tape line. This line is referred to as the reference line. Enter a new size for the line in the Measurements Toolbar and press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key. 5.
Click the "Yes" button.Only components that are created within the current model (not dragged from the Components Browser and loaded from an external component file) can be resized.
4. 3. Move the mouse to the end point of the same line segment. To scale an entire model: 1.
Page 240
Copyright Google Inc. Note . The following dialog box appears. This size will be used as the basis for a proportional rescale of your model. will stretch out from your starting point as you move the mouse. The model will be rescaled proportionally.
6. Use the inference tool tip to make sure you click on the exact point. 2008
. Select the "Tape Measure Tool" ( ). The cursor changes to a tape measure. 2.
Click one end of a line segment to set the starting point of a measurement. with arrows at each end. Click again at the other end of the line segment.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Scaling an Entire Model
You can rescale your model to a more precise dimension during the modeling process by specifying the desired dimension between two points using the Tape Measure Tool. The final distance is displayed in the Measurements Toolbar.

3. Note . The model will be rescaled proportionally. Note . Move the mouse to the end point of the same line segment. Use the inference tool tip to make sure you click on the exact point. 8.
10.
9. Click the "Yes" button. The following dialog box appears. The selection set context menu is displayed. The cursor changes to a tape measure.
5.
Double-click on the group to enter the group's context." The entities are grouped.
Page 241
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. To scale an one or more entities: 1. Select "Make Group.
Click one end of a line segment to set the starting point of a measurement. This size will be used as the basis for a proportional rescale of your model. Context-click while the cursor is over one of the selected entities. Select the "Tape Measure Tool" ( ).Google SketchUp 7 Help
Scaling Entities
You can rescale one or more entities using the Tape Measure Tool. 6. The final distance is displayed in the Measurements Toolbar.This process also works with components.
Select the entities you want to scale.Only components that are created within the current model (not dragged from the Components Browser and loaded from an external component file) can be resized. Click again at the other end of the line segment. Enter a new size for the line in the Measurements Toolbar and press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key. 2. with arrows at each end. A temporary measuring tape line.
11. 7. 4. The cursor changes to an arrow. Select the "Select Tool" ( ). will stretch out from your starting point as you move the mouse.

Move the cursor in a circle until it is touching the start of the angle (one of the lines). Place protractor's center at a vertex of the angle. The following image shows the first line in the angle (from the vertex out along to the red square). 2. ). aligned to the Select the "Protractor Tool" ( red/green plane and with its center point fixed to the cursor. The cursor will change to a protractor. 3. 2008
.
5.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating Angled Guide Lines
Angled guide lines are useful to draw angled geometry such as a roof slope. Press and release the "Ctrl" (Microsoft Windows) or "Option" (Mac OS X) key.
Page 242
Copyright Google Inc. The following image shows the protractor being placed at the angle's vertex.
4. 6. Click to set the vertex of the angle you will measure. To create an angled guide line: 1.
Click to set the start of the angle.

The angle will snap to these tick marks when the cursor is close to the protractor while moving around the protractor. on its edge. Notice that the protractor has marks.
Click to create the guide line. angle will move in more precise (smaller) increments when your cursor is farther from the center of the protractor while moving around the protractor. Conversely. indicating 15 degree increments. The following image shows a guide line created at a 45 degree angle so that a profile of a roof can be drawn. Note .
Page 243
Copyright Google Inc.Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over. 2008
.
8.
Move the cursor in a circle until the guide line is at the desired angle.Google SketchUp 7 Help
7.

Page 244
Copyright Google Inc. to lock the operation to that orientation. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Locking the Protractor Tool to its Current Orientation
Press and hold the "Shift" key. before you click on an entity.

The following image shows the first line in the angle (from the vertex out along to the red square). angle will move in more precise (smaller) increments when your cursor is farther from the center of the protractor while moving around the protractor. The angle will snap to these tick marks when the cursor is close to the protractor while moving around the protractor. such as for a woodworking project. To measure and an angle: 1.
Click to set the start of the angle.
Move the cursor in a circle until it is touching the start of the angle (one of the lines).
4. Click to set the vertex of the angle you will measure. Conversely.
5. Notice that the protractor has marks. 3. on its edge. Note . indicating 15 degree increments. 2.
Page 245
Copyright Google Inc. aligned to the Select the "Protractor Tool" ( red/green plane and with its center point fixed to the cursor. Move the cursor in a circle until it is touching the end of the angle (other line). ).Google SketchUp 7 Help
Measuring an Angle
Measure an angle when you want to duplicate that angle elsewhere in your model or create plans. Place protractor's center at a vertex of the angle (where two lines meet). The cursor will change to a protractor. The following image shows the protractor being placed at the angle's vertex. 2008
. 6.Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over.

such as 1:6. The angle's measurement will appear in the Measurements Toolbar.1. and pressing "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or """Return" (Mac OS X). The angle measures 120 degrees. 2008
. The value can either be in decimal degrees. or slope. This value can be changed any number of times before proceeding to the next command.Set the angle manually by entering a value in the Measurements Toolbar. such as 34.
Note .
Page 246
Copyright Google Inc.
Click to measure angle.Google SketchUp 7 Help
7. The value displayed in the Measurements Toolbar is referred to as the angular rotation value. The following image shows the second line in the angle (from the vertex out along to the red square).

Entering a Slope Value
To specify a new angle as a slope. Note .
Entering an Angular Rotation Value
To specify an exact angle in degrees. For example. You can specify an exact angular value either during or immediately after your rotation operation. You can specify an exact angular value either during or immediately after your rotation operation. type a decimal value into the Measurements Toolbar while rotating the cursor around the protractor.1" will give you an exact 34. type in the two values separated by a colon in the Measurements Toolbar. You can also manually enter in angular rotation or slope values directly into the Measurements Toolbar while measuring an angle and setting a guide line.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating Precise Angles
The degree of rotation you have indicated appears in angular degrees in the Measurements Toolbar while creating guide lines using the Protractor Tool. 2008
. such as 8:12.SketchUp can handle up to 0.1 degree angle.1 of a degree of angular precision. Negative values will move angle in a counterclockwise direction. Negative values will move angle in a counter-clockwise direction. typing in "34.
Page 247
Copyright Google Inc.

Click again to accept the direction. The cursor changes to a collection of axes. Move your cursor away from the origin to set the direction of the green axis. Note .
3. Select the "Axes Tool" ( ). 5. You will see the axes snap to inferred alignments and points as you move near them around your model.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Moving the Drawing Axes
To move the Drawing Axes: 1. Note . Use the inference tool tips to make sure you are aligned precisely.
Page 248
Copyright Google Inc.
Move your cursor to a point in your model that you want to be the new origin. 2. 4. Use inference tool tips again to make sure you are aligned precisely.Moving the drawing axes does not change the true ground plane for shadows and ground/sky display. Click to accept the direction. The blue axis will appear perpendicular to the new red/green plane.
You have moved your axes. Move cursor away from the origin to set the direction for the red axis. Click to establish the origin. Use the inference tool tips to make sure your cursor is located exactly where you want it to be.Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over. 2008
.
7. 6.

Page 249
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Resetting the Drawing Axes
Context-click on the drawing axes and select "Reset" from the context menu to restore the axes to the default position. 2008
.

Move the cursor to pull a dimension string out from the model. 3. Activate the "Dimension Tool" ( Click on a Circle entity. 4. 2. 2008
. ). The cursor changes to an arrow.
Page 250
Copyright Google Inc. Click the mouse again time to fix the position of the dimension string.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Placing Diameter Dimensions
To place a diameter dimension on a Circle entity: 1.

4. intersections. and arc and circle centers. Edges and points can be used to take dimensions.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Placing Linear Dimensions
Dimensions in SketchUp are based on a 3D model. Dimension leaders can be adjusted to span between non-linear points in a model so that your dimensions are as useful as possible in 3D. To take a dimension between two points in your model: 1. Move the cursor perpendicular to create a dimension string. Click the mouse to fix the position of the dimension string. 2008
. on edge points.You can take a dimension of a single line simply by clicking on the line and moving the cursor. Suitable points include: end points. The cursor changes to an arrow. 5.
Click on the endpoint of your dimension.
Click at starting point of your dimension. 6.Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over. Select the "Dimension Tool" ( ). midpoints. Move the cursor toward the endpoint of your dimension.
Page 251
Copyright Google Inc.
Note . 3. Tip . 2.

Radius and Diameter dimensions are limited to the plane defined by the arc or circle.Type "\n" followed by a space to start a new line of text (Microsoft Windows) The appearance of all Dimensions are set and controlled from the Dimension panel of the Model Info dialog box. These include the current axial planes (red/green. to position the dimension to the proper plane. as you dimension. red/blue.
Page 252
Copyright Google Inc.You might need to occasionally rotate your model. 2008
. it can only be moved within that plane. Once a dimension is taken and placed within a plane.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Tip . Tip . red/green) or the plane aligned to the edge you are measuring. These settings affect all dimensions already in the model.
Dimension Plane
You can take dimensions in one of several planes.

4. The cursor changes to an arrow. 3. 2. ). Activate the "Dimension Tool" ( Click on an Arc entity. Click the mouse again to fix the position the dimension string. Move the cursor to pull a dimension string out from the model.
Page 253
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Placing Radius Dimensions
To place a radius dimension on an Arc entity: 1.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Configuring Text Settings
Text entities are created using the settings found in the Text panel of the Model Info dialog box. Note .Text entities can have different attributes (font.
Page 255
Copyright Google Inc. Refer to the Text entity topic for further information. and so on) while dimension settings are global. size. 2008
.

2008
. to edit the text.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Editing Text
Double-click on text. with the Text Tool or Select Tool active.
Page 256
Copyright Google Inc. You can also context-click on a Text entity and select the "Edit Text" menu item from the Text entity's context menu.

without leader.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Attaching Text Directly to a Face
Double-click on a face with the Text Tool to attach text. to the face.
Page 257
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.

Click to position the text. such as the name of a component (if the ending point of the leader line is attached to a component).
Note .
5. 4. (optional) Enter text in the text box. Move the cursor to position the text. or the square footage of a square (if the ending point of the leader line is attached to the face of a square). The leader line will grow and shrink as you move the cursor around the screen. 6. 2008
. 2. A text entry box appears with default text.
(optional) Click in text box.
Page 258
Copyright Google Inc. Select the "Text Tool" ( ). 3.
Click on any entity to indicate the ending point of the leader line (the location where the leader should point).Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating and Placing Leader Text
Leader Text contains characters and a leader line that points (refers) to an entity.Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over. To create and place leader text: 1. The cursor changes to an arrow with a text prompt.

and rotates with your model as you change your view. A Pushpin leader is aligned in 3D space. or press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key twice. to display the area of the face as a Text entity.There are two styles of leaders: View Based and Pushpin.Google SketchUp 7 Help
7. Note . A View Based leader will always retain its 2D screen orientation.Type "\n" followed by a space to start a new line of text (Microsoft Windows)
Page 259
Copyright Google Inc.Press the Esc at any time to cancel creation of the Text entity. Tip . to complete text entry.Double-click on any face. Tip . while in the Text Tool. You can specify which type of leader is used from the Text panel of the Model Info dialog box.
Click outside of the text box. Tip . 2008
.

to complete text entry. To create and place screen text: 1. Select the "Text Tool" ( ). 4.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating and Placing Screen Text
Screen Text contains characters and is not associated with an entity and is fixed to the screen regardless of how you manipulate or orbit the model.Type "\n" followed by a space to start a new line of text (Microsoft Windows)
Page 260
Copyright Google Inc. Screen text will stay fixed on the screen regardless of how you manipulate and orbit the model. The cursor changes to an arrow with a text prompt. A text entry box appears.
Tip . 2. 2008
. or press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key twice. Click outside of the text box.
Move your mouse to a blank area on the screen where you want the screen text to appear. Click to position the text. 3. Enter text in the text entry box. 5.

Move the 3D text to the desired location. 3.Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over. Note . 2008
. See The 3D Text Dialog Box for further information. ). The 3D Text dialog box appears. 5. 4. You are placed in a move operation with the 3D text and the Move Tool. Click on the "Place" button. (optional) Modify settings in the Place 3D Text dialog box. Select the "3D Text Tool" ( Type text in the text field. 2. To create 3D text: 1.
Page 261
Copyright Google Inc. Refer to the Move Tool for further information.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating 3D Text
3D text is text that has been extruded (push/pulled).

Align
Select Left. or right respectively. from the drop-down list to align two or more lines text to the left. respectively. Center.
Page 262
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Place 3D Text Dialog Box
Use the options in the Place 3D Text dialog box to enter and configure 3D text. Uncheck the Extruded checkbox to create 2D text. in the Height text entry box.The Filled checkbox must be checked to create 3D text.
Filled
The 3D Text dialog box allows you to create 2D text with just outlines (edges) or faces.The extruded checkbox must be checked to create 3D text. Check the Filled checkbox to create faces for 3D text. Select Regular or Bold from the dropdown menu to create regular (non-bold) or bold text. or Right.
Extruded
Check the Extruded checkbox to create extruded (push/pull) 3D text. 2008
. or 3D extruded text. center.
Height
Type the height.
Font
Select a Font from the drop-down list to change font. Note . Uncheck the Filled checkbox to create 2D text outlines (just edges). in current units. Note .

in conjunction with Paraline mode. Use this command.
Page 263
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. to quickly generate sectional elevation or 1-point perspective views of your model.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Aligning Your View
Use the "Align View" command from the Section Plane Context menu to re-orient the model view to a view perpendicular to the section plane.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Animating Section Cut Effects
SketchUp allows you to animate section cut effects such that transitions are automatically inserted when you move between active section cuts. 3. 6. The section cut effect is displayed. Create two or more scenes Activate one section cut in the first scene. The section cut effect is displayed. To animate a section cut effect: 1. The scene context menu is displayed. 2008
. 2. Select the play animation menu item. Context-click on the first scene.
Page 264
Copyright Google Inc. SketchUp will cycle through each scene transitioning seamlessly between section cut effects. 5. 4. Add two or more section slices to your model. Activate the second section cut in the second scene.

Instead.A section plane will not work on a selection set (you cannot preselect only those items you want to slice).
Page 265
Copyright Google Inc. Note . Select the "Section Plane Tool" ( plane. therefore. Click on a face to create a Section Plane entity and resulting section cut effect.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating Section Cut Effects
To add a section plane entity: 1. the section plane will create a section slice in all entities in the current context and. the slice will expand to cover all entities in the context.Press the "Esc" key at any point during the operation to start over. 2. ). The cursor changes to a pointer with a section
Note . 2008
.

context-click on a Section Plane entity. are generated (wherever the section plane intersects with faces). making the edges merge with the geometry from which they were generated. encapsulated within a group. new edges.
Page 266
Copyright Google Inc. then select "Create Group from Slice" from the context menu. This technique allows you to quickly make slices through any complex shape. 2008
. or it may be immediately exploded.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating Grouped Section Slices
To create grouped section slices. This group may be moved off to the side as a section outline.

Section Slice
SketchUp can also export section slices using the Section Slice export feature.
Page 267
Copyright Google Inc. Section planes and section cuts will appear in the exported file depending on the visibility of the section plane and section cut.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Exporting Sections
SketchUp allows you to export section cut effects (your model with a section slice) and section slices. 2008
.
Exporting Models with Section Cut Effects
Exporting models with section cut effects is the equivalent of exporting any model as a bitmap image file. 2D vector sections can be accurately scaled and measured similarly to other 2D vector exports.

Changing the Active Section Plane
Newly placed section planes are active until another entity. Additional methods for manipulating section planes follow. Therefore a section plane within a group or component can be active at the same time. 2008
. because they are in separate contexts. and can have four active sections at once. as a section plane outside of any group or component.One section plane can be active for each context in your model. There are two ways to activate a section plane: double-click on the section plane while in the Select Tool or context-click on the section plane and select "Activate" from the context menu. is selected. and one context each for the groups contained within the top-level group). such as another section plane. A model that has a group that also contains two other groups has four different contexts (one context outside of any group.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Manipulating Section Planes
You can use the Move Tool and Rotate Tool to reposition section planes just as you reposition other entities. Note .
Reverse Cutting Direction
The direction of a section plane can be reversed by context-clicking on the section plane and selecting reverse from context menu.
Page 269
Copyright Google Inc. one context inside the top level group.

you must place additional section planes within a group or component to have simultaneous multiple section planes active.
Page 270
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Simultaneously Activating Multiple Section Planes
SketchUp only allows you to have one section plane active per context. 2008
. That means.

Page 271
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Using Sections with Scenes
Active Section Plane may be saved to a scene. 2008
. Section cut effects will animate during animations.

Camera Tools Context Menu
Context-clicking while using any camera tool launches the camera tools context menu. These tools include the Orbit Tool.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Camera Tools
This section of the user's guide covers the camera tools within SketchUp. 2008
. This menu enables you to switch between camera tools. Pan Tool.
Page 272
Copyright Google Inc. Camera tools are those tools used to manipulate your point of view of the model. Tools in this section are covered in the order they appear within the Camera menu. and Zoom Tool.

2008
.)
Page 273
Copyright Google Inc. Finally. (Remember that true Isometric views require Paraline mode. Use the "Orbit" Tool to orient the camera approximately where you want the view to be to change to a different Isometric view.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Using the Isometric (Iso) View
SketchUp will move your view to the true Isometric view closest to your current view angle when you activate the Isometric View. activate the Isometric view to lock into an actual Isometric view.

but cannot create a true plan or isometric drawing unless SketchUp is in Paraline mode.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Printing Standard Views in Perspective Mode
Traditional rules of perspective apply when you are in Perspective mode and want to print or export your model as a 2D vector drawing. 2008
. For example. the Top and Isometric views will reorient your view in a similar way.
Page 274
Copyright Google Inc. Note .You are in a perspective projection when the Perspective menu item in the Camera menu item has a checkmark. (the output will not be to scale as it is in the SketchUp drawing area).

to create a 3D model that matches a photo (or to match an existing SketchUp model to a scale in a photo).
4. You can also set the scale of the actual building or structure while matching.. or just resize the entire model after it has been drawn. digital pictures are not at a 1:1 scale. Therefore. Matching involves loading a digital picture and calibrating SketchUp's camera to the position and focal length of the camera used to take the actual photo (you are setting up the exact criteria used to take your picture so you can draw on the picture). SketchUp allows you to create these designs using the actual real-world scale (a scale of 1:1 where a unit of measurement in SketchUp represents that actual unit of measurement in the real world). Start sketching. 2. SketchUp is commonly used to create designs of buildings or structures. you must calibrate SketchUp's camera to match the position and focal length of the digital camera used to take the picture. you can draw over the image in SketchUp.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Match New Photo
Use the Match New Photo and Edit Matched Photo menu items to create a 3D model to match a photo or to match an existing 3D model to a photo's context. SketchUp moves into a 2D sketching mode from matching (it is 2D because you are drawing on a 2D photo that needs to be oriented at a specific camera angle to you). 2008
. Once you have duplicated the position and focal length of the camera used to take the picture. However.
High-Level Steps for Using Photo Match
Photo matching consists of 4 high-level steps: 1. Activate the Match New Photo and Edit Matched Photo menu items from the Camera menu. Start matching. Take digital pictures of a building or structure. Repeat Step 2 and 3 with any other photos that make up the building or structure. See Taking Digital Photos for Use When Matching for further information.
Page 275
Copyright Google Inc.
3.

and floor of a room meet at a corner. Navigate to the first photo in the series of photos for your building or structure. To create a 3D model to match a real-world building or structure: 1. such as the top and bottom of a square window. Move the cursor to a distinct origin-like point on photo (where three axes might intersect. 7. 15. Select the "Camera > Match New Photo. such as bottom corner of building). The photo is selected.
6. Move the cursor to the ending point of a position on the photo representing a line parallel to the red axis. and floor meet. Move the cursor to the starting point of a position on the photo representing a line parallel to the red axis. Click on the first photo in the series of photos for your building or structure. 5. the origin would be at the top corner of the building where roof and walls meet. Context-click to invoke the matching context-menu. The first axis bar is aligned to the red axis. See "Taking Digital Photos for Use When Matching" for further information. The origin is established. 14. the origin would be the bottom corner where the walls and ground meet. For photos that are taken from a vantage point where you are looking down on the b uilding or structure. Finally. Click on the other red axis bar grip. 11. 13. The photo will appear in the drawing area on its own scene in SketchUp. 9. Click on a red axis bar grip. The cursor changes to a hand. You are also placed in a matching mode where you will calibrate SketchUp's camera to duplicate the position and focal length of the camera used to take the actual photo .
•
• 8. Refer to Matching Controls and ContextMenu Items for further information. Take digital pictures of the building or structure. Release the mouse button. 4.
Release the mouse button. The cursor changes to a hand. The words "Match Photo" appear in the upper-left of the drawing area. 12. The cursor changes to a hand. 2. 16.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating a 3D Model to Match a Photo
Use the matching process to create a 3D model to match one or more photos of a building or structure. For photos that are taken from a vantage point where you are standing on the ground. The origin you use depends on the photo: • For photos that are usually taken indoors where walls. the Match Photo dialog box appears. Click the "Open" button.
Page 276
Copyright Google Inc. ceiling.
10. the origin is usually at the bottom corner where the walls. ceiling. Repeat steps 9 through 14 for the remaining three (one red and two green) axis bars. 3. 2008
. Click and hold the cursor on the origin. Release the mouse button. This process is best suited for making models of images that have parallel lines." The Select background image file dialog box is displayed.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
17. Caution . is a 2D drawing mode. Repeat steps 2-12 with other sides (photos) of the building until building or structure is done. Position Camera Tool.Tools that manipulate your point of view force you out of Sketch-Over-Image mode into normal SketchUp drawing mode. These POV tools are the Orbit Tool. The words "Sketch Over" appear in the upperleft of the drawing area. 2008
. unlike normal SketchUp drawing mode. 19. and Look Around Tool. 18. Refer to Sketch-Over-Image Controls and Context-Menu Items for further information. This mode. Sketch on photo using the SketchUp drawing tools. Walk Tool. Select "Done." You are placed in a sketching mode.
Page 277
Copyright Google Inc.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Matching an Existing 3D Model to a Photo's Context
Use the matching process to match an existing 3D model to a photo's context." The photo will appear in the drawing area on its own scene in SketchUp. 11. Click on the other red axis bar grip. The photo will appear in the drawing area on its own scene in SketchUp. 7. 19." The Open dialog box appears. The origin is established. Repeat steps 9 through 14 for the remaining three (one red and two green) axis bars. The photo is selected. 13.
Page 278
Copyright Google Inc. 5. Click on the photo. Take a digital picture of the location where you will place your building. To match an existing 3D model to a photo's context: 1. The cursor will change to two opposing arrows. 9. 14. Click on an red axis bar grip. 15. the Match Photo dialog box appears. 16. 18. Release the mouse button." The Select background image file dialog box is displayed. 20.
10. The cursor changes to a hand. Release the mouse button. 3. 6. 12. Click and hold on any of the axes. Check the "Model" checkbox in the Match Photo dialog box. oriented correctly to the photo (but likely not-to-scale with the photo). Select the model. The cursor changes to a hand. 4. Select "File > Open. 8. 22. Refer to Matching Controls and ContextMenu Items for further information. 17. Release the mouse button. Click "Open. The model will be hidden. Uncheck the "Model" checkbox in the Match Photo dialog box. Finally. 2008
. Select "Camera > Match New Photo. Move the cursor to the ending point of a position on the photo representing a line parallel to the red axis. Move the cursor to a distinct origin-like point on photo (where three axes might intersect. Move the cursor to the starting point of a position on the photo representing a line parallel to the red axis. Click and hold the cursor on the origin. The model will reappear. The words "Match Photo" appear in the upper-left of the drawing area. Click "Open. The first axis bar is aligned to the red axis. You are also placed in a matching mode where you will calibrate SketchUp's camera to duplicate the position and focal length of the camera used to take the actual photo . 21. Navigate to your model." The model appears in the drawing area. Navigate to the photo where you want to place your building or structure. This photo might or might not have an existing building where the model will be located. 2. such as bottom corner of building). The cursor changes to a hand.

Your model will scale to fit the photo.
Page 279
Copyright Google Inc. Position Camera Tool. 24. unlike normal SketchUp drawing mode. Select "Done.Google SketchUp 7 Help
23. 25. Context-click to invoke the matching context-menu. Walk Tool. 2008
. These POV tools are the Orbit Tool. 26." You are placed in a sketch-over-image mode. click the "Project textures" from photo button in the Match Photo dialog box to project. See SketchOver-Image Controls and Context-Menu Items for further information. The words "Sketch Over" appear in the upper-left of the drawing area. and Look Around Tool. This mode. Caution . Move the cursor up or down the axis to scale your model. is a 2D drawing mode. (optional) If your photo contains an existing building that is now represented by your model.Tools that manipulate your point of view force you out of Sketch-Over-Image mode into normal SketchUp drawing mode.

or specialized camera are not supported. will be difficult to align because you only adjust one vanishing point and the other two are far away. 2008
. typically. Stitched images (for example panoramic images). For example. If there are trees and other foreground objects blocking the view of the building.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Taking Digital Photos for Use When Matching
Your success with matching depends highly on the quality of photographs taken of your building or structure. an image which is looking down a hall way. Ultimately. some cameras used for architectural photographs adjust for vertical perspective distortion. A cropped image. A one point perspective. typically worse around the edges of the image.
•
•
•
• •
•
•
Page 280
Copyright Google Inc. The more right angled reference lines in the original image. Cropped (or expanded) images. This makes for large model sizes. Non right angle models. All cameras have a little bit of this distortion. we assume that perfectly straight lines in the original object are shown as perfectly straight lines in the photograph. it may be difficult to Sketch Over top of the image. There is also no resolution control over the export process and this may be a problem when exporting to GE (for example). Barrel distortion typically comes from wide angle lens cameras. Likewise. Sketch Over Image will also struggle with: Vanishing points which are at infinity. Images are currently embedded within the skp file and duplicated when made into a material. The images should not be distorted and should be of a “reasonable” resolution. and we have a simple tool for compensating for this visually. • • • Sketch Over Image works best on pictures of structures composed of predominantly right angles and taken at a roughly a 45 degree angle from a corner. an image taken with a very long tele-photo lens (or say a satellite or aerial image) will not have very useful vanishing points and will be difficult to align. or one which has been expanded to have extra white space around it. Excessive foreground. for example. Warped images. There are many other kinds of subtle lens distortions which I won't go into. Following are a few tips regarding matching photographs. by tilting the camera plane. the better results you will get. vertical lines will not align well across the image and the results will be unsatisfactory. This happens in two common situations. Sketch Over Image relies on SketchUp's red/green/blue axes and limits most drawing to the axis planes. The resulting photo is an image similar to our “Two Point Perspective” mode. Extremely high resolution images. will not have the ‘center of projection’ in the center of the image. Images which have been manually warped via an image processing program. These images are typically excessively warped and will have multiple vanishing points for each axis. Although it may seem possible to use an image like this. Sketch Over Image currently requires that the point you aimed the camera at is located in the center of the image. and users should use a third party product to eliminate it from images prior to using them within SketchUp.

2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Resuming a Sketch-Over-Image Mode
Click on the scene tab that represents the photo to return to sketching over the image.
Page 281
Copyright Google Inc.

These options are: • • Select the photo you were matching from the Camera > Edit Matched Photo sub-menu. Context-click on the Scene tab for the photo you were matching and select "Edit Matched Photo. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Editing a Previously Matched Photo
There are two options to resume matching."
Page 282
Copyright Google Inc.

A dialog box appears asking if you want to delete the scene." The Scenes Manager is displayed. 2. 4. 2008
. Select the "Window > Scenes.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Deleting a Matched Photo
To delete a matched photo: 1. Click the "Yes" button.
Page 283
Copyright Google Inc. The scene and its matched photo are removed. Click on the scene with the same name of the matched photo. Click on the "Remove Scene" button. 3. The photo is selected.

2008
.
Page 284
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Suspending the Gravity Setting (Microsoft Windows)
The Orbit Tool is designed to maintain a sense of gravity by keeping vertical edges pointed up and down. Press and hold the "Ctrl" key during orbit to suspend this gravity setting and to roll the camera on its side.

2008
.
Page 285
Copyright Google Inc.You will also be put in pan temporarily if you click on the middlemouse wheel and then click and hold the left mouse button or press and hold the "Shift" key. SketchUp contains a few mouse enhancements and modifier keys to allow easy access to the Orbit Tool. Tip .Click and hold the Control and Command keys simultaneously while clicking and holding the left mouse button to temporarily activate the Orbit Tool (if you have only one mouse button) (Microsoft Windows). Tip .
Activating the Orbit Tool While in Another Tool
Click and hold middle mouse button (scroll wheel) on a three-button mouse to temporarily activate the Orbit Tool while in any other tool (except the Walk Tool).Google SketchUp 7 Help
Orbiting With a Three Button Mouse
The Orbit Tool is used heavily when creating and editing models.

Select the "Orbit Tool" ( ovals. 3. The cursor changes to two interconnected perpendicular
Click anywhere in the drawing area. To orbit using the Orbit Tool: 1. Move your cursor in any direction to rotate around the center of the drawing area.
Page 286
Copyright Google Inc.Double-click the left mouse button on your model to center to the model in the drawing area. Tip .Google SketchUp 7 Help
Orbiting the View
The Orbit Tool performs a 3D orbit. 2. ). 2008
.

" and "Shift" keys simultaneously while clicking and holding the left mouse button to temporarily activate the Pan Tool (if you have only one mouse button). 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Panning While in Other Tools (1-Button Mouse)
Click and hold the "Control." "Command.
Page 287
Copyright Google Inc.

Page 288
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Panning While in the Orbit Tool (3-Button Mouse)
Press and hold the "Shift" key while in the Orbit Tool to temporarily activate the Pan Tool. 2008
. Or. press and hold the left mouse button while pressing and holding the middle mouse button (scroll wheel) to activate the Pan Tool.

2008
.
Page 289
Copyright Google Inc. Move the cursor in any direction to pan. 3. 2.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Panning the View
The Pan Tool performs a pan operation.
Click anywhere in the drawing area. The cursor changes to a hand. To pan using the Pan Tool: 1. Select the "Pan Tool" ( ).

Page 290
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Centering the Point of View
Double-click the left mouse button on your model to center the model in the drawing area. 2008
.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Changing Focal Length With the Zoom Tool
Focal length. To change the focal length: 1." The value appears in the Measurements Toolbar and the focal length changes to 300mm.
Page 291
Copyright Google Inc.
Type a focal length in millimeters. Note . 2.Focal length can range from 10 to 2063 millimeters. A shorter focal length allows you to see a larger (wide) portion of a model. 2008
. affects the amount you can see of a model. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass. expressed in millimeters. while a longer focal length allows you to see a smaller portion of a model. such as "300mm. Select the "Zoom Tool" ( ).

focal lengths yield a smaller field of view.
Precisely Changing Field of View and Focal Length
You can precisely change field of view by typing a value (from 1. 2. The field of view decreases when the cursor goes down (focal length increases). refers to the amount you can see of a model or scene.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Changing Field of View and Focal Length
Field of view. You must be in perspective mode (Camera > Perspective) to change field of view and focal length. The field of view increases when the cursor goes up. 2008
. while a wider field of view allows you to see more of a scene. Note . expressed in degrees. The field of view increases when the cursor goes up (focal length decreases). For example.As you increase or decrease the field of view beyond the normal setting of 35 degrees. the perspective angles will look increasingly distorted. followed by "mm" in the Measurements Toolbar. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass. to change the focal length to 30." The cursor changes to a magnifying glass.
Changing Field of View Using the Zoom Tool
The Zoom Tool simulates what is known as a dolly in movie-making terms. Select "Camera > Field of View. Short or wide angle focal lengths yield a greater field of view. 2. Note . the focal point moves off into infinity and you lose perspective (as if perspective mode is turned off). followed by "deg. Click and hold the mouse button while moving the cursor up or down. the other decreases).The Measurements Toolbar will display field of view in degrees when using the Zoom Tool in the field of view mode." in the Measurements Toolbar.0 to 120. Select the" Zoom Tool" ( )." You can precisely change the focal length by typing a value (10 to 2063). refers to a camera lens size. picture yourself standing on a moving platform looking into a camera. To change field of view using the Zoom Tool: 1.00) ."
Page 292
Copyright Google Inc. while the platform moves closer to or farther from the model. the focal point is very short and perspective angles become overly pronounced. A narrow field of view only allows you to see a small portion of a scene. Focal length. As you approach 120 degrees. expressed in millimeters. or telephoto. For example. type "110deg.
Changing Field of View Using the Field of View Tool
To change field of view using the Field of View Tool: 1. Wider fields of view are useful when working inside a room where you might want to see more of the room while you draw. when you zoom in on your model. The field of view decreases when the cursor goes down.
Hold the shift key and click and hold the mouse button while moving the cursor up or down. type "30mm. while longer. That is. to change the focal length to 110. which is the maximum field of view. As you approach zero. Field of view and focal length are inversely related (when you increase one.

Remember. For example. 2008
.
Page 293
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Adjusting Perspective (Field of View)
Adjust the screen to an exact perspective or camera lens by typing an exact value in the Measurements Toolbar while the Zoom Tool is active. "45 deg" sets a 45 degree field of view and "35 mm" sets the equivalent focal length of a 35mm camera. changing the FOV keeps the camera in the same location in 3D space. Press and hold the "Shift" key while in the Zoom Tool to visually adjust the camera lens or field of view.

Rolling the wheel backward on a scroll wheel mouse zooms out from your model.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Zooming With a Scroll Wheel Mouse
Rolling wheel forward on a scroll wheel mouse zooms in on your model.
Page 294
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. Note .The cursor position determines the center of zoom when using the scroll wheel whereas the center of the screen determines the center of zoom when zooming using the left mouse button.

Page 295
Copyright Google Inc. when you zoom in on your model. 2. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass with a plus and
Click and hold anywhere in the drawing area. Select the "Zoom Tool" ( minus sign. picture yourself standing on a moving platform looking into a camera. To zoom in and out using the Zoom Tool: 1.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Zooming In and Zooming Out of Your Model
The Zoom Tool simulates what is known as a dolly in movie-making terms. while the platform moves closer to or farther from the model. Drag the cursor up to zoom in (closer to the model) and down to zoom out (farther from the model). ). 3. That is. 2008
.

2008
. 4. 2. The Zoom Window Tool will then zoom in on the content within the zoom window. ). To zoom in on a portion of your model: 1. 3. Release the mouse button when all of the entities are enclosed within the zoom window. Move cursor diagonally.
Page 296
Copyright Google Inc. Select the "Zoom Window Tool" ( small square.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Zooming in on a Portion of Your Model
The Zoom Window Tool allows you to draw a rectangular zoom window around a portion of your model. These entities will fill the screen. This is the zoom window starting point. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass with
Click and hold a short distance away from the entities you want to appear in the zoom window.

2008
. Walkthrough tools are those tools used to view your model as through walking around and in your model. Tools in this section are covered in the order they appear within the Camera menu.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Walkthrough Tools
This section of the user's guide covers the walkthrough tools within SketchUp. These tools are the Position Camera Tool.
Page 297
Copyright Google Inc. Look Around Tool. and Walk Tool.

The camera will be positioned directly above this point (5' 6") facing the television set if you click at this point. Click on a point in your model. The cursor changes to a small person with a red Select the "Position Camera Tool" ( X. The following image shows a point in the middle of a room. You can override this height at this time by typing in a desired value. The first method places the camera at eye-level above a specific point (5' 6" above that point by default). facing a specific direction. you are placed in the Look Around Tool allowing you to move the camera around the point to look at items in your model.The viewing direction defaults to the top of screen.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Positioning the Camera
The camera is positioned using one of two methods.
Note . if you place the camera from a plan view. ). SketchUp places the camera's point of view at an average eye-height over the point you click on. 2008
. However. The camera does not point at anything in particular. The second method requires placing the camera at a specific point. 1. 6 inches.
Positioning the Camera at an Eye-Level View
The first position camera method allows you to position the camera at a specific eye-height above a specific point that you choose. Notice that the Measurements Toolbar indicates that the eye height above the ground plane is set to 5 feet.
Page 298
Copyright Google Inc.
2. which is due north. You are also placed in the Look Around Tool.

3.Use the Tape Measure Tool and the Measurements Toolbar to drag parallel construction lines off of edges as a method to provide accurate camera placements. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Positioning the Camera Using Specific Target Points
The second position camera method allows you to position the camera at a specific point. The following image shows a point in the middle of a room with a dotted line to the window on the left wall of the room. Tip . Drag the cursor to the portion of the model that you want to look at. facing a specific direction. 2.
Page 299
Copyright Google Inc. The camera will be positioned directly at the first point (at 0 height) facing up at the window if you release the mouse button on the window. 6 inches. The camera faces the item you dragged the cursor to in step 3. You can override this height at this time by typing in a desired value. The cursor changes to a small person with a red Select the "Position Camera Tool" ( X. Release the mouse button. A dotted line is extended from the point selected in step 2 to the portion of the model you want to look at. The camera is repositioned at a height of 0 at the point selected in step 2. Click and hold mouse button on a point in your model. ). Notice that the Measurements Toolbar indicates that the eye height above the ground plane is set to 5 feet. 1. 4.

Position the camera directly horizontal to the model to achieve a 2 Point Perspective.Google SketchUp 7 Help
5. Tip . 2008
.
Page 300
Copyright Google Inc. Tip .
(optional) Type a new eye height into the Measurements Toolbar to reposition the camera at eye height above the point selected in step 2.Hold the "Shift" key while clicking on a surface to position the camera directly on the surface.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Looking Around While in the Walk Tool
Click and hold the middle mouse button. while using the Walk Tool. 2008
.
Page 302
Copyright Google Inc. to use the Look Around Tool.

This option is useful when examining models such as mechanical devices or furniture (anything other than the interior of a building). 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Toggling Collision Detection
Press the "Alt" (Microsoft Windows) or "Command" (Mac OS X) key while walking around to temporarily turn off collision detection.
Page 303
Copyright Google Inc.

). You can override this height at this time by typing in a desired value.
Page 304
Copyright Google Inc. Press and hold the "Alt" key to avoid collision detection (walk through walls). and press and drag up and down to widen your field of view prior to walking through a model. Tip . left (to go left) or right (to go right) to walk through or around your model. down (backward). 2008
. Note . 3.It is often desirable to tour a model with a wide field of view.Press and hold the "Shift" key while moving the cursor up and down allows you to move up or down instead of forward or backward. The icon changes to a pair of shoes. A small plus sign (cross hair) is placed at the location where you clicked.
2. Press and hold the "Ctrl" (Microsoft Windows) or "Option" (Mac OS X) key to run instead of walk.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Touring Your Model
The Walk Tool is primarily used to take an interactive walk through or around your model. Notice that the Select the "Walk Tool" ( Measurements Toolbar indicates that the eye height above the ground plane is set to 2 feet. 10 1/2 inches. press and hold the "Shift" key. Activate the Zoom Tool. The further you are from the cross hair. Click and hold anywhere in the drawing area. To use the Walk Tool to tour your model: 1. the faster you walk. Move the cursor up (forward).

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Activating the Look Around Tool While in the Walk Tool
Click the middle mouse button to activate the Look Around Tool while in the Walk Tool. 2008
.
Page 305
Copyright Google Inc.

2. The cursor changes to a pair of eyes. 3.
Page 306
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Looking Around
The Look Around Tool performs tilt and pan operations. Select the "Look Around Tool" ( Click to start pivot. To tilt and pan using the Look Around Tool: 1. ). right or left to pan. Move the cursor up or down to tilt. 2008
.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Specifying an Eye Height
Type the eye height for the camera in the Measurements Toolbar and press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return"(Mac OS X) key to change the height above the ground plane for the camera.
Page 307
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.

Sandbox tools are those tools used to create and manipulate large surfaces (TINs) in your models.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Sandbox Tools
This section of the user's guide covers the sandbox tools within SketchUp. Stamp Tool. and Drape Tool. Sandbox From Contours Tool. they can also be used to model other organic shapes such as the curved portions of a hand-built wooden chair or a wooden bowl. 2008
. These tools include the Sandbox From Scratch Tool. Smoove Tool.
Page 308
Copyright Google Inc. Organic shapes are those that have a hand-made or custom appearance. Tools in this section are covered in the order they appear within the Draw > Sandbox and Tools > Sandbox sub-menus.
Sandbox tools are not just for modeling terrain.

Select all of your contour lines.
Page 310
Copyright Google Inc. 3.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating a Sandbox From Contour Lines
To create a sandbox from contour lines: 1. Ensure that the contour lines are offset in their height from the ground plane. 2008
. Import or draw several contour lines." Terrain will be filled in using the contour lines as a guide. Select "Draw > Sandbox > From Contours. 2.

4. The length value is displayed dynamically in the Measurements Toolbar.
Note .The terrain will be placed inside of a Group entity.The Sandbox from Scratch Tool defaults to 10' square grid sizes.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating a New TIN
To create a new TIN: 1. The cursor changes to a pencil with a grid. The following image shows the flat TIN created with the Sandbox From Scratch Tool. Click a third time to establish the width of your TIN.You can optionally enter a value in the Measurements Toolbar for the size of each square in your grid at this time (Grid Spacing). Tip . 5.
Page 311
Copyright Google Inc. 6. 3. You might want to zoom out or change the grid size (Grid Spacing) in the Measurements Toolbar to before creating your sandbox. such as smoothing with the Smoove Tool. 2008
. You must edit or explode the group to perform other operations. 2. Click to set the starting point of your TIN. Move the mouse in the direction you want to be the length of the TIN. As you move your mouse a line appears with tick marks at a specific spacing. on the TIN. Click a second time to establish the length of your TIN. Select the "Sandbox From Scratch Tool" ( ).
Note . Drag the mouse perpendicular to the length line to establish the width of your TIN.

These lines and points show precise alignment between the line you are drawing and the geometry of your model. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing a Flat TIN by Inference
The Sandbox From Scratch Tool uses SketchUp's sophisticated geometric inference engine to help you place your terrain in 3D space.
Page 312
Copyright Google Inc. are displayed in the drawing area as inference lines and inference points. The inference decisions. Refer to the inference engine topic for additional information. made by the inference engine.

regardless the model units setting. regardless the model units setting.652m) units at any time. You can also specify a line length and width value using the Measurements Toolbar.
Page 313
Copyright Google Inc.
Entering a Width Value
Specify a width and width in the Measurements Toolbar by typing in the desired length after setting the length of the flat TIN. SketchUp will use the current document units setting if you only type in a numerical value. You can also specify either Imperial (1'6”) or Metric (3.
Entering a Length Value
Specify a length and width in the Measurements Toolbar by typing in the desired length after placing the starting point of the flat TIN.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating Precise TINs
The Measurements Toolbar displays the length and width of your TIN while you are drawing a flat TIN. 2008
.652m) units at any time. SketchUp will use the current document units setting if you only type in a numerical value. You can also specify either Imperial (1'6”) or Metric (3.

" using the Measurements Toolbar.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Specifying an Offset Value
The Measurements Toolbar also specifies an offset while you are sculpting. 2008
. You can also specify an offset value.
Page 314
Copyright Google Inc. such as "10'.

or face within the TIN. The following image shows a flat terrain created with the Sandbox From Scratch Tool. such as with the Sandbox From Scratch Tool.
Page 315
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Sculpting a Terrain
To sculpt a terrain: 1. edges.Remember to ungroup a terrain created with the Sandbox From Scratch Tool prior to using the Smoove Tool.
Select the "Smoove Tool" (
). edge. or import a TIN.
Note . and faces and then click on the Smoove Tool to begin a smoove operation.
Tip . The following image shows the point that was selected (the largest square in the middle) and neighboring vertices. The cursor changes to an arrow. you can preselect a series of points. 2008
.Alternatively. 3.
2. Click on a point. Create. SketchUp highlights all neighboring vertices to be included in the sculpting operation within the radius specified in the Measurements Toolbar.

Move the mouse up or down in the vertical (blue) direction to sculpt the TIN. The following image shows the terrain resulting from moving the point and neighboring vertices up.Google SketchUp 7 Help
4.
Page 316
Copyright Google Inc. such as 10'. Smooth and soften the TIN to get your final model. 5. The TIN will expand or contract accordingly. You can also type offset value in the Measurements Toolbar. This operation can only be performed while in active selection (not after preselection). this operation can result in a non-functional terrain or terrain that can no longer be manipulated in a known way. However.
Note .Double-click to repeat the last smoove operation. 2008
. Tip .You can sculpt in a direction other than vertical by holding down the Shift key while moving the mouse.

Tip .Preselect a series of points. The larger the radius the more vertices included in the sculpt. 2008
. faces. and edges within your TIN to sculpt more specific shapes such as ridges and berms. such as "10'r." using the Measurements Toolbar.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Specifying Sculpting Radius Values
SketchUp determines the number of vertices included in the sculpting operation based on a radius value. You can also specify a radius value while sculpting. The Measurements Toolbar displays this radius while you are sculpting a TIN.
Page 317
Copyright Google Inc.

such as the terrain where a building might exist Create the faces to be used as the stamp. 9. 3.
Click on the stamp. Create your TIN. such as the bottom faces of the building. 6. SketchUp will create an offset around the stamp. or a component.The Stamp tool will not work on a group or component that is open for editing. The cursor changes to an arrow. 8. up or down. a group. Move the stamp over the location in the TIN where you want to create an impression. 5. Move the mouse to adjust the stamp within the TIN. Note . 4. selection set of faces. Smooth and soften the TIN to get your final model. Select the "Stamp Tool" ( ). and connected TIN. A copy of the stamp will be indented into the TIN.
Page 318
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.
10. 7.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating Impressions of Geometry in a TIN
To create an impression of geometry in a TIN: 1. Click on the TIN. 11.
Note . Click when you are done adjusting the stamp. The cursor will be on the copy of the stamp allowing you to move the stamp.The stamp can be an individual face. 2. (optionally) Adjust the offset size by typing in a new value in the Measurements Toolbar.

Paint the draped section without editing the group will paint the entire terrain instead of just a section of the terrain.
Page 319
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Painting Draped Terrain
Terrain is typically contained within a group. You must edit the group to paint individual sections of the terrain. 2008
.

Note . or import a terrain. such as with the Sandbox From Scratch Tool. Create the edges you want to drape over the TIN. 5. Tip .The draped edges will be outside of a group or component context if the TIN is encapsulated within a group or component.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Draping Edges Onto a TIN
To drape edges onto a TIN: 1. The following image shows a 2D road positioned above a terrain. 2008
. Create.The Drape Tool will only drape the edges surrounding a face if you attempt to drape a face or series of faces over the TIN. The following image shows the edges draped over the terrain.
Note . 4.This tool also works in active selection mode to select the drape edges if nothing is preselected. 2. The cursor changes to an arrow. Select the "Drape Tool" ( ). 3.
Page 320
Copyright Google Inc.
Click on the TIN to drape the selected edges on the TIN. Select the edges that you want to drape over the TIN. The edges can be in a single plane (flat) and must be positioned above a TIN.

This area of the model will appear very smooth when sculpted.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating Smooth Areas
You can preselect a series of triangles in your model using the Select Tool and then use the detailer to divide those triangles to create a smoother area. 2008
. The following image shows a flat TIN with a selection set that was detailed two times (creating several tiny triangles).
Page 321
Copyright Google Inc. using a tool such as the Smoove Tool.

Create a TIN.
Click on a point. The following image shows two additional triangles created when the midpoint of a line was selected. The following image shows a flat TIN or sandbox created with the Sandbox From Scratch Tool. SketchUp creates a new vertex where you clicked with new triangles spanning out from the new vertex.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Detailing a TIN
To detail a terrain: 1. edge. or face within the TIN.
Page 322
Copyright Google Inc. 3.
Select the "Add Detail Tool" (
).
2. The cursor changes to an arrow. 2008
.

or face within the terrain. edge.You can also type in an offset distance to adjust the height of the vertex after clicking on a point. Smooth and soften the TIN to get your final surface. The following image shows the resulting TIN when the new vertex was lifted. edges. 10' will raise the new vertex 10' above the starting terrain.You can sculpt in a direction other than vertical by holding down the Shift key while moving the mouse. this operation can result in non-functional terrain or terrain that can no longer be manipulated in a known way. For example.
Page 323
Copyright Google Inc. or on other portions of the TIN) to create additional triangles for manipulation. or faces (either on the TIN you created in step 3.
Move your mouse up or down to adjust the height of the vertex and surrounding triangles. However.Google SketchUp 7 Help
4. 5.
Note . Note . 6. Continue clicking on points. 2008
.

You can also specify an offset value. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Specifying an Offset Value
The Measurements Toolbar also specifies an offset while you are detailing a TIN.
Page 324
Copyright Google Inc." using the Measurements Toolbar. such as "10'.

Click on any edge to flip the edge to an opposite triangulation. 4. 2008
. 2.
Page 325
Copyright Google Inc. Create a TIN using a tool such as the Sandbox From Contours Tool. 3. Select the "Flip Edge Tool" ( ).
Move the mouse over the TIN to highlight edges that can be flipped. removes the selected edge.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Modifying TIN Triangulations
To modify TIN triangulations: 1. and replaces it with a perpendicular edge. SketchUp analyzes the two adjacent triangles that share the edge.

If a pair forms an angle that is less than the simplify angle. Depending on the complexity of the model.
Sandbox From Contours Tool
Simplify contours so that they have fewer lines and end points (when the complexity of the contours is not important for your overall model). The contours are highlighted. it can take SketchUp several minutes to several hours to calculate the geometry created by the Sandbox tools. when creating a sandbox from scratch. To use the Simplify Contours Ruby script: 1. 9. you'll interrupt the calculations. SketchUp may even appear to have stopped responding. Some Sandbox tools are capable of creating a lot of faces. script into your Plugin The Plugins folder on
C:\Program Files\Google\Google SketchUp 6\Plugins The Plugins folder on Mac OS X is at: <username>/Library/Application 6/SketchUp/Plugins 4. 5. Select all of the contours.sketchup. Once you have started a Sandbox operation. Place the Simplify Contours Microsoft Windows is at:s folder. Use the Simplify Contours script to reduce the number of line segments and endpoints. You can change the simplify angle when running the script.
Page 326
Copyright Google Inc. Download the Simplify Contours (www. The contours are simplified. they are merged into one segment. 3. Following are some tips for improving performance using the Sandbox tools. 6. 2008
. Restart Google SketchUp. 8. If you make any changes before that. Select the "Plugins > Simplify Contours. script from the SketchUp web site
Uncompress the Simplify Contours script to create a SimplifyContours. Open your model with the contoured terrain. This script evaluates each pair of segments in a contour. Click the "OK" button. by adjusting grid spacing to be larger.rb file.com/downloads). which defaults to 10 degrees. Support/Google SketchUp
Sandbox From Scratch Tool
Reduce grid complexity. 7." (optional) Set the Simplify Angle. while maintaining contours that are smooth enough for modeling. You can reduce the endpoints by 50% or more when using the 10 degree setting. you should not make any more changes to the model until after SketchUp has finished the operation. the slower SketchUp. 2.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Improving Sandbox Tool Performance
The more complex your model (the more faces). thus slowing performance. eliminating one endpoint.

Crop existing terrain to essential area needed for your model (removing all unneeded geometry). 2008
. Adjusting grid spacing to be larger if your existing terrain was created from scratch. Simplify your existing terrain to yield simpler results with these tools by: • • • Simplifying your contours if your existing terrain was created from contours.
The following image shows the additional polygons created when using the Stamp Tool on a complex terrain (rectangles that compose the house foundation):
The following image shows the additional polygons created when using the Stamp Tool on a simple terrain (rectangles that compose the house foundation):
Page 327
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Stamp and Drape Tool
The Stamp Tool and Drape Tool create additional faces from existing terrain.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
The following image shows the additional polygons created when using the Drape Tool on complex terrain (shaded below the house foundation):
The following image shows the additional polygons created when using the Drape Tool on a simple terrain (shaded below the house foundation):
Add Details Tool
Minimize use of this tool unless you truly need to add detail to your model because this tool adds additional faces to your terrain. 2008
.
Page 328
Copyright Google Inc.

Note . otherwise the empty gray boxes will appear in SketchUp as part of your style. that all sets in the Sets Pane. if all sets in the Sets Pane have 1 stroke. You can fill in the blanks by adding duplicate strokes as in the previous image where two of the same 32 pixel strokes were used. You can also drag and drop strokes from the Strokes tab.
The following image shows the Sets Pane after a second stroke has been added to the first set (the set whose stroke size is 32). each with a single stroke. Notice that all of the other sets (64. or blank strokes. So. in the remaining sets.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Adding Strokes to a Style
You can drag and drop strokes from the Strokes tab directly into empty grey boxes in the Sets Pane (if they exist). The following image shows the Sets Pane with four sets. must have the same number of strokes.
Page 329
Copyright Google Inc. 129. however. 2008
. This expansion is accomplished by adding empty grey boxes. and 256) have been expanded to accommodate the same number of strokes as the first set. the Style Builder will automatically create a blank stroke in the remaining sets to even out the sets.You will want to have the same number of strokes per set before you save your style. and you add another stroke to one of the sets. Keep in mind. above or below current strokes in the Sets Pane.

next to library of strokes in the Strokes tab.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Deleting Library of Strokes (Microsoft Windows)
Click on the "X" ( ).
Page 331
Copyright Google Inc. to remove the library. 2008
.

to replace the stroke with
Page 332
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Deleting Strokes
Click on the eraser icon ( an empty gray box. ) next to any stroke. 2008
. in the Sets Pane.

Items in this section are covered in the order they appear within the Google menu.
Page 333
Copyright Google Inc. such as Google Earth.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Google Toolbar
This section of the user's guide covers the Google Toolbar within SketchUp. 2008
. Buttons on the Google Toolbar are used to interact with other Google technologies.

Click on the Terrain check box toward the bottom middle of Google Earth to turn on terrain. These are as follows: • • • • Install Google Earth 3.640 or higher. Turn Elevation Exaggeration to 1 in Google Earth ("Tools > Options > View") Turn terrain on in Google Earth.0. Change your image resolution in Google Earth to the largest available setting ("Tools > Options > View" > "Detail Area") to ensure the best images captures in SketchUp.
Page 334
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Configuring Google Earth
There are a few configuration options you should set before using the Google Toolbar buttons.

Refer to the Configuring Google Earth and Google Earth and SketchUp Workflow sections for further information. 2008
.
Page 335
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Using SketchUp With Google Earth
You can use SketchUp with Google Earth to create 3D structures within the Google Earth environment.

(Google Earth) Zoom in on this location until you have a fairly detailed view of a building that you want to model.Ensure terrain is turned on in Google Earth. This image is locked so that you cannot delete it. Exit and restart Google Earth for this setting to take effect. Click on the Terrain check box toward the bottom middle of Google Earth to turn on terrain.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Getting the Current View From Google Earth
To get the current view: 1. type street and city where a new building will be built.The snapshot of the Google Earth view is locked in SketchUp so that it is not mistakenly deleted.
Page 336
Copyright Google Inc. Note . A 2D image of the current view in Google Earth is placed in SketchUp. Go to "Tools" > "Options" > "View" and change your graphics mode setting from Open GL to Direct X. For example. but you can use the Materials Browser to change the opacity of the image to 0. (Google Earth) Find the location where you want your 3D model to appear. 2008
. Note . You cannot delete this snapshot. (SketchUp) Click on the "Get Current View" button to capture an image of the current Google Earth view. (optional) Click on "Undo" if the image is not satisfactory and you need to reposition the view in Google Earth and repeat this process. making the image 100% transparent.If your snapshot appears solid black in SketchUp. adjust your graphics mode option in Google Earth.
Note . 3.
4. 2.

Get the current view from Google Earth using the Get Current View button. 2.
Page 337
Copyright Google Inc. one with terrain and one without terrain. Click on the "Toggle Terrain" button. Each image is assigned to a different layer in SketchUp whose visibility is toggled using the Toggle Terrain button.The Get Current View button actually captures two images from Google Earth. The 2D Google Earth image will toggle to a 3D Google Earth image (with terrain).
Note . A 2D Google Earth image will appear by default.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Toggling Terrain
To toggle a terrain: 1.Develop your model on the 2D image then toggle to the 3D image and adjust the model's location to the contours of the terrain. 2008
. Tip .

Ensure Google Earth is running. 2008
. Note . 4. SketchUp creates a temporary file of your model and places the model in Google Earth at the proper location. Use the Snapshot. Repeat this process until your model appears as you would like it in Google Earth. Toggle Terrain.
Page 338
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Placing Your Model in Google Earth
To place your model Google Earth: 1. See the Input and Output section of this guide for further information. 3. Click the "Place Model" button to send your model to Google Earth. and SketchUp Tools to create and place your model on a Google Earth snapshot image. 2.
Note . Select the faces to reverse and then contextclick and select Reverse Faces from the context menu.Reverse the faces in your model (within SketchUp) if your model appears black in Google Earth.Use the KMZ export option to export the final model for use in Google Earth.

To delete a model from Google Earth: 1.Uncheck checkboxes in front of SketchUp models to hide models in Google Earth.
Page 339
Copyright Google Inc. Select the "Delete" menu item. Note . 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Deleting Models from Google Earth
You can delete models in your local version of Google Earth when you no longer need them. 2. The SetkchUp model will be deleted. This method will help you locate the model you want to delete. Context-click on the model in either the Places or Templorary Places folder in Google Earth.

on to the model. of your model in Google Earth. model the general shape of each side and then project an image texture of the Eiffel Tower's side. and therefore size. instead of modeling all of the details of each side of the Eiffel Tower.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Optimizing Models for Google Earth
Complex models (models with a lot of faces) are rendered slowly in Google Earth.The following image shows a SketchUp model of the Eiffel Tower with minimal faces:
Page 340
Copyright Google Inc.
Use Image Textures On Simplified Structures
Draw the basic form of a structure and cover the structure with image textures of the actual structure. 2008
. For example. The following tips will help to reduce the complexity. containing all of the detail. which could contain thousands of faces.

) Make sure you optimize both the image dimensions and resolution. while still preserving the feel of the building. and your image dimension should be 640 x 480 or smaller. specific detailing on windows might not be as important as the placement and number of windows. the tapered steel crown of the Chrysler Building is made up multiple.
Page 341
Copyright Google Inc. (If your image does contains transparency. 2008
. eliminating 168 faces.Use PNG or JPG Format to preserve transparency. a colorized image with transparency won't display correctly in Google Earth. don't colorize the image. Since this is for on -screen display. a resolution of 72 ppi is adequate. For example.
Reduce Face Count by Simplifying Geometry
Large buildings might have a lot of detail that is simply not necessary in Google Earth. half-circle arcs. Reduce face count by reducing the number of sides of curves. but you can easily reduce the number of sides to five.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The following image shows the SketchUp model of the Eiffel Tower with a projected photo image (Google Earth on the left and SketchUp on the right). For example. A default half-circle arc has 12 sides. Your goal is to keep the image size as light as possible so it doesn't add unnecessary weight to the model.
Note .

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Hiding Google Earth Terrain
SketchUp imports two terrain images, one 3D and one 2D when the Get Current View feature is used in SketchUp. Each image is locked on its own unique layer. The 3D image's layer is named Google Earth Snapshot. The 3D image's layer is Google Earth Terrain. Only one of these snapshots (layers) is visible at a time. To hide all Google Earth terrain: 1. 2. Select "Window > Layers." The Layer Manager is displayed. Uncheck the checkboxes under the Visible column for the Google Earth Snapshot and Google Earth Terrain layers. All Google Earth terrain will be hidden.

Page 342

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Storing Models for Use in Google Earth
You can store models either in your local version of Google Earth (so they are not available to others) or share them using the 3D Warehouse.

Storing a Model Locally in Google Earth
To store a model locally in Google Earth: 1. Locate the model in the Temporary Places folder within Places panel on the left-hand side of Google Earth. Models placed in Google Earth are named SUPreview#, such as SUPreview2. Context-click on the model name. A context menu appears. Select the "Move to My Places" menu item. The model is moved to the My Places folder within the Places panel. Note - Only one SketchUp model can exist in Temporary Places at one time. You must store your models in the My Places folder if you want to view more than one of your models simultaneously in Google Earth.

2. 3.

Sharing a Model Using the 3D Warehouse
To share a model using the 3D Warehouse: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the model in SketchUp. The model appears in the drawing area. Click on the "Share Model" button in the Google toolbar. The 3D Warehouse appears. Log in to the 3D Warehouse. You will need a Google account if you do not have one. Follow the steps to post your model in the 3D Warehouse.

Page 343

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Specifying a Model's Location in the World
You can set the location of your model in all versions of SketchUp. However, the mechanism for setting location is different between SketchUp Pro and Google SketchUp.

Setting Location in SketchUp Pro
Use the Location panel in the Model Info dialog box ("Window > Model Info > Location") to set the location for your model. Caution - Do not use the Location panel in the Model Info dialog box to change the location of a model after importing the current view from Google Earth (using the Google Plugin). Using the Location panel to position models in Google Earth will likely result in an incorrectly located model.

Setting Location in Google SketchUp
Load Google Earth and navigate to the location where you model will exist (the town is sufficient). Use SketchUp's Get Current View button to import the current view, as well as the location, from Google Earth. You can hide or delete the Google Earth snapshots if you want to work without them (such as when doing a shadow study).

Page 344

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Stitching Together Terrain Images From Google Earth
You can often get better quality images by flying in close on a location in Google Earth, but this can prevent you from seeing the entire area you want to use. However, you can easily stitch together multiple terrain images from Google Earth in SketchUp. To stitch together multiple terrain images from Google Earth: 1. 2. 3. 4. (Google Earth) Fly in close so you are looking straight down at a location. (SketchUp) Click the "Get Current View" button. (Google Earth) Move the earth so you are looking straight down at a slightly different location than the location in step one. (SketchUp) Click the "Get Current View" button again. The new image is aligned properly with the image already in SketchUp. Note - It is important to get the images from Google Earth at the same elevation to ensure images align properly.

Page 345

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Model Settings and Managers
This section of the user's guide covers the various model settings and manager dialog boxes within SketchUp. These dialog boxes include the Components Browser, Application Preferences, Material Browser, and Styles Browser dialog boxes. Each dialog box in this section is covered in the order they appear within the Window (Microsoft Windows) and SketchUp (Mac OS X) menus.

Page 346

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Applying Materials
There are multiple methods to apply a material to entities in your model. To apply materials using the Paint Bucket Tool: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select the "Paint Bucket Tool." The cursor will change to a paint bucket. The Materials Browser will open. Click on the "Select" tab. Locate and click on a material library within the drop-down list. Click on the material you want to use. Click on a entity to apply the color or material to the entity. Note - Ensure that the Shaded with Textures display style is selected to see materials containing textures that you have applied to entities.

Page 347

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Editing Materials
Changes made a material will automatically apply to the entities in the model painted with that material. This behavior allows you to interactively experiment with color variations in your model. To edit a material: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Select "Window > Materials.". The Materials Browser is displayed. Click on the "Select" tab. Click on the "In Model" library drop-down list. Click on one of the materials. The material appears in the material thumbnail. Click on the "Edit" tab. Modify settings in any of the material. Refer the Edit Panel for further information. (optional) a. b. c. d. e. Save your changes to the edited material:

Click on the "In Model" button. The In Model library is displayed. Context-click on the edited material. The In Model context-menu is displayed. Select the "Save As" menu item. Navigate to a directory (folder) where you want to save the style. Type a name in the File name field and click the "Save" button. The file is saved. Refer to the Open or create a library context-menu item for information on how to retrieve this material for use in other SketchUp files.

Note - Select "Edit > Undo" to revert back to a previous material if you make a mistake while you are editing a material

Page 348

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Deleting Materials
Materials added to your model are stored within the model's .skp file. A material with only color information is very small, but materials with textures can get fairly large, depending on the file size of your texture. Therefore, it is suggested you delete unused materials from the In Model tab to minimize the size of your model file. To delete a material: 1. Select the "In Model" button of the Materials Browser. This button displays all materials defined in your model. Materials that are used in your model have a small triangle in the bottom right corner. Right click on the material you want to delete to display the material's context menu. Select "Delete" (Microsoft Windows) or "Remove" (Mac OS X) from the context menu. A dialog box will appear if you are deleting a material that is currently used in your model. a. b. Click "Yes" (Microsoft Windows) or "Remove" (Mac OS X) to delete the material and replace it with the default material. Click "No" (Microsoft Windows) or "Cancel" (Mac OS X) to retain the material.

2. 3.

Page 349

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Creating a Component
Components are useful for creating reusable models to be placed within other models. The most important issue to consider when creating components is how you want them to be placed when inserted into the model from the Components Browser. The component axes will dictate both component orientation on insert and cutting plane (for components that are to automatically cut holes in faces, such as windows). To create a component: 1. Draw your component in the orientation where it will be used. For example, if you are creating a couch component, draw it on the ground plane. If you are creating a window or door, draw it on a wall that is vertically aligned to the blue axis. Select the "Select Tool." The will change to an arrow. Click and hold the mouse button a short distance away from the entities you want to select to start a selection box. Drag the mouse to the opposite corner of the selection starting point. Release the mouse button when all of the elements are either partially included (left-toright selection) or fully included (right-to-left selection) in the selection box.

2. 3. 4. 5.

5.

Select "Edit > Make Component." Alternatively, context-click on the currently selected entities and select "Make Component" from the context menu. The Create Component dialog box is displayed. The following image shows the Create Component dialog box on Microsoft Windows:

Page 350

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

The following image shows the Create Component dialog box on Mac OS X:

6.

Fill out the fields in the dialog box. Ensure you make all of the appropriate selections and check all of the appropriate boxes before continuing. Specifically, decide whether the component should glue to faces in a specific orientation and cut openings.

Page 351

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

7.

Click the "Create" button. SketchUp adds the newly created component to the In Model components.

Caution - Components that are created in their appropriate "glue to" orientation are created with the blue and green axis swapped. This is only of importance when creating dynamic components as the LENZ will have a value for length along the green axis and the LENY will have a value for the length along the blue axis.

Note - The Make Component operation disconnects any geometry that was connected to selected geometry prior to placing the selected geometry in the component. The disconnected geometry is maintained outside of the component's context. Note - You can make component hierarchies by grouping other Component entities within a component. Additionally, you can mix your hierarchies by including components and groups within other components and groups. Tip - Create components that can be attached or glued to a surface in context (on a surface) to ensure that the cutting plane is established correctly.

Page 352

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Setting the Gluing and Cutting Plane of a Component
The Set gluing plane button is used to specify a different origin for the Component and to modify the orientation of the component when it is placed. To set the origin and plane of a component: 1. Select "Show Component Axes" in the Components Panel of Model Info dialog box to see the existing axes on a Component before using the Set gluing plane button to move the axes. Draw your component in the orientation where it will be used. For example, if you are creating a couch component, draw it on the ground plane. If you are creating a window or door, draw it on a wall that is vertically aligned to the blue axis. Select the "Select Tool." The will change to an arrow. Click and hold the mouse button a short distance away from the entities you want to select to start a selection box. Drag the mouse to the opposite corner of the selection starting point. Release the mouse button when all of the elements are either partially included (left-toright selection) or fully included (right-to-left selection) in the selection box.

2.

3. 4. 5. 6.

Page 353

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

7.

Select "Edit > Make Component." Alternatively, context-click on the currently selected entities and select "Make Component" from the context menu. The Create Component dialog box is displayed. The following image shows the Create Component dialog box on Microsoft Windows:

The following image shows the Create Component dialog box on Mac OS X:

8.

Click on the "Set gluing plane" button. The cursor changes to an arrow with axes attached to it.

Page 354

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

9.

Click on a location of the component to set the origin of the component's axes. The origin and insertion point is now set to this location. Note - When you change the axes you change the orientation of the component when dragged from the Components Browser and also the component's cutting plane. By default, the component's axes are placed as though the component will be inserted from the Components Browser in the exact orientation as the component is in while you create the component. Generally, you will not want to change this orientation unless, for example, you are creating a window component independent of other geometry and in the vertical plane (blue). In this case, the bottom of the window will be on the red/green plane. The red/green plane is the gluing and cutting plane. As such, this window's bottom will therefore want to align and cut into a face when placed in the model from the Component browser. As mentioned previously, however, it is best to create window and door components within the context of a surface type where they will ultimately be placed, such as a wall, so you do not have to reorient the axes. Follow the last two steps in this list if you need to reorient the component axes.

10. (optional) Move the mouse around the origin to redefine the orientation of the component. The axes of the component will rotate suggesting a new orientation for the component. The cut plane will also move to represent where the component will cut into a face when placed vertically or horizontally. For example, if you rotate the axes such that red is up and green is to the left, the component will be inserted horizontally to its orientation when created. The following image shows a window component during component creation. The component's axes have been reoriented such that the cutting plane is now parallel to the front of the window.

11. (optional) Click to set the new orientation.

Page 355

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Editing a Component Instance as a Whole
You can edit the component as a whole or edit individual entities within a component. Editing or modifying the component instance as a whole affects only the component instance, not the component definition or other instances.

Scaling a Component
Scaling a component as a whole scales the individual component instance, not the component definition, allowing you to have many differently scaled instances of the same component in your model. A component can become skewed when you scale the component in multiple directions. You can reset both a components scale and skew using the Reset Scale and Reset Skew context menu items.

Flipping a Component
You can flip (or mirror) a component along its axes using the Flip Along component context menu item. Choose Component's Red, Component's Blue, or Component's Green depending on the direction to flip the component.

Rotating a Component Using the Move Tool
Components can be rotated using either using the Move Tool or Rotate Tool. The first rotation method rotates the component about its center of mass and in the planes of the component bounding box. The second rotation method allows you to specify precise rotate planes and center of rotation. See the Rotate Tool for further information on this second rotation method. To rotate a component using the Move Tool: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the "Move Tool." The cursor will change to a four-way arrow. Move the cursor over a face that is perpendicular to the desired axis of rotation. Four rotation handles and a protractor appear on the face. Click on a rotation handle Rotate the component.

Page 356

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Editing Entities Within a Component Instance
Editing the entities within a component requires you to enter the component's context. Editing or modifying the entities within a component instance affects the component definition and other instances of the component. To edit the entities within a component: 1. Select the "Edit > Component Instance > Edit Component" to edit the component. Alternatively, context-click on the currently selected component and select "Edit Component" from the context menu. An edit bounding box will surround the component and entities exterior to the component will turn grey. Tip - Double-click on the component to edit the component. 2. Make changes to entities within the component. Any changes while in the context of the component affects each component instance and the component definition. You can also perform inference alignments to geometry outside of the component while you are editing the component. Select the "Edit > Close Group / Component" to end the edit session. Alternatively, context-click on the component's bounding box and select Close component from the context menu. Tip - Click outside of the component to close the component.

3.

Page 357

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Exploding a Component
You can explode a Component entity to break it back into its original entities. To explode a component: 1. 2. 3. Select the "Select Tool." The will change to an arrow. Select the component you want to explode. Select "Edit > Component Instance > Explode." Alternatively, context-click on the currently selected group and select "Explode" from the context menu. The component will be split back into its entities.

Elements within components that were placed adjacent to other geometry might become joined to elements exterior to the component when the component is exploded.

Page 358

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Inserting Components
There are a variety of different ways to insert component instances in SketchUp.skp). Drag the icon into the drawing area. Change the location of the component's axes before you insert the component to change the default insertion point.
Insert a Component From an External SketchUp (. Select the "File > Import" menu item. The Open file dialog box appears. Move the mouse to the location in the drawing area where you want to place the component. To insert a component from an external SketchUp file: 1.The component axes origin is the default insertion point for a Component. 3. Click the "Open" button. The cursor changes to the Move Tool anchored to the component's insertion point. Locate the icon representing the file you want to insert. 4.
Finally. 2. Tip . 2008
.skp) File
You can also insert a component from an external SketchUp file. See the Components Browser for further information. 4.The component axes origin is the default insertion point for a Component.
Page 359
Copyright Google Inc. Select the type of file to import from the Files of Type (Microsoft Windows) or Format (Mac OS X) drop-down list (. To insert a component from the File Explorer (Microsoft Windows) or the Finder (Mac OS X): 1. 3. 2. The cursor changes to the Move Tool anchored to the component's insertion point. Click and hold the mouse button on the icon. Release the mouse button to place the component into your model. Click the mouse button again to release the component. 5.
Inserting Components from Components Browser
Pre-defined Components are most often inserted from the Components Browser into a model. you can also insert a component from the File Explorer (Microsoft Windows) or the Finder (Mac OS X). Change the location of the component's axes before you insert the component to change the default insertion point. Tip .
Insert a Component From the File Explorer (Microsoft Windows) or the Finder (Mac OS X).

blue.
Each entire component instance was then painted after being edited.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Applying Materials to Components
Any geometry inside a component that is painted with the default material will be painted when you paint the instance as a whole. Therefore. and yellow from left to right):
Page 360
Copyright Google Inc. turning each of the faces with the default material to the color applied on the group (green. The following image contains four cars all enclosed in components. The tires. you can have entities within a component painted individually while other elements painted using the material assigned to the entire component. bumper. and windshield have been painted black when editing the component. red. 2008
.

that is already in your model. Insert a second instance of the same cabinet to the left of the previously inserted cabinet (so that the two cabinets touch). 5. if you insert this component and then move it by a midpoint. Notice that it is hard to accurately place the second cabinet because the insertion point is at the origin at the lower left corner of the component (away from where the two cabinets will touch).
Page 361
Copyright Google Inc. using a different (non-origin) point. if you have a 3d rectangle component. This process should be easier now that the insertion point has been moved to the lower-right corner of the component. However. Reposition the second kitchen cabinet away from the first.
Resetting Component Axes
Context-click on the component in the Components Browser and select "Reset Insert Point" to reset the insertion point to the origin of the component's axes. Select the "Move Tool" and click the lower-right corner of the second kitchen cabinet component. 4. If you drag a third instance of the same cabinet into the model.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Moving the Insertion Point
The Components Browser switches the insertion point from the origin of the component's axes to another point on the component when you use the Move Tool to select a component. Insert one kitchen cabinet component with the insertion point at the lower left corner of the component. 2008
. the insertion point changes to the mid point (while the origin remains at the lower left hand corner). Now move the second kitchen cabinet such that it is aligned on the left-side of the first cabinet. Consider the following: 1. For example. 2.
3. the insertion point will now be at the lower-right corner (making it easier to place more cabinets to the left of each other). This feature is useful when aligning components. the origin and insertion point will be the lower left-hand corner. such as cabinet components in a kitchen.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Inserting a Component
To insert a component in your drawing area: 1. Move the mouse to the location in the drawing area where you want to place the component.skp) file or by dragging and dropping a file from the Explorer (Microsoft Windows) or the Finder (Mac OS X) into your model. See the Component entity for further information. To see the origin of the component. The cursor changes to the Move Tool. 2008
. Navigate to a component in the Components Browser. Note .The component axes is the default insertion point (the point where the cursor grabs the component) for a component the first time you place the component in the model from the Components Browser. Tip . The insertion point will change to the point where the Move Tool selects a component if you place a component and then reposition the component using the Move Tool. Click the mouse button again to release the component. Click on the component.The Move Tool will usually be anchored to the origin of the component's axes (also called the insert point ).You can also insert components from an external SketchUp (. 2.
Page 362
Copyright Google Inc. 3. Note . 3. select Window > Model Info > Components > Show component axes.

The components directory on Microsoft Windows is:C:\Program Files\Google\Google SketchUp 6\Components The components directory on Mac OS X is:Macintosh HD/Library/Application Support/Google SketchUp 6/Components Type a file name in the File name field. 9. (Microsoft Windows) Select the "File" item from the left-hand side of the dialog box.
4. 6. The component's context menu appears. The following rules apply for components that have gluing planes: • • Thumbnails for components whose gluing plane is vertical. 8. (Microsoft Windows) Select "Window > Model Info. but not for a lamp.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Changing Component Thumbnail
Creating a component creates a thumbnail image of the component in the Component Browser. Context-click on the component. such as windows and doors. 3. Use the camera tools to find a view of the component acceptable for a thumbnail.
Page 363
Copyright Google Inc. The Save As dialog box appears. any. Save the component file." The Model Info dialog box appears. The File panel is displayed.
You must save the individual component to a file to change its thumbnail. is of a front view of the component. The component is saved in the specified directory. or sloped. Navigate to the components directory. 7. (Microsoft Windows) Check the "Redefine thumbnail on save" checkbox. 5. for example). Select the "Save As" menu item. 2. This image is based on the view of the component unless the component has a gluing plane. Open the component file. The component appears in the drawing area. 11. vehicle. This option ensures your thumbnail will be saved based on current view. is a top-down view of the component (which is appropriate for a rug component.
10. Thumbnails for components whose gluing plane is horizontal. Click the "Save" button. To change the component thumbnail: 1. or person. 2008
.

Click on one of the pre-defined styles. All of the pre-defined styles in the library are displayed in thumbnail form. Select the "Styles" library. 5. 2008
. Click on the styles library drop-down list. The style is applied to your model and the drawing area. 3. Each pre-defined style represents a collection of specific settings that can be applied to your model and the drawing area." The Styles Browser is displayed.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Applying Styles
Select one of many pre-defined styles from the Styles Browser and apply it to your model. Click on the "Select" tab. 2. To select and apply a pre-defined style: 1. Select "Window > Styles. 4.
Page 364
Copyright Google Inc.

Watermark. To Edit a style: 1.
Page 365
Copyright Google Inc. Type a name in the File name field and click the "Save" button. Click on the "Styles" library drop-down list.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Editing Styles
Styles are comprised of several different settings found under the Edit tab. Click on one of the pre-defined styles. 9. The style is applied to your model and the drawing area. 2. A copy of the style appears in the In Model library. Navigate to a directory (folder) where you want to save the style. Select "Window > Styles. 8. Click on the "Update Style" button. Refer to the Open or create a library context-menu item for information on how to retrieve this style for use in other SketchUp files. Context-click on the edited style. or Modeling Panel for further information. One of five panels is displayed (Edge. Select the "Save As" menu item. All of the pre-defined styles in the library are displayed in thumbnail form." The Styles Browser is displayed. Face Panel. (optional) Save your changes to the edited style: a. Refer to Edge Panel. Watermark Panel. Face. The copy of the style in the In Model library is updated with your changes. 2008
. e. c. 6. Background Panel. d. 5. b. 7. Background. Click on the "Select" tab. and Modeling). Click on the "In Model" button. The In Model context-menu is displayed. 3. 4. The In Model library is displayed. Click on the "Edit" tab. The file is saved. Select the "Styles" library. Modify settings in any of the edit panels.

2. The Edit panel is displayed. Thumbnails of all of the current edge styles used are displayed. Select "In Model" from the drop-down list of edge types. For example. The Edge rendering panel is displayed. edges drawn in the up or down direction will be colored blue. 2008
. Select "Window > Styles. Select the "By axis" item from the "Color" drop-down list (at the bottom of the Edge rendering panel)." The Styles Browser is displayed. 4. 5. To enable edge color by axis: 1. All edges in your model will now be colored with the color of their respective axis direction.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Aligning Edges to Axes
One method for aligning edges to axes is to enable an option to display all edges in the color of their respective axis direction. 3. Click on the "Edge Settings" icon (the first icon on the left). Click on the "Edit" tab.
Page 366
Copyright Google Inc.

4. Select the "In Model" style library from the drop-down list. 2.style file to share a style with others. Create a new folder/directory on your computer to contain your shared styles. 3.style files that can be opened by any copy of SketchUp 6 or above. The In Model style library is displayed. You must create a . Select the "Save As" menu item. 7. Select "Window > Styles. The style context menu is displayed. The Save As dialog box appears. Click the "Save" button. 2008
. To share a style: 1. 5. Navigate to the folder/directory you created in step 1. Context-click on the style name you would like to share.
You can now share this style file with others. The style file is saved to your newly created folder/directory.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Sharing Styles
Styles are shared in . 8. 6. Type the name of the style in the File name field." The Styles Browser is displayed.
Page 367
Copyright Google Inc.

The Choose Watermark dialog box is displayed.
Page 368
Copyright Google Inc. Or. 9. Check the radio button that reflects where you want the watermark to appear on the screen. Click on the "Finish" button. 7. (optional) Move the "Blend" slider to the left to fade the watermark. Click on the "Watermark" panel button. or the "Overlay" button to have the image appear in front of your model as an overlay. 2.
8. 6. Click either the "Background" button to have the image appear behind your model as a background watermark. Navigate to an image you will use as a watermark. Select "Window > Styles. The Create Watermark dialog box is displayed.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Adding a Watermark to the Drawing Area
To add a watermark to the drawing are: 1. The Watermark panel is displayed. 4. 5. Refer to Watermark Settings for further information. (optional) Check the "Create Mask" checkbox. Click on the "Next" button. 13. Click on the "Edit" tab. 11. Click on the "Add" button. 3. Click on the "Next" button. Refer to Watermark Settings for further information.
10. Click the "Open" button. The image will appear as a watermark in the background of the drawing area. 2008
. move the "Blend" slider to the right to fade the model." The Styles Browser is displayed. 12.

Select one or more entities. Select the layer for the entities from the "Layers" drop-down list. The Entity Info dialog box appears. Select the "Entity Info" menu item." The cursor changes to an arrow.
Page 369
Copyright Google Inc. 2. 3. 5. The selected entities are highlighted in yellow.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Moving Geometry Between Layers
To move geometry from one layer to another: 1. 4. Select the "Select Tool. Activate the context menu for the selected entities. 2008
.

Type a string in the "Filter" field.
Page 370
Copyright Google Inc. optionally. click on the Details Menu and select the "Expand All" menu item to expand the hierarchy so all levels are displayed. This feature helps you to locate only like components or groups. An icon with a plus sign will appear next to any components or groups when additional levels in the hierarchy exist (additional groups or components within the toplevel groups or components)." The Outliner dialog box opens with a hierarchical view of your model. 3.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Filtering Groups and Components in the Hierarchical View
The Outliner contains a Filter field for displaying only those groups or components containing a specific filter string. Items containing the filter string will be listed. Select "Window > Outliner. Click on the plus (+) icon to list groups or components within other groups or components. To filter items within the Outliner: 1. in the hierarchical view.
2. The Group and Component entities at the root (top-most) level of the hierarchy are displayed. 2008
. in red. Or.

Four black squares Group .Four hollow squares Open Group . • • • • • • • Component .Google SketchUp 7 Help
Identifying Entries in the Outliner Hierarchy
The Outliner uses a combination of icons and text to identify groups and component status in a hierarchy. 2008
.One hollow square Hidden Component or Group .Four grey squares with small lock in lower right corner Locked Group .One grey square with small lock in lower right corner Open Component .Name of component or group is in italics
Page 371
Copyright Google Inc.One solid square Locked Component .

3. Select "Window > Outliner. you can move a group. to the top of the hierarchy for easy editing.
Page 372
Copyright Google Inc. To move items within the outline: 1. Or. An icon with a plus sign will appear next to any components or groups when additional levels in the hierarchy exist (additional groups or components within the toplevel groups or components)." The Outliner dialog box opens with a hierarchical view of your model. optionally. The Group and Component entities at the root (top-most) level of the hierarchy are displayed. click on the Details Menu and select the "Expand All" menu item to expand the hierarchy so all levels are displayed. 2008
. For example.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Moving Items Within the Outliner
Use the Outliner to reorganize groups and components in the hierarchy. Move the group or component to a new position in the hierarchy. buried deep within the hierarchy. Click and hold on the group or component you want to move in the hierarchy. 4.
2. Click on the plus (+) icon to list groups or components within other groups or components.

To rename the component definition: 1. Select the "Rename" menu item Type the new component instance name in the Outliner. This tip is particularly useful if you want to easily locate a specific component instance in the outliner. 3.
2. 5. but only one instance represents Jim's Office. The context menu for the Component entity is displayed.
2. Context-click on the component in the Outliner. Type a new name in the definition's name field. This name can either be established when the component is first created. Tip . Context-click on the component in the Outliner. For example. The component definition name generally refers to type of component. 4.
Page 373
Copyright Google Inc. Notice that this is the same context menu as the context menu displayed when you context-click on an entity in the drawing area (except this context menu has a Rename menu item). you might want to have different instance names if several chairs are all from the same definition in your model. Where you may have several Cubicle Style 1 components in your model. The context menu for the Component entity is displayed. Click on the "Definition" tab to display information about this component's definition. Press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key to save your change.You can also use the Name field at the top of a component's Entity Info dialog box to rename component instances. 2008
. For example. components are identified in the outliner by a combination of their instance and definition names (the definition name is enclosed in lessthan and greater-than symbols).
Naming a Component Instance
A component instance name is useful when you want to differentiate different component instances from each other in the Outliner (the default name for all component instances is "Component"). Click on the "Entity Info" menu item.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Naming Groups and Components Within the Outliner
The Outliner displays groups by their group names and components by a combination of the definition and specific instance name. Jim's Office <Cubicle Style 1>. The Entity Info dialog box is displayed. Notice that this is the same context menu as the context menu displayed when you context-click on an entity in the drawing area (except this context menu has a Rename menu item). 3.Use instance names to differentiate different instances of the same definition in your model.
Naming a Component Definition
As mentioned in the previous paragraph. To rename the component instance: 1. X being some number) and rename the component definition using the outliner. such as a certain type of cubicle (Cubicle Style 1) or certain type of video camera (VideoX 8mm camera). 4. or you can accept the default (Component#X. Click outside of the Entity Info dialog box to save your change. Note .

Page 374
Copyright Google Inc. Select the "Rename" menu item Type the new component instance name in the Outliner. 4. 2008
. 3. Context-click on the group in the Outliner.
2.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Naming a Group
You can also name your groups for easy identification in the Outliner. To rename a group: 1. Notice that this is the same context menu as the context menu displayed when you context-click on an entity in the drawing area (except this context menu has a Rename menu item). The context menu for the Component entity is displayed. Press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key to save your change.

2008
." The Outliner dialog box opens with a hierarchical view of your model.
Page 375
Copyright Google Inc.
2.
3. To navigate a component or group hierarchy using the hierarchical view: 1. 4. The Group and Component entities at the root (top-most) level of the hierarchy are displayed. optionally. (optional) Double-click on the group or component name in the hierarchical view to edit the group or component in your model. Select "Window > Component. Or. click on the Outliner's Details Menu and select the "Expand All" menu item to expand the hierarchy so all levels are displayed. An icon with a plus sign will appear next to any components or groups when additional levels in the hierarchy exist (additional groups or components within the top-level groups or components). Click on any group or component name in the hierarchical view to select the group or component in your model.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Traversing Component and Group Hierarchies
The outliner contains a hierarchy view that reflects your hierarchy of components and groups in your model. Click on the plus (+) icon to list groups or components within other groups or components.

Select a styles library from the drop-down list.
Page 376
Copyright Google Inc. 4. 5.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Assigning Styles to Scenes
Select a style before creating a scene. 2. 3. such as "Assorted Styles.
Changing a Style Assigned to a Scene
To change a style already assigned to a scene: 1. A scene is added to the list. 4." The Scenes Manager is displayed. To select a Style and create a new scene. Select "Window > Styles. Click the "Add Scene" button. Select the" In Model" library from the drop-down list. Select the "Edit" tab. please follow these steps: 1. 5." The Styles Manger is displayed. The Edit panel is displayed. Select "Window" > "Styles. 2. 3. The In Model styles library is displayed. 2008
. Active style is automatically assigned to scenes you create in your SketchUp models. Click the "Update Style with changes" button. Click on a style in the library. The style is updated in all scenes. Adjust the display settings as necessary. The style is selected." The In Model library simply displays styles currently used in the model." The Styles Manager is displayed. Select "Window > Scenes.

Page 378
Copyright Google Inc.
• •
4.
Enabling Shadows Using Manually Input Data
Use the Location section of the Model Info dialog box to manually input location information. 4. the time zone for some locations may inaccurate by up to one hour (sometimes longer). (Google Earth) Zoom in on this location until you have a fairly detailed. (SketchUp) Click on "display shadows" to display shadows for your model. (SketchUp) Select "Window > Shadows.." The Model Info dialog box appears. The time zone in SketchUp is set based on the coordinates of the image. 3. Click on the Terrain check box toward the bottom middle of Google Earth to turn on terrain. top-down. To enable shadows using manual input data: 1. SketchUp is calibrated to the same latitude. type street and city where a new building will be built. (optional) Select or enter a country using the "Country" drop-down list box. 3. longitude. The time is not adjusted for Daylight Saving Time. 2008
. The Location Panel appears. 5. (Google Earth) Find the location where you want your 3D model to appear. • • (SketchUp) Click on the "Get Current View" button to capture an image of the current Google Earth view. The following occurs when you perform this step: A 2D image of the current view in Google Earth is placed in SketchUp. The 2D image is locked so that you cannot delete it. and time zone as the location in Google Earth.Ensure terrain is turned on in Google Earth. Note . To enable shadows using location data from Google Earth: 1. 2. Because some time zones lines zigzag rather dramatically. For example. 5.0) to your model.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Enabling Shadows
The SketchUp Shadows feature is designed to give you a general idea of how the sun and shadows affect your model during the course of a day and throughout the year. The imported image is aligned with the axes in SketchUp (the solid green axis points north and the solid red axis points east). view of a building that you want to model.. To enable shadows:
Enabling Shadows Using Location Data from Google Earth
Use Google Earth to set location and directional orientation for models that represent realworld structures. (optional) Select or enter a location (city) using the "Location" drop-down list box. Select "Location" on the left-hand side of the Model Info dialog box." The Shadows Settings dialog box appears. directional orientation of the model. 2. (optional) Enter a North angle in the "North angle" field if the true north is at an angle (instead of the default 0. (SketchUp) Manipulate shadows using the controls in the Shadows Settings dialog box. The calculations are based on the location (latitude and longitude. 6. Select "Window > Model Info. These coordinates appear in SketchUp's Set Custom Location dialog box within Model Info > Custom Location. and an associated time zone.

Check the "Enable Fog" checkbox. As with real fog. such as when you zoom in or zoom out.
Page 380
Copyright Google Inc." The Fog dialog box appears. 3.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Setting Fog
Use the Fog dialog box to apply Fog-like effects to your model. To apply Fog: 1. Note . Adjust the sliders. 2008
.Fog sliders will move automatically when you change your point of view. Select "Window > Fog. 2. and less clear as you move away. Fog might appear around your model (depending on your view of the model and the settings of the fog sliders). the geometry will become clearer as you zoom closer to it.

2. Select a drawing template from the drop-down list to select one of the SketchUp default templates. The Preferences dialog box is displayed. 3. Click on the "Templates" item on the left-hand side of the Preferences dialog box.
4. The selected template is sued after you close and restart SketchUp. click the "Browse" button to find a template that you have created.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Automatically Loading a Template
You can load a template SketchUp file manually using File > Open every time you want to create a model. 2008
. Click the "OK" button to close the Preferences dialog box. The Template panel is displayed. optionally. Or.
Page 381
Copyright Google Inc. Select "Window > Preferences" (Microsoft Windows) or "SketchUp" > Preferences" (Mac OS X). you can identify a file as a template using the Template section of the Preferences dialog box to load the template automatically when you run SketchUp: 1. Or.

Click the "OK" button to close the Preferences dialog box. Click on the "Template" item on the left-hand side of the Preferences dialog box. The Preferences dialog box is displayed. 2008
. Select a drawing template from the drop-down list to select one of the SketchUp default templates. The selected template is sued after you close and restart SketchUp. Or. optionally. 3. 2. click the "Browse" button to find a template that you have created.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Changing Your Template
To change your template: 1. The Template panel is displayed.
4. Select "Window > Preferences" (Microsoft Windows) or "SketchUp > Preferences" (Mac OS X).
Page 382
Copyright Google Inc.

description. For example. Modify the Model Info settings to fit your particular needs. 3. activate a ground plane.
Page 383
Copyright Google Inc. To create a template: 1. (optionally) Draw any geometry that you want to share among all of your models. 2. Note . For example.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating a Template
A template file contains default settings from the Model Info dialog box and base geometry. Select "File > New" to start a new SketchUp file.The template will appear in the Template panel of the Preferences dialog box (Window > Preferences on Microsoft Windows or SketchUp > Preferences on Mac OS X)
5. and set a geographic location. Modify the Preference settings to fit your particular needs. Select "File > Save As Template" to save the SketchUp file. and filename. 2008
. you might want to set default units and snaps. 6. you might want all of your models of houses to be created within the same starting terrain (such as when you are creating models of houses within a housing development). Enter the template name. (optional) Click the "Set as default template" checkbox to save this template as the default template (to load every time you load SketchUp). 7. 4.

Click on the "Shortcuts" item on the left-hand side of the Preferences dialog box. For example. Click the plus (+) button. or Alt.Do not use the spacebar or backspace keys as keyboard shortcuts to avoid conflict with values entered in the Measurements Toolbar. Therefore. except number keys. SketchUp will indicate when a key or key combination cannot be used or is already assigned. Control.The list of commands available in the Shortcuts panel is dynamically generated and includes all menu items and active context menu items. s7 will activate whatever command is invoked with the letter S as a keyboard shortcut.You can save your shortcuts to a ." The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
You can have multiple keyboard shortcut combinations for each command. 3. To assign a keyboard shortcut: 1. 7s would be the correct entry to redefine a segmentation in the Measurements Toolbar. However. numbers cannot be used as shortcut keys. Tip . Type the keyboard shortcut key sequence In the "Add Shortcut" field. See the Files panel in this topic for more information. Some context menu items become active only after performing another task. 2008
. The letters S. R. For example.
3. Note . with a few exceptions.
Page 384
Copyright Google Inc. select a face to activate the Reverse Faces command and then open Preferences > Shortcuts to set a keyboard shortcut for Reverse Faces. and the symbols / and * can be used within keyboard shortcuts and as you enter values in the Measurements Toolbar.dat file for copying to other computers. 2. X. Shortcut keys can consist of any keyboard key. Select the command to which you will assign a keyboard shortcut (within the Function list). The Measurements Toolbar and Keyboard Shortcuts Temporary focus is given to the Measurements Toolbar when you type a number while in the drawing area. Some keys are reserved for use by Microsoft Windows and can not be assigned as a keyboard shortcut. Note . Existing keyboard shortcuts for this command will display in the Assigned list. SketchUp will prompt you before allowing you to assign a keyboard shortcut that is already assigned to another command. Select "Window > Preferences. The Shortcuts panel is displayed. 2. Any key that can be used as a shortcut can also be assigned a modifier key like Shift.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Assigning Keyboard Shortcuts (Microsoft Windows)
Keyboard shortcuts can dramatically speed up your drawing by allowing you to change tools while keeping the mouse cursor near the drawing area. Prepend any of these letters with a number in the Measurements Toolbar to ensure that a command with a corresponding keyboard shortcut letter is not invoked.

select a face to activate the Reverse Faces command and then open Preferences > Shortcuts to set a keyboard shortcut for Reverse Faces. See the Files panel in this topic for more information. To assign a keyboard shortcut: 1. except number keys. Some context menu items become active only after performing another task. R." The Preferences dialog box is displayed. For example. with a few exceptions. numbers cannot be used as shortcut keys. Click on the "Shortcuts" item on the left-hand side of the Preferences dialog box. However. or Option. Some keys are reserved for use by Microsoft Windows and can not be assigned as a keyboard shortcut.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Assigning Keyboard Shortcuts (Mac OS X)
Keyboard shortcuts can dramatically speed up your drawing by allowing you to change tools while keeping the mouse cursor near the drawing area.
Page 385
Copyright Google Inc. 3. The Measurements Toolbar and Keyboard Shortcuts Temporary focus is given to the Measurements Toolbar when you type a number while in the drawing area. Tip . The Shortcuts panel is displayed. Control.Do not use the spacebar or backspace keys as keyboard shortcuts to avoid conflict with values entered in the Measurements Toolbar.
You can have multiple keyboard shortcut combinations for each command. Select "SketchUp > Preferences. Shortcut keys can consist of any keyboard key. 2008
. For example. Prepend any of these letters with a number in the Measurements Toolbar to ensure that a command with a corresponding keyboard shortcut letter is not invoked. SketchUp will indicate when a key or key combination cannot be used or is already assigned. Note . 2.You can save your shortcuts to a .dat file for copying to other computers. Therefore. Type the keyboard shortcut key sequence in the field below the function list. and the symbols / and * can be used within keyboard shortcuts and as you enter values in the Measurements Toolbar. 2. or Command. X.The list of commands available in the Shortcuts panel is dynamically generated and includes all menu items and active context menu items. Existing keyboard shortcuts for this command will display in the Key column next to each function. Any key that can be used as a shortcut can also be assigned a modifier key like Shift. The letters S. s7 will activate whatever command is invoked with the letter S as a keyboard shortcut. SketchUp will prompt you before allowing you to assign a keyboard shortcut that is already assigned to another command. 7s would be the correct entry to redefine a segmentation in the Measurements Toolbar. Note . Select the command to which you will assign a keyboard shortcut (within the Function list).

4. Click on the "Options" button. Check Shortcuts checkboxes if you do not want to save either shortcuts or File locations respectively. To export your preferences: 1. Select the "Window > Preferences." The Preferences dialog box appears. including keyboard shortcuts. 2008
. 7. 8. Including Keyboard Shortcuts (Microsoft Windows)
System preferences are automatically saved as you make the changes to items like keyboard shortcuts. Click the "OK" button. 9. The Export Preferences dialog box is displayed. for sharing between other copies of SketchUp. Click the "Export" button. The Export Preferences Options dialog box appears.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Exporting Preferences. Type the name of the file in the File name field (Preferences. 2. The preferences are saved to your predefined location. However. The Files panel is displayed.
Page 386
Copyright Google Inc. Click the "Export" button. Navigate to the folder where you want to save the file. you can export preferences. 6.dat by default). Select the "Files" item from the left-hand of the Preferences dialog box. 5. 3.

4. Select "New From File" from the pop-up menu at the bottom of the image well." Click and Drag your cursor around the Image Well until the color you want is in the Color Well. To load and select a color from an image: 1. 2. 3. you can drag an image file from the Finder and drop it on the Image Well. Click "Open.
Page 389
Copyright Google Inc. Note . Note . The Image Palettes Picker has a spectrum image loaded as a default. Additionally.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Loading and Selecting Colors from Images (Mac OS X)
The Image Palettes Picker allows you to load an image file into the Color Picker and select colors from anywhere in that image.To switch from image to image. 2008
. use the pop-up list at the top of the Image Well.You can also load an image you have copied to the OS X clipboard by selecting New From Pasteboard from the pop-up menu at the bottom of the image well. Locate your image in the New Color Palette dialog box.

Note . Click on the List drop-down menu.skm is saved at ~/Library/Application
10.jpg pictures taken with a digital camera) using the materials browser.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Adding Materials From Image Files (Mac OS X)
You can create realistic materials from image files (such as . Locate the image-based material to add to the library. To add materials from image files: 1. You cannot add materials to the materials libraries that are included with SketchUp. 13. Create a folder for your image files. Click Open. 9. Place your image files into the new folder. The image-based material will be added to your new materials library. 4. 2008
. 11. Click on the Color drop-down menu. Launch SketchUp. Enter a name for the new materials library that will contain your image-based materials. Select Window > Colors.
Page 390
Copyright Google Inc. 2. Click OK. 7. Click on the Texture Pallet Picker. 5. 6.You must create a new materials library if you wish to add materials to SketchUp from image files. 3. Select New. 12. A new materials library Support/SketchUp/Materials/<libraryname>. The Color Picker dialog box is displayed. Select New Texture. 8.

represented as a magnifying glass. 2.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Selecting Color with the Screen Picker (Mac OS X)
The Screen Picker. The cursor changes into a large magnifying glass. Click on the magnifying glass icon to activate the Screen Picker. To select a color using the Screen Picker: 1. is used to choose a color from any element currently visible on your Apple Macintosh screen. 3. Click the mouse button to place the color in the Active Color Well. Move the cursor around the screen until you are magnifying the color you want to use. 2008
.
Page 391
Copyright Google Inc.

3. Drag the cursor away from the origin in the north direction. To set the North angle: 1. The cursor changes to a cross within a circle. 5. 2. 4. Click again to establish the new north angle. Click on the Select button. Place the center of the cross at the origin of the North angle (usually the axes origin).Google SketchUp 7 Help
Setting the North Angle
The North angle establishes the path of the sun. 2008
.
Page 392
Copyright Google Inc. Click the left mouse button.

Entities are covered in alphabetical order.
Page 393
Copyright Google Inc. arcs. 2008
. and lines. These entities include faces.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Entities
This section of the user's guide covers the various entities used to construct a model in SketchUp. dimensions.

Each entire Group entity was then painted after being edited. 2008
. bumper. The following image contains four cars all enclosed in groups. Therefore. red. blue. The tires.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Applying Materials to Groups
Any geometry inside a group that is painted with the default material will be painted when you paint an unexploded group. turning each of the faces with the default material to the color applied on the group (green. and yellow from left to right):
Page 394
Copyright Google Inc. and windshield have been painted black when editing the group. you can have entities within a group painted individually while other elements painted using the material assigned to the entire group.

2.You can make group hierarchies by grouping other Group entities within a group. 4. Additionally.
5. Drag the mouse to the opposite corner of the selection starting point. The disconnected geometry is maintained outside of the group's context.
Page 395
Copyright Google Inc. The geometry you selected appears grouped within a highlighted bounding box. Note ." Alternatively. Release the mouse button when all of the elements are either partially included (left-toright selection) or fully included (right-to-left selection) in the selection box. Click and hold the mouse button a short distance away from the entities you want to select to start a selection box.The Make Group operation disconnects any geometry that was connected to the grouped geometry prior to placing the geometry in the group.
Select the "Edit > Make Group. To create a group: 1. 3. Select the "Select Tool. you can mix your hierarchies by including components and groups within other components and groups." The will change to an arrow.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating a Group
Groups are useful for combining entities to perform a quick operation such as copy or move operations.
Note . context-click on the currently selected entities and select "Make Group" from the context menu. 2008
.

context-click on the currently selected group's bounding box and select "Close Group" from the context menu. An edit bounding box will surround the group and entities exterior to the group will turn grey. Alternatively. Select the "Edit > Group > Edit Group" to edit the group. 2. placing you in the Group's context.
3. perform inference alignments to geometry outside of the group while you are editing the group. 2008
. You can. however. Tip .Double-click on the group to edit the group.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Editing a Group
Groups can be opened for editing. Select the "Edit > Close Group / Component" to end the edit session. To edit a group: 1. Alternatively.
Tip . context-click on the currently selected group and select "Edit Group" from the context menu. Any changes while in the group's context only affects the Group entity.
Page 396
Copyright Google Inc. Make changes to entities within the group.Click outside of the group to close the Group.

Elements within groups that were placed adjacent to other geometry might become joined to elements exterior to the group when the group is exploded. 3. The Group will be split back into its entities. Select the group you want to explode.click on the currently selected group and select "Explode" from the context menu." The will change to an arrow. context.
Page 397
Copyright Google Inc. Select the "Edit > Group > Explode. 2008
. To explode a group: 1.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Exploding (Ungrouping) a Group
You can explode (ungroup) a Group entity to break it back into its original entities. 2. Select the "Select Tool." Alternatively.

Alternately.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Inserting Image Entities
Images can be added to SketchUp models in one of two ways. First.Image Objects can also be inserted as textures ( "File > Import" ). 2008
. see the Texture Positioning topic. you can use the "File" > Import" .
Page 398
Copyright Google Inc. For additional information on using images as textures. which will open a File Open dialog allowing you to navigate to the file you want. you can simply drag and drop from the File Explorer (Microsoft Windows) or Finder (Mac OS X) directly into your drawing area. Note .

" The cursor changes to a pencil with an arc. Click to place the starting point of your arc. and number of segments in the Measurements Toolbar. Or. 2008
. 5.
Page 399
Copyright Google Inc. Move your mouse to adjust the bulge distance.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating an Arc Surface
As mentioned previously." The cursor changes to a pencil. Select the "Push/Pull Tool. Click again to place the ending point of your arc. Click at one end of the arc set the starting point of your line. Click on the face. Move the cursor up to create an arc curve in the positive direction or move the cursor down to expand the arc curve in the negative direction. 12. 6. Click at the other end of the arc to set the ending point of your line. Select the "Line Tool. Click again to set the bulge distance. 7. To draw an arc surface: 1. 3. 9." The cursor will change to a 3D rectangle with an up arrow. optionally type in values for the chord length. This step completes a face consisting of an arc and a straight line. 11. bulge distance. 8. 2. Select the "Arc Tool. arc surfaces are extruded faces with one or more arc edges. Click again when the arc curve has reached the desired size.
10. 4. radius. The vertical curved surface is an arc surface.

4. 8. Click on the face Move the cursor up to create cylinder in the positive direction or move the cursor down to expand the cylinder in the negative direction. 5.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating a Cylindrical Surface
As mentioned previously." The cursor will change to a 3D rectangle with an up arrow. Click again when the cylinder has reached the desired size. The vertical surface is a cylindrical surface. Move the mouse out from the center point to define the radius of your circle. the radius value is displayed dynamically in the Measurements Toolbar and can be specified by typing in a length value followed by pressing the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key.
Page 400
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. Select the "Circle Tool. Click to place the center point of the circle. Select the "Push/Pull Tool. 2. 6. You can also specify the segmentation for the circle in the Measurements Toolbar. 3. As you do so. To draw a cylindrical surface: 1.
Click a second time to finish the circle." The cursor changes to a pencil with a circle. cylindrical surfaces are extruded circles. 7.

Select the "Line Tool. Click again when the polyface surface has reached the desired size. This step completes a face consisting of an arc and a straight line. The vertical curved surface is an polyface surface. 2. Click and hold to place the starting point of your polyline curve.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating a Polyface Surface
As mentioned previously. 6. 5. polyface surfaces are extruded faces with one or more polyline curve edges. 8. Move the cursor up to create the polyface surface in the positive direction or move the cursor down to expand the polyface surface in the negative direction. 3. 9. To draw a polyface surface: 1. Select the "Push/Pull Tool. 2008
. 11." The cursor changes to a pencil. Select the "Freehand Tool. Do not close the curve. 7. Click at the other end of the polyline curve to set the ending point of your line." The cursor will change to a 3D rectangle with an up arrow.
Page 401
Copyright Google Inc. 4. Release the mouse button to stop drawing. Click at one end of the polyline curve to set the starting point of your line. Drag the cursor to draw a polyline curve. Click on the face
10." The cursor will change to a pencil with a polyline curve.

such as graphic images.
The items in this section are divided into the following categories: • • Importers and Exporters Presentations
• Printing The majority of the items in this section are found in the File menu. into your SketchUp file and outputting or presenting your model once it is finished.
Page 402
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Input and Output
This section of the user's guide covers the various mechanisms for inputting items.

3. All of the selected faces are reversed. 2. Select the "Reverse Faces" menu item. Select all of the back faces that are displayed. 1." The Styles Browser is displayed.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Preparing a 3DS File for Export
Ever face in SketchUp has a front and back side. The face settings portion of the Edit panel is displayed. 7. 5. Save the file as a 3DS file. The context menu for a Face entity is displayed. You will want to turn all of the faces in your model so that the front of the face is showing. 6.
10. 2008
. 8. Select the "Window > Styles. Context-click on one of the selected faces. 9. Note the Front color.
Page 403
Copyright Google Inc. The Edit panel is displayed. Click the "Face" settings button." Select the "Monochrome" face style. 4. Select "View > Face Style. Ensure the front of each face is facing out before exporting a model to the 3DS format. Click the "Edit" tab.

(optional) Click the "OK" button. 3. 8. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 411
Copyright Google Inc. Manipulate the view of the model so that it appears as you would like it to appear in the exported file. (optional) Adjust the options in the PDF/EPS Hidden Options dialog box. Select the "PDF" or "EPS" export type from the Export type (Microsoft Windows) or Format (Mac OS X) drop-down list. (optional) Click on the "Options" button. Click the "Export" button." The Export 2D Graphic dialog box is displayed (Microsoft Windows). 5. Enter a file name for the exported file in the File name (Microsoft Windows) or Save As (Mac OS X) field.SketchUp exports the model using the current point of view with the exception of unsupported features such as textures and shadows.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Exporting PDF or EPS Files
To export a 2D PDF or EPS graphic file: 1. Select "File > Export > 2D Graphic. 4. The PDF/EPS Hidden Options dialog box is displayed. 2008
. Note . 7. 2. 6.

Manipulate the view of the model so that it appears as you would like it to appear in the exported file.
2." The Export 2D Graphic dialog box is displayed (Microsoft Windows). Select "File > Export > 2D Graphic.
Page 412
Copyright Google Inc. (optional) Click the "Options" button. Click the "Export" button. and point of view. 3. including display style. SketchUp will export the model view as it is currently displayed. edge rendering. 6. The Export Image Options dialog box is displayed. 8. 5.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Exporting a Raster Image
To export a 2D graphic file: 1. (optional) Adjust the options in the Export Image Options dialog box. Enter a file name for the exported file in the File name (Microsoft Windows) or Save As (Mac OS X) field. 4. 7. shadows. 2008
. (optional) Click the" OK" button. Click the "OK" button. Select the export type from the Export type (Microsoft Windows) or Format (Mac OS X) drop-down list. 9.

(optional) Adjust the options in the Export Options dialog box dialog box. 7. 2. 6. (optional) Click on the "Options" button. Select the "Epix" export type from the Export type (Microsoft Windows) or Format (Mac OS X) drop-down list. Manipulate the view of the model so that it appears as you would like it to appear in the exported file.Your display must be set to 32-bit color in order to correctly export Epix files (Microsoft Windows). 8. (optional) Click the "OK" button. 5. Note . Click the "Export" button. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 414
Copyright Google Inc. 3. Select "File > Export > 2D Graphic. Note . The Export Options dialog box is displayed. 4. 2008
. Enter a file name for the exported file in the File name (Microsoft Windows)or Save As (Mac OS X) field.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Exporting Epix Files
To export an Epix file: 1." The Export 2D Graphic dialog box is displayed (Microsoft Windows).SketchUp exports the model using the current point of view with the exception of unsupported features such as textures and shadows.

4. (optional) Click on the "Options" button. (optional) Adjust the options in the DWG/DXF Hidden Line Options (Microsoft Windows) or Export Options (Mac OS X) dialog box. Note . (optional) Click the "OK" button. 8. 7. 2." The Export 2D Graphic dialog box is displayed (Microsoft Windows).Google SketchUp 7 Help
Exporting 2D DWG or DXF Files
To export a 2D DWG or DXF graphic file: 1. 2008
. 3. Manipulate the view of the model so that it appears as you would like it to appear in the exported file. Enter a file name for the exported file in the File name (Microsoft Windows) or Save As (Mac OS X) field. 5. Select the "DWG" or "DXF" export type from the Export type (Microsoft Windows) or Format (Mac OS X) drop-down list. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 415
Copyright Google Inc. Click the "Export" button.SketchUp exports the model using the current point of view with the exception of unsupported features such as textures and shadows. Select "File > Export > 2D Graphic. The DWG/DXF Hidden Line Options dialog box is displayed. 6.

For better quality results. crop any images to include only the portion of the image to be used if the image will be used as a texture in SketchUp (to minimize impact on file size in SketchUp). Additionally.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Importing Large Images
The maximum size of an image that can be imported into SketchUp is 1024 pixels wide by 1024 pixels high. downsize a larger image before import into SketchUp using a photo editing program like Adobe Photoshop (one that supports bicubic resampling) and save the file as a high-quality JPEG file.
Page 416
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. SketchUp will automatically downsize files larger than the 1024 pixels by 1024 pixels using a medium quality sampling mechanism.

2008
.
Preparing a CAD File for Import
The following tasks should be done before your CAD files are imported into SketchUp: 1. such as civil site plan.
2. SketchUp's face finder will create faces as edges are traced. hatching. such as property lines and parking lot markers to improve performance in SketchUp. logos and other entities that have no 3D relevance.
2. Create a single component from all entities imported into SketchUp that will not be extruded. Move all graphics. 3. Explode objects in AutoCAD to create block entities which are imported into SketchUp as components.
Handling CAD Files in SketchUp
The following tasks should be done before you begin working with your CAD file in SketchUp: 1. there are a few things you should do to your CAD files once they are imported into SketchUp. Delete layers from the CAD file containing text. far from the origin. dimensioning. check the Replace Selection With Component option when you make your component. You might want to move these entities into their own Layer to make this task easier to accomplish. toward the origin in your CAD program. You can also delete these Layers in SketchUp using the Purge command menu.
Page 417
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Preparing a CAD File for Import and Use in SketchUp
You should prepare your CAD files before importing them for use in SketchUp. Additionally. Also. Trace edges from end point to end point that are part of a 2D surface that will be extruded.

Select the "File > Import." The Open dialog box appears. Click the "Open" button.dxf).Google SketchUp 7 Help
Importing CAD Files at the Correct Scale
Apply the appropriate scale when importing a CAD file. Click the "OK" button. 5. Select the type of file to open from the Files of type (Microsoft Windows) or Format (Mac OS X) drop-down list. Select the appropriate scale from the Units drop-down list. such as an AutoCAD Drawing (. 3. 6. 4. 2008
.
Page 418
Copyright Google Inc. 2. Click the "Options" button. The CAD file is imported. The import options for the specific CAD file type appears.dwg) or AutoCAD Interchange File (. To import a CAD file at the correct scale: 1.

Page 419
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Importing an Adobe Illustrator File
Export the Adobe Illustrator drawing using either the AutoCAD Drawing (. you may want to reduce the number of anchor points that define the curve to reduce the number of segments that are created from the curves when the file is imported into SketchUp. especially if you extrude the faces formed by the segments. If your imported geometry contains a lot of segments. the file size can increase dramatically.When exporting Illustrator drawings that include curved line segments (splines). Note .dxf) format for use in SketchUp. Try to balance how many anchor points you think you must include in curved lines by taking into consideration the distance at which the curved lines will be viewed in the model.dwg) or AutoCAD Interchange File (.

Note . 4.It can take several minutes to import a large file because SketchUp's native geometry is very different from most CAD software and the conversion process is calculation-intensive. Click "OK" to import the file. (optional) Click on the "Options" button to modify the import options.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Importing 3D DWG or DXF Files
To import a 3D DWG or DXF model file: 1. Note . Select the type of file to import from the Files of Type (Microsoft Windows) or Format (Mac OS X) drop-down list. 2008
. The model will appear in the drawing area at the origin. The Import Results dialog box will appear containing details of the imported model. for the incoming file." The Open dialog box is displayed. (optional) Click on the "Zoom Extents" Tool to locate the imported model if it is not currently displayed in your drawing area. Select the "File > Import.
Page 420
Copyright Google Inc. such as units. 6. See the following Import Options section for further information. 3.The imported model's entities will be enclosed within a group if geometry existed in the drawing area prior to importing the model. 5. 2. Click "OK" in the Import Results dialog box.

it is a good idea to clean up and import only the CAD content that is absolutely necessary into SketchUp. 2008
. However. one imported CAD file can contain site plan information. Also. Another strategy is to keep different levels of detail in separate CAD files.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Reducing DWG or DXF Import File Size
Try to keep the size of imported files to a minimum.
Strategies for Minimizing CAD File Size
SketchUp models can be designed to be as accurate as models in CAD. a complex CAD file can slow SketchUp's performance because lines and faces in SketchUp have a lot more "intelligence" than their CAD equivalents. once imported. Therefore. SketchUp is not designed for the same type of line-intensive drawings done in CAD software.
Page 421
Copyright Google Inc. For example. Importing very large CAD files can take a long time because each CAD element must be analyzed and converted into a SketchUp entity. and a final file can have a specific detail. another can have a floor plan.

Select the type of file to import from the Files of Type (Microsoft Windows) or Format (Mac OS X) drop-down list. The Open dialog box is displayed. Select the "File > Import" menu item from the File menu. 4. 2008
. Click "OK" to import the file.It can take several minutes to import a large file because SketchUp's native geometry is very different from most CAD software and the conversion process is calculation-intensive. See the following Import Options section for further information.
Page 422
Copyright Google Inc. Click "OK" in the Import Results dialog box.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Importing 3DS Files
To import a 3DS model file: 1. The model will appear in the drawing area at the origin. (optional) Click on the "Zoom Extents" Tool to locate the imported model if it is not currently displayed in your drawing area. 3. (optional) Click on the "Options" button to modify the import options for the incoming file. 5. 6. Note . 2.

Select the type of file to import from the Files of Type (Microsoft Windows) or Format (Mac OS X) drop-down list. 4. (optional) Click on the "Zoom Extents" Tool to locate the imported model if it is not currently displayed in your drawing area. 3.
Page 423
Copyright Google Inc. 2. Select the "File > Import.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Importing DAE Files
To import a DAE file: 1." The Open dialog box is displayed. 2008
. Locate the file you want to import Click "OK" in the Import Results dialog box. The model will appear in the drawing area at the origin. 5.

" The Open dialog box is displayed. Click "OK" to import the file. Note . Click "OK" in the Import Results dialog box. for the incoming file. 4. Select the "File > Import. such as points. See the following Import Options section for further information.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Importing DEM Files
To import a DEM file: 1. the longer it takes the file to load. Additionally.ddf extension from your directory to open DDF files.
Page 424
Copyright Google Inc. 6. (optional) Click on the "Zoom Extents" Tool to locate the imported model if it is not currently displayed in your drawing area. The model will appear in the drawing area at the origin. Select the type of file to import from the Files of Type (Microsoft Windows) or Format (Mac OS X) drop-down list. (optional) Click on the "Options" button to modify the import options.The file import time corresponds to the number of maximum points defined in the Import Options dialog box: the greater number of maximum points.dem file extension to your DEM files to open these files. 2. Caution . The Import Results dialog box will appear containing details of the imported model. Note .You must add the .The imported model's entities will be enclosed within a component. 3. 5. you can select any file with the . 2008
.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Importing Large Images
The maximum size of an image that can be imported into SketchUp is 1024 pixels wide by 1024 pixels high. For better quality results.
Page 425
Copyright Google Inc. crop any images to include only the portion of the image to be used if the image will be used as a texture in SketchUp (to minimize impact on file size in SketchUp). SketchUp will automatically downsize files larger than the 1024 pixels by 1024 pixels using a medium quality sampling mechanism. 2008
. Additionally. downsize a larger image before import into SketchUp using a photo editing program like Adobe Photoshop (one that supports bicubic resampling) and save the file as a high-quality JPEG file.

2008
. Click anywhere in the drawing area to anchor the point of the image held by the cursor. 5. Select the "File > Import.
Page 426
Copyright Google Inc." The Open dialog box is displayed. Drag your mouse away from the anchor point to increase the size of the image. The image will appear in the drawing area.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Importing 2D Graphic Files
To import a 2D graphic file: 1. 4. Select the type of file to import from the Files of Type (Microsoft Windows) or Format (Mac OS X) drop-down list. Locate the file you want to import Click "OK" to import the file. will be anchored to one of the image's corners. 2. Your cursor. 6. 3. which will be an arrow. 7. Click again to finish placing your image.

" The Import dialog box is displayed. 7. Your cursor.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Importing 2D Graphics as Textures
To import a 2D graphic file as a texture: 1. which will be the paint bucket. The paint bucket cursor only appears when the image is over a surface where it can be painted. Refer to the Paint Bucket Tool for additional information on working with textures. Click "OK" to import the file. The image will repeat. Click on a surface to anchor the point of the image held by the cursor. 2. if necessary. 4. 2008
. A thumbnail of the image appears in the Materials Browser's Colors (Microsoft Windows or In Model (Mac OS X) section to indicate that the image is a texture. Drag your mouse away from the anchor point to increase the size of the image on the face. will be anchored to one of the image's corners. Select the type of file to import from the Files of Type (Microsoft Windows) Format (Mac OS X) drop-down list. 8.
Page 427
Copyright Google Inc. Click again to paint your image on the face.
5. Select the "File > Import. The image will appear in the drawing area. 3.
6. to fill the entire face. Locate the file you want to import Click the "Use As Texture" check box if you want your image to be used as a texture upon import (this will require you to paint the image on a an existing surface). See the following Importing 2D Graphics as Textures section for additional information.

mypres0002. at 10 frames per-second.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Exporting an Animation
Animation files can be used to present your model without the need for SketchUp.jpg. For example. Enter the name for the exported file or series of files. The Animation Export Options dialog box is displayed. Or. Select the "File > Export > Animation" menu item. you will get 600 files. you import your files into another presentation or animation product to further enhance your animations. 2.jpg. The animation exporter will combine this name with a sequencing number for each image file that is created as part of a multiple image file animation. 3. Select the export type from the Export type drop-down list. if you export a 1 minute presentation called mypres.
The following image contains the Animation Export Options dialog box on Mac OS X:
Page 429
Copyright Google Inc. mypress0003. Click on the "Options" button.jpg. The following image contains the Animation Export Options dialog box on Microsoft Windows:
4. The Export Animation Dialog box is displayed.jpg all the way to mypress0600. To Export an animation as an animation file (or series of image files): 1. each named mypres0001. 2008
.jpg.

Click on the "Export" button to export the presentation as an animation. 2008
.
Modify animation export options as necessary. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 430
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
5. 6. See Animation Export Options in this topic for further information.

Select the "View > Animation > Play" menu item. stopping. 2008
. To run an animation: 1. and pausing an animation. Press the "Pause" button to pause the animation. Press the "Stop" button to stop the animation. 2.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Running an Animation
SketchUp contains controls for starting. Note . 3. The animation controls are displayed and the animation starts to cycle through your scenes.You can also context-click on a scene tab and select Play Animation to begin an animation
Page 431
Copyright Google Inc.

= Functionality only available in SketchUp Pro
Page 432
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. Refer to Animation Export Options for further information. using the "File > Export > Animation" menu item. or series of progressive raster images.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Saving Animations
SketchUp animations can be exported as a video animation.

You can also Print to Scale and span a print across multiple sheets. allowing you to output a large drawing from a standard printer. Select the paper size for your printer using "File > Print Setup.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Printing (Microsoft Windows)
SketchUp allows you to print your designs using any Windows-compatible printing device. 3." Configure the output size and preview your output using "File > Print Preview. 2008
." Print your model using "File > Print. Printing is a three-step process: 1. 2."
Page 433
Copyright Google Inc.

py .bugsplatsoftware.google.
Page 438
Copyright Google Inc.zip in your Windows temporary directory). This dialog box will also indicate the name and location of the zip file (normally AtLastCrashMMDDYY_HHMMSS.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Loading An Offline Crash Report (Microsoft Windows)
If a crash occurs when you are not connected to the Internet. 2008
.php and follow the instructions on the Web page to send this file to BugSplat Software when you reconnect to the Internet. Or email the zip file to Google directly by contacting technical support at http://sketchup. BugSplat displays a dialog box indicating that a zip file has been created on your local hard drive.com/post/post_form. Go to http://www.com/support/bin/request.

Select the "Dynamic Components > Component Attributes" menu item. 2008
.Configuring a dynamic component is easier when the component is placed at the origin of the axes in SketchUp. 3. 2. Create a new component that is comprised entirely from groups or sub-component instances. BottomRail. The Component Attributes dialog box is displayed. when scaled with the Scale Tool. The parent component and each sub-component have a unique name. The component's context menu is displayed.
Note .top rail. TopRail. bottom rail. This component contains 4 sub-components: post. will not change size or orientation to the axes. the parent component is called Fence and it contains Post.
Page 442
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Constraining Attributes of a Dynamic Component
A constrained dynamic component is a component that has elements (sub-components or sub-groups) that. and Picket sub-components. and picket sub-components. Following is an image of the fence component used in this example. For example. To constrain entities of a dynamic component: 1. Context-click on the component. each with a unique name.

An empty list of attributes appears for the component.Google SketchUp 7 Help
4. 2008
. A list of predefined attributes is displayed. All of the position attributes are displayed for the component. The field is opened for editing.
5. Click on the "add attribute" button in the last row of the Fence component. Click on "Position" in the list of predefined attributes.
Click the plus (+) button next to the Fence component.
Click on the "add attribute" button in the last row of the Fence component. A list of predefined attributes is displayed. The field is opened for editing. 6. 7.
Page 443
Copyright Google Inc.

Click on the "add attribute" button in the last row of the TopRail component. So. The field is opened for editing. Double-click in the field next to the X attribute in the TopRail sub-component. and Z axes. 13. but to their parent component's axes. All of the size attributes are displayed for the component. All of the size attributes are displayed for the component. Type "=4" in the LenY field to constrain the length of the Fence component in the Y direction (the fence cannot be scaled in the Y direction). sub-component X. Y. Erase the current value. for example. 11. all components have their own axes. 16. Click on the plus sign "+" next to the TopRail sub-component to display its attributes.
9. A list of predefined attributes is displayed. Double-click in the field next to the LenY attribute in the Fence component. Y (green ). 12. The value for LenY (4) is displayed in black to indicate it is constrained (the fence cannot be resized using the Scale Tool). if the parent component's Z is 2". The following image shows these attributes within the Fence component. The field is opened for editing. Click on "Size" in the list of predefined attributes.
Click on "Size" in the list of predefined attributes. Remember. and Z (blue) refer to the location of the parent component's axes relative to the SketchUp axis. and LenZ refer to the length of the component in either the X. 17. The field is opened for editing. All of the position attributes are displayed for the component.
• •
10. every sub-component will have the X. However. So. LenX. Press the "Tab" key to accept the formula.Google SketchUp 7 Help
8. 19. Y. 15. or Z direction. A list of predefined attributes is displayed.
Examine the parent component's default attributes: • X (red). LenY. and Z values are relative not to the SketchUp Axes. 14. Click on "Position" in the list of predefined attributes. 18.
Page 444
Copyright Google Inc. All of the attributes are faded gray color to indicate they are not constrained to a specific value. The field is opened for editing. Y. 2008
. Click on the "add attribute" button in the last row of the TopRail component. the component is 2" above the origin.

Unconstrained values (values that could be altered when scaling a component) are in light gray. But all other values. For example.Move the cursor over a field and click the mouse button to create a reference to the content in that field in your formulas. 24. The value of TopRail's Z is constrained to 9 inches below the length of Fence (Fence!LenZ). Press the "Tab" key to accept the formula. clicking on the LenZ field of Fence would place "Fence!LenZ" in the currently edited formula. 28. The field is opened for editing. Type "=1. Some of the parent's values might be constrained depending on the type of component you are creating. The field is opened for editing. Type "=4" in the X field of the TopRail to constrain the TopRail to 4" along the X axis from the Fence's origin (to accommodate the 4" width of the Pole).Google SketchUp 7 Help
20. Double-click in the field next to the Z attribute. 23. 21. 26. 25. 27. 29. Double-click in the field next to the LenX attribute. 22. The field is opened for editing. including Fence's location to SketchUp's axes (X. 30. The following image shows the changes made in steps 9 through 29:
Tip . 2008
. Type "=Fence!LenZ-9" in the Z field of the TopRail to constrain the Pole's Z value using a formula based on the overall height of the Fence (Fence!LenZ).Constrained values appear in solid black text. Note . Double-click in the field next to the Y attribute.Y. Erase the current value. Erase the current value. Press the "Tab" key to accept the formula.25" along the Y axis from the Fence's origin (the middle of the Pole).
Page 445
Copyright Google Inc. For example.25" in the Y field of the TopRail to constrain the TopRail to 1. the Fence's thickness (LenY) is constrained to 4". Press the "Tab" key to accept the formula. you want all of your sub-component's values constrained.Generally. and Z) are unconstrained so it can be moved anywhere and scaled in the X and Z directions (LenX and LenZ).

The following image shows the changes made in steps 30 through 41:
42. Continue constraining all of the default attributes (X.
Page 446
Copyright Google Inc. The component should only scale in the directions that are unconstrained (the X and Z directions). 44.Google SketchUp 7 Help
31. 40. The field is opened for editing. Erase the current value. The thickness of TopRail is set to 1. 39. 35. Click on the "Close" button. 41. All of TopRail's default attributes are now constrained so that the component will not change its position and size when scaled. The field is opened for editing. Use the Scale Tool to scale your component. Type "=1. 36. Press the "Tab" key to accept the formula. Sub-components should retain their dimensions (such as post and picket width and depth). 38.Y. 43. Type "=Fence!LenX-Post!LenX" in TopRail's LenX field. Erase the current value.5". The height of TopRail is set to 3. 32.5" in TopRail's LenY field. 2008
.Z. LenY. and LenZ) for each of Fence's sub-components. Erase the current value. Hint: you will want to constrain the LenZ of the picket to some value that is relative to the Fence's LenZ so the picket resizes proportionally to the fence in the Z (blue) direction. 37. Type "=3. Press "Tab" to accept the formula.5 ". Double-click in the field next to the LenY attribute. The length of the TopRail will be constrained to the length of Fence minus the length of the post (4"). Double-click in the field next to the LenZ attribute. LenZ. Press the "Tab" key to accept the formula. 33.5" in TopRail's LenZ field. 34.

3.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating a Dynamic Component
Creating a dynamic component consists of the following high-level steps: 1. Test your component to ensure it works correctly. 3. Use the Tab key to tab between fields or to accept a value. Select the "Dynamic Components > Component Attributes" menu item. The component's context menu is displayed. For example. 5. Save your component to a component file. Context-click on the component. each with a unique name. You will only create components with subcomponents in this getting started portion of the documentation.
Add variables and values to your component to make it dynamic. 2008
.
2. Create a new component that is comprised entirely from groups or sub-component instances. Use the equals sign (=) to assign a value or formula to a variable Use an exclamation point (!) to refer to a value outside of the current subcomponent. 6. The Component Attributes dialog box is displayed.
Page 447
Copyright Google Inc. The Component Attributes dialog box is a two-column spreadsheet of attribute and attribute value pairs. This spreadsheet follows general spreadsheet rules: 1. 2.
4. Fence!spacing refers to the value of the spacing variable in the Fence component.

A list of predefined attributes appears. Note . To add a custom attribute: 1. Click on the title (in gray) of the group of predefined attributes. Click on the add attribute button in the Component Attributes dialog box. 2. 2. The custom attribute is accepted and you are prompted to enter a value for the attribute.Attribute names cannot have spaces and must start with a letter. To add a group of predefined attributes: 1. Click on the add attribute button in the Component Attributes dialog box. A list of predefined attributes appears. A list of predefined attributes appears.
Adding a Pre-Defined Attribute
The Component Attributes dialog box contains several pre-defined attributes you can add to your components. Enter the name of the custom attribute in the "Enter Name" field. with the phrase "Enter Name" also appears. with the phrase "Enter Name" also appears.
Adding a Custom Attribute
You can add any number of custom attributes to your dynamic components to embed special functionality into the component. All of the predefined attributes in the group appear in the first column of the Component Attributes dialog box. 2. or you can add a group of attributes. A field with the phrase "Enter Name" also appears. Click on the add attribute button in the Component Attributes dialog box. 2008
. The name appears in the first column of the Component Attributes dialog box. A field. A field. To add a predefined attribute: 1. Press the Tab key. 3. Click on a predefined attribute.
Adding an Attribute Group
The Attribute Manger contains several pre-defined attributes you can add to your components.
Page 448
Copyright Google Inc. you can add your own custom attribute.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Adding an Attribute
There are three ways to add attributes to your dynamic components: You can add attributes from a menu of predefined attributes.

such as the pickets of a fence component. Refer to Constraining Attributes of a Dynamic Component for further information.
Note . Following is an image of the fence component. such as the fence with one picket. 3.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Repeating a Sub-Component Within a Dynamic Component (1 Dimension)
A repetitive dynamic component is a component containing a sub-component that repeat. or the steps of a stair component.The components in this example must be constrained before you can perform these steps. The component's context menu is displayed. a bottom rail. 2. and a post. You are going to replicate the picket subcomponent as the component is scaled in the X direction. a picket. circular for circular stairs.
Page 449
Copyright Google Inc. Context-click on the component. diagonally for stairs. Select the "Dynamic Components > Component Attributes" menu item. and so on). This component contains 4 sub-components: a top rail. The main issue when creating a replicating sub-component is the spacing between each replicated part and how the part is replicated (linearly for a fence. Create the component with one of the replicating subcomponents. 2008
. 1. The Component Attributes dialog box is displayed.

A list of predefined attributes is displayed.
Page 450
Copyright Google Inc.
5. Type "spacing" and press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key. 2008
. Note . The field is opened for editing. 6.
Click on the "Add attribute" button in the last row of the Fence component. An attribute named "spacing" is placed in a list of attributes called "Custom. Refer to Constraining Attributes of a Dynamic Component for further information. A list of attributes appears for the component.A list of attributes will only appear if you have constrained the component before trying these steps. Type "2"
7." The field next to the spacing attribute is opened for editing.
Click the plus (+) button next to the Fence component.Google SketchUp 7 Help
4.

TopRail!LenX is the length of the TopRail component in the X direction. Double-click on the value in the value field for the X attribute. You need to create a formula that will yield a number of copies given the length of TopRail (or BottomRail) component.
Click the plus (+) button next to the Picket component. Click on the "add attribute" button in the last row of the Picket component. Z coordinate as the original Picket component (so all your pickets are exactly at the same spot). 12. 14. The first part of this formula. 2008
. A list of predefined attributes is displayed. The field is populated with the word "Copies" and the field next to the Copies attribute is opened for editing. Press the "Backspace" (Microsoft Windows) or Delete (Mac OS X) key to delete the current value for the X attribute. You have established a spacing value of 2" between pickets. Type "=5+COPY*(Fence!spacing+LenX)"
Page 451
Copyright Google Inc. we will use a formula to position. The field is opened for editing. Picket copy 2. The following image shows the results of steps 5 through 8. The copies of the original picket will display as Picket copy 1. Type "=(TopRail!LenX)/(Picket!LenX+Fence!spacing)-1" 13. 11.
Press the "Tab" key to accept the value. Press the "Tab" key to accept the value. Click on the "Copies" attribute in the list. This number is then divided by the width of a picket plus the spacing (Picket!LenX+Fence!spacing).
10. Picket copy 3.Google SketchUp 7 Help
8. These copies are placed at the same X. A list of attributes appears for the component. in the X direction. Next. 15. 16. A value of 1 is then subtracted from the total. and so on. and.Open the Outliner to see the copies being made as the component is scaled.
9. each copy of Picket. this formula yields the number of pickets that are created given the length of TopRail. As mentioned. Note .

So. and so on. The following image shows the results of steps 9 through 17. Press the "Tab" key to accept the value.
Page 452
Copyright Google Inc. equal to 2 for the second copy. The Copy attribute is simply a counter that begins at 0 (for the original Picket) and adds one for each additional copy.Google SketchUp 7 Help
17.Multiplication takes place before addition. you will only ever see the X value for the original Picket component in the Component Attributes dialog box.
Note . This formula uses a predefined attribute called Copy to determine X positioning for each picket. 2008
. equal to 3 for the third copy. Click on the close button. However. 18. Copy is equal to 1 for the first copy.

Use the Scale Tool to scale your component in the X direction.
Page 453
Copyright Google Inc. The component should add pickets as you scale. Refer to Hiding Scale Handles for further information.
You might consider hiding the scale handles so that only the handles in the X direction are visible when using the Scale Tool.Google SketchUp 7 Help
19. The following image shows the Fence component after scaling along the X axis. 2008
.

The component's context menu is displayed. This document assumes you are familiar with 1 dimensional replication. Context-click on the component. 2008
. such as the tiles within a floor component.
Page 454
Copyright Google Inc.You should create a component whose subcomponent replicates in one direction prior to creating a component whose subcomponent replicates in two directions.
To replicate a subcomponent within a parent component (in two dimensions): 1. Note . Refer to Repeating a Sub-Component Within a Dynamic Component (1 Dimension). 2.
Following is an image of the Floor component after it has been scaled. Create your component with one subcomponent. the component scales in 2 dimensions. Now the Floor has 8 copies of the replicating Tile subcomponent. In the case of a floor and tiles. Following is an image of the Floor component containing 1 Tile sub-component (it simply looks like one tile). The Tile sub-component replicates as the Floor component is scaled in the X and Y directions (using the Scale Tool). X.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Repeating a Sub-Component Within a Dynamic Component (2 Dimensions)
A repetitive dynamic component is a component containing a sub-component that replicate. such as a floor with one tile. and Y.

Use a formula in the field next to the Floor's Rows attribute to determine the number of rows in the parent component.
Select the "Dynamic Components > Component Attributes" menu item. Note .The floor function. Position is determined by establishing a multiplier that represents the row or column and then multiplying the multiplier by the size of the subcomponent to establish its X and Y location. Use a formula in the field next to the myRow attribute that iterates through each copy and determines the row where the copy will be placed. Create an attribute. Add the Copies attribute to the Tile subcomponent. For example: =Floor!rows*Floor!columns-1 14. b. Ensure that the attributes for all components are visible. in the Tile subcomponent. Create a Rows attribute in the Floor component to hold the number of rows in your dynamic component. with one argument.Google SketchUp 7 Help
3. 2008
. such as myRow. rounds the result down to the nearest whole number.
Page 455
Copyright Google Inc. This formula will be based on the size of the replicating subcomponent (Tile) and overall size of the parent component (Floor).
10. 7.The ceiling function. Create a Columns attribute in the Floor component to hold the number of rows in your dynamic component. then myRow will be equal to 2. Establish the position of each replicating subcomponent (the exact column and row). such as 12. The copies are calculated by multiplying the rows by columns and subtracting one (for the original). Set TileSize to some value. that represents the size of the replicating subcomponent. For example: =CEILING(LenX/TileSize) Note . 13. in the Floor component. 6. This formula will be based on the tile size of the replicating subcomponent (Tile) and overall size of the parent component (Floor). For example. For example: =Floor(COPY/Floor!columns) If Copy equals 7. 4. 9. a. Use a formula in the field next to the Copies attribute to calculate the number of copies of the replicating subcomponent. For example: =CEILING(LenY/TileSize) 12. rounds the result of LenY/tilesize to the nearest bigger whole number. 11. 5. Set the LenX and LenY of the Tile subcomponent to the size in the parent component. set LenX to equal Floor!TileSize and LenY to equal Floor!TileSize (for the Floor Tile subcomponent). with only one argument. Note that rows start at 0. 8. The Component Attributes dialog box is displayed. this example contains a TileSize attribute. Create an attribute to hold the row multiplier. For example. and there are 3 columns in the object. so 2 represents the 3rd row. Use a formula in the field next to the Floor component's Columns attribute to determine the number of columns in the parent component.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
c. For example: =COPY-(myRow*Floor!columns) If copy equals 7. in the Tile subcomponent. then myColumn will be equal to 1.
Use a formula in the field next to the Tile sub-component's Y attribute to calculate the location of the sub-component. 2008
.The floor function. such as myColumn.
Create an attribute to hold the column multiplier. For example: Y =myRow*floor!tilesize The following is an image of the Component Attributes dialog box with all Floor and Title attributes:
Page 456
Copyright Google Inc. Note that columns start at 0. myRow equals 2 (calculated previously) and there are 3 columns in the object. Note .
Use a formula in the field next to the Tile subcomponent's X attribute to calculate the location of the sub-component. For example: X =myColumn*floor!tilesize
f. with one argument. so 1 represents the 2rd row. rounds the result down to the nearest whole number. d.
e. Use a formula in the field next to the myColumn attribute that iterates through each copy and determines the column where the copy will be placed.

Press the "Tab" key to accept the value. Notice that the top-level component is listed. This field contains the user-friendly name you want to appear in the configuration box for this attribute." This article explains how to configure the more complex display rule: "Users can select from a list. A list of attributes appears for the component. and table. such as the spacing between pickets in a fence or the width of your stairs. A row is created with the field in the List Option column open for edit. 3. Select the "Dynamic Components > Component Attributes" menu item. 7." Select "Users can select from a list. The Component Attributes dialog box is displayed.
Page 458
Copyright Google Inc. The component's context menu is displayed.
5. 2008
. 9. The following image shows the Display rule drop-down list. Values that are configurable will appear in a Component Options dialog box accessible from the component's context menu. There are two display rules allowing you to configure the attribute: "Users can edit as textbox" and "Users can select from a list. Context-click on the component. Click the plus (+) button next to the component's name. Display label field. 2. To make a value configurable: 1." The Display label and a table appear. Type "Small" in the "List Option" field.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Making Attribute Values End-User Configurable
You might want to allow the users of your dynamic component to configure some values of your dynamic component. Click on the "Details" button to the right of the attribute you want to make end-user configurable. A drop-down list of display rules appears. Press the "Tab" key. 4. 8.
Type a label in the in the "Display label" field. Click the "add option" icon in the "List Option" column of the table.
10.
6. This text will appear in a drop-down list in the Configure Options dialog box. Type "1" in the Value field. 11.

15. 2" Large . Repeat • • •
steps
7
through
11
using
the
option
and
value
pairs
of:
Medium . The user of this component can now configure the component's Slat Spacing attribute using the Configure Options dialog box. The Component Attributes dialog box closes. 2008
. 4
The following image shows the attribute details panel with all completed fields:
14.Google SketchUp 7 Help
12. 3 Extra Large . The attribute details panel closes. Click on the "Close" button.
Page 459
Copyright Google Inc. Click on the "Apply" button. Refer to Configuring a Dynamic Component for further information.

This is an important aspect of gluing components because it affects the variables you use in your formulas. not LenZ. For example. if you want to constrain a gluing component that glues to vertical surfaces. such as window. LenZ will have a value for length along the green axis and the LenY will have a value for the length along the blue axis.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Making a Dynamic Gluing Component
The process of creating a component using the create component dialog box is the same for both dynamic and regular components (dynamic components are different in that you have visibility into their internal attributes). to a specific height.
Page 460
Copyright Google Inc. you're formula will have to constrain LenY. As a dynamic component creator you will notice that the blue and green axes (LenY and LenZ) are swapped when you edit the attributes of a component that has a specific gluing orientation (such as a component that glues only to vertical surfaces). 2008
.

6. The following image shows the attribute details panel:
6. The attribute details panel is displayed. Click on the "add attribute" button in the last row of the attributes list. Click on the "ScaleTool" attribute in the list. To hide scale handles using the ScaleTool attribute: 1. 2. 2008
. An empty list of attributes appears for the component. alternatively. The attribute details panel closes. The field is opened for editing.
10.
Uncheck the checkboxes next to the scale handles you want to toggle off. Click the plus (+) button next to the component's name. Notice that the top-level component is listed. A list of predefined attributes is displayed. The scaling grips that are toggled on will appear around the Dynamic Component. 8. 9. Click on the Dynamic Component. Or. check the checkboxes next to the scale handles you want to toggle on. 7. The field is populated with the word "ScaleTool. The cursor will change to a box within another box. Select the "Scale Tool" ( ). Select the "Dynamic Components > Component Attributes" menu item. The Component Attributes dialog box is displayed. The component's context menu is displayed. 4. 3." Click on the "Details" button to the right of the ScaleTool attribute. Click on the "Close" button.
Page 461
Copyright Google Inc. Context-click on the component.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Hiding Scale Handles
Add the ScaleTool attribute to your Dynamic Component to toggle display of scale handles on the component (limiting how users can scale the component). 5. Click on the "Save" button. The Component Attributes dialog box closes.

3.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Implementing Dynamic Pricing
You can create a component whose pricing changes based on the type of material or size of component the user chooses. Select the "Dynamic Components > Component Attributes" menu item. such as a cabinet door. Click on the "add attribute" button in the last row of the component.
Page 462
Copyright Google Inc.
2. A drop-down list of display rules appears. A drop-down list of attributes appears. Notice that the top-level component is listed. 5. The field is populated with the word "Material" and the field next to the Material attribute is opened for editing. The component's context menu is displayed. Create a component. The Component Attributes dialog box is displayed.
Context-click on the component. 6. Click on the "Details" button to the right of the Material value. 4. Click on the "Material" attribute in the list. 2008
. To implement dynamic pricing in your dynamic component: 1.

This text will appear in a drop-down list in the Configure Options dialog box. 12. 9. The following image shows the Display rule drop-down list.
Replace the word "Material" with "Wood Type" in the "Display label" field.Google SketchUp 7 Help
7. Type "Wood_Cherry_Original" in the Value field. Click the "Add option" icon in the "List Option" column of the table. The Display label and a table appear. This is the name of a specific material in the Materials Browser. 11. Display label field. 13.
Page 463
Copyright Google Inc. and table.
10. A row is created with the field in the List Option column open for edit.
Select "Users can select from a list" from the Display rule drop-down list. Type "Cherry" in the "List Option" field. 2008
. Press the "Tab" key.
8. Press the "Tab" key to accept the value.

Context-click on the component.15. if(MATERIAL="Wood_Cherry_Original". 2008
.50. 17. 19." The field next to the Cost attribute is opened for editing. 16. Select the "Component Options" menu item. Repeat steps 9 through 13 using the option and value pairs of: • • Cork . Click on the "Close" button.00.25))" 18. Press the Tab key to accept the formula. Press the "Apply" button.40. 21. 15. The Component Options dialog box is displayed. Wood_Plywood_Knots
The following image shows the attribute details panel with all completed fields:
14. 20. Type "=if(MATERIAL="Wood_Board_Cork". The component's context menu is displayed. Wood_Board_Cork Plywood. This formula assigns a cost for the door based on the material (wood) that is selected by the user. A drop-down list of attributes appears. Type "Cost" and press the Tab key. An attribute named "Cost" is placed in a list of attributes called "Custom. The attribute details panel closes.Google SketchUp 7 Help
14. Click on the "Add attribute" button in the last row of the component. The following is an image of the Component Options dialog box for the Television dynamic component:
Page 464
Copyright Google Inc.60.

the price $40. the price is $60. but changes the MSRP of the door to reflect the wood type.25) In the previous example. if the third choice in a drop-down list of materials is chosen (Plywood). For example: MSRP =CHOOSE (OPTIONINDEX("MATERIAL"). the price is $15.50. And. if the first choice in a drop-down list of materials is chosen (Cork).You can also use the CHOOSE and OPTIONINDEX functions in place of nested if statements (as in step 17). 2008
. 40. 60.
Page 465
Copyright Google Inc.50. 15.25. If the second choice in a drop-down list of materials is chosen (Cherry). Tip .Google SketchUp 7 Help
Choosing different Wood Types from the drop-down list not only changes the SketchUp material applied to the component (to reflect the wood type).

such as kitchen cabinets.10) These formulas are useful for components that represent items that must not be smaller than or larger than a specific size.
Snapping to One of a Series of Specific Values
Place the following formula in the LenX field for a component to snap the component's LenX to the nearest value (24. 2008
.48) This formula is useful for components that represent items that come in a pre-defined series of sizes.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating a Dynamic Component That Snaps to a Specific Size
You can constrain a component to a series of predefined sizes by placing specific formulas in the LenX.
Snapping to the Nearest Rounded Value
Place the following formula in the LenX field for a component to snap the component's LenX to the nearest width within 2 inches after scaling: LenX =ROUND(CURRENT("LenX")/2)*2 This formula is useful for components that represent items that only come in whole number sizes.
Snapping to a Smallest or Largest Size
Place the following formula in the LenX field for a component to snap the component's LenX to 20 inches wide when a scale operation scales the component beyond 20 inches: LenX =SMALLEST(CURRENT("LenX"). 36.20) Place the following formula in the LenX field for a component to snap the component's LenX to 10 inches wide when a scale operation scales the component below 10 inches: LenX =LARGEST(CURRENT("LenX"). LenY. or LenZ fields of the parent component.24.36.
Page 466
Copyright Google Inc. or 48 inches) in a list after scaling: LenX =NEAREST(CURRENT("LenX").

must be embedded in the Dynamic Component to be accessible when that component is used on different computers. such as photographic textures of a specific material). The texture is now embedded in the component and will be available to all users of the component. create a face on the bottom of a couch component. To embed a texture in a Dynamic Component: 1. For example. Apply the unique texture to the face. Create your Dynamic Component. 3.
Page 467
Copyright Google Inc. Create a small face (it can be as small as a few millimeters) on the component that is not visible to the user. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Using Unique Textures in Dynamic Components
Dynamic Components that use unique textures (textures that do not ship with SketchUp. 2.

Page 468
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Deleting an Attribute
Click on the minus icon to the right of an attribute's value field to delete the attribute.

Page 469
Copyright Google Inc. not a predefined attribute. 2008
. Note .You can only change the name of a custom attribute.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Renaming an Attribute or Component Name
Double-click on an attribute name or component name in the Component Attributes dialog box to rename the attribute or component.

2008
. 3. Select "Dynamic Components > Swap Component. Select the dynamic components you want to replace. Context-click on one component. The components are highlighted in the drawing window. The new Dynamic Component replaces the previously selected Dynamic Components. 2. use this option to swap all windows of a specific type or manufacturer with windows of another type or manufacturer." The Select a SKP dialog box is displayed. 5. Click the "Open" button. For example. Select the SketchUp file containing the Dynamic Component to replace the currently selected components.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Swapping Multiple Dynamic Components
Use the Swap Component menu item to swap the currently selected component with another component. 4. The context menu is displayed.
Page 470
Copyright Google Inc. To swap out a series of components: 1.

4. This same method can be used to calculate total board feet for wood used in a project. 3. Select "File > Generate Report. 7. Click on the "Generate xml file" button or "Generate csv file" button to generate either an XML or CSV file. Each components' bounding box is highlighted. Click the "Save" button. 6. A dialog box displays. The report is displayed in Microsoft Excel (or any program that can display .Google SketchUp 7 Help
Generating an Attribute Report
An Attribute Report is a comma separated value file containing all attributes and values in a dynamic component. Context-click on the component.
Page 471
Copyright Google Inc.csv files).
5. Then. Note . Click the "Yes" button to display the Attribute Report." The Generate Report dialog is displayed. The component's context menu is displayed. use the SUM formula in Microsoft Excel (after creating an Attribute Report) to calculate the total cost of all items in the selection set. Click the "All model attributes" button to save a report with all attributes in your model or click the "Current selection attributes" to save a report with the attributes in your current selection. 2. To generate an Attribute Report: 1. Use the "Select Tool" to select one or more dynamic components. such as all cabinets. in a scene that have costs attributes. The Attribute Report is saved.You can select all components. and so on. 2008
.

4.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Configuring a Dynamic Component
Some dynamic components have the ability for the values of certain geometry to be enduser configurable using a Component Options dialog box. 2008
. Select the "Dynamic Components > Component Options" menu item. The Component Options dialog box is displayed. The component's geometry should reflect changes in the Component Options dialog box. The component's context menu is displayed. The following is an image of the Component Options dialog box for the Fencedynamic component:
3. 2.
Type values in fields or select options from drop-down menus as applicable. To configure a component: 1. Context-click on the component. The Fence component has two fields and three drop-down lists.
Page 472
Copyright Google Inc. Click the "Apply" button to apply your configuration changes to the component.

The component contains sub-component of the component is dynamic.
The component will have a badge ( ) on its thumbnail in the Component Browser or in the Google 3D Warehouse indicating that it is dynamic when it meets one of the previous conditions. ScaleTool or Copies attributes. Setting an attribute to some value using the equal sign (=).A file can only contain one Dynamic Component (without any additional geometry) to be identified as a Dynamic Component. Note . 2008
. such as "=123" is sufficient. The component contains a formula assigned to one if its attributes.
Page 473
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Identifying Dynamic Components
A component is considered dynamic when one of the following conditions is met: • • • The component contains the onClick.

2008
. These tasks are covered within other topics in the user's guide. but are addressed as high-level topics here to facilitate the search capabilities of the online user's guide (so these issues are listed when a search is performed).Google SketchUp 7 Help
Common Tasks
This section of the user's guide addresses common tasks that new users ask about as they are learning SketchUp.
Page 474
Copyright Google Inc.

For example. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Adding a Background to Your Model
SketchUp allows you add image files to your model and position those images such that they act as a background.
Page 475
Copyright Google Inc. you can have a single image placed vertically behind a house so that you can study what will be seen from certain angles within the house.

To change the cursor to axes colors: 1. 3. The colors of the edges in your model change to reflect their alignment to the axes.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Ensuring Edge Alignment to Axes
There are two methods to ensure your edges align to axes: change the cursor to the axes colors or change your edges to the axes colors. 4. Select the "In Drawing" item on the left-hand side of the Preferences dialog box. The styles in your model appear.
Changing Cursor to Axes Colors
One method for ensuring your edges are aligned to axes is to change the cursor so that it displays cross hairs that are the colors of the axes while drawing. 2.
Page 476
Copyright Google Inc. 4. Click the "OK" button to close the Preferences dialog box. 3. Select "Window > Styles. Select "In Model" from the drop-down list of styles libraries. 2.
Changing Edges to Axes Colors
A second method for ensuring your edges are aligned to axes is to temporarily change the colors of your edges to reflect their alignment to one of the axis. The cursor will display cross hairs that are the color of the axes. The Edge Setting panel appears. 5. 2008
. Click on the "Edge Settings" icon. The Preferences dialog box is displayed. Select "By axis" from the Color drop-down list. The Drawing panel is displayed. To change edge colors to reflect axes colors: 1. Click on the "Edit" tab. Select "Window > Preferences" (Microsoft Windows) or "SketchUp > Preferences" (Mac OS X). Click the "Display cross hairs" checkbox." The Styles Browser is displayed. One of the edit panels appears.

3. 2008
. click on the "Claim Credit" button in the Credits panel of the Model Info dialog box to sign in. Save and. Your nickname will appear in the Modeled by field in the Contributors section of the Model Info Credits panel. Click the Sign In button. 7.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Claiming Credit on a Model
SketchUp allows you to claim credit on the models you create and make available to others to use using the 3D Google Warehouse. The cursor moves to the Password field. The Google Login button is now highlighted to indicated you are signed in.You can also click on the credits button on the status bar to display the Credits Model Info dialog box. Your username appears in the Author section of the Model Info Credits panel. Press the "Tab" key.Alternatively. Create your model in SketchUp. such as models found in the 3D Google Warehouse." The Credits panel displays author and contributor information. Note -You must sign in every time you run SketchUp. Type in your Username in the Username field. 5. Note . Your nickname will appear as the first contributor if your model is included in someone else's model. Your model can be composed of other models. (optional) Check the "Keep me signed in on this computer" checkbox. 8. Type in your Password in the Password field. To claim credit on a model: 1. optionally. The Sign In dialog box appears. 4.
Page 477
Copyright Google Inc. Click on the Google Login button on the Status Bar. 2. Open the Credits panel of "Window > Model Info. The list of contributors will have component and contributor names if you are using pre-made components in your model. upload your model to the 3D Google Warehouse. 6. Your username stays with the model as it is reused in other models. Note .
9.

2. Use the Move Tool if you want to create one or more copies of a piece of geometry at specified distance intervals from the original piece of geometry. 2008
.
Page 478
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Copying Geometry
There are two ways to copy geometry in SketchUp: 1. Use the Copy and Paste commands to copy geometry.

Caution .Orbiting will move a model out of 2-point perspective. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Creating a 2-Point Perspective
Select "Camera > Two-Point Perspective" to achieve a 2-point perspective view of your model. You will be placed in the Pan Tool to pan around your model.
Page 479
Copyright Google Inc.

Page 480
Copyright Google Inc. Drag the cursor back and forth along the length of the entity to increase or decrease the number of divisions." A string of red dots appears along the line segment. Type in the number of desired segments followed by pressing the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key to manually divide the entity. 4.
This menu item is available for the 3D Polyline. and Polygon entities. Circle. 2008
. A tooltip displays the number and length of segments that will be created if you pause briefly on the entity. 3.
Note .The number of divisions is also displayed in the Measurements Toolbar. Click again to divide the entity. 2. Line. The entity will be broken into separate segments. Context-click on the entity to invoke the entity's context menu Select "Divide.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Dividing Lines or Arcs Into Equal Segments
To divide a line or arc into equal segments: 1.

Use the "Protractor Tool" to create a Guide Line entity at some angle. 2. To draw accurate angled lines: 1. Use the "Line Tool" to trace over the Guide Line entity and create the line. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing Accurate Angled Lines
Drawing accurate angled lines is a two-step process.
Page 481
Copyright Google Inc.

require experience with several SketchUp tools and features. Draw a circle on the ground plane at the origin.
2.
Page 482
Copyright Google Inc. You should be competent with the following tools and features before attempting to draw a bowl: • • • • • • The Circle Tool The Follow-Me Tool The Offset Tool The Line Tool The Eraser Tool Inference
One common way to draw a bowl is: 1. The size of this circle does not matter. such as drawing a bowl or sphere.
Move the cursor to the origin.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing a Bowl
Advanced tasks. 2008
. This circle will be used as a path used to draw the side of the bowl. The cursor should snap to the origin.

Draw a circle perpendicular to the circle on the ground plane whose radius represents the radius of the outside of your bowl.
Press and hold the "Shift" key to lock the Circle Tool in the green or red inference direction. The cursor should turn green or red.
Page 483
Copyright Google Inc. 5.Google SketchUp 7 Help
3.
Move the cursor up the blue axis (above the circle on the ground plane).
4. 2008
.

The offset distance represents the bowl thickness.Google SketchUp 7 Help
6.
Page 484
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.
7.
Use the "Line Tool" to divide the second circle in half.
Use the "Offset Tool" to create an offset of this second circle.

The profile of the bowl is complete. Select the edge of the circle on the ground plane. This is your path.
Use the "Eraser Tool" to erase the top half of the second circle. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
8. Select the "Follow-Me Tool.
10.
Use the "Eraser Tool" to erase the face that represents the inside of the bowl. 11.
9. You are creating the profile of the bowl."
Page 485
Copyright Google Inc.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
12. A bowl is created.
Page 486
Copyright Google Inc.
13. Remove the circle on the ground plane. Click on the profile of the bowl. 2008
.

require experience with several SketchUp tools and features. You should be competent with the following tools and features before attempting to draw a cone: • • • • • • The Circle Tool The Move Tool The Push/Pull Tool The Follow-Me Tool The Line Tool Inference
Drawing a Cone by Resizing a Cylinder Face
One common way to draw a cone is: 1. such as drawing a cone or sphere. Draw a circle on the ground plane at the origin.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing a Cone
Advanced tasks.
Page 487
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. This circle will represent the base of the cone.

" Place the cursor at the edge of the top of the cylinder. Cardinal points act as resize handles. Move the cursor toward the center of the cylinder. 4.
Page 488
Copyright Google Inc.
Use the "Push/Pull" Tool to create a cylinder at the height of your cone.Google SketchUp 7 Help
2. The edge of the circle will not highlight when the cursor is on a cardinal point.
3.
6. A cone begins to take shape. 5. 7. 2008
. Click the mouse button when the cursor is over a cardinal point on the edge of the top of the cylinder.
Select the "Move Tool. Move the cursor around the edge until you find one of the cardinal points (a point that is aligned with the red or green axis).

5.
Use the "Orbit Tool" to orbit so that your view is looking over the top of the circle (not directly down on the circle). This circle will represent the base of the cone. 3. creating a solid triangular face. 4.
Page 489
Copyright Google Inc.
2. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing a Cone Using The Follow-Me Tool
One common way to draw a cone is: 1. Use the "Line Tool" to draw a line up the blue axis from middle of the circle to the height of your cone. Use the "Line Tool" to join the last line to the bottom of the first line. This line will form the second line of a triangle. Draw a circle on the ground plane at the origin. Use the "Line Tool" to draw a line from the top of the previous line to the edge of the circle.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
6.
Select the edge of the circle on the ground plane.
Page 490
Copyright Google Inc.The bottom face of the cone is eliminated when you use the Follow Me Tool to create a cone. This is your path." Click on the solid triangular face.
7.
Note .
Select the "Follow-Me Tool. 8. A cone is created. 2008
. Draw a line from endpoint to endpoint of any segment along the circumference of the cone's base to recreate the bottom face.

Click and hold one of the grips in the middle of one of the bounding box edges (not one of the corner grips). The circle will form an ellipse." The cursor will change to a box within another box. Draw a circle with the Circle tool. Move the cursor away from the center of the circle. 3. Scaling grips will appear around the circle. 2008
. 2. 4.
Page 491
Copyright Google Inc. One common way to draw an ellipse is: 1. 5. Select the "Scale Tool. Click on the circle.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing an Ellipse
There are multiple ways to draw things in SketchUp.

A cursor appears with the text. Select the 3D text.
10. Select the face of each letter and press the Delete key on your keyboard. Context click on the 3D text. The face is removed and the letter appears to be engraved.
Page 492
Copyright Google Inc. Click on the rectangular surface." The Place 3D Text dialog box appears. 2008
. The 3D text explodes into its individual geometry. 3. 11. 8. 6. 2. The context menu for the group is displayed. Draw a large rectangular surface. Select the "Explode" menu item. 7. 5. The text is placed on the surface as a group.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing Engraved Text
To draw text that appears engraved: 1. Enter the desired text in the text field. Check the "Extruded" check box. Select the "Tools > 3D Text. Type a negative value in the Extruded field. Click the "Place" button. 4. 9.

2. The size of this circle does not matter. Draw a circle on the ground plane at the origin.
Use the "Select Tool" to select the face of the circle and press the "Delete.
Select the "Circle Tool. 2008
.
Page 493
Copyright Google Inc." The face is deleted. require experience with several SketchUp tools and features. such as drawing a cone or inner tube. 4." Move the cursor to the origin.
3. The cursor should snap to the origin. This circle will be used as a path used to draw the sphere. You should be competent with the following tools and features before attempting to draw an inner tube: • • • • The Circle Tool The Select Tool The Follow-Me Tool Inference
One common way to draw a inner tube is: 1.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing an Inner Tube
Advanced tasks.

"
Page 494
Copyright Google Inc.
Hold the "Shift" key to lock the Circle Tool to lock the inference direction.
Select the edge of the circle on the ground plane.Google SketchUp 7 Help
5. While holding the "Shift" key.
6.
Move the cursor up the blue axis (above the circle on the ground plane). This is your path. This circle is the profile of the inner tube.
Select the "Follow-Me Tool.
4. draw a circle. perpendicular to the first circle.
7. whose diameter will be the diameter of your inner tube. The cursor should turn green or red. 2008
. 5.

SketchUp's inference engine displays a dashed diagonal line and the word "square" when your rectangle is a square.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing a Pyramid (Creating a Pyramidal Hipped Roof)
Advanced tasks."
Page 496
Copyright Google Inc.
2.
3. You should be competent with the following tools and features before attempting to draw a pyramid: • • • • The Rectangle Tool The Move Tool The Line Tool Inference
One common way to draw a pyramid is: 1. This square will be the base of your pyramid.
Select the "Move Tool.
Use the "Line Tool" to draw two diagonal lines across the square (from corner to the opposite corner). 2008
. require experience with several SketchUp tools and features. Use the "Rectangle Tool" to draw a square. such as drawing a cone or pyramid.

Hover the cursor over the mid point of the diagonal line. The tooltip should say "endpoint. 2008
. Move the cursor up in the blue direction to the desired height.
Page 497
Copyright Google Inc.
Click the mouse button.Google SketchUp 7 Help
4. 6."
5.

Draw a circle on the ground plane at the origin. This circle will be used as a path used to draw the sphere. The size of this circle does not matter. You should be competent with the following tools and features before attempting to draw a sphere: • • • • • The Circle Tool The Select Tool The Follow-Me Tool The Eraser Tool Inference
One way to draw a sphere is: 1. such as drawing a cone or sphere.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing a Sphere
Advanced tasks. The cursor should snap to the origin.
2.
Page 498
Copyright Google Inc. require experience with several SketchUp tools and features.
Move the cursor to the origin. 2008
.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
3. Select the "Follow-Me Tool.
Select the edge of the circle on the ground plane. perpendicular to the circle on the ground plane (this represents the profile of the sphere). 7.
4. 5. Draw a circle.
Move the cursor up the blue axis (above the circle on the ground plane). The cursor should turn green or red. 2008
. This is your path.
Press and hold the "Shift" key to lock the Circle Tool in the green or red inference direction.
6."
Page 499
Copyright Google Inc. smaller than the first.

A sphere is created.
Click on the profile of the sphere. 2008
.
9.
Remove the circle on the ground plane.Google SketchUp 7 Help
8.
Page 500
Copyright Google Inc.

Click the "Display cross hairs" checkbox. Click on the "Edit" tab. The Edge Setting panel appears. Click the "OK" button to close the Preferences dialog box. Select "Window > Preferences" (Microsoft Windows) or "SketchUp > Preferences" (Mac OS X)." The Styles Browser is displayed. 4. Select the "In Drawing" item on the left-hand side of the Preferences dialog box.
Changing Edges to Axes Colors
A second method for ensuring your edges are aligned to axes is to temporarily change the colors of your edges to reflect their alignment to one of the axis. The Preferences dialog box is displayed. 2008
. 5. To change edge colors to reflect axes colors: 1.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Ensuring Edge Alignment to Axes
There are two methods to ensure your edges align to axes: change the cursor to the axes colors or change your edges to the axes colors. Select "By axis" from the Color drop-down list. The cursor will display cross hairs that are the color of the axes.
Changing Cursor to Axes Colors
One method for ensuring your edges are aligned to axes is to change the cursor so that it displays cross hairs that are the colors of the axes while drawing. 4. 2.
Page 501
Copyright Google Inc. Click on the "Edge Settings" icon. The Drawing panel is displayed. The styles in your model appear. 3. To change the cursor to axes colors: 1. One of the edit panels appears. 2. The colors of the edges in your model change to reflect their alignment to the axes. Select "Window > Styles. Select "In Model" from the drop-down list of styles libraries. 3.

Selecting the geometry to be flip. 3. Context-clicking on the geometry.
Flipping Geometry
Flipping is useful when you want to create an exact mirror of your geometry.
Page 502
Copyright Google Inc. Selecting the "Flip Along" context menu item. You can flip geometry by: 1. 4. The context menu is displayed.
The following image shows the geometry after the flip operation. Choosing the direction or axis for the flip. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Flipping or Mirroring Geometry
A flip operation refers to making a mirror of your geometry. 2. The following image shows the geometry before the flip operation. A mirror is creating a mirrored copy of your geometry.

For example.
2. The following image shows the left-side of a car. Mirroring allows you to create one half of a model and then duplicate and mirror that half to create the rest of the model.
Make a copy of the geometry
Page 503
Copyright Google Inc. but you are creating an additional copy. The process to mirror geometry follows: 1. Select the geometry to be mirrored. 2008
.
Mirroring Geometry
The process for mirroring geometry is essentially the same process as for flipping.You can also use the Scale Tool to flip or mirror geometry.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Note . you could create the left-side of a model of a car and then duplicate and mirror that side to create the rightside of the car.

Context-click on the geometry. 2008
. The context menu is displayed. 5. 6.You can also use the Scale Tool to flip or mirror geometry.
Note .
Paste the copy. The following image shows the left-side of the car and copy of the left-side of the car that has been flipped.Google SketchUp 7 Help
3. 4.
Page 504
Copyright Google Inc. Select the "Flip Along" context menu item. Choose the direction or axis for the flip.

" The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
Some mouse drivers or configuration utilities make it possible to map mouse buttons to various functions or keystroke assignments. By default. 2008
. you roll the scroll wheel up to zoom in and down to zoom out. To change scroll wheel mapping: 1.
Page 506
Copyright Google Inc. You should make these kinds of changes carefully because SketchUp makes extensive use of the mouse buttons in combination with various modifier keys (Ctrl. Shift). The Compatibility panel is displayed. Alt.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Remapping Mouse Buttons (Microsoft Windows)
You can only control the directory you roll the scroll wheel to zoom in and out in SketchUp. Select the "Compatibility" item in the left-hand side of the Preferences dialog box. 3. Check the "Invert" checkbox. Select "Window > Preferences. and you could easily lose functionality by remapping the mouse buttons. 2.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Welcome to the SketchUp Reference Guide
The SketchUp Reference Guide contains explanations of all reference material pertaining to SketchUp. The content in this guide answers the "What is the.. 2008
.feature" questions of endusers.
Page 507
Copyright Google Inc..

drawing area.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Application Window
The SketchUp user interface is designed to be simple and easy to use.
Mac OS X
Following is an image of the SketchUp user interface on Mac OS X:
Microsoft Windows
Following is an image of the SketchUp user interface on Microsoft Windows:
Page 509
Copyright Google Inc. and the Measurements Toolbar. menus. Toolbars and tool palettes. status bar. The main parts of the SketchUp user interface are the title bar. 2008
.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Page 510
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing Area
The drawing area is where you create your model.
Page 511
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. The 3D space of the drawing area is identified visually by the drawing axes.

Microsoft Windows
Following is an image of the status bar on Microsoft Windows:
Geolocation Button Hover over the Geolocation button to display location information for the current model. Manually georeferenced using location in SketchUp (bright exclamation point). Note . Manually georeferenced (using location in SketchUp). Click the Geolocation button to display the Location panel of the Model Info dialog box. A model can have three states. and georeferenced with data from Google Earth. The Georeferencing portion of the Location panel allows you to manually establish the geographic location for the current model. Attribution Button Click the Attribution button to display the Credits panel of the Model Info dialog box. The Credits panel allows you to view contributors toward the current model. and georeferenced with data from Google Earth (Google Earth logo with exclamation point).
Page 513
Copyright Google Inc. such as creating elements of a specific dimension.Altering the fields in the Location panel of the Model Info dialog box while using georeferenced data from Google Earth yields a warning that Google Earth terrain and layers were be erased. You can also enter values into the Measurements Toolbar to manipulate currently selected entities. Click the Geolocation button to display the Location panel of the Model Info dialog box. This panel also allows the current users to claim credit toward the current model. The Georeferencing portion of the Location panel allows you to manually establish the geographic location for the current model. A model can have three states. as indicated by the icon next to the Use georeferencing checkbox: Not georeferenced (faded exclamation point).Google SketchUp 7 Help
Status Bar
The status bar is the long gray rectangular area at the bottom of the drawing area. 2008
.
Mac OS X
Following is an image of the status bar on Mac OS X:
Geolocation Button Hover over the Geolocation button to display location information for the current model. Measurements Toolbar The Measurements Toolbar displays dimensional information while you draw. as indicated by the icon next to the Use georeferencing checkbox: Not georeferenced. Google Login Button Click the Google Login button to log in to your Google account. Instructor Button Click on the Instructor button to display the Instructor dialog box.

Google Login Button Click the Google Login button to log in to your Google account. Instructor Button Click on the Instructor button to display the Instructor dialog box.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Attribution Button Click the Attribution button to display the Credits panel of the Model Info dialog box.
Page 514
Copyright Google Inc. The Credits panel allows you to view contributors toward the current model. 2008
.Use the resize handle to make the drawing area larger so you can see the entire message in the status bar. such as creating elements of a specific dimension. Measurements Toolbar The Measurements Toolbar displays dimensional information while you draw. You can also enter values into the Measurements Toolbar to manipulate currently selected entities. Note . This panel also allows the current users to claim credit toward the current model.

appearing below the menus.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Toolbars and Tool Palettes (Mac OS X)
The Toolbar.
Page 515
Copyright Google Inc. referred to as the getting started tools. contains a set of user-defined controls. Additional tool palettes are found in the View > Tool Palettes submenu. By default. 2008
. the Toolbar contains the basic set of SketchUp tools.

below the menus. appearing below the menus and along the left side of the application contain a user-defined set of tools and controls.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Toolbars (Microsoft Windows)
The Toolbars. By default. 2008
. SketchUp displays one Toolbar.
Page 516
Copyright Google Inc. Additional Toolbars are found in the View >Toolbars submenu. referred to as the getting started Toolbar.

2008
. A blank drawing area appears when you start SketchUp and the name of the currently opened file is "Untitled" in the title bar. and a title bar collapse/expand button on the right.
Page 517
Copyright Google Inc. In the middle of the title bar is the name of the currently opened file. and maximize) on the left.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Title Bar (Mac OS X)
The title bar (at the top of SketchUp) contains the standard Macintosh OS X window controls (close. indicating that you have not yet saved your work. minimize.

minimize.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Title Bar (Microsoft Windows)
The title bar (at the top of SketchUp) contains the standard Microsoft Windows controls (close. indicating that you have not yet saved your work. 2008
.
Page 518
Copyright Google Inc. A blank drawing area appears when you start SketchUp and the name of the currently opened file is "Untitled" in the title bar. and maximize) on the right. and the name of the currently opened file.

2008
. the Measurements Toolbar is located on the right side of the status bar. You can change the value of the geometry as many times as you like before you start a new operation. Units are set within the Units panel of the Model Info dialog box. You can type values in the Measurements Toolbar using an alternate measuring system than the default system. SketchUp will display a tilde (~) before the number to indicate that a number is not precise (not within precision settings as set in the Units panel of the Model Info dialog box). SketchUp will convert the value to the default system. you can type in 3' 6" even if you are using metric system as your default. Detailed information on the Measurements Toolbar values accepted for each tool appears in the Drawing Tools and Modification Tools sections of this user's guide. The Measurements Toolbar displays dimensional information while you draw.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Measurements Toolbar
By default. You can also enter values into the Measurements Toolbar to manipulate currently selected entities.
• • • • • •
Page 519
Copyright Google Inc. The Measurements Toolbar cannot be used again to enter values for a tool once you have exited the tool. such as creating elements of a specific dimension. Other behaviors of the Measurements Toolbar are as follows: • You can type a value in the Measurements Toolbar before or after an operation is complete as long as the value is entered prior to the start of a new operation. The Measurements Toolbar is always awaiting input from your keyboard. You must press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key to accept a typed value. It is not necessary to click in the Measurements Toolbar before typing. For example.

Scene tabs are not part of the default application user interface. Note . Scene tabs are only displayed when you create a scene using the Scene Manager.
Microsoft Windows
Following is an image of the scene tabs on Microsoft Windows:
Mac OS X
Following is an image of the scene tabs on Mac OS X:
Page 520
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Scene Tabs
Scene tabs are created when a scene is created using the Scene Manager. Click on a scene tab to switch between the scenes in your file.

Move Left/Move Right
The Move Left and Move Right menu items are used to reposition a scene in the series of scenes.
Delete
The Delete menu item is used to delete the currently selected scene.
Add
The Add menu item is used to add a new scene to the current file. Context-click on a scene tab to access its context menu.
Page 521
Copyright Google Inc.
Update
The Update menu item is used to update a scene if you have made changes to the scene. 2008
.
Play Animation (Microsoft Windows-Only)
The Play Animation menu item starts an animation.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Scene Tab Context Menu Items
Scene Tabs contain their own context menus.
Scene Manager
The Scene Manager menu item invokes the Scene Manager dialog box.

Clicking on any icon in the doc will return that application to view. Clicking on the SketchUp icon in your Dock returns SketchUp to view. which might vary on different computers depending on additional functionality of your other applications. Directions for entering a new license should accompany any new license.
Services
The Services menu item provides access to Mac OS X's system-wide services. and view a list of all available licenses. Mac OS X Keyboard Shortcut: Command+
License
The License menu item displays SketchUp's licensing dialog box used to enter a new license. containing the SketchUp version number.
Preferences
The Preferences menu item opens SketchUp's application preferences for setting various global settings for the program. 2008
. application preferences.Google SketchUp 7 Help
SketchUp Menu (Mac OS X)
The SketchUp menu contains menu items that control the SketchUp application. and a link to the SketchUp web site. An Internet connection is required to use this feature.
About Plugins
The About Plugins submenu contains information about each SketchUp plugin. determine which licenses are currently in use.
Check for Update
The Check for Update menu item checks to see if you have the most current version of SketchUp. allowing you access to other programs running in Mac OS X. You will be prompted to download the current version if your version is out-ofdate. Mac OS X Keyboard Shortcut: Command+H
Hide Others
The Hide Others menu item hides all visible applications except SketchUp allowing you to focus on SketchUp alone.
Show All
The Show All menu item unhides all running programs in Mac OS X. technical support contact information. and the SketchUp license manager. including items to show and hide SketchUp.
Page 522
Copyright Google Inc. such as the 3DS exporter.
Hide SketchUp
The Hide SketchUp menu item hides SketchUp and all of its open drawing windows.
About SketchUp
The About SketchUp menu item activates the About SketchUp dialog box.

allowing you to open a previously saved SketchUp file. save. You will be prompted to save your changes if you have not saved changes to the current model before selecting the New menu item. This report contains valuable information regarding the unrecoverable errors. SketchUp displays a dialog box allowing you to fix problems if they are found. This dialog box contains the option to quit SketchUp and send a report. and export model files. Google recommends you click on the Always fix my models button in this dialog box to fix the problem.
New
The New menu item is used to close the current document and create a blank drawing area to begin a new SketchUp model. SketchUp will check your model for unrecoverable errors during the open. You likely will not notice anything different in your model.Google SketchUp 7 Help
File Menu (Microsoft Windows)
The File menu contains items that relate to SketchUp model files. and Fix it later. Refer to the Automatically fix problems when they are found option for further information. open. after these problems are fixed. You will be prompted to save your changes if an unsaved model is already open because only one file can be open at a time.
Page 524
Copyright Google Inc. SketchUp will display a dialog box in the rare case that unrecoverable errors are found in your model. including commands to create. Fix it now. This dialog box has three options: Always fix my models. preventing the overwriting of a good auto-save file. SketchUp will use the settings in the template file to define the initial model state if you have selected a template file in the template panel under Window > Preferences. SketchUp checks all files for problems when they are opened and saved if the Automatically check models for problems check box is checked in the General Panel of the Application Preferences. except that it will perform better. import. Google recommends you click on the quit SketchUp and send report button to terminate SketchUp and preserve your previously valid auto-save file. This preferences option causes SketchUp to automatically fix problems without user intervention. print. Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl+O Problem Detection Minor problems can occur with your model given the infinite flexibility that SketchUp provides when designing in 3D. 2008
. This button also checks the Automatically fix problems when they are found checkbox in the General Panel of the Application Preferences. Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl+N
Open
Use the Open menu item to launch the Open dialog box.

except that it will perform better. and Fix it later. Backup files are saved in the My Documents (Microsoft Windows) or Library/Application Support/Google SketchUp 6/SketchUp/Autosave (Mac OS X) folder. the existing file will be converted to a backup file (.If Create Backup is enabled within the General panel of the preferences dialog box. You can have SketchUp automatically save for you at a specific time increment by enabling the Auto-save option within the General panel of the Preferences dialog box. except that it will perform better. Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl+S Tip . Problem Detection Minor problems can occur with your model given the infinite flexibility that SketchUp provides when designing in 3D. The new file will become the current file in the drawing window. and the new drawing will be saved in place of that currently existing file (. by default. This file can be assigned a new name. This report contains valuable information regarding the unrecoverable errors. SketchUp will display a dialog box in the rare case that unrecoverable errors are found in your model. This preferences option causes SketchUp to automatically fix problems without user intervention. or attempt to quit SketchUp with unsaved open documents. The Create Backup option can help preserve your data in the event of an accidental removal of a . Fix it now. Google recommends you click on the Always fix my models button in this dialog box to fix the problem. You can use this dialog box to save the current drawing as a new document. This dialog box contains the option to quit SketchUp and send a report. after these problems are fixed. SketchUp will prompt you to save your work before continuing.It is good to save often.skb). You likely will not notice anything different in your model. and a previous version of SketchUp. SketchUp checks all files for problems when they are opened and saved if the Automatically check models for problems check box is checked in the General Panel of the Application Preferences.skp). Problem Detection Minor problems can occur with your model given the infinite flexibility that SketchUp provides when designing in 3D. Refer to the Automatically fix problems when they are found option for further information. When you close an unsaved document.
Save As
Use the Save As menu item to open the Save As dialog box which defaults to the current document's folder.skp file. You likely will not notice anything different in your model. a new location. This dialog box has three options: Always fix my models. SketchUp displays a dialog box allowing you to fix problems if they are found. 2008
. after these problems are fixed.
Page 525
Copyright Google Inc. preventing the overwriting of a good auto-save file. This button also checks the Automatically fix problems when they are found checkbox in the General Panel of the Application Preferences.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Save
Use the Save menu item to save the currently active SketchUp model to your file system. Tip . SketchUp will check your model for unrecoverable errors during the save. Google recommends you click on the quit SketchUp and send report button to terminate SketchUp and preserve your previously valid auto-save file.

This preferences option causes SketchUp to automatically fix problems without user intervention. SketchUp displays a dialog box allowing you to fix problems if they are found. Fix it now. This report contains valuable information regarding the unrecoverable errors. This preferences option causes SketchUp to automatically fix problems without user intervention.Google SketchUp 7 Help
SketchUp checks all files for problems when they are opened and saved if the Automatically check models for problems check box is checked in the General Panel of the Application Preferences. This dialog box contains the option to quit SketchUp and send a report. after these problems are fixed. Problem Detection Minor problems can occur with your model given the infinite flexibility that SketchUp provides when designing in 3D. SketchUp displays a dialog box allowing you to fix problems if they are found. and Fix it later. This menu item launches a dialog box where you can name the template and set the template as the default template (to be loaded every time you launch SketchUp). This dialog box contains the option to quit SketchUp and send a report. Refer to the Automatically fix problems when they are found option for further information.
Page 526
Copyright Google Inc. This button also checks the Automatically fix problems when they are found checkbox in the General Panel of the Application Preferences. and Fix it later. This report contains valuable information regarding the unrecoverable errors. SketchUp will check your model for unrecoverable errors during the save as. Google recommends you click on the quit SketchUp and send report button to terminate SketchUp and preserve your previously valid auto-save file. except that it will perform better. You likely will not notice anything different in your model. Fix it now. preventing the overwriting of a good auto-save file. SketchUp will display a dialog box in the rare case that unrecoverable errors are found in your model. Refer to the Automatically fix problems when they are found option for further information. This dialog box has three options: Always fix my models. Google recommends you click on the Always fix my models button in this dialog box to fix the problem. preventing the overwriting of a good auto-save file. SketchUp will display a dialog box in the rare case that unrecoverable errors are found in your model. SketchUp checks all files for problems when they are opened and saved if the Automatically check models for problems check box is checked in the General Panel of the Application Preferences.
Save A Copy As
Use the Save A Copy As menu item to save a new file based on your current model. Google recommends you click on the quit SketchUp and send report button to terminate SketchUp and preserve your previously valid auto-save file.
Revert
Use the Revert menu item to revert your current document to its last saved state. Google recommends you click on the Always fix my models button in this dialog box to fix the problem. 2008
. This menu item does not overwrite or close the current file and is useful for saving incremental copies or tentative schemes of your work. SketchUp will check your model for unrecoverable errors during the save a copy as. This button also checks the Automatically fix problems when they are found checkbox in the General Panel of the Application Preferences.
Send to LayOut
Use the Send to LayOut menu item to send the current model to LayOut.
Save As Template
Use the Save As Template menu item to save the current SketchUp file as a template. This dialog box has three options: Always fix my models.

Share Model Use the Share Model menu item to post your SketchUp model file and corresponding KML file to the Google 3D Warehouse. 2D vector drawings. This option makes it easy to send your SketchUp files to a plotter. DWG. 3D Model Use the 3D Model menu item to export you SketchUp file to 3D formats. Additional file formats are available for export using Google SketchUp Pro. PNG. transparency. TGA. BMP. This option makes it easy to archive your animations to CD or DVD and to create smooth animations of complex models. which is useful for sharing your work with other people or exporting your drawings for use in other applications. resolution independent. The Google 3D Warehouse is a repository where models can be shared with other Google Earth or SketchUp users. Pixel-based images can be exported in JPEG. Get Models Use the Get Models menu item to download a model from the Google 3D Warehouse.
Page 527
Copyright Google Inc.
Import
Use the Import menu to import information from other files into your SketchUp drawings. EPS. such as KMZ files.
Print Setup
Use the Print Setup menu item to access to the print setup dialog box. Vector images can be exported in PDF. Animation Use the Animation menu item to export a pre-rendered animation file containing the scene sequence you have created. Note that vector output formats may not support certain display options. Section Slice Use the Export 2D Section Slice menu item to output dimensionally accurate 2D section slices in standard vector formats. section slice. such as shadows. and TIFF file formats. 2D Graphic Use the 2D Graphic menu item to export 2D bitmap and dimensionally accurate. or further modify your models using vector-based illustration software.
Export
Use the Export submenu to access SketchUp's export functionality. and DXF file formats. quickly integrate them into construction documentation. This dialog box is used to select and configure printer and scene properties for printing. and textures. Epix. or animation. You can export your SketchUp model as a 3D model. a 2D graphic. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
3D Warehouse
The 3D Warehouse submenu contains menu items for accessing the 3D Warehouse repository of models.

Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl+P
(Recently Opened File List)
The (Recently Opened File List) menu item lists recently opened SketchUp files. Select a file from this list to open the file. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 528
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.
Exit
The Exit menu item closes the current file and the SketchUp application window. SketchUp will notify you to save your file if it has not been saved since the last change.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Print Preview
Use the Print Preview menu item to preview your model as it will appear on paper (using the print setup settings). This dialog box enables you to print the current model in SketchUp's drawing area to the currently selected printer.
Print
The Print menu item opens the standard Print dialog box.

SketchUp displays a dialog box allowing you to fix problems if they are found. This report contains valuable information regarding the unrecoverable errors. SketchUp checks all files for problems when they are opened and saved if the Automatically check models for problems check box is checked in the General Panel of the Application Preferences. Fix it now. and Fix it later. Keyboard Shortcut: Command+W
Page 529
Copyright Google Inc. open. You will be prompted to save your changes if the model in the active drawing window has not been saved recently. You likely will not notice anything different in your model. This dialog box has three options: Always fix my models.Google SketchUp 7 Help
File Menu (Mac OS X)
The File menu contains items that relate to SketchUp model files. allowing you to open a previously saved SketchUp file. and export model files. Google recommends you click on the quit SketchUp and send report button to terminate SketchUp and preserve your previously valid auto-save file. SketchUp will use the settings in the template file to define the initial model state if you have selected a template file in template panel under SketchUp > Preferences. print. This button also checks the Automatically fix problems when they are found checkbox in the General Panel of the Application Preferences. preventing the overwriting of a good auto-save file. import. Google recommends you click on the Always fix my models button in this dialog box to fix the problem. except that it will perform better. SketchUp will check your model for unrecoverable errors during the open. including commands to create. This action is the same as clicking on the close button in your drawing's title bar.
Open Recent
Use the Open Recent submenu to quickly access recently opened SketchUp files. Keyboard Shortcut: Command+O Problem Detection Minor problems can occur with your model given the infinite flexibility that SketchUp provides when designing in 3D.Open another instance of SketchUp if you want multiple drawing areas open simultaneously. Refer to the Automatically fix problems when they are found option for further information. SketchUp will display a dialog box in the rare case that unrecoverable errors are found in your model.
Close
The Close menu item closes the active drawing window. after these problems are fixed. 2008
. You can clear the list of recent files by selecting the Clear menu item from the end of the recent files list. This dialog box contains the option to quit SketchUp and send a report. This preferences option causes SketchUp to automatically fix problems without user intervention. save.
New
The New menu item is used to create a blank drawing area and begin a new SketchUp model. Keyboard Shortcut: Command+N
Open
Use the Open menu item to launch the Open dialog box. Tip .

The new file will become the current file in the drawing window. Keyboard Shortcut: Command+S Tip . or attempt to quit SketchUp with unsaved open documents.skb). except that it will perform better. This preferences option causes SketchUp to automatically fix problems without user intervention.If Create Backup is enabled within the General panel of the preferences dialog box.It is good to save often. The Create Backup option can help preserve your data in the event of an accidental removal of a .skp file. Tip . after these problems are fixed. You can use this dialog box to save the current drawing as a new document. Keyboard Shortcut: Shift+Command+S Problem Detection Minor problems can occur with your model given the infinite flexibility that SketchUp provides when designing in 3D. preventing the overwriting of a good auto-save file. except that it will perform better. and the new drawing will be saved in place of that currently existing file (. Google recommends you click on the quit SketchUp and send report button to terminate SketchUp and preserve your previously valid auto-save file. Problem Detection Minor problems can occur with your model given the infinite flexibility that SketchUp provides when designing in 3D. Fix it now. SketchUp displays a dialog box allowing you to fix problems if they are found. You can have SketchUp automatically save for you at a specific time increment by enabling the Auto-save option within the General panel of the Preferences dialog box.
Save As
Use the Save As menu item to open the Save As dialog box which defaults to the current document's folder. Google recommends you click on the Always fix my models button in this dialog box to fix the problem. This dialog box contains the option to quit SketchUp and send a report.
Page 530
Copyright Google Inc. This dialog box has three options: Always fix my models. This file can be assigned a new name. SketchUp will prompt you to save your work before continuing. the existing file will be converted to a backup file (. Refer to the Automatically fix problems when they are found option for further information. and Fix it later. SketchUp will check your model for unrecoverable errors during the save. You likely will not notice anything different in your model.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Save
Use the Save menu item to save the currently active SketchUp model to your file system. a new location. SketchUp checks all files for problems when they are opened and saved if the Automatically check models for problems check box is checked in the General Panel of the Application Preferences. This report contains valuable information regarding the unrecoverable errors. 2008
. You likely will not notice anything different in your model. after these problems are fixed. SketchUp will display a dialog box in the rare case that unrecoverable errors are found in your model. and a previous version of SketchUp.skp). When you close an unsaved document. This button also checks the Automatically fix problems when they are found checkbox in the General Panel of the Application Preferences.

SketchUp will display a dialog box in the rare case that unrecoverable errors are found in your model. This preferences option causes SketchUp to automatically fix problems without user intervention. preventing the overwriting of a good auto-save file.
Send to LayOut
Use the Send to LayOut menu item to send the current model to LayOut. This dialog box has three options: Always fix my models. SketchUp displays a dialog box allowing you to fix problems if they are found. Refer to the Automatically fix problems when they are found option for further information.Google SketchUp 7 Help
SketchUp checks all files for problems when they are opened and saved if the Automatically check models for problems check box is checked in the General Panel of the Application Preferences. This report contains valuable information regarding the unrecoverable errors. This menu item launches a dialog box where you can name the template and set the template as the default template (to be loaded every time you launch SketchUp). preventing the overwriting of a good auto-save file. SketchUp will check your model for unrecoverable errors during the save a copy as. SketchUp checks all files for problems when they are opened and saved if the Automatically check models for problems check box is checked in the General Panel of the Application Preferences. after these problems are fixed. Google recommends you click on the quit SketchUp and send report button to terminate SketchUp and preserve your previously valid auto-save file. SketchUp will check your model for unrecoverable errors during the save as. 2008
. This button also checks the Automatically fix problems when they are found checkbox in the General Panel of the Application Preferences. This dialog box contains the option to quit SketchUp and send a report. except that it will perform better. You likely will not notice anything different in your model. This menu item does not overwrite or close the current file and is useful for saving incremental copies or tentative schemes of your work. This dialog box has three options: Always fix my models.
Revert
Use the Revert menu item to revert your current document to its last saved state. This preferences option causes SketchUp to automatically fix problems without user intervention. Google recommends you click on the Always fix my models button in this dialog box to fix the problem. Google recommends you click on the Always fix my models button in this dialog box to fix the problem. This button also checks the Automatically fix problems when they are found checkbox in the General Panel of the Application Preferences. Problem Detection Minor problems can occur with your model given the infinite flexibility that SketchUp provides when designing in 3D. SketchUp will display a dialog box in the rare case that unrecoverable errors are found in your model. Refer to the Automatically fix problems when they are found option for further information. SketchUp displays a dialog box allowing you to fix problems if they are found.
Save A Copy As
Use the Save A Copy As menu item to save a new file based on your current model. and Fix it later. This report contains valuable information regarding the unrecoverable errors. Fix it now. Google recommends you click on the quit SketchUp and send report button to terminate SketchUp and preserve your previously valid auto-save file.
Page 531
Copyright Google Inc. Fix it now. This dialog box contains the option to quit SketchUp and send a report. and Fix it later.
Save As Template
Use the Save As Template menu item to save the current SketchUp file as a template.

Import
Use the Import menu to import information from other files into your SketchUp drawings. Consult the Mac OS X system help for more information about Page Setup.
Page Setup
Use the Page Setup menu item to access the Mac OS X page setup dialog box. Get Models Use the Get Models menu item to download a model from the Google 3D Warehouse. which is useful for sharing your work with other people or exporting your drawings for use in other applications. Note that vector output formats may not support certain display options. DWG. You can export your SketchUp model as a 3D model. such as shadows. 2D Graphic Use the 2D Graphic menu item to export 2D bitmap and dimensionally accurate. 3D Model Use the 3D Model menu item to export you SketchUp file to 3D formats. transparency. This option makes it easy to archive your animations to CD or DVD and to create smooth animations of complex models. Pixel-based images can be exported in JPEG. 2D vector drawings. This dialog box is used to select and configure printer and page properties to use for printing. EPS. and TIFF file formats. 2008
. Keyboard Shortcut: Shift+Command+P
Page 532
Copyright Google Inc. Vector images can be exported in PDF. Epix. or further modify your models using vector-based illustration software. Animation Use the Animation menu item to export a pre-rendered animation file containing the scene sequence you have created. or an animation. a 2D graphic. This option makes it easy to send your SketchUp files to a plotter. and textures. and DXF file formats. Share Model Use the Share Model menu item to post your SketchUp model file and corresponding KML file to the Google 3D Warehouse.Google SketchUp 7 Help
3D Warehouse
The 3D Warehouse submenu contains menu items for accessing the 3D Warehouse repository of models. resolution independent. PNG. Get Pro Exporters The Get Pro Exporters menu item launches the Google SketchUp Pro exports web site. such as KMZ files. Additional file formats are available for export using Google SketchUp Pro. a section slice. The Google 3D Warehouse is a repository where models can be shared with other Google Earth or SketchUp users. quickly integrate them into construction documentation.
Export
Use the Export submenu to access SketchUp's export functionality.

This dialog box enables you to print the current model in SketchUp's drawing area to the currently selected printer.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Document Setup
Use the Document Setup menu item to access to the Document Setup dialog box. Consult the Mac OS X system help for more information about printing. Keyboard Shortcut: Command+P = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 533
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. This dialog box is used to configure the document properties prior to printing.
Print
The Print menu item opens the standard Print dialog box.

Redo
The Redo menu item returns the last undo to its previous state.
Undo
Use the Undo menu item to undo the last drawing or editing commands performed. one at a time. Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl+C or Ctrl+Insert
Paste
Use the Paste menu item to paste the contents of the clipboard into the current SketchUp document. visibility operations. Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl+V or Shift+Insert
Page 534
Copyright Google Inc. paste commands. Contents of the clipboard will remain on the clipboard until replaced with other content using an additional Cut or a Copy command. and standard cut. Use the Previous menu item under the Camera menu to undo a point of view change.Undo will undo any operation that creates or modifies geometry. The number of possible sequential Undo commands is limited to 100 steps. Keyboard Shortcut: Shift+Delete or Ctrl+X
Copy
The Copy menu item copies the selected items to the clipboard without deleting the items from the model. allowing you to position the new geometry when it is pasted. copy. These menu items include those for creating and editing groups and components. SketchUp allows you to undo all operations you have performed. The contents of the clipboard can then be inserted back into any open SketchUp document by using the Paste menu item. 2008
. The contents of the clipboard can then be inserted back into any open SketchUp document by using the Paste menu item.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Edit Menu (Microsoft Windows)
The Edit menu contains items allowing you to perform editing functions on SketchUp geometry. Contents of the clipboard will remain on the clipboard until replaced with other content using an additional Cut or a Copy operation. Contents of the clipboard will remain on the clipboard until replaced with other content using an additional Cut or a Copy operation. The pasted geometry will be attached to and placed by the point of the cursor. but it does not undo changes to your point of view. Keyboard Shortcut: Alt+Backspace or Ctrl+Z Note . Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl+Y
Cut
The Cut menu item removes the selected elements from your model and places them in the clipboard. to the state at which you saved your file.

Lock
The Lock menu item is used to lock any component or group that you do not want to be able to be moved or edited. Selected The Selcted menu item unhides any selected hidden object. Ensure Show Hidden Geometry is enabled under the View menu to view and select hidden geometry. deselecting any currently selected items in the model.
Select All
Use the Select All menu item to select all selectable entities in the model.
Page 535
Copyright Google Inc. any items on a hidden layer. All The All menu item unhides all hidden entities in your current document. or enable viewing and working inside tight areas. 2008
. or geometry that is clipped away using a section plane cannot be selected with the Select All menu item.
Delete
Use the Delete menu item to remove the currently selected entities from your model.
Unhide
The Unhide submenu contains options for unhiding hidden entities. Last The Last menu item unhides the last entities hidden with the Hide command. Hidden entities. Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl+A
Select None
The Select None menu item clears the selection set. Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl+T
Hide
Use the Hide menu item to hide any selected object.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Paste in Place
Use the Paste in Place menu item to paste an item at the same location where it was cut or copied. Keyboard Shortcut: Delete
Delete Guides
Use the Delete Guides menu item to delete all of the guides that are in the drawing area. Hiding geometry can help simplify your current view.

Keyboard Shortcut: I Intersect Selected Only Select the Intersect Selected Only to intersect only those items that are selected. Intersect With Model Complex geometry in SketchUp can be easily created using the Intersect With Model menu item (also called the Intersector).
Entity Commands Sub-Menu
The Entity Commands sub-menu contains all of the commands available to manipulate the currently selected entity (which are the same as the commands found in the entity's context menu). The sub-menu's name and contents will change depending on the entity that you have selected. Keyboard Shortcut: G
Close Group/Component
Use the Close Group/Component menu item to exit from a group or component's context or editing session.
Make Component
Use the Make Component menu item to create a component entity from the selected entities. Use the Intersect with Model menu item to intersect all entities overlapping with the currently selected entity (such as a box component and a tube component).Google SketchUp 7 Help
Unlock
The Unlock submenu contains options for unlocking components and groups.
Page 536
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.
Intersect
The Intersect sub-menu contains menu items for intersecting geometry with other geometry. Intersect With Context Select the Intersect With Context menu item to intersect two entities within the current context (excluding all entities outside of the context). All Use the All menu item to unlock all components and groups in your drawing area. Selected Use the Selected menu item to unlock all components and groups in a selection set. Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl+C
Make Group
The Make Group menu item creates a Group entity from the selected entities.

one at a time. 2008
. but it does not undo changes to your point of view. The number of possible sequential Undo commands is limited to 100 steps. You can use cut. visibility operations. allowing you to position the new geometry when it is pasted.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Edit Menu (Mac OS X)
The Edit menu contains items allowing you to perform editing functions on SketchUp geometry. Use the Previous menu item under the Camera menu to undo a point of view change. Keyboard Shortcut: Shift+Command+Z
Cut
The Cut menu item removes the selected elements from your model and places them in the clipboard. The contents of the clipboard can then be inserted back into any open SketchUp document by using the Paste menu item. paste commands. Contents of the clipboard will remain on the clipboard until replaced with other content using an additional Cut or a Copy command. The contents of the clipboard can then be inserted back into any open SketchUp document by using the Paste menu item. to the state at which you saved your file. copy and paste to move geometry between open SketchUp windows. copy and paste to move geometry between open SketchUp windows.
Undo
Use the Undo menu item to undo the last drawing or editing commands performed. and standard cut.
Page 537
Copyright Google Inc.Undo will undo any operation that creates or modifies geometry. SketchUp allows you to undo all operations you have performed. Keyboard Shortcut: Command+C
Paste
Use the Paste menu item to paste the contents of the clipboard into the current SketchUp document. Keyboard Shortcut: Command+Z Note . You can use cut.
Redo
The Redo menu item returns the last undo to its previous state. Contents of the clipboard will remain on the clipboard until replaced with other content using an additional Cut or a Copy operation. Keyboard Shortcut: Command+X
Copy
The Copy menu item copies the selected items to the clipboard without deleting the items from the model. copy. These menu items include those for creating and editing groups and components. The pasted geometry will be attached to and placed by the point of the cursor.

Page 538
Copyright Google Inc. Ensure Show Hidden Geometry is enabled under the View menu to view and select hidden geometry. any items on a hidden layer. Keyboard Shortcut: Shift+Command+E
Lock
The Lock menu item is used to lock any component or group that you do not want to be able to be moved or edited.
Delete Guides
Use the Delete Guides menu item to delete all of the guides that are in the drawing area. Keyboard Shortcut: Command+E
Unhide
The Unhide submenu contains options for unhiding hidden entities. Contents of the clipboard will remain on the clipboard until replaced with other content using an additional Cut or a Copy operation. Keyboard Shortcut: Shift+Command+A
Hide
Use the Hide menu item to hide any selected object. deselecting any currently selected items in the model.Google SketchUp 7 Help
You can use cut. 2008
. copy and paste to move geometry between open SketchUp windows. Hidden entities. Keyboard Shortcut: Command+V
Paste in Place
Use the Paste in Place menu item to paste an item at the same location where it was cut or copied. or geometry that is clipped away using a section plane cannot be selected with the Select All menu item. Selected The Selcted menu item unhides any selected hidden object. or enable viewing and working inside tight areas. Last The Last menu item unhides the last entities hidden with the Hide command.
Delete
Use the Delete menu item to remove the currently selected entities from your model. Hiding geometry can help simplify your current view. All The All menu item unhides all hidden entities in your current document.
Select All
Use the Select All menu item to select all selectable entities in the model. Keyboard Shortcut: Command+A
Select None
The Select None menu item clears the selection set.

Intersect With Context Select the Intersect With Context menu item to intersect two entities within the current context (excluding all entities outside of the context). Keyboard Shortcut: Control-Shift+Command+G
Intersect
The Intersect sub-menu contains menu items for intersecting geometry with other geometry.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Unlock
The Unlock submenu contains options for unlocking components and groups. Keyboard Shortcut: Shift+Command+G
Make Group
The Make Group menu item creates a Group entity from the selected entities. Keyboard Shortcut: Command+G
Close Group/Component
Use the Close Group/Component menu item to exit from a group or component's context or editing session. All Use the All menu item to unlock all components and groups in your drawing area." into your model. 2008
.
Page 539
Copyright Google Inc. such as mathematical symbols. and other "dingbats.
Special Characters (Mac OS X)
The Special Characters menu item opens the Mac OS X Character Palette allowing you to insert special characters. The sub-menu's name and contents will change depending on the entity that you have selected. arrows. Selected Use the Selected menu item to unlock all components and groups in a selection set.
Make Component
Use the Make Component menu item to create a component entity from the selected entities. The Mac OS X help system contains additional help on this feature. Use the Intersect with Model menu item to intersect all entities overlapping with the currently selected entity (such as a box component and a tube component). letters with accent marks. Intersect Selected Only Select the Intersect Selected Only to intersect only those items that are selected.
Entity Commands Sub-Menu
The Entity Commands sub-menu contains all of the commands available to manipulate the currently selected entity (which are the same as the commands found in the entity's context menu). Intersect With Model Complex geometry in SketchUp can be easily created using the Intersect With Model menu item (also called the Intersector).

Fog
The Fog menu item activates fog. Google. Large Tool Set. Walkthrough. Shadows. Face Style.
Section Planes
The Section Planes menu item toggles the display section plane entities.
Shadows
The Shadows menu item activates shadows. Once selected.
Section Cuts
The Section Cuts menu item toggles the display of any section cut effects. and Sandbox. Measurements.
Page 540
Copyright Google Inc. See the Scene Manager topic for further information. Modification.
Guides
The Guides menu item toggles the display of Guide line entities and Guide point entities. Views. 2008
. The Hidden Geometry menu item displays hidden faces with a light cross-hatch pattern (edges are displayed dashed). This option can enhance usability on tablets or low-resolution displays.
Scene Tabs
The Scene Tabs command toggles the display of scene tabs. These Toolbars are: Getting Started. Refer to the Fog dialog box for information on configuring fog settings.
Toolbars
The Toolbars submenu contains all of the Toolbars. hidden geometry can be made visible with the Unhide and Unhide All menu items. Camera. Items in the Camera menu alter your point of view. Sections. The Large Buttons menu item toggles large Toolbar buttons on and off. Layers. enabling you to select the geometry. Principal. Note . Guide. Dynamic Components.Google SketchUp 7 Help
View Menu (Microsoft Windows)
The View menu contains menu items that alter the display of entities within your model. Drawing.Items in the View menu alter the display of entities. Standard.
Axes
The Axes menu item toggles the display of the drawing axes.
Hidden Geometry
Use the Hidden Geometry menu item to display hidden geometry or entities that have been hidden using the Hide menu item or context command.

Refer to the Styles topic for further information.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Edge Style
The Edge Style submenu contains options to activate edge styles. Depth Cue. Wireframe.
Page 541
Copyright Google Inc. Settings The Settings item invokes the Animation panel of the Model Info dialog box.
Component Edit
The Component Edit submenu contains commands to alter the display of other entities when editing components. Update Scene Use the Update Scene menu item to update a scene if you have made changes to the scene Delete Scene Use the Delete Scene menu item to delete a scene from the current model. Hidden Line. The edge styles are Profiles. See the Styles topic for further information. Add Scene Use the Add Scene menu item to add a new scene to the current file. See the Scenes and Animations topic for further information. See the Scenes and Animations topic for further information. Previous Scene Use the Previous Scene menu item to transition to the previous scene. Hide Rest of Model Use the Hide Rest of Model menu item to toggle the display of the model when editing a component. The face styles are X-ray.
Animation
The Animation submenu contains several menu items related to scenes and animations. Play The Play menu item starts an animation. and Monochrome.
Face Style
The Face Style submenu contains options to activate face styles. 2008
. and Extension. Next Scene The Next Scene menu item is used to transition to the next scene. Shaded with Textures. Hide Similar Components Use the Hide Similar Components menu item to toggle the display of similar components when editing a component. Shaded.

Hidden Geometry
Use the Hidden Geometry menu item to display hidden geometry or entities that have been hidden using the Hide menu item or context command. The Large Tool Set palette contains all tools needed by advanced SketchUp users. Google. The Hidden Geometry menu item displays hidden faces with a light cross-hatch pattern (edges are displayed dashed).
Axes
The Axes menu item toggles the display of the drawing axes.
Guides
The Guides menu item toggles the display of Guide Line entities and Guide Point entities.
Shadows
The Shadows menu item activates shadows. 2008
. Refer to the Styles topic for further information. hidden geometry can be made visible with the Unhide and Unhide All menu items. Refer to the Fog dialog box for information on configuring fog settings. Note . Items in the Camera menu alter your point of view. The edge styles are Profiles.
Page 542
Copyright Google Inc. Once selected.Items in the View menu alter the display of entities. The Google palette has tools for using SketchUp with Google Earth and the Google 3D Warehouse.Google SketchUp 7 Help
View Menu (Mac OS X)
The View menu contains menu items that alter the display of entities within your model.
Fog
The Fog menu item activates fog.
Section Planes
The Section Planes menu item toggles the display section plane entities.
Edge Style
The Edge Style submenu contains options to activate edge styles. and Dynamic Components. and Extension.
Tool Palettes
The Tool Palettes submenu contains all of the tool palettes. See the Scene Manager topic for further information. enabling you to select the geometry.
Scene Tabs
The Scene Tabs command toggles the display of scene tabs. The Dynamic Components palette has one tool for activating animated dynamic components. There are three tool palettes: Large Tool Set. Depth Cue.
Section Cuts
The Section Cuts menu item toggles the display of any section cut effects.

and Monochrome. Play The Play menu item starts an animation. See the Scenes and Animations topic for further information.
Customize Toolbar
The Customize Toolbar menu item launches the Customize Toolbar dialog box allowing you to place command buttons on the Toolbar.
Page 543
Copyright Google Inc. Hide Rest of Model Use the Hide Rest of Model menu item to toggle the display of the model when editing a component. Settings The Settings item invokes the Animation panel of the Model Info dialog box. Shaded with Textures. The face styles are X-ray. Update Scene Use the Update Scene menu item to update a scene if you have made changes to the scene Delete Scene Use the Delete Scene menu item to delete a scene from the current model. See the Styles topic for further information.
Hide/Show Toolbar
The Hide/Show Toolbar menu item controls the visibility of the Toolbar. 2008
. Previous Scene Use the Previous Scene menu item to transition to the previous scene. You can also modify the visibility of the Toolbar by clicking on the Toolbar collapse/expand button at the top right corner of the title bar. Hidden Line. Next Scene The Next Scene menu item is used to transition to the next scene. Add Scene Use the Add Scene menu item to add a new scene to the current file. Hide Similar Components Use the Hide Similar Components menu item to toggle the display of similar components when editing a component.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Face Style
The Face Style submenu contains options to activate face styles. Shaded. Wireframe.
Animation
The Animation submenu contains several menu items related to scenes and animations. See the Scenes and Animations topic for further information.
Component Edit
The Component Edit submenu contains commands to alter the display of other entities when editing components.

Points of view are saved automatically when the camera is moved in SketchUp. Bottom. Left. 2008
. Selecting any of these model views will immediately set your active drawing window to that view.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Camera Menu (Microsoft Windows)
The Camera menu contains items for altering your point of view of the model. and Isometric. Right.
Perspective
Select the Perspective menu item to enter a perspective projection. Note .
Edit Matched Photo
Select the Edit Matched Photo menu item to edit a previously matched photo. Use the Two-Point Perspective menu item to achieve a 2-point perspective view of your model. Points of view are saved automatically when the camera is moved in SketchUp.
Standard Views
The Standard Views submenu provides access to standard views: Top.SketchUp must be in paraline mode to print to scale.
Parallel Projection
Select the Parallel Projection menu item to enter a paraline projection.
Next
Use the Next menu item to advance to the next saved point of view.
Orbit
The Orbit menu item invokes the Orbit Tool.
Two-Point Perspective
A two-point perspective is a common drawing technique in which all verticals lines in the model will appear straight.
Previous
Use the Previous menu item to back up to the previous saved point of view.Orbiting will move a model out of 2-point perspective. Be aware that faces and edges that are parallel to the view plane will be measurable.
Match New Photo
Select the Match New Photo menu item to start a match new photo session. You will be placed in the Pan Tool to pan around your model. Keyboard Shortcut: O
Page 544
Copyright Google Inc. Front. Back.
Caution .

This option is often used with the Walk Tool to take an eye-level tour of a structure. but is available to use from the Camera menu. Keyboard Shortcut: H
Zoom
The Zoom menu item launches the Zoom Tool.
Walk
The Walk menu item invokes the Walk Tool for maneuvering through your SketchUp model as though you taking a virtual tour of the model.
Look Around
The Look Around menu item invokes the Look Around Tool which pivots the camera around a stationary point at the point of view. Keyboard Shortcut: Z
Field of View
Use the Field of View menu item to invoke the Zoom Tool in Field of View mode allowing you to widen or narrow your field of view. 2008
.
Page 545
Copyright Google Inc.
Zoom Extents
The Zoom Extents menu item launches the Zoom Extents Tool. while using matching. Note .Google SketchUp 7 Help
Pan
The Pan menu item invokes the Pan Tool.
Position Camera
The Position Camera menu item launches the Position Camera Tool allowing you to investigate fixed views of your model (such as an eye-level view of a house).
Zoom Window
The Zoom Window menu item launches the Zoom Window Tool.The Zoom Window Tool is not in the Google SketchUp Toolbar. to zoom such that the photo fills the entire drawing area. Keyboard Shortcut: Shift+Z
Zoom to Photo
Select the Zoom to Photo menu item.

SketchUp must be in paraline mode to print to scale.
Edit Matched Photo
Select the Edit Matched Photo menu item to edit a previously matched photo.
Pan
The Pan menu item invokes the Pan Tool.
Orbit
The Orbit menu item invokes the Orbit Tool. You will be placed in the Pan Tool to pan around your model.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Camera Menu (Mac OS X)
The Camera menu contains items for altering your point of view of the model.
Next
Use the Next menu item to advance to the next saved point of view.
Two-Point Perspective
A two-point perspective is a common drawing technique in which all verticals lines in the model will appear straight. Bottom. Note . Be aware that faces and edges that are parallel to the view plane will be measurable.
Caution . Back.
Perspective
Select the Perspective menu item to enter a perspective projection.
Match New Photo
Select the Match New Photo menu item to start a match new photo session. Front. 2008
.
Page 546
Copyright Google Inc. Left. Right.
Standard Views
The Standard Views submenu provides access to standard views: Top.
Parallel Projection
Select the Parallel Projection menu item to enter a paraline projection. Points of view are saved automatically when the camera is moved in SketchUp. Points of view are saved automatically when the camera is moved in SketchUp. Selecting any of these model views will immediately set your active drawing window to that view. Use the Two-Point Perspective menu item to achieve a 2-point perspective view of your model.Orbiting will move a model out of 2-point perspective. and Isometric.
Previous
Use the Previous menu item to back up to the previous saved point of view.

Walk
The Walk menu item invokes the Walk Tool for maneuvering through your SketchUp model as though you taking a virtual tour of the model. 2008
.
Zoom to Photo
Select the Zoom to Photo menu item.
Position Camera
The Position Camera menu item launches the Position Camera Tool allowing you to investigate fixed views of your model (such as an eye-level view of a house).The Zoom Window Tool is not in the Google SketchUp Toolbar. Note . to zoom such that the photo fills the entire drawing area. while using matching.
Look Around
The Look Around menu item invokes the Look Around Tool which pivots the camera around a stationary point at the point of view. This option is often used with the Walk Tool to take an eye-level tour of a structure.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Zoom
The Zoom menu item launches the Zoom Tool. but is available to use from the Camera menu.
Zoom Extents
The Zoom Extents menu item launches the Zoom Extents Tool.
Zoom Window
The Zoom Window menu item launches the Zoom Window Tool.
Field of View
Use the Field of View menu item to invoke the Zoom Tool in Field of View mode allowing you to widen or narrow your field of view.
Page 547
Copyright Google Inc.

comprised of multiple connected straight line segments (editable as a single curve).
Page 548
Copyright Google Inc. within the drawing area. Keyboard Shortcut: A
Freehand
Use the Freehand menu item to invoke a Freehand Tool used to draw irregular.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Draw Menu (Microsoft Windows)
The Draw menu contains all of the SketchUp drawing tools and provides an alternative to using the. inscribed within a circle. consisting of 3 to 100 sides. Toolbars or keyboard shortcuts. or edges.
Rectangle
The Rectangle menu item invokes a Rectangle Tool used to draw four coplanar intersecting edges and a subsequent Face entity. Keyboard Shortcut: R
Circle
The Circle menu item invokes a Circle Tool used to draw Circle entities. Keyboard Shortcut: C
Polygon
The Polygon menu item invokes a Polygon Tool used to draw regular Polygon entities. 2008
. Keyboard Shortcut: L
Arc
The Arc menu item invokes an Arc Tool used to draw Arc entities. coplanar connected lines in the form of Curve entities.
Line
The Line menu item invokes a Line Tool used to draw Line entities.

inscribed within a circle.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Draw Menu (Mac OS X)
The Draw menu contains all of the SketchUp drawing tools and provides an alternative to using the tool palette or keyboard shortcuts.
Polygon
The Polygon menu item invokes a Polygon Tool used to draw regular Polygon entities. 2008
. Keyboard Shortcut: Apple+K
Circle
The Circle menu item invokes a Circle Tool used to draw Circle entities. or edges. Keyboard Shortcut: Apple+J
Freehand
Use the Freehand menu item to invoke a Freehand Tool used to draw irregular. comprised of multiple connected straight line segments (editable as a single curve). Keyboard Shortcut: Apple+. coplanar connected lines in the form of Curve entities. Keyboard Shortcut: Apple+L
Arc
The Arc menu item invokes an Arc Tool used to draw Arc entities. Keyboard Shortcut: Apple+F
Rectangle
The Rectangle menu item invokes a Rectangle Tool used to draw four coplanar intersecting edges and a subsequent Face entity.
Line
The Line menu item invokes a Line Tool used to draw Line entities. consisting of 3 to 100 sides.
Page 549
Copyright Google Inc. within the drawing area.

re-attach. Keyboard Shortcut: E
Paint Bucket
The Paint Bucket menu item invokes the Paint Bucket Tool used to assign materials to entities in your model. Use the Paint Bucket Tool to paint individual elements. and copy geometry. This tool can be used to displace. Keyboard Shortcut: Spacebar
Eraser
Use the Eraser menu item to invoke the Eraser Tool allowing you to erase entities from the drawing area. Keyboard Shortcut: M
Rotate
Use the Rotate menu item to invoke the Rotate Tool used to rotate drawing elements and single or multiple objects within a single rotation plane. Keyboard Shortcut: B
Move
The Move menu item invokes the Move Tool allowing you to move. Keyboard Shortcut: S
Push/Pull
The Push/Pull menu item invokes the Push/Pull Tool used to manipulate faces of your model. or replace a material in your model. This tool also allows you to hide and soften edges. or subtract faces. This tool can also be used to rotate Component entities.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Tools Menu (Microsoft Windows)
The Tools menu provides access to all of the modification tools in SketchUp. depending on the context of selected geometry. The Rotate Tool can also be used to stretch and distort geometry by selecting only a portion of a model.
Select
The Select menu item invokes a Select Tool allowing you to select one or more entities to modify. fill a number of connected faces. extrude. This menu represents one of three mechanisms for accessing these tools (additional mechanisms are the Toolbars and keyboard shortcuts). manipulate. 2008
. Keyboard Shortcut: P
Page 550
Copyright Google Inc. Keyboard Shortcut: Q
Scale
The Scale menu item invokes the Scale Tool allowing you to resize and stretch selected geometry relative to other elements in your SketchUp model.

Lines and faces can be offset either inside or outside the original face.
3D Text
The 3D Text menu item launches a 3D Text Tool used to create modeled 3 dimensional text.
Text
The Text menu item launches a Text Tool used to insert Text entities into your model. creating Guide Line entities. Keyboard Shortcut: F
Tape Measure
Use the Tape Measure menu item to invoke the Tape Measure Tool used to perform a number of dimension-related operations.
Page 551
Copyright Google Inc.
Dimensions
Use the Dimensions menu item to invoke a Dimension Tool used to place Dimension entities in your model.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Follow Me
Use the Follow Me menu item to invoke the Follow Me Tool used to extrude faces along a path such as an edge or line drawn with the Freehand Tool. 2008
.
Axes
The Axes menu item invokes the Axes Tool allowing you to move the drawing axes. and re-scaling an entire model to an exact dimension.
Offset
The Offset menu item invokes the Offset Tool used to create copies of co-planar lines and faces that are a uniform distance from original lines and faces. This tool is often used when constructing rectangular objects that are skewed relative to one another. These operations include measuring the distance between two points. This tool is useful when adding details to a model because it allows you to draw the detail at one end of a path on the model and then repeat that detail along the path. Offsetting a face will always create a new face. or to allow for more accurate scaling of entities that are not oriented along the default coordinate planes.
Section Plane
The Section Plane menu item invokes a Section plane Tool used to make section cuts in your model. Keyboard Shortcut: T
Protractor
The Protractor menu item invokes the Protractor Tool allowing you to measure angles and create Guide Line entities (usually at some angle).

when clicked.
Dynamic Components
The Dynamic Components submenu contains menu items for configuring and creating dynamic components.Ruby scripts are contained in the Plugins directory under the installation directory. the Create Face utility will properly connect edges and create a face.
•
Query Tool The Query Tool menu item invokes a Query Tool utility that displays the current mouse position in the Measurements Toolbar. Create Face The Create Face menu item invokes the Create Face utility allowing you to troubleshoot face creation and. Create Face will not create a face. but displays a message indicating why SketchUp cannot create a face. This menu item only appears after enabling the utilities tools using the Extensions panel of the Preferences dialog box. animates. Interact Tool Use the Interact Tool menu item to interact with a dynamic component that has click regions. 2008
.
Page 552
Copyright Google Inc. Toggle Terrain Use the Toggle Terrain menu item to toggle the Google Earth snapshot image between a 2D and 3D image. but the edges are not connected topologically. such as a door that. or appear to be connected when there is actually a small gap between the ends of the edges.
Utilities
The Utilities submenu contains various utilities and macros created using the SketchUp Ruby API. Place Model Use the Place Model menu item to place your SketchUp models in Google Earth. create a face for three or more intersecting edges. A face cannot be created because edges are not exactly planer. Specifically. In these instances. Note . in most cases. In this case. Component Options Use the Component Options menu item to display the Component Options dialog box used to configure a dynamic component.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Google Earth
The Google Earth submenu contains menu items for interacting with Google Earth. This message can be used to troubleshoot face creation. This menu item only appears after enabling Dynamic Components using the Extensions panel of the Preferences dialog box. Get Current View Use the Get Current View menu item to capture 2D and 3D snapshot images of the current view in Google Earth. the Create Face utility is useful when: • A model has two edges that have a common end point geometrically (the coordinates of the end point are the same).

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Generate Report Use the Generate Report menu item to display the Generate Report dialog box used to generate various dynamic components reports. This menu item only appears after enabling the terrain modeling tools using the Extensions panel of the Preferences dialog box.
Page 553
Copyright Google Inc. See the Sandbox Tools topic for further information. 2008
.
Sandbox
The Sandbox submenu contains options for modifying terrain. Component Attributes Use the Component Attributes menu item to display the Component Attributes dialog box used to develop a dynamic component.

Keyboard Shortcut: S
Page 554
Copyright Google Inc. Keyboard Shortcut: E
Paint Bucket
The Paint Bucket menu item invokes the Paint Bucket Tool used to assign materials to entities in your model.
Select
The Select menu item invokes a Select Tool allowing you to select one or more entities to modify.The Paint Bucket Tool is different than the Apple Color Picker used to select colors and materials. Keyboard Shortcut: B
Move
The Move menu item invokes the Move Tool allowing you to move. This menu represents one of three mechanisms for accessing these tools (additional mechanisms are the tool palette and keyboard shortcuts). or replace a material in your model. This tool can also be used to rotate Component entities.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Tools Menu (Mac OS X)
The Tools menu provides access to all of the modification tools in SketchUp. manipulate. 2008
. Keyboard Shortcut: Spacebar
Eraser
Use the Eraser menu item to invoke the Eraser Tool allowing you to erase entities from the drawing area. The Rotate Tool can also be used to stretch and distort geometry by selecting only a portion of a model. and copy geometry. Use the Paint Bucket Tool to paint individual elements. Keyboard Shortcut: M
Rotate
Use the Rotate menu item to invoke the Rotate Tool used to rotate drawing elements and single or multiple objects within a single rotation plane. Keyboard Shortcut: Q
Scale
The Scale menu item invokes the Scale Tool allowing you to resize and stretch selected geometry relative to other elements in your SketchUp model. Note . This tool also allows you to hide and soften edges. fill a number of connected faces.

re-attach. These operations include measuring the distance between two points.
3D Text
The 3D Text menu item launches a 3D Text Tool used to create modeled 3 dimensional text. depending on the context of selected geometry. creating Guide Line entities. Keyboard Shortcut: P
Follow Me
Use the Follow Me menu item to invoke the Follow Me Tool used to extrude faces along a path such as an edge or line drawn with the Freehand Tool. Offsetting a face will always create a new face. extrude. or subtract faces. Keyboard Shortcut: F
Tape Measure
Use the Tape Measure menu item to invoke the Tape Measure Tool used to perform a number of dimension-related operations.
Text
The Text menu item launches a Text Tool used to insert Text entities into your model. This tool can be used to displace. or to allow for more accurate scaling of entities that are not oriented along the default coordinate planes. Keyboard Shortcut: T
Protractor
The Protractor menu item invokes the Protractor Tool allowing you to measure angles and create Guide Line entities (usually at some angle).
Page 555
Copyright Google Inc.
Axes
The Axes menu item invokes the Axes Tool allowing you to move the drawing axes. and re-scaling an entire model to an exact dimension.
Offset
The Offset menu item invokes the Offset Tool used to create copies of co-planar lines and faces that are a uniform distance from original lines and faces.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Push/Pull
The Push/Pull menu item invokes the Push/Pull Tool used to manipulate faces of your model. Lines and faces can be offset either inside or outside the original face. 2008
. This tool is useful when adding details to a model because it allows you to draw the detail at one end of a path on the model and then repeat that detail along the path. This tool is often used when constructing rectangular objects that are skewed relative to one another.
Dimensions
Use the Dimensions menu item to invoke a Dimension Tool used to place Dimension entities in your model.

such as a door that. create a face for three or more intersecting edges. This menu item only appears after enabling Dynamic Components using the Extensions panel of the Preferences dialog box. when clicked. 2008
. in most cases. Place Model Use the Place Model menu item to place your SketchUp models in Google Earth.
Utilities
The Utilities submenu contains various utilities and macros created using the SketchUp Ruby API. Note . the Create Face utility is useful when:
Page 556
Copyright Google Inc. Interact Tool Use the Interact Tool menu item to interact with a dynamic component that has click regions.
Dynamic Components
The Dynamic Components submenu contains menu items for configuring and creating dynamic components.
Google Earth
The Google Earth submenu contains menu items for interacting with Google Earth. Specifically.Ruby scripts are contained in the Plugins directory under the installation directory. Create Face The Create Face menu item invokes the Create Face utility allowing you to troubleshoot face creation and.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Section Plane
The Section Plane menu item invokes a Section plane Tool used to make section cuts in your model. Component Attributes Use the Component Attributes menu item to display the Component Attributes dialog box used to develop a dynamic component. This menu item only appears after enabling the utilities tools using the Extensions panel of the Preferences dialog box. Get Current View Use the Get Current View menu item to capture 2D and 3D snapshot images of the current view in Google Earth. animates. Component Options Use the Component Options menu item to display the Component Options dialog box used to configure a dynamic component. Toggle Terrain Use the Toggle Terrain menu item to toggle the Google Earth snapshot image between a 2D and 3D image. Generate Report Use the Generate Report menu item to display the Generate Report dialog box used to generate various dynamic components reports.

See the Sandbox Tools topic for further information. the Create Face utility will properly connect edges and create a face. Create Face will not create a face. or appear to be connected when there is actually a small gap between the ends of the edges. A face cannot be created because edges are not exactly planer.
•
Query Tool The Query Tool menu item invokes a Query Tool utility that displays the current mouse position in the Measurements Toolbar. This menu item only appears after enabling the terrain modeling tools using the Extensions panel of the Preferences dialog box. This message can be used to troubleshoot face creation. but displays a message indicating why SketchUp cannot create a face.
Sandbox
The Sandbox submenu contains options for modifying terrain. 2008
. but the edges are not connected topologically.Google SketchUp 7 Help
•
A model has two edges that have a common end point geometrically (the coordinates of the end point are the same).
Page 557
Copyright Google Inc. In this case. In these instances.

such as edge and face rendering styles.
Page 558
Copyright Google Inc.
Materials
The Materials menu item invokes Material Browser and Editor used for managing your materials.
Components
The Components menu item displays Components Browser used for managing your components.
Scenes
The Scenes menu item invokes the Scene Manager used to manage scenes for an animation.
Entity Info
The Entity Info menu item displays the Entity Info dialog box used to view and set settings for the currently selected entity (or entities). and components. 2008
. Model settings are dialog boxes with settings that affect the model.
Layers
Use the Layers menu item to display the Layers Manager used to manage your SketchUp layers.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Window Menu (Microsoft Windows)
The Window menu contains model settings and managers for your models. The Scene Manger will display with the current scene highlighted. and model information.
Styles
The Styles menu item invokes the Styles dialog box containing options related to styles.
Oultiner
The Outliner menu item invokes the Component Outliner used to display components and groups in a hierarchy. materials. layers.
Fog
The Fog menu item invokes the Fog dialog box used to add a fog effect to your model.
Model Info
Use the Model Info menu item to display the Model Info dialog box used to set settings for your entire model.
Shadows
The Shadows menu item invokes Shadow Settings dialog box for manipulating shadows in your model. Managers are dialog boxes that manage certain aspects of your model such as scenes. display settings. such as shadows.

Welcome
The Welcome menu item invokes the Welcome to SketchUp dialog box.
Soften Edges
The Soften Edges menu item invokes the Soften Edges dialog box used to soften and smooth edges in your model.
Hide/Show Dialogs
Use the Hide/Show Dialog menu item to hide and show all currently active dialog boxes.
Component Options
The Component Options menu item is used to display the Component Options dialog box used to configure a dynamic component.
Component Attributes
The Component Attributes menu item is used to display the Component Attributes dialog box used to develop a dynamic component.
Ruby Console
The Ruby Console menu item displays the Ruby Console where you can type Ruby script.
Page 559
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Match Photo
The Match Photo menu item invokes the Match Photo dialog box used to help you create accurate 3D models from photos and to accurately place models in a photo's context.
Instructor
The Instructor menu item invokes the Instructor used to display information about the currently activated tool. 2008
.
Preferences
The Preferences menu item invokes the Application Preferences dialog box where you can set various global settings for the program.

2008
. such as shadows. This item works similarly to clicking the plus icon at the top of the document window.
Model Info
Use the Model Info menu item to display the Model Info dialog box used to set settings for your entire model. Keyboard Shortcut: Command+M
Zoom
The Zoom menu item toggles between shrinking and expanding the main document window.
Minimize
The Minimize menu item minimizes the current document window and places it in the dock. materials. display settings.
Outliner
The Outliner menu item invokes the Component Outliner used to display components and groups in a hierarchy. Model settings are dialog boxes with settings that affect the model.
Styles
The Styles menu item invokes the Styles dialog box containing options related to styles.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Window Menu (Mac OS X)
The Window menu contains model settings and managers for your models.
Layers
Use the Layers menu item to display the Layers Manager used to manage your SketchUp layers. and components.
Page 560
Copyright Google Inc. Keyboard Shortcut: Shift+Command+C
Components
The Components menu item displays the Component Browser used for managing your components. and model information. Keyboard Shortcut: Shift+Command+I
Entity Info
The Entity Info menu item displays the Entity Info dialog box used to view and set settings for the currently selected entity (or entities). layers. Managers are dialog boxes that manage certain aspects of your model such as scenes. Keyboard Shortcut: Command+I
Materials
The Materials menu item invokes the Color Picker used for selecting and applying colors and materials to your models. Click on the minimized view in the doc to re-activate a minimized window. such as edge and face rendering styles.

Soften Edges
The Soften Edges menu item invokes the Soften Edges dialog box used to soften and smooth edges in your model. 2008
.
Component Options
The Component Options menu item is used to display the Component Options dialog box used to configure a dynamic component.
Ruby Console
The Ruby Console menu item displays the Ruby Console where you can type Ruby script.
Bring All To Front
Use the Bring All To Front menu item to bring all of your open SketchUp windows to the foreground of Mac OS X.
Component Attributes
The Component Attributes menu item is used to display the Component Attributes dialog box used to develop a dynamic component.
Match Photo
The Match Photo menu item invokes the Match Photo dialog box used to help you create accurate 3D models from photos and to accurately place models in a photo's context. The Font Panel also allows you to select bold and italic versions of your fonts.
Fog
The Fog menu item invokes the Fog dialog box used to add a fog effect to your model.
Page 561
Copyright Google Inc. The Scene Manger will display with the current scene highlighted. Keyboard Shortcut: Command+T
Shadows
The Shadows menu item invokes Shadow Settings dialog box for manipulating shadows in your model.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Scenes
The Scenes menu item invokes the Scene Manager used to manage scenes for an animation.
Hide/Show Dialogs
Use the Hide/Show Dialogs menu item to hide and show all currently active dialog boxes. All open document windows and active panels and palettes are brought to front.
Instructor
The Instructor menu item invokes the Instructor used to display information about the currently activated tool.
Show Fonts
The Show Fonts sub-menu includes options for toggling the display of the Fonts Panel allowing you to choose a font face and type.

2008
.
Page 562
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Arrange in Front
Use the Arrange in Front menu item to bring all of your open SketchUp windows to the foreground of Mac OS X and arrange them from the center outward toward the edge of the screen.
(Open Documents)
The (Open Documents) menu items represent a dynamically generated list of all your open SketchUp files . Select the file you want to activate from this menu to switch between files.

License
The License submenu includes several options allowing you to view and manage your SketchUp license.
Page 563
Copyright Google Inc.
Contact Us
Select the Contact Us menu to contact Google SketchUp technical support. This dialog box displays single user licenses on the network. and video tutorials. provided by Google when you buy SketchUp. 2008
. This menu item is used primarily when switching from a single-user license to a multiuser network license. These items include the SketchUp on-line user's guide. Click on this menu item to display the SketchUp Authorization Screen.
Help Center
The Online Help Center menu item launches the Google SketchUp Help Center in your default web browser. Lan License Monitor The Lan License Monitor menu item displays the LAN License Monitor dialog box. to authorize SketchUp. a quick reference card. License Info The License Info menu item displays information about your SketchUp license. Authorize Use the Authorize menu item to authorize your SketchUp licence to extend the use of SketchUp beyond the 8 hour trial period. including the type of license and serial number. Set Network License File Use the Set Network License File menu item to relocate the network license file on the network. Type in the authorization number. You must authorize a new single-user or network license to use SketchUp again. Unauthorize Use the UnAuthorize menu item to unauthorize your SketchUp licence.
Welcome to SketchUp
The Welcome to SketchUp menu item launches the Welcome to SketchUp dialog box. Unset Network License File Use the Unset Network License File menu item to delete the location of the network license file on the network.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Help Menu (Microsoft Windows)
The Help menu contains items relating to receiving help with the product. Caution . This web site contains a list of Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) and a knowledge base of technical support issues and solutions.SketchUp will not run after you unauthorize your license.

The Check For Update menu item checks to see if you have the most current version of SketchUp.
About SketchUp.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Check for Update. You will be prompted to download the current version if your version is out-ofdate.. 2008
... This dialog box provides information about your SketchUp version and license.
Page 564
Copyright Google Inc. An Internet connection is required to use this feature..
The About Google SketchUp menu item activates the About Google SketchUp dialog box.

This web site contains a list of Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) and a knowledge base of technical support issues and solutions. These items include the SketchUp on-line user's guide.
Online Help Center
The Online Help Center menu item launches the Google SketchUp Help Center in your default web browser. and video tutorials.
Page 565
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Help Menu (Mac OS X)
The Help menu contains items relating to receiving help with the product.
Welcome to SketchUp
The Welcome to SketchUp menu item launches the Welcome to SketchUp dialog box. 2008
.
Contact Us
Select the Contact Us menu to contact Google SketchUp technical support. a quick reference card.

2008
. and monochrome). Push/Pull Tool. Paint Bucket Tool. Scale Tool.
Google Toolbar
The buttons on the Google Toolbar are used to collaborate between SketchUp and other Google products.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing Toolbar
The buttons on the Drawing Toolbar activate the Rectangle Tool. shaded.
Modification Toolbar
The Modification Toolbar contains geometry modification tools. hidden line.
Face Style Toolbar
The buttons on the FaceStyle Toolbar activate SketchUp's face rendering styles (x-ray transparency. Line Tool. For example. you can type in the specific length of a line while you are in the Line Tool. Arc Tool.
Page 567
Copyright Google Inc. The Toolbar contains the Get Current View. The tools on this Toolbar are the Move Tool. Circle Tool. wireframe. Polygon Tool. Make Component.
Layers Toolbar
The Layers Toolbar provides quick access to several often used layer operations.
Principal Toolbar
The buttons on the Principal Toolbar activate the Select Tool. and Eraser Tool. Toggle Terrain. Follow Me Tool. shaded with textures. The Measurement Toolbar is used to create accurate geometry. and Share Model buttons. Rotate Tool. Place Model. and Freehand Tool.
Measurements Toolbar
The Measurements Toolbar contains a field where you can type values corresponding to the currently activated tool. and Offset Tool. Get Models.

Sandbox Toolbar
The buttons on the Sandbox Toolbar activate SketchUp's Sandbox Tools (Sandbox From Contours. and Model Info. Component Options dialog box. right. Open. The bottom view is not included. Sandbox From Scratch. Cut.
Dynamic Components Toolbar
The buttons on the Dynamic Components toolbar activate the Interaction tool. and Look Around Tool. 2008
. Erase.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Sections Toolbar
The Sections Toolbar allows you to conveniently execute common section operations.
Views Toolbar
The buttons on the Views Toolbar activate SketchUp's standard views (iso. Save. and Component Attributes dialog box ( ). top. Drape Tool. Print. back.
Shadows Toolbar
The Shadows Toolbar is used to control shadows. Redo.
Page 568
Copyright Google Inc. Paste. Undo. and left). This Toolbar contains buttons to launch the Shadow Settings dialog box (left-most icon) and enable/disable shadows (second icon). Copy. but is available from the Camera menu. Stamp Tool. The controls on this Toolbar include buttons for toggling the section cut effect and toggling the display of section planes. Walk Tool. Smoove Tool. front. This Toolbar also contains slider bars to control settings related to the time of year (left-most slider bar) and time of day (right-most slider bar). These menu items are New.
Standard Toolbar
The Standard Toolbar contains a variety of menu items which help with file and drawing management and shortcuts to printing and help operations.
Walkthrough Toolbar
The buttons on the Walkthrough Toolbar activate the Position Camera Tool. Add Detail Tool. and Flip Edge Tool).

2008
.
Page 569
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Large Buttons
The Toolbar can be displayed using large and small tool buttons. Check the Use Large Tool Buttons checkbox in the General panel of the Preferences dialog box to switch between large and small tool buttons.

The buttons on the Google Toolbar are used to collaborate between SketchUp and other Google products. Get Models.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Google Tool Palette (Mac OS X)
SketchUp contains a Google tool palette containing all of the options to interact with other Google applications. 2008
. and Share Model buttons. The Toolbar contains the Get Current View. Place Model.
Page 571
Copyright Google Inc. Display the Google tool palette by clicking on the View > Tool Palettes > Google menu item. Toggle Terrain.

Keep Item Visible
The Keep Item Visible option keeps the toolbar item always visible when the window is resized.
Use Small Size
The Use Small Size option provides additional space in the Toolbar by shrinking the size of individual icons.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Toolbar Context Menu (Mac OS X)
The Toolbar context menu is activated by context-clicking on the Toolbar.
Icon & Text
The Icon & Text option allow you to display both icons and names of controls in the Toolbar. The Toolbar shows both controls and their labels as a default...
Remove Item
The Remove Item option removes the control that you have selected.
Text Only
The Text Only option allows you to only display the names of controls in the Toolbar.
Icon Only
The Icon Only option allows you to only display icons for controls in the Toolbar.. such as the Display Style group of controls.
Customize Toolbar. This menu contains options for manipulating the appearance of your Toolbar. This option does not change the size of textual names or icon groups. menu item displays the Customize Toolbar dialog box containing all of the controls that can be placed in the Toolbar.
Page 574
Copyright Google Inc.
The Customize Toolbar.. 2008
.

You can also use the View menu or the Styles dialog box to switch between these styles.
Shadows (icon)
The Shadows icon control toggles shadows on and off. The following section covers each of these controls.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Toolbar Control Types (Mac OS X)
SketchUp contains a variety of controls you can place into your Toolbar for easy access. Any new entities you draw will be assigned to the current layer. 2008
.
Undo/Redo
The Undo command will undo the last drawing or editing command performed.
Layers
The Layers Toolbar provides quick access to several often used layer operations.
Page 575
Copyright Google Inc.
Display the Current Layer: The Layers Toolbar displays the current layer name.
Shadows (sliders)
The Shadows sliders give you quick access to the most frequently used shadow settings. and adjust date and time with the sliders.Many of the controls on the Customize Toolbar dialog box are tools listed in the Large Tool Pallet section of the documentation.
Standard Views
The Standard Views control gives you quick access to SketchUp's Standard Views (not including a bottom view).
Face Style
The Face Style control allows you to quickly switch between SketchUp's Face Rendering Styles. The Redo Command cancels Undo operations.
You can also use the Shadow Settings dialog box to access more detailed shadow settings. Add a Layer: Click in the text field of the drop-down list and type a new layer name to add a new layer to the model. stepping forward in the modification history. Note . You can turn shadow casting on and off with the checkbox.

A Flexible Space automatically adjusts spacing between Toolbar controls depending on the number and size of controls in the Toolbar. You will be prompted to set a few characteristics for the Component entity upon clicking this Toolbar control.
Section Cuts
The Section Cuts control toggles the display of the Section Cut Effect.
Page 576
Copyright Google Inc.
Section Display
The Section Display control toggles the display of Section Planes.
Space
The Space is used to add a space between controls.
X-Ray Mode
The X-Ray Mode control toggles the X-Ray display mode.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Slideshow
The Slideshow control is used to start and stop slide shows.
Component Maker
The Component Maker creates a Component entity from the selected geometry. 2008
.
Flexible Space
The Flexible Space is used to add an adjustable space between controls.
Separator
The Separator is used to add a vertical line to separate controls in your Toolbar.
Model Info
The Model Info control is used to display the Model Info dialog box.

Page 577
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.
Measurements
The Measurements control contains a field where you can type values corresponding to the currently activated tool.
Colors
The Colors control launches the Color Picker. enabling you to print the current view of your model. For example. The Measurement Toolbar is used to create accurate geometry. you can type in the specific length of a line while you are in the Line Tool.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Print
The Print control activates the Print dialog box.
Fonts
The Fonts control launches the Font dialog box.
Customize
The Customize control invokes the Customize Toolbar dialog box.

blue). is used to define the place where all of axes lines start or originate.
Note . 2008
. The term origin. These axes are helpful in providing a sense of direction in 3D space while you work. green. The plane where the red and green axes lines lie is called the ground plane. perpendicular to each other.The Drawing Axes will be automatically hidden in any images expored from SketchUp.
Page 578
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing Axes
SketchUp's drawing axes consist of three colored lines (red. displayed in the drawing area.

Page 579
Copyright Google Inc.
Place
Use the Place menu item to move the drawing axes.
Reset Align View
Select the Align View menu item to align SketchUp's point of view with the current view. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The Drawing Axes Context Menu
All of the context menu items for the drawing axes context menu follow.
Move
Select the Move menu item to move and rotate the drawing axes relative to their current position.
Hide
Select the Hide menu item to hide the drawing axes.

appearing automatically while working on the model.
Inference Cues
The inference engine uses visual cues. This engine helps you draw very accurately by inferring points from other points as you draw while also providing you with visual cues. These cues make complex inference combinations clear to you as you draw Additionally. 2008
.
Page 580
Copyright Google Inc. called the inference engine. the inference engine uses specific colors to indicate its type of inference (covered further in Inference Types). to identify significant points or geometric conditions.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Inference
SketchUp features a geometric analysis engine. allowing you to work in 3D space using a 2D screen and input device.

Following is an image of an Intersection inference:
On Face The On Face inference indicates a point which lies on a Face entity. Following is an image of a Midpoint inference:
Intersection The Intersection inference indicates an exact point where a line intersects another line or face.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Inference Types
There are three main types of inferences: point. The Midpoint inference is represented by a cyan circle. Endpoint The Endpoint inference indicates the end of a Line or Arc entity. Following is a list of point inference types. The On Face inference is represented by a blue diamond. SketchUp often combines inferences together to form a complex inference. linear. and planar. Following is an image of an Endpoint inference:
Midpoint The Midpoint inference indicates the middle point on a line or edge. The Intersection inference is represented by a red x. 2008
. The Endpoint inference is represented by a green circle.
Page 581
Copyright Google Inc.
Point Inference
A point inference is based on the exact point of your cursor in your model.

The On Blue Axis inference is represented by a blue line.Google SketchUp 7 Help
On Edge The On Edge inference indicates a point that lies along an edge. Following is an image of an On Edge inference. The On Red Axis inference is represented by a red line.
Linear Inference
A linear inference snaps along a line or direction in space. The On Green Axis inference is represented by a green line. 2008
. The On Edge inference is represented by a red square. Following is an image of an On Green Axis inference:
On Blue Axis The On Blue Axis inference indicates a linear alignment to the blue drawing axis. a linear inference sometimes displays a temporary dotted line while you draw. In addition to a tooltip. On Red Axis The On Red Axis inference indicates a linear alignment to the red drawing axis. Following is an image of an On Blue Axis inference:
Page 582
Copyright Google Inc. Following is an image of an On Red Axis inference:
On Green Axis The On Green Axis inference indicates a linear alignment to green drawing axis.

The From Point inference is represented by a dotted line whose color corresponds to the axis direction (red. or blue). Following is an image of an From Point inference:
Perpendicular The Perpendicular inference indicates perpendicular alignment to an edge. Following is an image of an Perpendicular inference:
Parallel The Parallel inference indicates a parallel alignment to an edge. The Parallel inference is represented by a magenta line. 2008
. Following is an image of a Tangent at Vertex inference (the right arc's vertex is tangent the left arc's vertex):
Page 583
Copyright Google Inc. The Perpendicular inference is represented by a magenta line. green. Following is an image of an Parallel inference:
Tangent at Vertex The Tangent at Vertex inference indicates an arc whose vertex is tangent to a previously drawn arc's vertex.Google SketchUp 7 Help
From Point The From Point inference indicates a linear alignment from a point along the drawing axes directions. The Tangent at Vertex inference is represented by a cyan arc.

using unique inference indicators. but are magenta color. Following is an image of a Golden Section inference:
Drawing Plane Inference
SketchUp will snap to the planes defined by the Drawing Axes or your view when it cannot snap to geometry in the drawing area. Group and component tooltips also indicate that the inference is in a Group or Component entity by appending the phrase "in group" or "in component" to the end of an inference tooltip.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Shape Inferences
SketchUp indicates half circles. SketchUp will draw on the ground plane when the point of view is that of the ground plane. squares. Half Circle The Half Circle inference indicates an arc that is exactly one half of a circle. Following is an image of a Square inference:
Golden Section The Golden Section inference indicates a rectangle whose properties match the Golden Ratio as found in mathematics and the arts. These indicators follow. Group and Component inference indicators are the same shape. and golden sections. Following is an image of a Half Circle inference:
Square The Square inference indicates a rectangle whose sides are all the same size. For example.
Page 584
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.
Component and Group Inferences
All inferences apply on geometry inside Component entities or Group entities.

Page 585
Copyright Google Inc. resized. meaning they do not limit your interaction with the rest of the application by requiring user input before continuing with your work. 2008
. Dialog boxes in SketchUp can be snapped to other user interface components on your screen.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Dialog Boxes
Most dialog boxes in SketchUp are modeless. and minimized (with some exceptions). Instead. these dialog boxes can be displayed while you work allowing you to make dynamic settings changes to your model while you are sketching.

Choose between None. This menu item is available for the Face and Surface entities. This menu item is available for the Section Plane entity. Materials The Materials menu item is used to calculate the total area of the faces in the entire model.
Page 586
Copyright Google Inc. Section Plane. This menu item is available for the Component entity. with the material of the currently selected face. This option is similar to changing the local coordinate system in other 3D applications.
Active Cut
The Active Cut menu item is used to activate and de-activate the Section Plane Object.
Align Axes
The Align Axes menu item is used to align the Drawing Axes to the currently selected face. Layer The Layer menu item is used to calculate the total area for all faces in the layer of the currently selected face. Closed Arrow. as indicated by the check mark. Activating a Section Plane will automatically de-activate all other planes in that context.
Align View
The Align View menu item is used to align the SketchUp Camera to the currently selected face.
Arrow
Click on the Arrow sub-menu menu to select the end point type for the leader line. and Open Arrow
Change Axes
The Change Axes menu item is used to redefine the origin axes of the selected component. The results of the calculation are displayed in a Area dialog box.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Context Menu Items for Entities
All of the context menu items for all entities in SketchUp follow.
Area
The Area sub-menu of the Face context menu is used to calculate the surface area in your SketchUp model. 2008
. This menu item is available for the Face and Surface entities. and Surface entities. Selection The Selection menu item is used to calculate the total surface area of the currently selected face. This menu item is available for the Face and Surface entities. This menu item is available for Face. hidden or unhidden. Dot.

Component Attributes The Component Attributes menu item is used to display the component's Component Attributes dialog box. This menu item is primarily used to stitch together photographs.
Page 587
Copyright Google Inc. Component Options The Configure menu item is used to display a dynamic component's Component Options dialog box. You can also click outside of the group with the Select Tool. 2008
. encapsulated within a Group. Generate Report The Generate Report menu item is used to generate a report of all attributes contained in a dynamic component. This menu item is available for the Component entity.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Close Component
The Close Component menu item is used to end an editing session and close the component. Swap Component The Swap Component menu item is used to swap the currently selected component with another component. wherever the section intersects with a face.
Combine Textures
The Combine Textures menu item is used to create a texture which is unique to the set of parallel Face entities. or press the Esc key to close the component. or press the Esc key to close the group.
Dynamic Components
The Dynamic Components submenu contains several options for working with Dynamic Components.
Convert to Polygon
The Convert to Polygon menu item is used to convert the entity into a polygon arc. Circle.
Create Group from Slice
Generates new edges.
Close Group
The Close Group menu item is used to end an editing session and close the group. This menu item is available for the 3D Polyline. This menu item is available for the Section Plane entity. which will remain editable yet generate standard facets when extruded. This menu item is available for the Group entity. and Curve entities. This menu item is available for a selection set of parallel Face entities (where at least one face has a texture). You can also click outside of the component with the Select Tool.

a window with a color attribute set to green will remain green when swapped with another component containing a color attribute set to green. Component Attributes The Component Attributes menu item is used to display the Component Attributes dialog box used to develop a dynamic component. This menu item is available for the Component entity.
Page 588
Copyright Google Inc. You can also use the Select Tool to double-click on the group. You can also use the Select Tool to double-click on the component. This menu item is available for any Component entity. Swap Component Use the Swap Component menu item to swap the currently selected component with another component.Components that have attributes with the same name and value will retain their settings when swapped. This menu item is available for any Component entity. Note . or select the component and press "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or Return (Mac OS X) key to edit a component. or select the group and press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key to edit a group. Type in the new text and press the "Enter" (Microsoft Windows) or "Return" (Mac OS X) key to accept your changes. This menu item is available for the Group entity. Component Options The Component Options menu item is used to display the Component Options dialog box used to configure a dynamic component.
Dynamic Components
The Dynamic Components submenu contains menu items for configuring and creating dynamic components.
Edit Text
The Edit Text menu item is used to edit the dimension text. use this option to swap all windows of a specific type or manufacturer with windows of another type or manufacturer. This menu item is available for the Dimension and Text entities. This menu item is not available when an arc bounds a curved surface. Generate Report The Generate Report menu item is used to display the Generate Report dialog box used to generate various dynamic components reports. For example. For example.
Edit Component
The Edit Component menu item is used to edit the currently selected component.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Divide
The Divide menu item is used to divide an entity into any number of equal segments. 2008
.
Edit Group
The Edit Group menu item is used to edit the currently selected group.

This menu item is available for the Component and Group entities. This menu item is available for the 3D Polyline. such as a box and a tube.
Hide/Unhide
The Hide/Unhide menu item hides or unhides the select entity. These faces can then be pushed. Select Unhide to restore visibility for the entity. Group. This menu item changes to Unhide when selected geometry is hidden. This menu item is available for the all entities. This menu item is available for the 3D Polyline.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Entity Info
The Entity Info menu item is used to display the Entity Info dialog box for viewing and changing the entity's attributes. if View > Show Hidden Geometry is enabled.
Explode Curve
The Explode Curve menu item is used to break the entity into regular edges.
Flip Along
The Flip Along menu item is used to mirror the selected geometry along an axis . and automatically create new faces where the elements intersect. and will no longer respond to tool operations as a single entity. This menu item is available for all entities. 2008
. You can use the Axis Tool to reposition the drawing axes. An exploded entity will appear the same. and Image entities.
Explode
The Explode menu item is used to break the entity into the separate entities. An exploded entity will appear the same. allowing you to select them. but it can no longer be edited. Component. Curve. but it can no longer be edited.
Page 589
Copyright Google Inc. All hidden entities are displayed in a ghosted pattern. This menu item is available for all entities. This menu item is available for the Image entity. and Polygon entities. Circle. and will no longer respond to tool operations as a single entity. pulled or deleted to create new geometry.
Group
This creates a Group entity out of the selected geometry.
Intersect With Model
The Intersect With Model menu item is used to intersect two elements.
Erase
The Erase menu item is used to delete the selected entity from your model.
Export
The Export menu item is used to save the image entity to a file that can be edited in an image editor. allowing you to flip in virtually any direction.

with a new definition. The Make Unique Texture menu item is also available for a face which doesn't already have a texture applied. This menu item is available for the Face entity. Additional copies of the component can be dragged into the work area from the Components Browser. and rotates with your model as you change your view. This menu item is not available if SketchUp already considers the texture to be "unique" and applies to the side of the face which is visible at the time you select the menu. This dialog box prompts you to enter a texture size.Google SketchUp 7 Help
This menu item is available for the Component. This menu item is available for the Group entity. edit the material size. or reposition the texture on the face. A View Based leader will always retain its 2D screen orientation. however.The Make Unique Texture menu item will not be available again for a face unless you change the size of the face. Face.
Lock/Unlock
The Lock menu item is used to lock the component so that it cannot be moved or edited.
Make Unique Texture
The Make Unique Texture menu item is used to create a texture which is unique to that face. This menu item is available for the Face and Surface entities. Pushpin. The original component definition and all other instances will not be affected when you edit the component after using the Make Unique menu item.
Orient Faces
The Orient Faces menu item is used to automatically orient all the connected faces of your model to the orientation of the currently selected face. Note . and Surface entities. 2008
.
Make Component
The Make Component menu item converts the entities into a new Component entity (component definition). This option could lead to unexpected results when an edge of a face bounds three or more other faces.
Leader
Click on the Leader sub-menu to select between View Based. A Pushpin leader is aligned in 3D space.
Page 590
Copyright Google Inc. and Hidden leader types. Group.
Make Unique
The Make Unique menu item converts the currently selected component into a unique component. This menu item is available for the Component entity. The Unlock menu item is used to unlock the component so it can be edited. The Texture Size dialog box is displayed when you select a face without a texture and then select the Make Unique Texture menu item.

This menu item is available for Component and Image entities. This menu item is available for the Component entity.
Scale Definition
The Scale Definition menu item applies any scaling operation.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Point at Center
The Point at Center menu item is used to place a point at the center of your arc or circle entity.
Reload
The Reload menu item is used to update the currently selected component with a new revision from the file system. when exporting SketchUp geometry to a file format that only supports single-sided faced polygons (like DXF. with a new name and location in your file system.
Reverse Faces
The Reverse Faces menu item is used to flip the front and back sides of the currently selected face.
Save As
The Save As menu item is used to save the selected component to a separate SketchUp file.
Reset Scale
The Reset Scale menu item is used to remove any scaling operations applied to the component. This menu item is commonly used to create component files that can be included in the component collection or reused in other models. to the component definition in the Components Browser. This menu item is available for the Face.
Page 591
Copyright Google Inc. Section. This menu item is available for the Component and Group entities. and 3DS). However. This menu item is generated by a Ruby script. This menu item is available for the 3D Polyline. DWG. and Surface entities. This menu item is available for the Component and Group entities. This menu item is available for the Component entity.
Reverse
The Reverse menu item is used to reverse the direction of a Section Plane entity. to the currently selected component. This menu item is available for the Section Plane entity. Circle.
Reset Skew
The Reset Skew menu item is used to remove any skewing applied to the component. it becomes important to know which side of the face will be exported. and Polygon entities. 2008
.

Softened edges are not visible unless displayed in profile. Face. Reset Position The Reset Position menu item is used to reset the texture to its previous state. See Position Texture Tool for additional information. Polygon. This menu item only appears when a texture is painted on the face.
Page 592
Copyright Google Inc. and Surface entities. Receive The Receive Shadows menu item allows the face of the entity to receive a shadows cast by other entities. This menu item is available for the Image entity
Soften
The Soften menu item is used to soften a faceted surface. All on same Layer The All on same Layer menu item is used to select all of the elements on the current layer.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Select
The Select submenu contains several options for selecting geometry related to the entity. Cast The Cast Shadows menu item allows the face of the entity to cast a shadow. 2008
. Curve. Circle. and Polygon entities. Connected Faces The Connected Faces menu item is used to select all of the faces currently connected to the selected entity.
Texture
The Texture submenu contains several options for repositioning textures on a face. Line. Bounding Edges The Bounding Edges menu item is used to select all of the edges currently bounding the selected entity. Curve. This menu item is available for the 3D Polyline. All Connected The All Connected menu item is used to select all of the elements currently connected to the selected arc. This menu item is available for the 3D Polyline.
Shadows
The Shadows submenu contains cast and receive shadow options for the Image entity. Circle. Position The Position menu item is used to manipulate textures (reposition. Line. skew. stretch. and so on) directly on a face.

This menu item is available for the 3D Polyline. Edit Texture Image Select Edit Texture Image to launch your default image editor.
Zoom Extents
The Zoom Extents menu item is used to zoom your view to a distance where the whole entity is visible and centered in the drawing window. and Image entities. Image. in the In Model section of the Material Browser. If you have not identified an editor in the Applications panel of the Preferences dialog box.
Use As Material (Microsoft Windows)
The Use As Material menu item is used to create a material. Component. Face.
Text Position
The Text Position menu item is used to position text either at the start of the dimension line (Outside Start). in the Colors In Model section of the Material Browser.
Page 593
Copyright Google Inc.
Use As Material (Mac OS X)
The Use As Material menu item is used to create a material. Group. SketchUp launches the default editor or image display application. Line. Circle. as defined in the Applications panel of the Preferences dialog box. This menu item is available for the Image entity.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Projected The Projected menu item is used to wrap images and textures over forms as though projected onto the form.
Unglue
The Unglue menu item is used to free a component from a face (if you've attached a holecutting component to a face). our end of the dimension line (Outside End). This menu item is available for the Component. Group. center (Centered). Polygon. This menu item is available for the Image entity. from the image. and Surface entities. This menu item is available for the Dimension entity. This menu item is available for the Face and Surface entities. Curve. to edit the currently selected texture. from the image. 2008
.

The following image shows a context menu for a Face entity.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Context Menus
Menu items also appear in special context menu: menus whose contents vary depending on the context in which they are invoked (usually on one or more entities in the drawing area or on a user interface component. 2008
. such as a dialog box).
Page 594
Copyright Google Inc.

You must choose a template to use SketchUp.
Always Show on Startup Checkbox
Check the Always Show on Startup button to display the Welcome to SketchUp dialog box when you launch SketchUp.
Template Tab
Click on the arrow next to the Template tab to display a list of available templates.
Default Template Field
The Default Template field displays the name of the currently used template. Uncheck the Always Show on Startup button to never show the Welcome to SketchUp dialog box when you launch SketchUp.
Page 595
Copyright Google Inc. and learn more about SketchUp. Not Licensed (during an 8-hour evaluation of Google SketchUp Pro). or Not Licensed . Refer to Selecting a Template for more information.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Welcome to SketchUp Dialog Box
The Welcome to SketchUp dialog box appears when you first run SketchUp.
License Tab
Click on the arrow next to the License tab to display the currently active licenses.
Licensing Status Field
The Licensing Status field displays current information about your license status. license a copy of Google SketchUp Pro. This dialog box is primarily used to choose a template for use in SketchUp (templates have predefined settings. 2008
. Use the Welcome to SketchUp menu item on the Help menu to display the Welcome to SketchUp dialog box.
Learn Tab
Click on the arrow next to the Learn tab to display several options for learning SketchUp.
Start Using SketchUp Button
Click the Start using SketchUp button to close the Welcome to SketchUp dialog box and start using SketchUp. The Add License dialog box appears. such as units of measurement). SketchUp can either be Licensed.Expired (the 8-hour evaluation period is over).
Add License Button
Click the Add License button to add a license.
Choose Template Button
Click the Choose Template button to select a default template.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Principal Tools
This section of the user's guide covers the principal tools within SketchUp. Principal tools are those tools that tend to be used most often in SketchUp. Tools in this section are covered in the order they appear within the Tools menu. 2008
.
Page 596
Copyright Google Inc.

Activate the Select Tool from the Principal Toolbar (Microsoft Windows).Select Tool
Use the Select Tool to specify the entities you will modify when using other tools or commands. The entities that are included in a selection are referred to as the selection set. Keyboard Shortcut: Spacebar
Page 597
Copyright Google Inc. the Tool Palette (Mac OS X) or from the Tools menu. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
.

the Tool Palette (Mac OS X). or by selecting Eraser from the Tools menu. Keyboard Shortcut: E
Page 598
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Eraser Tool
Use the Eraser Tool to delete entities. The Eraser Tool can also be used to hide and soften edges. Activate the Eraser Tool from the Principal Toolbar (Microsoft Windows). 2008
.

fill a number of connected faces. the Tool Palette(Mac OS X). or by choosing Paint Bucket from the Tools menu.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Paint Bucket Tool
Use the Paint Bucket Tool to assign materials and colors to entities in your model. Activate the Paint Bucket Tool from the Principal Toolbar (Microsoft Windows). The Paint Bucket Tool is separate from the Apple Color Picker used to select colors and materials (Mac OS X). 2008
. Keyboard Shortcut: B
Page 599
Copyright Google Inc. You can use it to paint individual entities. or replace a material with another throughout your model.

Replace
Press and hold the "Shift" key prior to clicking on a face with the Paint Bucket Tool to apply a material to every face. with the new material.
Adjacent Fill
Press and hold the "Ctrl" (Microsoft Windows) or the "Option" (Mac OS X) key while clicking on a face with the Paint Bucket Tool to fill that face and any adjacent (connected) face with the same material.
Note .
Element Fill
The Paint Bucket Tool normally operates by filling in faces as you click on them.Selecting a number of entities with the Select Tool and painting using the Ctrl (Microsoft Windows) or the Option (Mac OS X) modifier key causes just the entities within the selection set to be painted.
Note . As mentioned previously. 2008
. with the same material in the current context.
Page 600
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Fill Options
The Paint Bucket Tool can be used with one or more keyboard modifiers to perform various painting operations.Selecting a number of entities with the Select Tool and painting using the Shift modifier key causes just the entities within the selection set to be painted. entities selected with the Select Tool can be painted with a single click of the Paint Bucket Tool. The face you click on and the adjacent face must have the same material prior to performing this operation.

2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Adjacent Replace
Press and hold both the "Shift" and the "Ctrl" (Microsoft Windows) or the "Option" (Mac OS X) keys simultaneously while painting to only replace the material on the face within the confines of geometry that is physically connected to that face.
Page 601
Copyright Google Inc.Selecting a number of entities with the Select Tool and painting using the Ctrl (Microsoft Windows) or the Option (Mac OS X) modifier key causes just the entities within the selection set to be painted. Note .

if all faces are selected and you paint the front of one face. Conversely. For example. No edges are painted when you select a face and all edges and paint the back of one face. All selected edges will be painted when you select a face and all edges and paint the front of the face. These rules follow: • The side of the faces that will be painted depends on the side initially painted when more than one face is selected. if all faces are selected and you paint the back of one face. all back faces will be painted. 2008
.
•
Page 602
Copyright Google Inc. Ensure you have the color set to the "By material" style settting to see the painted effect applied to edges. the front of all faces will be painted.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Face Painting Rules
There are several face painting rules that apply when painting multiple faces or edges at the same time.

Rectangle Tool. These tools include the Line Tool. and Freehand Tool. 2008
. Drawing tools are those tools used to create new geometry.
Page 603
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Drawing Tools
This section of the user's guide covers the drawing tools within SketchUp. Tools in this section are covered in the order they appear within the Draw menu.

the Tool Palette (Mac OS X) or the Draw menu.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Line Tool
Use the Line Tool to draw edges or Line entities. 2008
. The Line Tool can also be used to divide faces or heal deleted faces. Activate the Line Tool from the Drawing Toolbar (Microsoft Windows). Keyboard Shortcut: L
Page 604
Copyright Google Inc. Line entities can be joined to form a face.

2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Line Entities
Lines. form the structural foundation of all models.
Page 605
Copyright Google Inc. also referred to as edges. Draw lines with the Line Tool.

Activate the Arc Tool from the Tool Palette (Mac OS X). Drawing Toolbar (Microsoft Windows). Keyboard Shortcut: A
Page 606
Copyright Google Inc. or from the Draw menu. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Arc Tool
Use the Arc Tool to draw Arc entities: arcs comprised of multiple connected line segments (which can be edited as a single arc).

bulge.
Arc Deformation
If an Arc is deformed in a way that destroys its radial definition. 2008
. it will become a non-parametric Curve entity.Arc and Circle entities are special in that they automatically produce softened edges when extruded using the Push/Pull Tool. radius. For example. Draw Arcs with the Arc Tool. every point on the arc is inferred as an endpoint of the segment. all inference techniques will operate on the Arc as though it were comprised of segments. These entities act as a single line in that they can define the edge of a face and also divide a face.
Page 607
Copyright Google Inc. more line segments increases the size of your model and degrades performance. Arc entities are comprised of a length (also called the base chord). Note . Additionally. You can often achieve acceptable results by indicating small segmentation and using smoothing and edge softening to create the impression of smoothness. The following image shows an Arc entity.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Arc Entities
Arc entities are a combination of multiple line segments connected together to approximate the curvature of the arc. Polyline Curves can no longer be edited as arcs. selecting one segment of the arc selects the entire Arc entity. However. such as with a non-uniform scale operation.You can explode a arc into regular edge segments using the Explode Curve context menu item (see the Arc Context Menu Items section later in this topic).
Arc Segmentation
Arcs with more line segments appear to have smoother curvature than arcs with fewer line segments. However. and number of segments.
Note .

Page 608
Copyright Google Inc. Curve entities are comprised of multiple line segments that are connected together.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Freehand Tool
Use the Freehand Tool to draw irregular hand-drawn lines in the form of Curve entities and 3D Polyline entities. Activate the Freehand Tool from the Draw menu. from the Drawing Toolbar (Microsoft Windows). Curve entities can be useful for representing contours in a contour map or other organic shapes. 2008
. or the Tool Palette (Mac OS X). These curves behave as a single line in that they can define and divide faces. They are also connected such that selecting one segment selects the entire entity.

Page 609
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
3D Polyline Entities
SketchUp's 3d Polyline entities are curve-like entities that do not generate inference snaps or affect geometry in any way. Note . 2008
. Freehand sketches are usually used for tracing imported drawings.A 3D Polyline looks just like a Curve entity. Note . but is thinner. or for decorating your model. 2D sketching. Draw 3D Polyline entities with the Freehand Tool.You can explode a freehand sketch into regular edge segments using the Explode context menu item (see the 3D Polyline Context Menu Items section later in this topic).

The model in the previous image contains two entities: a Face entity (in the middle) surrounded by a Curve entity (the continuous edge).You can explode a curve into regular edge segments using the Explode Curve context menu item (see the Curve Context Menu Items section later in this topic). These entities act as a single line in that they can define the edge of a face and also divide a face. Draw curves with the Freehand Tool. selecting one segment of the curve selects the entire Curve entity. 2008
. Note . Curves can begin and end at the same point (as in the following image) or start and end at different points.
Note .Google SketchUp 7 Help
Curve Entities
SketchUp's Curve entities are a combination of multiple line segments that are connected together.
Page 610
Copyright Google Inc. The following image contains a Curve entity. Additionally.

Page 612
Copyright Google Inc. or Polygon Tool. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Face Entities
Face entities are flat plane-like entities that combine to form the 3D geometry in a SketchUp model. or coplanar. Arc Tool. Faces are automatically created when any three or more intersecting lines or edges are in the same plane (an infinite flat 2D space). Rectangle Tool. The edges that bound a face remain when you delete a face. The following image was created simply by joining arcs and lines to form the edges and subsequent faces. Circle Tool. SketchUp will create new edges and faces using the Auto-fold feature if you alter one of the edges of a face so that it is no longer co-planar with that face. a face is erased automatically when you delete one of its bounding edges. Draw faces with the Line Tool. Freehand Tool. However.

For example. However.You can explode an Circle into regular edge segments using the Explode Curve context menu item (see the Circle Context Menu Items section later in this topic). These entities act as a single line in that they can define the edge of a face and also divide a face. The following image shows a Circle entity with 24 segments. Note .Google SketchUp 7 Help
Circle Entities
Circle entities are a combination of multiple line segments that are connected together to form a circle.Arc and Circle entities are special in that they automatically produce softened edges when extruded using the Push/Pull Tool. Circle entities are comprised of a radius and number of segments. 2008
.The model in the previous image contains two entities: a Face entity (in the middle) surrounded by a Circle entity (the circular edge). Draw circles with the Circle Tool. selecting one segment of the arc selects the entire Circle entity. every point on the circle is inferred as an endpoint of the segment. Note .
Note . Additionally. all inference techniques will operate on the Circle as though it were comprised of segments.
Page 614
Copyright Google Inc.

However. selecting one segment of the polygon selects the entire Polygon entity.
Note . but can have 3 or more sides.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Polygon Entities
SketchUp's Polygon entities are similar to Faces entities.The model in the previous image contains two entities: a Face entity (in the middle) surrounded by a Polygon entity (the six-sided edge). The following image shows a six-sided polygon. Polygon entities are comprised of a radius and number of segments. Draw polygons with the Polygon Tool. Additionally. These entities act as a single line in that they can define the edge of a face and also divide a face. all inference techniques will operate on the Polygon as though it were comprised of segments. 2008
. Note .
Page 616
Copyright Google Inc.You can explode a polygon into regular edge segments using the Explode Curve context menu item (see the Polygon Context Menu Items section later in this topic).

These tools include the Push/Pull Tool. Tools in this section are covered in the order they appear within the Tools menu. and Select Tool. Eraser Tool. Modification tools are those tools used to modify existing geometry.
Page 617
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Modification Tools
This section of the user's guide covers the modification tools within SketchUp. 2008
.

This tool can also be used to rotate components and groups. Activate the Move Tool using the Modification Toolbar (Microsoft Windows). stretch and copy geometry. 2008
. the Tool Palette (Mac OS X)or the Tools menu. Keyboard Shortcut: M
Page 618
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Move Tool
Use the Move Tool to move.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Scale Tool
Use the Scale Tool to resize and stretch portions of geometry relative to other entities in your model. The Scale Tool is only intended to perform scaling operations on portions of your model (not the entire model). Keyboard Shortcut:S Note . the Tool Palette (Mac OS X) or the Tools menu.A Global Scale is an operation whereby the entire model is scaled simultaneously by applying a desired dimension to the distance between two points. 2008
.
Page 620
Copyright Google Inc. Activate the Scale Tool from the Modification Toolbar (Microsoft Windows). Use the Tape Measure Tool's global re-scale functionality to perform global scaling operations.

The default behavior is a non-uniform scale. the Scale Tool displays all the grips you may use. The Scale Tool allows you to perform both uniform scaling and non-uniform scaling (stretching operations). meaning that the proportions of the object will change. Any grips hidden behind geometry will become visible whenever touched by the mouse cursor. The Measurements Toolbar displays and accepts a single value. The Measurements Toolbar displays two values separated by a comma.
Page 621
Copyright Google Inc. and remain fully operable. Turn on X-ray Transparency mode to reveal any hidden grips.
Edge Grips
Edge grips scale the selected geometry from the opposite edge by two dimensions simultaneously. meaning that the proportions of the object will change. The default behavior is a non-uniform scale. The default behavior is a uniform scale such that the proportions remain intact and a single scale factor or dimension is displayed in the Measurements Toolbar. 2008
.
Face Grips
Face grips scale the selected geometry from the opposite face in only one dimension. The scaling grip that is used dictates the type of scaling you perform.
Corner Grips
Corner grips scale the selected geometry from the opposite corner.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Scale Grip Types
Upon activation.

including circular. the Modification Toolbar (Microsoft Windows) or the Tools menu. 2008
.
Page 622
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Push/Pull Tool
Use the Push/Pull Tool to push and pull Face entities to add volume to or subtract volume from your models.Push/Pull works only on faces. You can use push/pull to create volume out of any face type. and therefore does not work when SketchUp is set to a Wireframe rendering style. Activate the Push/Pull Tool from the Tool Palette (Mac OS X). rectangular. Keyboard Shortcut: P Note . and abstract faces.

Activate the Offset Tool from the Tool Palette (Mac OS X). Keyboard Shortcut: F
Page 623
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Offset Tool
Use the Offset Tool to create copies of lines and faces at a uniform distance from the originals. You can offset edges of faces either inside or outside of the original face. Offsetting a face will always create a new face. 2008
. the Modification Toolbar (Microsoft Windows) or from the Tools menu.

2008
.
Page 624
Copyright Google Inc. the Modification Toolbar (Microsoft Windows). because you can draw the profile of the molding at one end of a path on the model and using the Follow Me Tool continue that detail along the path. This tool is especially useful when trying to add details to a model.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Follow Me Tool
Use the Follow Me Tool to duplicate the profile of a face along a path.The path and the face must be in the same context. You can manually and automatically extrude a face along a path using the Follow Me Tool. Activate the Follow Me Tool from the Tools menu. such as a crown molding. Note . or the Tool Palette (Mac OS X).

Activate the Intersect With Model Tool from either context menu or the Edit menu. pulled or deleted to create new geometry. This tool allows you intersect two elements. These faces can then be pushed.
Page 625
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Intersect With Model Tool
Use the Intersect With Model Tool to create complex geometry. to automatically create new edges and faces where the elements intersect. 2008
. such as a box and a tube.

You cannot edit a texture applied to a curved surface as a whole though you can use the "View > Hidden Geometry" menu item view and edit the texture on the individual faces that make up the curve's face set. Additionally.The Position Texture Tool can only be used to modify textures applied to flat surfaces. and distorting.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Position Texture Tool
Materials within SketchUp are applied as tiled images meaning that the pattern or image will repeat both vertically and horizontally across any entities you paint. Note . this tool allows you to perform unique actions on images such as painting a picture around a corner or projecting it on a model. resizing. the terms material and texture are used interchangeably in this topic. including repositioning.
Page 626
Copyright Google Inc. Note .Normally a texture is a subset of a material. 2008
. However. Use the Position Texture Tool to adjust a material on a surface in a number of ways. Activate the Position Texture Tool from the context menu for a Face entity.

Pins can be moved or dragged.
Page 627
Copyright Google Inc. such as a resize or skew. A move operation simply moves the pin to another location on the material. 2008
. The Position Texture Tool has two modes: Fixed Pin Mode and Free Pin Mode.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Material Positioning Pins
The Position Texture Tool uses pins to manipulate a material. A drag operation performs some manipulation of the material.

Undo
The Undo menu item will undo the last position texture command.
Reset
The Reset menu item is used to reset the position of the texture to the position prior to using the Position Texture Tool. returning you to the last texture positioning command that you performed.
Fixed Pins
The Fixed Pins menu item is used to toggle between Fixed Pin and Free Pin modes.The Edit > Undo command and Undo button will Undo everything you did during your texture positioning session. Caution . Unlike the Undo command in the Edit menu.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Fixed Pin and Free Pin Mode Context Commands
Context-click while using the Position Texture Tool to display the position texture context menu.
Redo
The Redo menu item cancels Undo operations.
Page 628
Copyright Google Inc. returning you to the texture positioning state previous to using the Undo command. The Edit > Redo operation cancels the Undo Edit > Undo operation. this undo command will only keep track of a single operation at a time. and 270 degrees. 2008
.
Rotate
The Rotate menu item is used to rotate the texture one of three predefined increments: 90.
Flip
The Flip menu item is used to flip the texture horizontally (Left/Right) or vertically (Up/Down). 180.
Done
The Done menu item is used to exit the Position Texture Tool and save the current texture position.

These tools include the Measure Tool. and Dimension Tool.
Page 629
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. Guide tools are those tools used to create construction geometry and prepare physical documentation. Text Tool. Tools in this section are covered in the order they appear within the Tools menu.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Construction Tools
This section of the user's guide covers the construction tools within SketchUp.

Page 631
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Guide Line Entities
Guide Line entities are infinite dashed lines used as guides to draw precisely. so you might want to hide guide lines as you work or delete all guide lines at once when you have finished your model. 2008
. you cannot resize a guide line because guide lines are infinite in length. Use "Edit > Hide" to hide the currently selected guide line.
Hiding/Erasing All Guide Lines
Guide lines are usually created as a temporary means to build a portion of your model. Rotate. Keeping too many guide lines in your model can decrease SketchUp's inference accuracy and display performance. and Erase Tools to reorient a guide line. Guide Lines do not interfere with regular geometry. But. Guide lines can also be hidden and erased independent of regular geometry. Draw guide lines with the Tape Measure Tool. Use "Edit > Erase" Guides to erase all guides in the current context. You can use the Move.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Guide Point Entities
Guide Point entities are finite dashed lines with end points as guides to draw precisely.
Hiding/Erasing All Guide Points
Guide points are usually created as a temporary means to build a portion of your model. Draw guide points with the Tape Measure Tool. Rotate. so you might want to hide guide points as you work or delete all guide points at once when you have finished your model. Keeping too many guide points in your model can decrease SketchUp's inference accuracy and display performance. 2008
. and Erase Tools to reorient a guide point. You can use the Move.
Page 632
Copyright Google Inc. Use "Edit > Hide" to hide the currently selected guide line. Guide points can also be hidden and erased independent of regular geometry. Use "Edit > Erase Guides" to erase all guides in the current context. Guide points do not interfere with regular geometry.

you might use this tool to allow for more accurate scaling of objects that are not oriented along the default coordinate planes. Activate the Axes Tool from the Guide Toolbar (Microsoft Windows). the Tool Palette (Mac OS X) or the Tools menu. or reorient. 2008
. you might want to move the axes when you are constructing rectangular objects that are skewed relative to one another.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Axes Tool
Use the Axes Tool to move. Or. For example. the drawing axes within your model.
Page 634
Copyright Google Inc.

Dimension display properties. Draw dimensions with the Dimension Tool. can be adjusted using the Dimension panel of the Model Info dialog box. You can. Select the Highlight non-associated dimensions option in the Dimension panel of the Model Info dialog box to highlight these dimensions in a specified color. however. such as text. change the dimension text to include additional information." Caution .
Changing Dimension Text
A Dimension entities text displays the dimension by default.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Dimension Entities
Dimension entities are finite lines with length information allowing you to quickly and effectively communicate key dimensions of your model. 2008
. For example. Include the symbols <> anywhere in your text to insert the dimension. "The length of this line is <>.
Each Dimension Object lies in its own plane. for all dimension entities in your model. Dimensions can move and update automatically as you make changes to your model.
Page 636
Copyright Google Inc.Dimensions that have lost their direct link to geometry or that have had their text edited might not show accurate measurements. which is determined by the entity from which it is drawn and the direction used when it was created.

Activate the Text Tool from the Guide Toolbar (Microsoft Windows). There are two types of text in SketchUp: Leader Text and Screen Text. the Tool Palette (Mac OS X) or the Draw menu.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Text Tool
Use the Text Tool to insert Text entities into your model. 2008
.
Page 637
Copyright Google Inc.

Dot. or Screen Text. All text interacts with the model in three dimensions. Use the Text Tool to place Text Objects in your model.
Text leaders are tied to the model. and size settings. which has leader lines and can be attached to a face. When the leader arrow becomes obscured. so as you rotate the model. As you rotate the model.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Text Entities
Text entities allow you to annotate your SketchUp model in several ways.
Page 638
Copyright Google Inc. rotates and hides just like any edge geometry. the text information continues to be valid. This method works well for planning studies and models that will be examined using fly-bys.
Text Leaders
Text Objects can have one of four leader arrow styles: None. Pushpin 3D Pushpin leaders do change appearance as your view changes because they are drawn in 3D space just like model geometry. the whole text entity disappears.
Text entities can have their own font. Thus. 2008
. there are two main styles of leaders: View Based and Pushpin. Once a leader arrow is obscured the text will be hidden. the leader foreshortens. This method works well for presentation of still images from a particular vantage point. 3D text can be repositioned in 3D space just like any other edge entity. There are two types of Text entities: Leader Text. Closed arrow. color. A Pushpin leader is aligned in 3D space. There appearance remains the same based on the screen layout and viewing direction present when they were placed. the notes attached to those surfaces adjust with them. This can be changed using the context menu or its Entity Info dialog box. but there are two ways for it to look on the screen. and the entire entity will follow whatever it is attached to. As you move and adjust surfaces. As you rotate the model. and Open arrow. A View Based leader will always retain its 2D screen orientation. and rotates with your model as you change your view. which remains fixed to a point on your screen. the actual text tries to stay oriented on the screen the same way. View Based 2D View Based leaders do not change as the model view is changed.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Section Plane Entities
Section Planes are special entities that control the SketchUp section cutting effect.
Page 641
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. Their position in space and in relation to groups and components determine the nature of the section cut effect. The following image shows a rectangular section plane creating a section cut effect in a model of a cup.

and Zoom Tool. Tools in this section are covered in the order they appear within the Camera menu. This menu enables you to switch between camera tools. Pan Tool. Camera tools are those tools used to manipulate your point of view of the model.
Page 642
Copyright Google Inc.
Camera Tools Context Menu
Context-clicking while using any camera tool launches the camera tools context menu. These tools include the Orbit Tool.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Camera Tools
This section of the user's guide covers the camera tools within SketchUp. 2008
.

Next can be used after using the Orbit Tool. Activate the Next option from the Camera menu. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Next
Use the Next option to advance to the next view of your model. or any of the Zoom tools. Pan Tool.
Page 643
Copyright Google Inc. Position Camera Tool. Look Around Tool.

Page 644
Copyright Google Inc. Pan Tool. or any of the Zoom tools.or the Camera menu. or Tool Palette (Mac OS X).Google SketchUp 7 Help
Previous
Use the Previous option to return to the last view of your model. 2008
. Previous can be used after using the Orbit Tool. Position Camera Tool. Look Around Tool. Activate the Previous option from either the Camera Toolbar (Microsoft Windows).

Right (Shift+6).
Page 645
Copyright Google Inc. Standard Views Toolbar (Mac OS X) or the Camera menu.
Tip . plan. Front (Shift+4). These point of views are (from left-to-right in the image below): Top (Shift+2). and Bottom (Shift + 3). Left (Shift+7). Select a Standard View from Views Toolbar (Microsoft Windows). 2008
. Isometric (Shift+1).Google SketchUp 7 Help
Standard Views
SketchUp provides several pre-defined standard point of views for your convenience. Back (Shift+5).The standard views can be used with a paraline projection to produce elevation. and section drawings.

Start matching. However. Therefore. Once you have duplicated the position and focal length of the camera used to take the picture. you can draw over the image in SketchUp.
High-Level Steps for Using Photo Match
Photo matching consists of 4 high-level steps: 1. 2008
. you must calibrate SketchUp's camera to match the position and focal length of the digital camera used to take the picture. to create a 3D model that matches a photo (or to match an existing SketchUp model to a scale in a photo). Activate the Match New Photo and Edit Matched Photo menu items from the Camera menu.
Page 646
Copyright Google Inc.
3.
4. Start sketching. Take digital pictures of a building or structure.. or just resize the entire model after it has been drawn. SketchUp is commonly used to create designs of buildings or structures.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Match New Photo
Use the Match New Photo and Edit Matched Photo menu items to create a 3D model to match a photo or to match an existing 3D model to a photo's context. SketchUp allows you to create these designs using the actual real-world scale (a scale of 1:1 where a unit of measurement in SketchUp represents that actual unit of measurement in the real world). See Taking Digital Photos for Use When Matching for further information. Repeat Step 2 and 3 with any other photos that make up the building or structure. digital pictures are not at a 1:1 scale. 2. SketchUp moves into a 2D sketching mode from matching (it is 2D because you are drawing on a 2D photo that needs to be oriented at a specific camera angle to you). You can also set the scale of the actual building or structure while matching. Matching involves loading a digital picture and calibrating SketchUp's camera to the position and focal length of the camera used to take the actual photo (you are setting up the exact criteria used to take your picture so you can draw on the picture).

Opacity Move the Opacity slider to the left to make the photo more transparent. Match Photo dialog box controls. Click and hold on a vanishing point to select the vanishing point. Uncheck the Photo checkbox to hide the photo. Click and hold on the origin to select the origin.
Match Photo Dialog Box
The Match Photo dialog box controls are used to help you create accurate 3D models from photos and to accurately place models in a photo's context. This option is also available in sketchover-image mode. 2008
. Click and hold on the axis line to select the axis line.
Matching Controls
Use the matching controls to adjust the axis such that you can draw a model to match a photo or match a model to a photo. Vanishing points There are three vanishing points in the matching mode (red. Uncheck the Model checkbox to hide the model. This option is also available in sketch-over-image mode. Move the cursor to reposition the vanishing point. This button is only active in a Sketch-Over-Image mode. Model Check the Model checkbox to display the model.
Page 647
Copyright Google Inc. New Matched Photo Click on the New Matched Photo button to start a new matching.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Match Controls and Context-Menu Items
There are three sets of controls that are accessible from the matching mode. This option is also available in sketch-over-image mode. Edit Matched Photo Click on the Edit Matched Photo button to reenter the matching mode. Origin The origin represents the point where all axes in SketchUp originate. and the matching contextmenu items. Click and hold the axes bar grips to reposition the axes bars. Photo Check the Photo checkbox to display the photo. Move the cursor along the axis line to resize a model. These controls are: The matching controls. Move the Opacity slider to the right to make the photo more opaque. The vanishing point is a place along the horizon of a perspective photo where all the parallel lines seem to converge. Move the cursor to reposition the origin. Red and Green Axes bars The red and green axes bars are used to align the camera to a photo. Axes lines The axes lines represent the 3 dimensional axes and help to establish the vanishing points. green and blue).

Rotate 90 left Select the Rotate 90 left menu item to rotate the red and green axes 90 degrees left. Done Select the done menu item to end your matching. Enter a value in the spacing text-entry box to change the size of grid spacing to represent some multiple of the overall structure size. Cancel match Select the Cancel Match menu item to cancel and exit your matching.
Matching Context-Menu Items
Context-click during matching to display the matching context-menu. Zoom vanishing points Select the Zoom vanishing points menu item to zoom to fit all vanishing points in the drawing area. Finally. 2008
. Then. the right-most style is used for photos taken from a vantage point where you are standing on the ground (the origin would be the bottom corner where the walls and ground meet). The middle style is used for photos taken from a vantage point where you are looking down on the building or structure (the origin would be at the top corner of the building where roof and walls meet).Google SketchUp 7 Help
Project Textures From Photo Click on the Project textures from photo button to automatically project the photo as a texture onto your model. and floor of a room meet at a corner (the origin is usually at the bottom corner where the walls. Grid styles are used to set the grid to best complement a specific type of photo. The Red/Green button toggles grid lines in the red and green planes. Style Click on the Style icons to change the style of the grid.
Page 648
Copyright Google Inc. The left-most style is used for photos usually taken indoors where walls. and floor meet). drag the axes lines to line grid squares up with your image. Planes Click on the planes buttons to toggle the display of grid lines on a particular plane. the Green/Blue button toggles grid lines in the green and blue planes. Start over Select the Start Over menu item to restart matching. The Red and Blue button toggles grid lines in the red and blue planes. Grid Check the On radio button to continuously display the axes grid. Use this menu item primarily when creating a model to match several photos (to rotate the model as you draw the model's sides to match the different sides of the structure in different photos). Zoom matched photo Select the Zoom matched photo menu item to fit the entire drawing area. ceiling. Check the Auto radio button to only show the grid when manipulating one of the matching controls. Spacing The spacing field is used to set the scale of your model before you start sketching over the image. Finally. ceiling.

Uncheck the Photo checkbox to hide the photo.
Page 649
Copyright Google Inc. These controls are: The SketchUp tools. Uncheck the Model checkbox to hide the model. This option is also available during matching. Sketch-Over-Image Dialog Box Controls The Sketch Over dialog box controls are used to help you create accurate 3D models from photos and to accurately place models in a photo's context. Use this menu item primarily when creating a model to match several photos (to rotate the model as you draw the model's sides to match the different sides of the structure in different photos). Zoom Matched Photo: Select the Zoom Matched Photo menu item to fit the entire drawing area. This option is also available during matching. Edit Matched Photo: Select the Edit Matched Photo menu item to resume matching. 2008
. Redo Use the Redo menu item return the last undo to its previous state. Sketch-Over-Image Context-Menu Items Context-click during a Sketch-Over-Image to display the Sketch-Over-Image context-menu. Opacity: Move the Opacity slider to the left to make the photo more transparent.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Rotate 90 right Select the Rotate 90 right menu item to rotate the red and green axes 90 degrees right. and the Sketch-OverImage context-menu items. Project Photo: Select the Project Photo menu item to project the photo's texture on your model. This option is also available during matching. Photo: Check the Photo checkbox to display the photo. Model: Check the Model checkbox to display the model. Sketch Over dialog box controls. Undo Use the Undo menu item to undo the last matching command.
Sketch-Over-Image Controls and Context-Menu Items
There are three sets of controls that are accessible from a Sketch-Over-Image mode. Move the Opacity slider to the right to make the photo more opaque.

Uncheck the Photo checkbox to hide the photo. Photo Check the Photo checkbox to display the photo. These controls are: The SketchUp tools. Opacity Move the Opacity slider to the left to make the photo more transparent. This option is also available during a Photo Match session.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Sketch-Over-Image Session Controls and Context-Menu Items
There are three sets of controls that are accessible from a Sketch-Over-Image Session. Uncheck the Model check box to hide the model. This option is also available during a Photo Match session. Edit Photo Match Select the Edit Photo Match menu item to resume the Photo Match session. Sketch Over dialog box controls. and the SketchOver-Image session context-menu items.
Sketch Over Dialog Box Controls
The Sketch Over dialog box controls are used to help you create accurate 3D models from photos and to accurately place models in a photo's context.
Page 650
Copyright Google Inc. Project Photo Select the Project Photo menu item to project the photo's texture on your model. Zoom Matched Photo Select the Zoom matched photo menu item to fit the entire drawing area. Move the Opacity slider to the right to make the photo more opaque. 2008
. This option is also available during a Photo Match session. Model Check the Model checkbox to display the model.
Sketch-Over-Image Session Context-Menu Items
Context-click during a Sketch-Over-Image session to display the Sketch-Over-Image session context-menu.

Tool Palette (Mac OS X) or the Camera menu. Keyboard Shortcut: O
Page 651
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Orbit Tool
Use the Orbit Tool to rotate the camera about the model. The Orbit Tool is useful when viewing geometry from the outside. Activate the Orbit Tool from either the Camera Toolbar (Microsoft Windows).

Zoom Window Tool
Use the Zoom Window Tool to zoom in on a specific portion of your model. Activate the Zoom Window Tool from either the Camera Toolbar (Microsoft Windows), or Tool Palette (Mac OS X) or the Camera menu.

Page 654

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Zoom Extents Tool
Use the Zoom Extents Tool to zoom your view to a distance which makes the whole model visible and centered in the drawing area. Activate the Zoom Extents Tool from either the Camera Toolbar (Microsoft Windows), or Tool Palette (Mac OS X) or, the Camera menu. Keyboard Shortcut: Shift+Z

Page 655

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Zoom to Photo Tool
Use the Zoom to Photo Tool to move the camera (your view) in such that the entire photo fills the drawing area. This menu item is active while matching photos. Activate the Zoom to Photo Tool from either the Camera Toolbar (Microsoft Windows, or Tool Palette (Mac OS X), or the Camera menu.

Page 656

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Walkthrough Tools
This section of the user's guide covers the walkthrough tools within SketchUp. Walkthrough tools are those tools used to view your model as through walking around and in your model. These tools are the Position Camera Tool, Look Around Tool, and Walk Tool. Tools in this section are covered in the order they appear within the Camera menu.

Page 657

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Position Camera Tool
Use the Position Camera Tool to position the camera (your view) at a specific eye height so that you can check the line of sight of a model or walk through a model. Activate the Position Camera Tool from either the Walkthrough Toolbar (Microsoft Windows),Tool Palette (Mac OS X) or the Camera menu.

Page 658

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Walk Tool
Use the Walk Tool to maneuver through your SketchUp model as though you were walking through your model. Specifically, the Walk Tool fixes the camera to a particular height, and then allows you to maneuver the camera around your model. The Walk Tool is available only in Perspective mode. Activate The Walk Tool from the Walkthrough Toolbar (Microsoft Windows), Tool Palette (Mac OS X) or the Camera menu.

Page 659

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Look Around Tool
Use the Look Around Tool to pivot the camera (your view) around a stationary point. The Look Around Tool behaves similarly to a person standing still while turning their head to up, down (tilt), and side to side (pan). The Look Around Tool is particularly useful for viewing the inside of spaces, or to evaluate visibility after using the Position Camera Tool. Activate the Look Around Tool from either the Walkthrough Toolbar (Microsoft Windows, Tool Palette (Mac OS X) or the Camera menu.

Page 660

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Sandbox Tools
This section of the user's guide covers the sandbox tools within SketchUp. Sandbox tools are those tools used to create and manipulate large surfaces (TINs) in your models. These tools include the Sandbox From Scratch Tool, Sandbox From Contours Tool, Smoove Tool, Stamp Tool, and Drape Tool.

Sandbox tools are not just for modeling terrain; they can also be used to model other organic shapes such as the curved portions of a hand-built wooden chair or a wooden bowl. Organic shapes are those that have a hand-made or custom appearance. Tools in this section are covered in the order they appear within the Draw > Sandbox and Tools > Sandbox sub-menus.

Page 661

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Sandbox From Contours Tool
Use the Sandbox from Contours Tool to create a TIN from contour lines. You must create or import contour lines that are offset in their height prior to using this tool. Activate the Sandbox from Contours Tool from the Draw menu. Note - You must enable the sandbox tools before you can use them. See Enabling the Sandbox Tools for further information. The following image shows several contour lines offset in height from the ground plane.

The following image shows the resulting terrain created when the Sandbox From Contours Tool is used on the selected contours.

Note - In some cases the Sandbox From Contour Line Tool might create triangulations in the TIN that result in flat spots or plateaus. These plateaus can be retriangulated (to create a slope) using the Flip Edge Tool.

Page 662

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Sandbox From Scratch Tool
Use the Sandbox From Scratch Tool to generate a flat triangulated TIN that can be sculpted into other forms using other sandbox tools. The Sandbox From Scratch Tool generates the TIN in the red/green or ground plane. This tool is useful in creating terrain when no other terrain model or data is available. Activate the Sandbox From Scratch Tool from the Draw menu. Note - You must enable the sandbox tools before you can use them. See Enabling the Sandbox Tools for further information.

Page 663

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Smoove Tool
Use the Smoove Tool to sculpt an existing TIN by allowing vertical movement of a selection of points, edges, or faces and their immediately adjacent geometry. The result is a smooth deformation of a triangulated surface. Activate the Smoove Tool from the Tools menu. Note - You must enable the sandbox tools before you can use them. See Enabling the Sandbox Tools for further information.

Page 664

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Stamp Tool
Use the Stamp Tool to create impressions in a TIN by pushing a duplicate of the base of geometry, such as a house, into a TIN. Activate the Stamp Tool from the Tools menu. Note - You must enable the sandbox tools before you can use them. See Enabling the Sandbox Tools for further information.

Page 665

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Drape Tool
Use the Drape Tool to project edges, such as the edges in a road, onto a terrain. Activate the Drape Tool from the Tools menu. Note - You must enable the sandbox tools before you can use them. See Enabling the Sandbox Tools for further information.

Page 666

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Add Detail Tool
TINs do not have to consist of triangles of the same size. Use the Add Detail Tool to split triangles into additional, smaller triangles, and make small detailed modifications to your TIN. Any click on your TIN creates new triangles centered around a new vertex that you can manipulate. Activate the Add Detail Tool from the Tools menu. Note - You must enable the sandbox tools before you can use them. See Enabling the Sandbox Tools for further information. Smaller triangles equate to a smoother final TIN. However, having an abundance of small triangles in your TIN can also decrease performance. The Add Detail Tool can help strike a balance between detail and performance by allowing you to add detail only to areas of the TIN where it is needed.

Page 667

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Flip Edge Tool
Use the Flip Edge Tool to manually adjust the triangulation for any pair of adjacent triangles in a TIN. This tool is useful in removing flat spots or plateaus in a terrain generated from contour lines. Activate the Flip Edge Tool from the Tools menu. Note - You must enable the sandbox tools before you can use them. See Enabling the Sandbox Tools for further information. The following image contains a terrain with several opposing triangulations (triangles that point opposite to each other).

Page 668

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Triangulations whose sides run north and south create plateaus in the TIN. The Flip Edge Tool can be used to flip these triangulations and remove these plateaus (creating slopes). The following image shows terrain with the triangulations flipped.

Tip - You can easily see triangles with opposing triangulation by displaying hidden geometry. Turn on hidden geometry (View > Hidden Geometry) to view the triangles in the TIN.

Page 669

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Google Toolbar
This section of the user's guide covers the Google Toolbar within SketchUp. Buttons on the Google Toolbar are used to interact with other Google technologies, such as Google Earth.

Items in this section are covered in the order they appear within the Google menu.

Page 670

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Google Earth and SketchUp Workflow
SketchUp can be used to create three-dimensional models for Google Earth. 7. (Google Earth) Navigate to the location where you want your model to appear.
Page 671
Copyright Google Inc. (SketchUp) Click on the "Toggle Terrain button" to toggle to the 3D image.
3. (SketchUp) Export the final model for use in Google Earth using the KMZ export option found in File > Export > 3D Model. This image contains the location information needed to properly place the model at the correct location in Google Earth. 5. (SketchUp) Reposition the model to conform to the terrain in the 3D image. (SketchUp) Create your model on top of the 2D image. 4. (SketchUp) Click on the "Get Current View" button to get an image of the current view from Google Earth. 8. (SketchUp/Optional) Click on the Share Model button to post the model to the Google 3D Warehouse. (SketchUp) Click on the "Place Model button" to place the model in Google Earth. The workflow for creating and placing SketchUp models in Google Earth follows: 1. 2. 2008
. 6.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Get Current View Button
Use the Get Current View button to capture 2D and 3D snapshot images of the current view in Google Earth.
Page 672
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. These images are used as the context for your 3D SketchUp models.

2008
.
Page 674
Copyright Google Inc. This button is used as a quick mechanism for viewing your model in Google Earth as you are working on your model.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Place Model Button
Use the Place Model button to place your SketchUp models in Google Earth.

2008
.
Page 675
Copyright Google Inc. Refer to the 3D Warehouse documentation for further information.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Get Models Button
Use the Get Models button to download models from the 3D Warehouse.

Note . 2008
. Refer to the 3D Warehouse documentation for further information.The thumbnail of your model appearing in the 3D Warehouse will represent the view of the model in SketchUp at the time the model was shared.
Page 676
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Share Model Button
Use the Share Model button to post your model to the 3D Warehouse.

2008
. and Styles Browser dialog boxes. Each dialog box in this section is covered in the order they appear within the Window (Microsoft Windows) and SketchUp (Mac OS X) menus. Material Browser. These dialog boxes include the Components Browser.
Page 677
Copyright Google Inc. Application Preferences.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Model Settings and Managers
This section of the user's guide covers the various model settings and manager dialog boxes within SketchUp.

Scene The Scene section of the Animation panel allows you to determine the amount of time an animation will spend on each scene before transition to another scene.
Components
The Components panel allows you to modify the visual appearance of your model while editing groups and components. Seconds: Enter the number of seconds that should transpire before the next scene appears. SketchUp allows you to fade or hide other similar components or fade or hide the rest of the model to make it easier to concentrate on
Page 678
Copyright Google Inc. Enable scene transitions: Click on the Enable Scene Transitions checkbox to enable scene transitions.
Animation
The Animation panel allows you to set properties for animations. Seconds: Enter the number of seconds that will transpire before the transition changes to another scene. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Model Info Dialog Box
The Model Info dialog box allows you to configure a number of different settings specific to your current SketchUp model. Activate the Model Info dialog box from the Window menu. The Model Info dialog box contains several panels. The following image shows the Animation panel of the Model Info dialog box on Microsoft Windows:
The following image shows the Animation panel of the Model Info dialog box on Mac OS X:
Scene Transitions The Scene Transitions section of the Animation panel allows you to determine the amount of time it takes to transition from one scene in the animation to another scene. including the Dimensions panel for setting global dimensions and the Units panel for setting units to be used in your model.

2008
. Fade Rest of Model: Slide the Fade rest of model slider to control the fading of geometry unrelated to the group or component you are editing. Click the Hide checkbox to toggle the display of components similar to the one you are editing. The following image shows the Components panel of the Model Info dialog box on Microsoft Windows:
The following image shows the Components panel of the Model Info dialog box on Mac OS X:
Component/Group Editing The Component/Group Editing portion of the Components panel allows you to define how geometry outside a component appears when editing a component.
Page 679
Copyright Google Inc. Component Axes: Components contain their own axes. Fade Similar Components: Slide the Fade similar components slider to control the degree of fading of other visible instances of the component you are editing. Click the Component Axes checkbox to display component axes.Google SketchUp 7 Help
modifications to the edited component. Click on the Hide check box to toggle the display of the rest of the model while editing a component or group.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Credits
The Credits panel allows you to view contributors toward the current model. 2008
. Author The Author portion of the Credits panel displays the currently logged in user. Contributors The Contributors portion of the Credits panel displays the list of contributors toward the current model. This panel also allows the current users to claim credit toward the current model.
Dimensions
The Dimensions panel allows you to change the appearance and behavior of Dimension entities in your model. The following image shows the Dimensions panel of the Model Info dialog box on Microsoft Windows:
Page 680
Copyright Google Inc. Claim credit button: Click the Claim Credit button to claim credit on the currently selected model. User's must log in using their Google Account (GAIA account) to claim credit toward a model.

Slash. Closed Arrow and Open Arrow.
Page 681
Copyright Google Inc. Select all dimensions: Click on the Select all dimensions button to select all dimension entities in the model. Align to screen: Click on the Align to screen radio button to allow Dimension entities to rotate as you orbit the model (always face the camera).Google SketchUp 7 Help
The following image shows the Dimensions panel of the Model Info dialog box on Mac OS X:
Text The Text portion of the Dimensions panel allows you to select the font used by Dimension entities in the drawing area. Leader Lines The Leader Lines portion of the Dimensions panel allows you to choose an end point style for your leader lines. Fonts: Click on the Fonts button to select the font to be used for all Dimension entities in SketchUp. 2008
. Update selected dimensions: Click on Update selected dimensions to update the currently selected entities with the currently selected dimension settings. As you orbit your model.
Dimension The Dimension portion of the Dimensions panel contains default display options for Dimension entities. These styles are None. Endpoints: Select the end point style for all of your end points from the Endpoints dropdown list. Align to dimension line: Click on the Align to dimension line radio button to allow Dimension entities to align to the dimension line instead of the camera. the text will remain aligned with the dimension lines. Dot. Click on the font color button to choose a font color for Dimension entities.

including the location of the file (on your file system). This behavior can result in an unclear Dimension text. Slide the slider to set the threshold angle that will cause Dimension entities to become hidden. Highlight Non-Associated Dimensions: Click on the Highlight non-associated dimensions checkbox to assign a color to dimensions that are not associated with entities in your model.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Expert Dimension Settings Click on the Expert dimension settings button to display the Expert Dimension Settings dialog box. Hide when too small: As your view moves further away from your model. Hide when foreshortened: Click the Hide when foreshortened checkbox to allow Dimension entities to hide when they become foreshortened.
File
The File panel allows you to configure settings related to your SketchUp model's file. such as an edge. date of last modification. dimensions appear smaller and text remains the same size. and version of SketchUp used for last modification. Non-associated dimensions are usually the result of erasing an entity that was used to calculate a dimension. The following image shows the File panel of the Model Info dialog box on Microsoft Windows:
Page 682
Copyright Google Inc. size. 2008
. Slide the slider to set the size that will cause Dimension entities to be hidden. Click on the Hide when too small checkbox to automatically hide dimensions when they are hard to read.

in kilobytes. Glue to: Select a menu item from the Glue to menu to identify the surfaces where your file can be placed. Note .These options are also displayed when you create a component from a selection set within SketchUp. Size: The Size field contains the Size. of the current SketchUp model's file.
Page 683
Copyright Google Inc. For example. Location: The Location field contains the location of the model's file on the file system (if it has been saved). Alignment The Alignment portion of the File panel allows you to determine the alignment of the model when loaded and used as a component. The Description field is the only field that is editable within the General section. 2008
. However. Redefine Thumbnail on Save: Click the Redefine Thumbnail on Save checkbox to save the current view of the model as the thumbnail representation of the model. This thumbnail is shown when browsing through models when locating a file to open (Microsoft Windows).Google SketchUp 7 Help
The following image shows the File panel of the Model Info dialog box on Mac OS X:
General The General portion of the File panel contains default file options for the current model. Description: Click in the Description field to enter a description for your model. a model of a door would only be glued to surfaces in the horizontal planes. the options presented during component creation pertain to components that are already within a model while the options in the Model Info dialog box pertain to a model file that can be loaded as a component in another model. Version: The Version field contains the version of SketchUp last used to modify the model.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Cut Opening: Click the Cut Opening checkbox to cause your model to able to penetrate a face. 2008
. thus creating an opening.
Page 684
Copyright Google Inc. when used as a component. Uncheck this option to cause the shadow to be cast from the component's current position.There is a different process for specifying a location for your model using Google SketchUp. This option works best with components that have narrow bases (such as trees). Note .
Location
The Location panel allows you to specify a location for your model based on the nearest major city. This option is useful to determine accurate shading of architectural and geographical models. Note . The model will cut the face to which it is attached at the model's perimeter. Refer to Specifying a Model's Location in the World for more information. Click the Shadows face sun checkbox to cause shadows to be cast from the components' current position as though the components were facing the sun. Always face camera: Click the Always face camera checkbox to treat the model as though it were a 2D component by forcing the model to always face forward when loaded as a component. The size of the shadow changes based on view point. This option does not work well with components that have wide bases (such as people in mid stride).Click the Geolocation button on the status bar to display the Location panel of the Model Info dialog box. Note .Ensure the component's axis is positioned at the bottom center of the component for best results. This option increases performance by eliminating the need to render the component as a 3D form. Shadows face sun: This option is only available when the Always face camera option is enabled. The shadow shape does not change as the component rotates to face the camera.

Manually georeferenced (using location in SketchUp). A model can have three states.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The following image shows the Location panel of the Model Info dialog box on Microsoft Windows:
The following image shows the Location panel of the Model Info dialog box on Mac OS X:
= Georeferencing The Georeferencing portion of the Location panel allows you to manually establish the geographic location for the current model.
Page 685
Copyright Google Inc. and georeferenced with data from Google Earth. 2008
. as indicated by the icon next to the Use georeferencing checkbox: Not georeferenced.

Show in Model: Click the Show in Model checkbox to highlight the North angle in orange. Location.The Use georeferencing checkbox is automatically checked when you import georeferenced data from Google Earth. Note . 2008
. The georeferencing button on the Staus Bar turns solid to indicate that georeferencing has been set manually.
Page 686
Copyright Google Inc. However. This dialog box allows you to manually enter Country. Location: Select a city from the Location list box to assign a city of origin for your model. Geographic Location The Geographic Location portion of the Location panel allows you to assign a geographic location to your model.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Use georeferencing: Check the Use georeferencing checkbox to manually set the location of the current model to the location in the Location panel . it will not affect the georeferened data. and Timezone for any geographic location that is not already in the Country or Location drop-down list boxes.All models have a location (as indicated in the Location panel of the Model Info dialog box). If you uncheck this box and then make changes to the location information. Latitude. Longitude. Custom Location: Click on the Custom location button to display the Custom Location dialog box. Solar Orientation The Solar Orientation portion of the Location panel allows you to set the path of the Sun in relation to the axes. not all models are georeferenced to a location (meaning that location information is embedded in the model so that it can be properly placed in Google Earth. Country: Select a country from the Country list box to assign a country of origin for your model. Note . North Angle Button: Click the North Angle Button to change the path of the Sun.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Statistics
The Statistics panel allows you to troubleshoot performance issues in SketchUp. This panel displays information about the type and number of drawing elements in your model and allows you to perform verifications on your model. The following image shows the Statistics panel of the Model Info dialog box on Microsoft Windows:
The following image shows the Statistics panel of the Model Info dialog box on Mac OS X:
Entire Model and Components The Entire Model and Components options in the drop-down list box allow you to toggle between displaying statistics for your entire model and displaying statistics related only to components.
Page 687
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. The Components option is useful for generating a tally of the number of certain components used in your model (such as the number of a particular part in an assembly).

or automatically saved (using the SketchUp autosave feature). Edges bounding a face are in the same component. Refer to the Save menu item in the File menu or the auto-save feature in the General panel of the Application Preferences dialog box for further information.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Show Nested Components Click the Show nested components checkbox to include individual elements within placed components in the statistics totals.Problem checking is also performed automatically (if turned on within the General panel of the Application Preferences dialog box) when a file is loaded. Vertices of faces are on the same plane. Purge Unused Click the Purge Unused button to remove any unused components. and other extraneous information from your file. Note . image objects.
Text
The Text panel allows you to change the appearance and behavior of Text entities in your model. This option checks for several cases. The following image shows the Text panel of the Model Info dialog box on Microsoft Windows:
Page 688
Copyright Google Inc. materials. layers. manually saved. Faces do not have zero area size. Start and end points of an edge are not the same. Click the Fix Problems button to scan your model. including: • • • • • Faces bounded by properly connected edges. Fix Problems Click the Fix Problems button to find minor issues with your SketchUp model due to the infinite flexibility that SketchUp provides when designing in 3D. 2008
. and report and fix any problems.

font style. is invoked. Text might or might not have leader lines. Leader Lines The Leader Lines options allow you to identify the type of leader line used with Text. to a specific piece of geometry. to a specific piece of geometry. Fonts: Click on the Fonts button to define the font to be used for all leader text in SketchUp. font style. using a leader line and arrow. The Font dialog box. Leader Text Color Swatch: Click on the leader text color swatch to select the default display color for any unpainted leader text (those painted with the default material). Leader Text Leader text is text that is attached.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The following image shows the Text panel of the Model Info dialog box on Mac OS X:
Screen Text Screen text is text that is not attached. containing the font. The Leader Text portion of the Text panel allows you to select the font used by leader text in the drawing area. Select all screen text: Click the Select all screen text to select all screen text in the drawing area. Text Color Swatch: Click on the text color swatch to select the default display color for any unpainted screen text (those painted with the default material). and size for your dimensions font. The Font dialog box. The Screen Text portion of the Text panel allows you to select the font used by screen text in the drawing area. using a leader line and arrow. Fonts: Click on the Fonts button to define the font to be used for all screen text in SketchUp. Select all leader text: Click the Select all leader text to select leader text in the drawing area. 2008
.
Page 689
Copyright Google Inc. containing the font. and size for your dimensions font. is invoked.

Leader: Click on the Leader drop-down menu to select between View Based and Pushpin leader types.
Update Selected Text: Click the Update selected text button to apply the current settings to any selected Text entities. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
End Point: Click on the End Point drop-down menu to select the end point type for the leader line. Dot. Note . The following image shows the Units panel of the Model Info dialog box on Microsoft Windows:
Page 690
Copyright Google Inc. and rotates with your model as you change your view. and Open Arrow. A View Based leader will always retain its 2D screen orientation. Choose between None. Closed Arrow. A Pushpin leader is aligned in 3D space.You can override the default units using the Measurements Toolbar to work in different units simultaneously.
Units
The Units panel is allows you to set defaults for linear and angular unit measurements.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
The following image shows the Units panel of the Model Info dialog box on Mac OS X:
Length Units The Length Units section of the Units panel allows you to set the default units for your model. Precision: Click on the Precision drop-down menu to set the precision for displaying units. centimeters. and fractional units display only fractional inches. 2008
. millimeters. Architectural displays as feet and inches. Length snaps can be overridden by entering exact values into the Measurements Toolbar.Fractional units are primarily used by wood workers in the United States. Ordinarily.SketchUp does not have a grid snap option similar to other CAD applications. Format: Click on the Format drop-down menu to set the type of units displayed for measurements. and within the Measurements Toolbar. Decimal unit precision can be set in numbers of decimal places beyond zero for any of these units. Type the snap length in the text field to have SketchUp snap to specific increments when drawing. This option is only available when the format is set to Decimal.
Page 691
Copyright Google Inc. SketchUp users working in Metric should use the decimal unit setting. Decimal displays decimal units. For example. Display units format: Click the Display units format checkbox to display unit markers. such as the double quotes (") for inches. dimensions. Note . a measurement of three feet in length would read as 3'0" with this setting enabled. Engineering displays feet and decimal units of feet. Enable length snapping: Click the Enable length snapping checkbox to snap lines and other entities to the specified sized increments. feet. Architectural unit precision can be set from 1" to 1/64". inches would be suppressed in this case. and meters. Note . Engineering unit precision can be set in decimal places beyond zero. Force Display of 0": Click on the Force Display of 0" checkbox to display 0" in architectural units when there are no inches in the measurement. including inches.

0 (one decimal place) for greater accuracy. 2008
. Snap Angle: Click on the Snap Angle drop-down list to choose the snap increment for angular measurements and rotations. Move your cursor inside the protractor to snap to the specified increment while using these tools. You will see tick marks corresponding to your snap angle on the Protractor.
Page 692
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Angle Units The Angle Units portion of the Units panel allow you to define how units are displayed for angled measurements Precision: Click on the Precision drop-down list to set the use of decimal degree units to either a level of precision of 0 (no decimal places) or 0. Enable angle snapping: Click on the Enable angle snapping checkbox to enable snapping to the specified increment while using the Protractor or Rotate Tool.

Text Position
The Text position options allow dimension text to horizontally to the dimension line.
This Entity Info dialog box item is available for the Dimension entity. Outside End The Outside End menu item places the dimension text at the end of the dimension line. All of the Entity Info dialog box fields for all entities in SketchUp follow.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Entity Info
Select an entity and either context-click on the entity or select Window > Entity Info to view and change the entities attributes. Centered The Centered menu item places the dimension text in the center of the dimension line.
Align to Dimension
The Align to dimension radio button allows dimension text to align vertically to the dimension line instead of the camera. As you orbit your model.
Page 693
Copyright Google Inc. Centered The Outside Start menu item places the dimension text at the center of the dimension line. Closed and Open. This Entity Info dialog box item is available for the Dimension entity. the text will remain vertically aligned with the dimension lines. This Entity Info dialog box item is available for the Dimension entity. Slash. 2008
. Outside Start The Outside Start menu item places the dimension text at the start of the dimension line.Some of these items are only visible when the details arrow in the upper right-hand corner is pointing up. These styles are None. Outside The Outside menu places the dimension text on the opposite side of the dimension line from the dimensioned points. Note . Dot.
Endpoints
Select the end point style for all of your end points from the Endpoints drop-down list.
Align to Screen
The Align to screen radio button allows Dimension entities to rotate as you orbit the model (always face the camera). Above The Above menu item places the dimension text above the dimension line.

Expand
Click on Expand to see components and groups nested within the currently selected component or group. Group. Use the Area > Selection context menu item to calculate the area of multiple selected entities. This dialog box item is available for the Face entity.
Leader
The Leader drop-down list contains a list of leader-types permitted for the selected Text entity.
Layer
The Layer field displays the layer of the currently selected entity.
Definition Name
The Name field can contain the name of the component definition. Image. if View > Show Hidden Geometry is enabled. Component. This Entity Info dialog box item is available for the Component and Group entities. Hidden entities are displayed in a ghosted pattern. This Entity Info dialog box item is available for the Component entity. 2008
. This Entity Info dialog box item is available for the Text entity. This Entity Info dialog box item is available for the Text and Dimension entities. Curve. This Entity Info dialog box item is available for the all entities. Face.
Page 694
Copyright Google Inc.
Font
The Font button is used to select a new font for the selected Text or Dimension entity. and Surface entities. Line.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Area
The Area field displays the area of the selected entity. Polygon. This Entity Info dialog box item is available for the Arc.
Hidden
The Hidden check box is used to hide or unhide the entity. Circle. Select a new layer to move the entity to that layer.
Cast Shadows
The Cast Shadows menu item allows the entity to cast a shadow.
Arrow
The Arrow drop-down list contains a list of arrowheads permitted for the selected Text entity. allowing you to select them. This Entity Info dialog box item is available for the Text and Dimension entities. This Entity Info dialog box item is available for all entities.

Segments
The Segments field displays the number of segments in the selected entity.
Locked
The Locked check box is used to lock the component so that it cannot be moved or edited. 2008
.
Material
The Material swatch displays the material used on the currently selected entity. Arc. Face. Group. This Entity Info dialog box item is available for the Component. Image. Circle. and Image entities. Type a new value in this field to change the number of segments for the entity.
Radius
This Radius field displays the radius of the selected entity. Curve. This Entity Info dialog box item is available for the Arc.Arc segmentation can only be changed when the Arc entity is part of 2 dimensional geometry (not part of a curved surface). Curve. This Entity Info dialog box item is available for the Arc. Face. and Polygon entities. The left swatch represents the front-side material. Line. This Entity Info dialog box item is available for the Component and Group entities. Note . Component. However. Group. Surface. and Polygon entities
Page 695
Copyright Google Inc. This Entity Info dialog box item is available for the 3D Polyline. Line. The right swatch represents the back-side material. Group. Type a new value in this field to change the radius of the entity.
Receive Shadows
The Receive Shadows menu item allows the component to receive a shadows cast by other entities. There are two default material swatches for faces and surfaces because faces and surfaces have both a front and a back side. Curve. and Surface entities.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Length
The Length field displays the length of the currently selected entity. Circle. This Entity Info dialog box item is available for the Component. Circle. Image entities also have an un-editable name field in the dialog box.
Name
The Name displays the name of the currently selected component instance or group. and Text entities. This Entity Info dialog box item is available for the Arc. and Polygon entities. Polygon. additional copies of the component can be dragged into the work area from the Components Browser. Circle. The default material for an entity is represented by a gray/blue box. Dimension. Uncheck the Locked check box to unlock the component so it can be edited.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Size in pixels (Microsoft Windows) or Size (Mac OS X)
The Size in pixels (Microsoft Windows) or Size (Mac OS X) field displays the pixel dimensions of the currently selected image.
Page 696
Copyright Google Inc. This Entity Info dialog box item is available for the Image entity. This Entity Info dialog box item is available for the Line entity. Click in this field to modify the text.
Text
The Text field contains the text string for the selected Text entity. Type in a new width or height to proportionally rescale the Image entity.
Width and Height
The Width and Height fields display the dimensions of the currently selected image. Click in the drawing area to update your changes. 2008
. This Entity Info dialog box item is available for the Line entity. This Entity Info dialog box item is available for the Image entity. This Entity Info dialog box item is available for Text and Dimension entities.
Smooth
The Smooth option is used to render the faces connected to the edge with a varying tonal value. click on the lock icon to rescale the Image entity's width and height independently (non-proportional scale).
Soft
The Soft option is used to render the edge as a soft edge. Or.

and will contain different options as you select different entities in your model. This dialog box is context-sensitive. and allows you to view and change their properties. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Entity Info Dialog Box
The Entity Info dialog box displays information about selected entities. The following image shows the Entity Info dialog box on Microsoft Windows:
The following image shows the Entity Info dialog box on Mac OS X:
Page 697
Copyright Google Inc. Activate the Entity Info dialog box from either the Window menu or through a context menu.

Page 698
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Details Arrow
Click on the arrow in the upper-right portion of the Entity Info dialog box to show or hide additional details.

Page 699
Copyright Google Inc. The Materials Browser is used to organize materials and colors into libraries and to select and to apply materials to your model. Activate the Materials Browser either by clicking on the Paint Bucket Tool or by selecting Material Browser from the Window menu. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Materials Browser
SketchUp contains a library of predefined materials that you can apply to faces and edges in your model.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Materials Browser Controls
Use Materials Browser controls to navigate among materials in your materials libraries. Use the select tab to navigate between material libraries. The In Model style library contains all of the styles currently included with your model file.
Material Name Field
The material name field displays the name of the currently selected material. Back Arrow Click the Back arrow to navigate to the previous location in the hierarchy of libraries. This feature allows you to display both your materials libraries and the in model library at the same time.
Edit Tab
The Edit tab contains a panel of options for editing materials. appearing as an eye dropper. 2008
. In Model Button Click on the In Model button to navigate to the In Model style library.
Set Material To Paint With To Default
Click the Set Material To Paint With To Default to set the material to the default front and back face colors.
Sample Paint Button
Use the Sample Paint button. to sample and repaint materials appearing in your model.
Create Material
Click on the Create Material button to create a copy of the currently active material in the In Model library.
Page 700
Copyright Google Inc.
Select Tab
Click on the Select tab to display the select panel . See the Paint Bucket Tool for additional information.
Material Thumbnail
The material thumbnail displays the currently selected material. Refer to the Face Panel section of the Styles Browser topic for further information on setting the default front and back face colors. Forward Arrow Click the Forward arrow to navigate to the next location in the hierarchy of libraries.
Display Secondary Selection Pane Button
The Display Secondary Selection Pane button displays a second select panel below the primary select panel. This feature is useful when you want to drag materials between libraries and the in model library.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Material Browser Context Menu Items (Mac OS X)
A number of useful Materials Browser-related commands are accessible using context menus.. Context-click on any material's icon or name to access the Materials Browser's context menus.
Edit. The Color name dialog box appears. Click OK...
Click the Duplicate menu item to duplicate the material. The following options appear depending on whether you are clicking on icons in an established styles library or in the In Model library:
Duplicate. Enter a new name for the duplicated material in the Color Name field.
Click the Edit menu item to place the current material in the Edit Panel. 2008
.
Page 701
Copyright Google Inc..
Remove
Click the Remove menu item to remove a material from the In Model library.

You can use this menu item to save materials that have been modified or created during a drawing session.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Material Browser Context Menu Items (Microsoft Windows)
A number of useful Materials Browser-related commands are accessible using context menus. painted with the currently selected material.
Delete
Select the Delete menu item to delete a single material from a materials library. 2008
. SketchUp launches the default editor or image display application.
Select
Select the Select menu item to select all faces in your model painted with the currently selected material.
Area
Select the Area menu item to calculate the amount of surface area.
Page 702
Copyright Google Inc.
Export Texture Image
Click the Export Texture Image menu item to save the texture-portion of the material as an image file
Save As
Select the Save As menu item to save the selected material to a separate file (. The following options appear depending on whether you are clicking on icons in an established styles library or in the In Model library:
Add to Model
Select the Add to model menu item to add the currently selected material to the In Model library.
Edit Texture Image
Click the Edit Texture Image to launch your default image editor. in current units.skm). Context-click on any material's icon or name to access the Materials Browser's context menus. The material is not applied to any faces when the Area menu item is grey. with a new name and location. as defined in the Applications panel of the Preferences dialog box. to edit the currently selected texture. If you have not identified an editor in the Applications panel of the Preferences dialog box.

This dialog box does not display files. 2008
.
Small Images. only folders.
Remove Library From Favorites
Select the Remove Library from Favorites menu item to remove a library from your list of favorites (appearing at the bottom of the libraries drop-down list).The open or create a library menu item displays a Browse for Folder dialog box.
List View
Select the List View menu item to display the styles in list form. or Extra Large Images menu item to change the size of the thumbnails in the Select panel. Extra Large Images
Select the Small Images. Large Images.
Add Library to Favorites
Select the Add Library to Favorites menu item to add an existing library to the list of favorite libraries (appearing at the bottom of the libraries drop-down list).Google SketchUp 7 Help
Materials Browser Details Menu
Click on the right arrow next to the styles library drop-down list to open the details pop-up menu. Large Images.
Open or Create a Library
Select the Open or create a library menu item to open an existing library (or file) or create a new styles library (folder). Medium Images. This menu allows you to perform additional material-related functions.
Page 703
Copyright Google Inc. Note .
Refresh
Select the Refresh menu item to update the styles appearing in the styles browser. Medium Images.
Purge Unused
Select the Purge Unused menu item to remove all materials in the In Model library that are not actually used in your model.
Save Library As
Select the Save Library As menu item to save a copy of a library with a new name. Select the folder or location containing the file and click the OK button.
Get More
Select the Get More menu item to get more styles from the SketchUp web site.

and Brightness). color.
Match Color On Screen Button
Click on the Match color on screen button and click anywhere on the screen to sample a color of a pixel and apply it to the currently selected material. 2008
. The image file appears in the texture file field below the Use texture image checkbox. This color can be disguised a bit when it is combined with a texture.
Browse Button
Click on the Browse button to display the Choose Image dialog box and browse for an image file.
Use Texture Image Checkbox
Check the Use texture image checkbox to include an image file. specific. Instead.
Color Pickers Drop-Down List
Use the Color Pickers drop-down list to select between the HLS. and Color Wheel color pickers. on-screen.Light. Note . Uncheck the Use texture image checkbox to indicate that you no longer want to use an image file in your material (the texture file is removed).
Page 704
Copyright Google Inc. (Red-Green-Blue). Drag image files into this field on click on the file open icon to the right to locate and open a image file. Use the Match color on screen button if you want to sample a . Locate and select the image file you want to use and click the Open button.
Undo Color Changes Button
Click the Undo Color Changes button to drop all changes to the material during an edit session. as part of the current material. (Hue. HSB (Hue. representing a texture. The Choose Image dialog box appears. you will be promoted to select a new image file.Saturation). Saturation.
Match Color of Object in Model Button
Click on the match color of object in model button and click on an entity in the model to sample the color from that entity and apply it to the currently selected material. See Color Pickers (Microsoft Windows) or Color Picker (Mac OS X) for more information. if any.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Materials Browser Edit Panel
Use the edit panel to edit the currently selected material.Re-checking the use texture checkbox will not restore a previous image file setting.The Match color of object in model tool matches the color of a specific entity's material.
Texture File Field
The texture file field contains the name of a image file (representing a texture). associated with the current material. RGB. Note .

These options do not affect the original image file itself. if you type 2 in the top dimension box (width). The Dimensions options allow you to specify the dimensions of each texture tile. For example.
Colorize Checkbox
Check the Colorize checkbox to lock all colors throughout the image to the same hue. Type a value in the height or width box to change the size of the texture tile.
Page 705
Copyright Google Inc. Click the horizontal and vertical arrow buttons to revert to the previous width and height settings.
Dimensions Fields
Textures repeat themselves similar to tiles when they are painted on surfaces. Alternatively. Slide the opacity slider to the left to increase the transparency of the texture.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Edit Texture Image in External Editor Button
Click on the Edit texture image in external editor button to launch your default image editor. 2 will appear in the bottom box (height). This option is useful for files that are not displaying proper colors.
Opacity Slider
Slide the opacity slider to the right to increase the opacity of the texture. to edit the currently selected texture. Click on the chain icon if you do not want aspect ratio to be maintained. 2008
. as defined in the Applications panel of the Preferences dialog box. SketchUp launches the default editor or image display application.
Reset Color Button
Click the Reset Color button to reset the color of the material to the original color in the image file. If you have not identified an editor in the Applications panel of the Preferences dialog box. type a number from 0 to 100 (0 being fully transparent and 100 being fully opaque) in the opacity field. The corresponding dimension will adjust automatically to maintain aspect ratio.

2008
. Activate the Components Browser from the Window menu. The following image contains a screen shot of the Components Browser on Microsoft Windows.See component definitions and instances for further information.
Page 706
Copyright Google Inc. Note .Google SketchUp 7 Help
Components Browser
The Components Browser contains both user-created and pre-built Component entities that you can use in your models.

2008
. where insertion points appear. scaled.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Component Definitions and Instances
A Component Definition and a Component Instance are created when a component is created using the Create Component dialog box. but. called instances. appear and behave within the drawing area (whether they can be glued to faces. Component Definitions are represented by thumbnail images in the Components Browser. and painted independently of other instances. and so on).
Page 708
Copyright Google Inc. Component Instances are components definitions that have been inserted in the drawing area (called instancing). can be rotated. Components Definitions define or provide a blueprint for how all components of a specific type. once brought into the drawing area. Component Instances all look like and have the same default behavior as the Component Definition.

For example. Notice that the gluing plane (the grey plane) is parallel to the red/green plane and bottom of the window). This plane represents exactly where the component will orient to a face and cut into a face.
Page 709
Copyright Google Inc.
General
Name The Name field can contain the name of the component definition. Description The Description field can contain a description of the component. A grey gluing plane guide will appear when a specific gluing plane is selected. This window component was also set to glue to vertical surfaces. All component definitions must have a name.
Alignment
Glue to The Glue to drop-down list is used to identify the faces where your component can be placed when initially placed from the Components Browser. a standard door might only be glued to faces in the vertical (blue) plane.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The Create Component Dialog Box
The Create Component dialog box is displayed when you attempt to create a component using the Make Component menu item. The following image shows a window component during component creation. 2008
.

using the Set Plane button. Always face camera The Always face camera option allows the component to take on billboard behavior by drawing the component as a 2D form. from the Components Browser. Set Component Axis The component axis defines how the component inserts and aligns to other geometry or to the camera.
Usually you want windows and doors to have a gluing plane that is parallel to the front or back of the window or door (not the bottom). against a vertical surface. to properly set the gluing or cutting plane. The Set component axis button is used to specify a different origin for the component and to modify the orientation of the component when it is placed. Cut Opening The Cut Opening option allows the Component to create openings in the face onto which it is placed.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The following image shows what occurs when the previously mentioned window component is placed. For example. Note .Components with the Always face camera option enabled cannot have gluing behavior.
Page 710
Copyright Google Inc. Note . The component axis also defines the cutting plane by the orientation of the red/green plane. a door or window component might be set to cut an opening in any wall where instances of the component are placed.There must be edges along the cutting plane of the component to cut a hole in a face. Notice that the window meets the vertical face at the window's bottom because it was created with a gluing plane that is parallel to the bottom of the window. You might need to reorient the component's axes at creation. This option increases performance by eliminating the need to render the component as a 3D model. 2008
.

Note .
Page 711
Copyright Google Inc. The size of the shadow changes based on view point.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Shadows face sun This option is only available when the Always face camera option is enabled. Uncheck this option to create a component definition in the Components Browser without creating a component instance from selection set. The shadow shape does not change as the component rotates to face the camera. 2008
. Replace selection with component The Replace selection with component option causes the currently selected entities to be turned into a Component instance. Uncheck this option to cause the shadow to be cast from the component's current position. The shadows face sun option causes the shadow to be cast from the component's current position as though the component were facing the sun. This option does not work well with components that have wide bases (such as people in mid stride).Ensure the component's axis is positioned at the bottom center of the component for best results. This option works best with components that have short bases (such as trees).

2008
.
Page 712
Copyright Google Inc. Use the Make Component menu item from the Edit menu to create a component from the currently selected entities.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Component Entities
Components are entities that can hold other entities. but they are commonly used to combine several entities as a single entity for the purposes of reuse in multiple models. Components are similar to Group entities.

the name of the component. Context-click on any component's icon or name to access the Components Browser's context menus. You can use this menu item to save components that have been modified or created during a drawing session. This dialog box contains the location for the component file.
Properties
Select the Properties menu item to display the Properties dialog box. The following options appear depending on whether you are clicking on icons in an established component collection or in the In Model components:
Delete
Select the Delete menu item to delete a single component from a component collection. and the number of component instances in the model.
Reload
Select the Reload menu item to reload a component from its original file in the event that the component's file has changed since being used in your model.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Components Browser Context Menus
A number of useful Components Browser-related commands are accessible using context menus.
Save As
Select the Save As menu item to save the selected component to a separate SketchUp file with a new name and location.
Reset Insertion Point
Select the Reset Insertion Point menu item to reset any changes made to a component definition's insertion point. when the file was last opened.
Page 713
Copyright Google Inc.
Replace Selected
Select the Replace Selected menu item to replace the currently selected components in the drawing area with the currently selected component in the Components Browser.
Select Instances
Select the Select Instance menu item to select all of the instances of a specific component in your model. 2008
.

Refresh: Click on the Refresh menu item to refresh the current list of components. The In Model components contain all of the components currently included with your model file. Note . components in your model. Use the select panel to navigate between component libraries. Small Thumbnails: Click the Small Thumbnails menu item to display small thumbnail representations of your components. and description. List: Click on the List menu item to display a list of all component names. This feature allows you to display both your component collections and the In Model components at the same time.
Display Secondary Selection Pane Button
The Display Secondary Selection Pane button displays a second select panel below the primary select panel.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Components Browser Controls
Use Components Browser controls to navigate among components in your component libraries.
Page 714
Copyright Google Inc. This feature is useful when you want to drag components between collections and the In Model components. Large Thumbnails: Click the Large Thumbnails menu item to display large thumbnail representations of your components. View Options Drop-Down List Click on the View Options drop-down list to list several options for viewing your components in Components Browser. Details: Click on the Details menu item to display large thumbnails representations of your components along with the component name.
Component Thumbnail
The component thumbnail displays the currently selected component. 2008
.
Component Description Field
The component description field displays a description of the currently selected component.
Select Tab
Click on the Select tab to display the select panel . In Model Button Click on the In Model button to navigate to the In Model components. and components in the 3D Warehouse.
Component Name Field
The component name field displays the name of the currently selected component.You can have components in your In Model components that are not being used by your model. author.

and a list of the five most-recently viewed local collections and Google 3D Warehouse searches. Collections are identified by a stack of 3 overlapping boxes around a component thumbnail. Expand: Select the Expand menu item to see all sub-components. Open or create a local collection (Microsoft Windows): Select the Open or create a local collection menu item to open all the components in a collection folder or create a new collection folder. Search Field Type the name of any components you want to find in the search field. in a favorite.SketchUp lists all individual models and collections with the search term. resulting from a search. The following lists all options found on the details menu in both Microsoft Windows and Mac OS X versions of SketchUp. Individual Components are indicated by a single box around the component thumbnail. to search for all plane components. and so on. View in 3D Google Warehouse: Select the View in 3D Google Warehouse menu item to view the search results in the 3D Warehouse. Open a local collection: Select the Open a local collection menu item to open all the components in a collection folder." Search Button (Microsoft Windows) Click the Search button to initiate a search of a component whose name you have typed in the Search field. Create a local collection (Mac OS X): Select the Create a local collection menu item to create a new collection folder. The Collections and Searches drop-down list is divided into three sections: Collections at the top. Remove from favorites: Select the Remove from favorites menu item to remove the current collection from the list of favorite collections in the Collections and Searches dropdown list. Component List The component list contains a listing of all components in the model. type "plane.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Collections and Searches Drop-Down List Click on the Collections and Searches drop-down list to list all of the component collections in SketchUp. Search Button (Mac OS X) Click the Search button to view a list of recent searches. For example. Note . Select the Clear menu item to clear the list. Click on a collection to select the collection.
Page 715
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. Add to favorites: Select the Add to favorites menu item to add the current collection to a list of favorite collections in the Collections and Searches drop-down list. Save as a local collection: Select the Save as a local collection menu item to save all components in the In Model collection as a collection on your local hard drive. Details Menu Click on the Details arrow to display the Details Menu. a list of the user's favorite collections or searches (local or in the Google 3D Warehouse). Purge unused (In Model only): Select the Purge unused to remove all components in the In Model collection that are not currently used in your model.

construction lines. for the exception of the Loaded From field. click on Expand to see components and groups nested within the currently selected component or group.
Edit Tab
The Edit tab contains properties specific to the currently selected component.
Page 716
Copyright Google Inc. See the Create Component Dialog Box for further information on these properties. These are the same properties whose values you define when a component is created. select Components from the dropdown list to see statistics for all components in the component.
Statistics Tab
The Statistics tab reports quantities of various elements.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Previous Button Click on the Previous button (displayed after performing a search) to view the previous twelve Google 3D Warehouse search results. Loaded From The Loaded From field displays the location of the component on the file system. These properties can only be edited for components that are selected in the In Model components. within the component. 2008
. Select All geometry from the drop-down list to see statistics for all geometry in the component or group. Alternatively. edges. Next Button Click on the Next button (displayed after performing a search) to view the next twelve Google 3D Warehouse search results. such as faces. Finally.

Activate the Styles Browser from the Window menu. 2008
. background colors. watermarks. and so on).Google SketchUp 7 Help
Styles Browser
The Styles Browser contains options used to alter how your model and the drawing area is rendered (its edge type face type. The following image contains a screen shot of the Styles Browser on Microsoft Windows:
Page 717
Copyright Google Inc.

Sky
Check on the Sky checkbox to have a sky color that is different from the background color.
Ground
Check on the Ground checkbox to select a ground color that is different from the background color. Place the slider toward the left-most position to minimize below-ground visibility.
Page 719
Copyright Google Inc.
Transparency
Slide the Transparency slider to adjust the level of transparency for the ground plane. Click on the Sky button to select a sky color.
Background
Click on the Background button to select a background color for SketchUp's drawing area. Place the slider toward the right-most position to maximize below-ground visibility. and ground colors. sky.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The Styles Browser Background Panel
Styles also contain options for configuring the drawing area background.
Show Ground from Below
Check the Show ground from below checkbox to toggle the display of the ground plane from viewpoints below the horizon. 2008
.

You can only apply one style at a time. The In Model styles library contains all of the styles currently included with your model file.
Style Thumbnail
The style thumbnail displays the style currently applied to your model.
Create New Style Button
Click on the Create new style button to create a copy of the currently active style in the In Model library. 2008
. Note . but you might want multiple styles in the In Model library. Forward Arrow Click the Forward arrow to navigate to the next location in the hierarchy of libraries.
Update Style Button
Click on the Update style button to update the copy of the currently active style in the In Model library.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Styles Browser Controls
Use the Styles Browser controls to navigate among styles in your styles libraries.
Style Description Field
The style description field displays a description of the currently active style. This feature is useful when you want to drag styles between libraries and the in model library.
Select Tab
Click on the Select tab to display the select panel.You can have styles in your In Model style library that are not being used by your model. In Model Button Click on the In Model button to navigate to the In Model styles library.
Style Name Field
The style name field displays the name of the currently active style. This feature allows you to display both your styles libraries and the in model library at the same time. Styles in the In Model library are also saved with your SketchUp file. Back Arrow Click the Back arrow to navigate to the previous location in the hierarchy of libraries. Note .
Display Secondary Selection Pane Button
The Display Secondary Selection Pane button displays a second select panel below the primary select panel. For example. Use the select panel to navigate between style libraries.
Page 720
Copyright Google Inc. you might have one style that you apply when you are working on the model (because performance is better when you use the style) and another style you use for presenting the model.

watermark panel.
Page 721
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Libraries Drop-Down List Click on the libraries drop-down list to list all of the styles libraries in SketchUp. and other styles panel. Select a style from the secondary style pane and click on one or more wells to sample the corresponding settings from that style. See Details Menu for further information. For example. Click on this tab to display the five wells and a secondary style pane. Details Menu Click on the Details arrow to display the Details Menu. face rendering panel. Click on a library to select the library. 2008
.
Mix Tab
The Mix tab contains five wells corresponding to the five categories of styles in the styles browser (edge. face. click on a style in the secondary style pane and click on the Edge Settings well to sample the edge settings from that style. and modeling styles). The style in the style thumbnail changes to reflect the newly sampled settings.
Edit Tab
The Edit tab contains five separate panels: The edge rendering panel. background. drawing area styles panel. watermark.

Medium Images.
List View
Select the List View menu item to display the styles in list form.
Add Library to Favorites
Select the Add Library to Favorites menu item to add an existing library to the list of favorite libraries (appearing at the bottom of the libraries drop-down list).
Page 722
Copyright Google Inc.
Get More
Select the Get More menu item to get more styles from the SketchUp web site. This dialog box does not display files.
Refresh
Select the Refresh menu item to update the styles appearing in the styles browser.The open or create a library menu item displays a Browse for Folder dialog box. 2008
. This menu allows you to perform additional styles-related functions. Medium Images. only folders. Select the folder or location containing the file and click the OK button.
Remove Library From Favorites
Select the Remove Library from Favorites menu item to remove a library from your list of favorites (appearing at the bottom of the libraries drop-down list). Note .
Save Library As
Select the Save Library As menu item to save a copy of a library with a new name. Large Images.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Styles Browser Details Menu
Click on the right arrow next to the styles library drop-down list to open the details pop-up menu. Extra Large Images
Select the Small Images. or Extra Large Images menu item to change the size of the thumbnails in the Select panel. Large Images.
Purge Unused
Select the Purge Unused menu item to remove all styles in the In Model library that are not actually used in your model.
Small Images.
Open or Create a Library
Select the Open or create a library menu item to open an existing library (or file) or create a new styles library (folder).
Create Style
Select the Create style menu item to create a copy of the currently active style in the In Model library.

Models with perfectly straight digitally drawn lines are often perceived to be in a finished state.
Display Edges
Check the Display Edges checkbox to activate the display of edges in your model. The following images shows a series of cubes without and then with edges.
Page 723
Copyright Google Inc. Tip . Edge Rendering Styles are useful in conveying that a model is still in conceptual state and. therefore.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The Styles Browser Edge Panel
SketchUp contains a variety of edge rendering styles allowing you to manipulate the edge appearance on the screen. is open for feedback. Note . 2008
.Endpoints and Jitter edge rendering styles are not available for NPR Edges.

Page 724
Copyright Google Inc. Enter a thickness. The following image shows a series of cubes with edges and depth cue edges on. Enter a thickness. for the depth cue lines in the pixels field. This thickness determines the thickness of the forward-most lines (such as for the bottom middle cube in the following image) of your model. Notice that the foreground edges on each cube get progressively thinner from front to back and top to bottom. in pixels. The following image shows a series of cubes with edges and profile edges.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Profiles
Check the Profiles checkbox to emphasize the outlines or profiles of major shapes in your model. 2008
. in pixels. This style is particularly useful in ensuring the 3D nature of geometry is emphasized and borrows from a proven traditional media drawing technique. for the profile lines in the pixels field.
Depth Cue
Check the Depth Cue checkbox to emphasize the lines of geometry in the foreground over the lines of geometry in the background.

in pixels. for the length of the emphasized endpoints in the pixels field.
Endpoints
Check the Endpoints checkbox to place additional line thickness at the endpoints of lines. This edge rendering style does not affect inference behavior.
Page 725
Copyright Google Inc. The following image shows a series of cubes with edges and extension edges. giving your model hand-drawn sketched appearance.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Extension
Check the Extension checkbox to extend each line slightly past its endpoint. in pixels. 2008
. The following image shows a series of cubes with edges and endpoints edges. Enter a length. for the extension lines in the pixels field. Enter a length.

Page 726
Copyright Google Inc. This edge rendering style does not affect inference behavior. The following image shows a series of cubes with edges and jitter edges. Note . Move the Level of Detail slider to the left to decrease the number of displayed edges.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Jitter
Check the Jitter checkbox to render each line multiple times at a slight offset. giving your model hand-drawn sketched appearance. This option is only available for styles that have a Sketchy Edge.
Color
SketchUp also allows you to manipulate the edge color on the screen. Tip .Experiment with combinations of edge renderings to see how they appeal to you.
Halo
Check the Halo checkbox to create a halo affect where lines overlap in your model by ending lines.Edge Colors are only available when using Shaded and Shaded with Textures Face Rendering Styles. a certain distance away from the overlap point.
Level of Detail
Move the Level of Detail slider to the right increase the number of displayed edges. 2008
. Inference alignments to edges are not available when edges are hidden. Type a number in the halo text field representing the distance away from the intersection where lines will end. This option is only available for styles that have a Sketchy Edge. that would normally overlap.

By Material Select the By Material drop-down list item to display edges using an assigned material color. This option is helpful in determining when edges are not aligned to an axis.
Page 727
Copyright Google Inc.
By Axis Select the By Axis drop-down list item to display edges in colors corresponding to the color of the drawing axes to which they are parallel. and blue corresponding to the axes to which they are aligned. The following image contains edges painted with a grey material. but preserves them if you choose to view them again.Google SketchUp 7 Help
All Same Select the All Same drop-down list item to display all edges using the Edges color as defined in color swatch. 2008
. The following image has lines colored red. green. This option does not actually change any edge color assignments you may have made.

2008
.
Wireframe
Click on the Wireframe face rendering style button to display the model as a collection of lines.
Note .Google SketchUp 7 Help
The Styles Browser Face Panel
SketchUp contains a variety of face rendering styles allowing you to manipulate the amount of material and textures displayed on the screen.
Back color
Click on the Back color button to set the default color for the back sides of faces. or which you might use as an underlay for hand drawings.Use this face rendering style when creating black and white printouts which you might want to modify further with traditional media. on a wireframe rendered model
Hidden Line
Click on the Hidden Line button to display faces in the model without any shading or textures. Materials assigned to faces override this setting.You cannot use face modification tools. Tip .
Front Color
Click on the Front color button to set the default color for all front sides of faces. Faces are not displayed in Wireframe mode. Materials assigned to faces override this setting. such as the Push/Pull Tool.
Page 728
Copyright Google Inc.

Monochrome mode provides default shading and is useful for shadow studies whereby you turn the face front and face back to white and then display shadows.
Shaded
Click on the Shaded button to display faces in the model as shaded to reflect a light source. Switch back to the Shaded with Textures face rendering mode to create your final output.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Monochrome
Click on the Monochrome button to display the model as an assembly of edges and faces. The default colors for front and back face are displayed when no color has been applied to a face. Any color that had been applied to a face will be displayed. 2008
. Use other face rendering styles. when performance slows dramatically. Tip . However. just as with the Hidden Line face rendering style.
Page 729
Copyright Google Inc.
Shaded with Textures
Click on the Shaded with Textures button to display the faces in model with the texture images that have been applied to a face. such as the Shaded face renderings style. Remember that both sides of faces can have different colors.Textures can slow down SketchUp's performance.

Shadow display will default to ground plane shadows only when X-ray mode is enabled.
Page 730
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. The Faster display sacrifices sorting accuracy to provide a faster rendering update rate. Remember. and snap to points and edges that would otherwise be hidden behind faces when modeling with X-ray mode. medium. X-ray mode is different than material transparency. Faces can not cast Shadows when using X-ray mode.
Enable Transparency
Click on the Enable transparency checkbox to enable or disable global material transparency. however. You can easily visualize. Conversely. it may sometimes display transparent faces in an unrealistic way: Faces may appear as if they were in front of other surfaces when they are really behind. This option allows you to see through the model's faces and edit edges behind faces and can be combined with any of the above face rendering styles. Each option differs in its speed and quality of transparency sorting. and vice-versa. and nicer.
X-Ray
Click on the X-Ray button to display all faces in SketchUp with a global transparency.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Monochrome
Click the Monochrome button to display the faces with the default front and back face color. select. Because SketchUp's transparency system is designed for real-time feedback and display.
Transparency Quality
The Transparency Quality options allow you to select the quality of transparency display between faster. the Nicer display performs additional calculations to correctly sort transparent surfaces. that it is not possible to select and infer faces that would otherwise be hidden.

Color by Layer
Check the Color by Layer checkbox to apply materials to geometry on a per layer basis using the color associated with the layer.
Guides
Click on the Guides button to set the color of any Guide Line entities in your model.
Section Cut Width
Enter a Section Cut Width to define the thickness (in pixels) of all cut lines in the active section plane.
Selected
Click on the Selected button to set the color of the highlight used to indicate a selection. enabling you to select the geometry. UnHide > Last.
Active Section
Click on the Active Section button to define the color for the currently active (highlighted) Section Plane entity.
Page 731
Copyright Google Inc.
Guides
Check the Guides checkbox to display guide line entities and guide point entities. Use a color that will contrast well with the other colors in your model when selecting a selected color.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The Styles Browser Modeling Panel
The Modeling panel contains styles for how a variety of entities are displayed on the screen.
Section Cuts
Click on the Section Cuts button to define the color for the active section plane's section slice line. Once selected.
Section Planes
Check the Section Planes checkbox to display Section Plane entities. Ensure shaded or shaded with Textures display is turned on to view materials.
Hidden Geometry
Check the Hidden Geometry checkbox display hidden geometry or entities that have been hidden using the Hide menu item or context command.
Inactive Section
Click on the Inactive Section button to define the color for the currently inactive (not highlighted) Section Plane entities in your model. and Unhide > All menu items. 2008
. hidden geometry can be made visible with the Unhide> Selected.
Locked
Click the Locked button to set the color of any locked component. The Hidden Geometry checkbox displays hidden faces with a light cross-hatch pattern (edges are displayed dashed).

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Watermark
Watermark is part of the Styles Browser. 2008
.
Page 734
Copyright Google Inc. This feature allows you to add a watermark-like image to foreground or background of the drawing area.

of the watermark and tile them across the drawing area. or tiles. Check the radio button in the Position matrix that best represents the location on the screen where you want your watermark.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Watermark Settings
There are several settings that you can make when creating or editing a watermark. watermarks. Positioned Select the Positioned option to position the watermark at one of nine pre-defined screen locations. Move the Scale slider to the left to create decrease the size of the watermark. Move the Scale slider to the right to create progressively fewer. 2008
.
Create Mask
The Create Mask option uses brightness of the color to create a vignette-like mask. Tiled Select the Tiled option to create copies. larger. These settings follow.
Position
There are three options for positioning your watermark. Move the Blend slider to the left to increase the presence of the model while decreasing the presence of the watermark. watermarks.
Page 736
Copyright Google Inc. The positioning options are: Stretched Select the Stretched option to stretch the watermark across the drawing area. The white portion of the graphic will become transparent and the black portions of the graphic will use the background color. Move the Scale slider to the right to increase the size of the watermark.
Blend
Move the Blend slider to the right to increase the presence of the watermark while decreasing the presence of the model. Move the Scale slider to the left to create progressively more. Check the Lock Aspect Ratio checkbox if you want the aspect ratio (height of image to width of image) to remain consistent such that the image is not distorted (the image might not fill the entire drawing area when aspect ratio is locked). smaller.

If you use any other layer as a drawing layer. Namely.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Layers Manager
The Layers Manager is used to apply and manage layers in your model. which will be visible the first time you activate the Layers dialog box. 2008
. all the entities that were created on that layer will become invisible when you hide that layer. Note . but inside a group or component that is on another layer. Entities that reside on Layer0 always inherit their visibility from the layer of the components/groups that contain them. Any entities that are on layer 0.
Page 737
Copyright Google Inc. Caution .Remember.You cannot delete Layer0. layers in SketchUp do not work exactly like layers in 2 dimensional programs. called Layer0. entities drawn with one layer appear in all layers in SketchUp. will remain visible when you hide layer 0. Activate the Layers Manager from the Window menu. This is not the case when hiding layer 0. This makes layer 0 work like the default drawing layer. Every model has one layer. The following image shows the Layers Manager on Microsoft Windows:
The following image shows the Layers Manager on Mac OS X:
The Layers Manager displays all the layers and their associated visibility in the model.

2008
. Purge Select the Purge option to delete all unused layers (layers without any geometry).
Page 738
Copyright Google Inc. This menu allows you to perform additional Layers Manager-related functions. Color by Layer Select the Color by Layer menu item to apply materials to geometry on a per layer basis using the color associated with the layer. Select All Select the Select All menu item to select all layers in the list of layers. Ensure shaded or shaded with Textures display is turned on to view materials.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Details Menu
Click on the right arrow next to the Delete button to open the details pop-up menu.

Delete
Select a layer and click on the Delete button to delete a layer.
Name
The Name column lists all the layers.
Visible
Click on the Visible checkbox to toggle the visibility of a layer. Each new layer has a different color to help you distinguish layers. The current layer has a check next to its name. Click again on the Visible column header to reverse the order.
Page 739
Copyright Google Inc. Click on the Visible column header to sort layers by visibility. Click on a layer and select a new color to change the color of the layer. 2008
. Check the box next to a layer name to make it the current layer. in the drawing. You can select a multiple layers by dragging. You will be prompted to move entities on the deleted layer to another layer (the default or current layer) if there are entities unique to that layer. Click on the name of a layer to edit the name of the layer. by name. A hidden layer becomes automatically visible when you select the layer.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Layers Manager Options
Add
Click on the Add button to create additional layers. Click on the Name column header to sort the layer alphabetically. Click on the Color column header to sort layers by color. Enter the layer name (or press "Enter" on Microsoft Windows or "Return" on Mac OS X to accept the default name). You can also press the Ctrl key and click on layer names to selectively pick layers or press the Shift key and click to select a series of contiguous layers. Click again on the Color column heading to reverse the order.
Color
The color column displays a color associated with each layer. Click on the Name column again will reverse the order.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Outliner
The Outliner is used to view your Group and Component hierarchies as a hierarchical tree. locating instances of a particular component. Activate the Outliner dialog box from the Window menu. This feature is great for navigating through large models. 2008
. or renaming groups and components. restructuring the model hierarchy. The following image shows a screenshot of the Outliner on Microsoft Windows:
The following image shows a screenshot of the Outliner on Mac OS X:
Page 740
Copyright Google Inc.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Details Menu
Click on the right arrow next to the Filter field to open the details pop-up menu. 2008
.
Page 741
Copyright Google Inc.
Collapse All
Select the Collapse All menu item to collapse (close all branches) the entire hierarchical view in the Outliner. This menu allows you perform additional Outliner-related functions.
Expand All
Select the Expand All menu item to expand (open all branches) the entire hierarchical view in the Outliner.
Sort by Name
Select the Sort by name menu item to toggle the sorting of the groups and components alphabetically.

Activate the Scenes dialog box from the Window menu or from the scene tabs.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Scenes Manager
The Scenes Manager is used to control the various features of SketchUp scenes. The following image shows the Scenes Manager on Microsoft Windows:
Page 742
Copyright Google Inc. The Scenes Manger contains a list of all of the scenes for the model. 2008
. Scenes in this list are displayed in the order in which they will be displayed when running an animation.

when you update a scene.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The following image shows the Scenes Manager on Mac OS X:
Caution . 2008
.Each scene has a series of properties that you can store with that scene (Properties to save). to update (the dialog box that appears when the Update button is clicked).
Page 743
Copyright Google Inc. Additionally. If you choose to update a property that you are not storing with a scene (using Properties to save). it is important to ensure you have all of the properties you want to store with a scene checked prior to updating a scene. the property will not be updated. Therefore. of the properties that are stored with the scene. you can choose those properties.

A new scene. it is important to ensure you have all of the properties you want to store with a scene checked prior to updating a scene. of the properties that are stored with the scene. Click on the Update Scene button. 2. To update a scene: 1. Select a scene and check the Include in Animation option to include the scene in animation.
Update Scene
Use the Update Scene button to update a scene if you have made changes to the scene. Click on the Update button.
Name
Click in the Name field to name the currently active scene. Select the scene in the list of scenes and click the Delete Scene button to delete the scene. when you update a scene. within Properties to save. to store with the scene.Each scene has a series of properties that you can store with that scene (Properties to save).
Delete Scene
The Delete Scene button allows you to delete a scene from the current file. (optional) Rename the default scene name to something that represents the view of the model that will appear in the scene. To add a scene: 1. 2. Click on the properties." (optional) Provide a description of the scene. Caution . 3.
Include in Animation
Use the Include in Animation option to indicate whether a scene should be used in the animation. is added to the list of scenes and a scene tab appears above the drawing area. Remember. if your scene contains a top-down view of the model. Additionally. If you choose to update a property that you are not storing with a scene (using Properties to save). 4. you can only update those properties that you have previously selected to be stored with the scene.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Scenes Manager Options
Add Scene
The Add Scene button allows you to add a new scene to the current file. you can choose those properties. Disable this option for scenes you want to work on but do not want in a animation. For example.
Page 745
Copyright Google Inc. A Properties to Update dialog box appears. 5. call the scene "Top. 4. with a default scene name.
3. (optional) Unselect any properties you do not want to save with the scene. Click on the properties you want to update. Therefore. the property will not be updated. Select the scene you want to update. Click on the Add Scene button. 2008
. to update (the dialog box that appears when the Update button is clicked).

Drawing Style Click on the Drawing Style checkbox to store the drawing style settings. Axes Location Click on the Axes checkbox to store display and position of SketchUp's drawing axes with the scene. including type. with the scene. with the scene. Camera Location Click on the Camera Location checkbox to store the point of view. Hidden Geometry: Click on the Hidden the hidden geometry visibility with the scene.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Description
Click in the Description field to provide a short description or note for the currently active scene. including the zoom distance and field of view.
Page 746
Copyright Google Inc. Geometry checkbox to store
Visible Layers Click on the Visible Layers checkbox to store the visible layers with the scene. such as edge rendering. 2008
. date.Use different section cuts in successive scenes to create exciting animations with different cross sections of your model. with the scene. Shadows Settings Click on the Shadows Settings checkbox to store all shadow-related information. time. and so on.
Properties to Save
The Properties to Save options are used to control the different properties that can be stored with each scene. Properties that are not checked in the Properties to save section cannot be updated with the Update button. Tip . Active Section Planes Click on the Active Section Planes checkbox to store the active section planes with a scene.

The following image contains a screen shot of the Shadows Settings dialog box on Microsoft Windows:
The following image contains a screen shot of the Shadows Settings dialog box on Mac OS X:
Note . 2008
. including display. You can also use the Shadows Toolbar control to control shadows. Activate the Shadow Settings dialog box from the Window menu.
Page 747
Copyright Google Inc. time and date. Note . and site location and orientation.Daylight savings time is not factored into shadow calculations.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Shadows Settings Dialog Box
The Shadows dialog box is used to control SketchUp's Shadows feature.Ensure you have set the proper location for your model set through the Location panel of the Model Info dialog box for accurate shadow casting.

Light
Use the Light slider to control the intensity of the light in the model.
On Faces
Click on the Faces checkbox to enable casting of Face shadows. (it lightens or darkens light). You can specify the date in numerical form (11/8).
Page 749
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Shadow Options
SketchUp contains a variety Shadow setting options allowing you to manipulate the use of shadows within your model. The slider adjusts the time from sunrise to sunset. The slider adjusts the date from January 1st to December 31st.
Date
Use the Date slider to adjust the day of the year used by SketchUp to determine the location of the sun for shadow casting.
Time
Use Time slider to adjust the time of day used by SketchUp to determine the location of the sun for shadow casting. This option effectively lightens and darkens the areas under shade and shadows. This option effectively lightens and darkens illuminated surfaces. Type a date into the date text field to set a precise day.
From Edges
Click the From Edges checkbox to enable the casting of shadows from edges that are not associated with a face. with 12:00 noon in the middle of the slider. Type a time into the time text field to set a precise time.
Dark
Use the Dark slider to control the intensity of light in the model. This feature makes intensive use of your 3D graphics hardware and can cause performance degradation.
On Ground
Click the On Ground checkbox to enable the casting of shadows on the ground plane (the red/green plane). This option (it lightens or darkens shadows). 2008
.
Display Shadows
Click on the Display Shadows checkbox to toggle between displaying and not displaying shadows within your model.

The following image shows a screenshot of the Fog dialog box on Microsoft Windows:
The following image shows a screenshot of the Fog dialog box on Mac OS X:
Page 750
Copyright Google Inc. Click on the Fog menu item within the Window menu to display the Fog dialog box. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Fog Dialog Box
Fog is primarily used as a special effect during presentations.

Refer to the Background Panel section of the Styles Browser topic for further information on setting the background color.
Use Background Color
Check the Use background color checkbox to use the currently configured background color as the fog color. Fog can begin right in front of the camera which is zero on the scale or further away from the camera. Move the right-most slider to the left to establish 100 percent strength closer to the camera (your view). Move the left-most slider to the right to start fog somewhere beyond the camera. Uncheck the Display Fog checkbox to hide fog.
Page 751
Copyright Google Inc.Use the OpenGL panel in the Application Preferences dialog box to set hardware acceleration before using fog.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Fog Options
There are a few options in the Fog dialog box for configuring fog.
Display Fog
Check the Display Fog checkbox to display fog in the drawing area. Move the right-most slider all the way to the left to have zero visibility right in front of the camera and extending out to infinity (you won’t actually be able to see your model at all and at any distance).
Fog Sliders
The left-most fog slider determines where you want the fog to start relative to the camera (your view). The right-most slider determines where you want the fog to be at 100% strength (known as zero visibility). 2008
. Uncheck the Use background color and click on the color swatch to select a different color to be used as the fog color. Note .

2008
. Activate the Match Photo dialog box from the Window menu. This dialog box is only relevant during matching.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Match Photo Dialog Box
The Match Photo dialog box controls are used to help you create accurate 3D models from photos and to accurately place models in a photo's context. The following image contains a screen shot of the Match Photo dialog box on Microsoft Windows:
The following image contains a screen shot of the Match Photo dialog box on Mac OS X:
Page 752
Copyright Google Inc. Refer to the Match Photo dialog box section of the Matching Photos and Models topic for further information.

2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Page 753
Copyright Google Inc.

The following image contains a screen shot of the Soften/Smooth Edge dialog box on Microsoft Windows:
Page 754
Copyright Google Inc. Softened edges can also be smoothed rendering the adjoining faces with a smooth tonal gradient. 2008
.Softened edges are hidden automatically (but still exist in your model). Edges that are currently not visible will be displayed.
Note . Tip . Edges are automatically hidden when softened.Triple-click on geometry to ensure you have hidden and unhidden geometry selected before performing a soften or smooth operation.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Soften Edges Dialog Box
SketchUp's edges can be softened and smoothed to achieve a real-world appearance. Activate the Soften Edges dialog box from the Window menu. along with any explicitly hidden geometry. The Soften Edges dialog box allows you to automatically apply or remove softness and smoothing effects to the edges in your model. The following series of images contains a column (lower part of each image) that is first softened (middle column) and then smoothed (right-most column). when you enable the Hidden Geometry menu item on the View menu.

2008
. A good strategy for creating useful models is to try to use the least amount of geometry in conjunction with soften or smoothing effect to achieve the desired result (whether it be a detailed close-up or a panoramic). detailed geometry require additional facets (such as a column having many small sides) to achieve a clean soften or smooth effect. However. Namely.There are a several components to achieving a desired result using soften and smoothing effects. Conversely. adding detail to portions of a model that will be seen at a distance is likely a waste of the computer's resources.
Page 755
Copyright Google Inc. additional detail can affect the computer's performance.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The following image contains a screen shot of the Soften/Smooth Edge dialog box on Mac OS X:
Tip .

and move the Angle Between Normals to 61 degrees. Now move the slider to 59 degrees. create a 6-sided polygon. the higher the setting the more performance might degrade. between coplanar surfaces. click on Smooth Normals. expand the polygon using the Push/Pull Tool. can be smoothed. 2008
.
Smooth Normals
Click on the Smooth Normals checkbox to smooth any edges.Edges that are shared by three or more faces cannot be softened. to make the edges appear smooth. The following image shows an edge shared by three faces. Note . therefore. select the entire 3D polygon. essentially deleting edges.
Soften Coplanar
Click on the Soften Coplaner checkbox to soften edges. The higher the setting. the more angles you are likely to smooth or soften with a smooth or soften command. Experiment further by turning on the Soften Coplaner option to see edges appear and disappear. For example.Create a three dimensional multi-sided polygon (with more than 5 sides) and experiment with these options to become familiar with softening and smoothing models.
Angle Between Normals
Use Angle Between Normals slider to set the maximum size of all angles that will be smoothed or softened.
Page 756
Copyright Google Inc. Tip . Notice that each edge of the polygon looks smooth because the angle between each normal is 60 degrees and. Notice that the sides no longer look smoothed because the Angle Between Normals only operates on angles below or equal to 59 degrees. Consequently.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Soften Edges Options
SketchUp contains a few Soften Edges options allowing you to manipulate the use of softening within your model. essentially spreading color and texture over edges.

2008
. Click on a tool in the Toolbar or menu to view information about that tool in the instructor.
Page 757
Copyright Google Inc. Click on links in the instructor to navigate to sections in the online SketchUp User's Guide.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Instructor
The Instructor dialog box displays information related to the currently selected tool.

Miscellaneous The Miscellaneous options define other global mouse behaviors. Mouse Wheel Style Click the Invert checkbox to change SketchUp scroll wheel behavior to match Google Earth scroll wheel behavior (rolling forward zooms out. moving the mouse to extend the line. Click-drag-release: Click the Click-drag-release radio button to force the Line Tool to draw by click and holding the mouse button to define the start point of the line. Click Style The Click Style options allows you to define how your input device reacts to clicks. Display crosshairs: Click the Display crosshairs checkbox to display a set of colored crosshairs (corresponding to axes colors) when drawing.
Drawing
Use the Drawing preferences panel to define global mouse (or other input device) behavior. Activate the Preferences from the Window menu. Continue Line Drawing: Click the Continue line drawing checkbox to force the Line Tool to treat an end point as the start point of a new line. Auto Detect: Click the Auto Detect radio button to use either Click-drag-release and Clickmove-click as necessary. and releasing the mouse to establish the end point of the line. dragging the mouse to extend the line.
Page 758
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Application Preferences Dialog Box (Microsoft Windows)
SketchUp's application preferences are used to set various global behaviors for SketchUp. and clicking again to establish the end point of the line.
Applications
Use the Applications preferences panel to identify the application used to open an application for editing image files. Use the browser to locate an image editor for your image files. 2008
. Component/Group Highlighting Bounding box only: Click the Bounding box only checkbox to toggle between displaying only one bounding box or displaying a bounding box for each component and it's corresponding edges when selected. Default Image Editor Click on the "Choose" button to display the Image Editor Browser. saving you one extra click required establish a new start point for the second line.
Compatibility
Use the Compatibility preferences panel to identify component and group highlighting and mouse wheel settings. Click-move-click: Click the Click-move-click radio button to force the Line Tool to draw by clicking and releasing the mouse button to define the start point of the line. rolling backward zooms in).

Materials Use the Materials field to define the default location used when you open or create a library using the Materials Browser. The extension will be available (menu items and optional Toolbar) the next time your run SketchUp. Styles Use the Styles field to define the default location used when you open or create a library using the Styles Browser. Type the auto-save interval. Saving Create Backup:Click on the Create Backup checkbox to automatically create a backup file whenever you save a drawing. SketchUp uses this location as the starting point for all File > Export > 3D Model operations.skp. Texture Images Use the Texture Images field to define the default location for all images that can be used as a texture. An extension can be an add-on tool or feature created by Google that is not necessarily a part of core SketchUp functionality. in minutes. Auto-Save: Click the Auto-Save checkbox to automatically save changes to your drawing into a temporary file at a specific time interval. SketchUp uses this location as the starting point for all open and save file operations. For example. into the minutes field. Export Models Use the Export Models field to define the default location for all models that are exported. Models Use the Models field to define the default location for all of your models. Components Use the Components field to define the default location used when you open or create a collection using the Components Browser. Click in the check box next to the extension that you want to enable in SketchUp. Watermark Images Use the Watermark Images field to define the default location for all images that can be used as a watermark. if your drawing is hotel.
General
Use the General preferences panel to define global save and user interface settings.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Extensions
Use the Extensions preferences panel to add or remove SketchUp extensions from the user interface. This file will be saved to the same folder as the drawing file.
Page 759
Copyright Google Inc. the backup will be called hotel.
Files
The Files preferences panel defines various locations for files used by SketchUp (such as the default location for Components and Materials). 2008
. SketchUp uses this location as the starting point for all File > Insert > Image as Texture operations.skb. The backup file is the previously saved version of the file. This temporary file is available on the file system should SketchUp abnormally exit.

Google strongly recommends you keep the Auto-Save option checked to ensure that your valuable work is retained.
Page 760
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. This report contains valuable information regarding the unrecoverable errors. Automatically fix problems when they are found: Check the Automatically fix problems when they are found checkbox to have SketchUp fix problems found in your model automatically (without having to display a dialog box). These problems can occur given the infinite flexibility that SketchUp provides when designing in 3D. This file is saved in the directory where the original . allowing a larger drawing area. Google strongly recommends checking this box to ensure that problems are corrected proactively. Leave this checkbox unchecked if you want SketchUp to display a dialog box (with the Always fix my models. The large tool buttons are easier for some users to see and use (they provide larger areas to click with your mouse) and are easier to use with a pen and tablet. and Fix it later options) when a problem is found. preventing the overwriting of a good auto-save file. Fix it now. such as AutoSave_hotel. Your model is assessed for problems when it is loaded or saved. Use Large Tool Buttons: Click on the Use large tool buttons checkbox to toggle between large and small tool buttons. This dialog box contains the option to quit SketchUp and send a report. allowing your model to perform optimally.skp file exists. Automatically check models for problems: Check the Automatically check model for problems checkbox to check for minor problems with your model. SketchUp checks your model for unrecoverable errors during the auto-save. SketchUp will display a dialog box in the rare case that unrecoverable errors are found in your model. Warn of style changes when creating scenes: Click the Warn of style changes when creating scenes if you want to be notified when a style has changed when adding scenes to your file. You must manually check for problems using the Fix Problems button in the Statistics panel of the Model Info dialog box if you leave this checkbox unchecked. Scenes and Styles The Scenes and Styles options allow you to enable warnings for style changes. Check Model For Problems The Check Model for Problems options allow you to enable problem checking for your SketchUp models. Tool Palette SketchUp has two differently sized toolbars. Smaller buttons save screen space.skp. Caution .Google SketchUp 7 Help
The temporary file's name will be a combination of the word "AutoSave" with the original filename. Google recommends you click on the quit SketchUp and send report button to terminate SketchUp and preserve your previously valid auto-save file.

Certain OpenGL drivers do not fully support casting shadows on faces. 2008
. and are rarely tested using other 3D programs. Note . Note . Disable this option if you are having problems with the 3D rendering of your models or if your video card is not 100% OpenGL compatible and does not support hardware acceleration. Check the system settings for your graphics card to see if it supports hardware acceleration (using the Control Panel on Microsoft Windows.Hardware Acceleration might only be available on your system for certain resolutions and color depths. Google cannot guarantee that SketchUp will work with hardware acceleration on your system. however you will be warned by SketchUp that enabling this option could cause problems on your system if fast feedback is not supported. Most 3d drivers are designed for games. numerous incompatibility problems can occur requiring a fix from the video card manufacturer. Caution . Unfortunately. You can also attempt to use this feature by checking the Use Fast Feedback checkbox manually. Therefore. such as blurring of the model. Use fast feedback: Check the Use fast feedback checkbox to increase performance when editing large models.
Page 761
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
OpenGL
Use the OpenGL preferences panel to define how the OpenGL standard should be applied within SketchUp. when using fast feedback under a non-application controlled setting. It is possible that you will see rendering anomalies. OpenGL Settings The OpenGL Settings allow you to speed up OpenGL drawing.SketchUp's Shadow feature can have a severe performance impact on slower computers or those using software rendering. Caution . SketchUp runs a test to assess whether your video card can support this option on startup. Use hardware acceleration: Click on the Use Hardware acceleration checkbox to use the hardware acceleration features of a video card. Use maximum texture size: Check the Use maximum texture size checkbox to use the maximum texture size supported by your graphics card. Google cannot control the quality of the OpenGL driver on your computer system. SketchUp will activate (check) this option if fast feedback is supported. Video card device drivers are proprietary and are maintained solely by the manufacturer of the video card in your system. Google strongly recommends that you set your driver's anti-aliasing setting to application controlled (which is normally the default setting for most graphic card drivers) to ensure that fast feedback functions properly.You might notice intermittent streaks or small spots of light within face shadows. Consequently. This option might result in a slowing of SketchUp unless your graphics card and computer can handle what is advertised. and can vary greatly with the quality of your OpenGL driver. Refer to the OpenGL topic for further information. only a small percentage of 3D drivers in the consumer video card market are 100% OpenGL compatible and can use this feature (though many cards claim to be 100% OpenGL compatible). A minimal amount of these artifacts is to be expected on most systems.

Capabilities The capabilities table lists one or more different graphic card settings combinations that might work well within SketchUp. Choose a different combination if you want to alter your graphics capabilities within SketchUp. such as 2x or 4x. Filter Field Type a phrase in the Filter to list shortcuts of a specific type. in the Add Shortcut field. SketchUp defaults to the most basic of these combinations to ensure your models will be rendered properly. Anti-Alias: SketchUp generally defaults to a combination with a zero anti-alias value. 2008
. to be assigned to the currently selected function. Higher anti-alias values. These combinations were selected by SketchUp. Reset All Button Click the Reset All button to reset all keyboard shortcuts to their factory defaults. Export Button Click the Export button to export current keyboard shortcuts as a keyboard shortcuts file. This setting provides a solution to this problem.
Page 762
Copyright Google Inc. Including Keyboard Shortcuts for more information. on execution. from a large list of settings combinations supported by your graphics card. can create smoother looking lines in SketchUp. Assigned Button Click the assigned button to remove the currently selected keyboard shortcut (in the Assigned field) from the list of shortcuts assigned to a function. Assigned Field The Assigned field contains a list of keyboard shortcuts assigned to the currently selected function. you might experience some flickering and reduced rendering performance if a higher anti-alias value is selected. Details: Click on the Details button to view details about your video card. However. Import Button Click the Import button to import a keyboard shortcuts file. Refer to Exporting Preferences. Including Keyboard Shortcuts for more information. Add Shortcut Button Click the add shortcut button to add the keyboard shortcut in the Add Shortcut field to the currently selected function. Function List The Function list contains all of the functions that can be assigned a keyboard shortcut.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Correct reversed picking driver bug: Check the Correct reversed picking driver bug checkbox to correct an issue whereby some video card device drivers cause SketchUp to select the reverse of faces with the Select Tool. Add Shortcut Field Type a keyboard shortcut. Refer to Importing Preferences.
Shortcuts
Use the Shortcuts preferences panel to define keyboard shortcuts for most SketchUp commands.

2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Template
Use the Template preferences panel to designate a SketchUp file that you would want to use as a template for all of your subsequent models. Drawing Template Drop-Down List The Drawing Template drop-down list contains a list of all of the templates available in SketchUp. Browse Button Click the "Browse" button to browse for a template. The Browse for Template dialog box is displayed.
Page 763
Copyright Google Inc. Locate and select a template using this dialog box.

Default Image Editor Click on the "Choose" button to display the Image Editor Browser. 2008
. Miscellaneous The Miscellaneous options define other global mouse behaviors. Click-move-click: Click the Click-move-click radio button to force the Line Tool to draw by clicking and releasing the mouse button to define the start point of the line. Click in the check box next to the extension that you want to enable in SketchUp. and releasing the mouse to establish the end point of the line. Activate the Preferences from the SketchUp menu.
Page 764
Copyright Google Inc. dragging the mouse to extend the line. An extension can be an add-on tool or feature created by Google that is not necessarily a part of core SketchUp functionality.
Drawing
Use the Drawing preferences panel to define global mouse (or other input device) behavior. saving you the one extra click required establish a new start point for the second line. The extension will be available (menu items and optional Toolbar) the next time your run SketchUp. and clicking again to establish the end point of the line. Auto-activate paint tool: Click the Auto-activate paint tool checkbox to automatically activate the Paint Bucket Tool after you select a color swatch.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Application Preferences Dialog Box (Mac OS X)
SketchUp's application preferences are used to set various global behaviors for SketchUp. Click-drag-release: Click the Click-drag-release radio button to force the Line Tool to draw by click and holding the mouse button to define the start point of the line.
Applications
Use the Applications preferences panel to identify the application used to open an application for editing image files. Click Style The Click Style options allow you to define how your input device reacts to clicks. Use the browser to locate an image editor for your image files. Display crosshairs: Click the Display crosshairs checkbox to display a set of colored crosshairs (corresponding to axes colors) when drawing.
Extensions
Use the Extensions preferences panel to add or remove SketchUp extensions from the user interface. Continue Line Drawing: Click the Continue line drawing checkbox to force the Line Tool to treat an end point as the start point of a new line. moving the mouse to extend the line. Auto Detect: Click the Auto Detect radio button to use either Click-drag-release and Clickmove-click as necessary.

Page 765
Copyright Google Inc. into the minutes field.skp. Caution . Save current window size:Click on the Save current window size button to save the window size for the currently active drawing window as the default size for SketchUp. The large tool buttons are easier for some users to see and use (they provide larger areas to click with your mouse) and are easier to use with a pen and tablet. Smaller buttons save screen space. This report contains valuable information regarding the unrecoverable errors. in minutes. The temporary file's name will be a combination of the word "AutoSave" with the original filename.Google strongly recommends you keep the Auto-Save option checked to ensure that your valuable work is retained. the backup will be called hotel.skb. Type the auto-save interval. Check Model For Problems The Check Model for Problems options allow you to enable problem checking for your SketchUp models. Main Window The Main Window options allow you to set the behavior for the main SketchUp window. such as AutoSave_hotel.Google SketchUp 7 Help
General
Use the General preferences panel to define global save and user interface settings. Use Large Tool Buttons: Click on the Use large tool buttons checkbox to toggle between large and small tool buttons. This file is saved in the Autosave folder under <user>/Library/Application Support/SketchUp/Autosave if the model has never been saved. This temporary file is available on the file system should SketchUp abnormally exit. 2008
. Tool Palette SketchUp has two differently sized tool pallets. The backup file is the previously saved version of the file. allowing a larger drawing area. This dialog box contains the option to quit SketchUp and send a report. Newly created drawing windows will appear directly on top of each other when this option is not enabled.skp. SketchUp will display a dialog box in the rare case that unrecoverable errors are found in your model. Auto-Save Click the Auto-Save checkbox to automatically save changes to your drawing into a temporary file at specific time interval. This file will be saved to the same folder as the drawing file. preventing the overwriting of a good auto-save file. Google recommends you click on the quit SketchUp and send report button to terminate SketchUp and preserve your previously valid auto-save file. Cascade main windows: Click on the Cascade main windows checkbox to place newly created drawing windows lightly below and to the right (cascaded) of the previous drawing window. This feature is useful if you want to see all of your drawing window title bars. SketchUp checks your model for unrecoverable errors during the auto-save. For example. Create Backup Click on the Create Backup checkbox to automatically create a backup file whenever you save a drawing. if your drawing is hotel. SketchUp puts the auto save file in the same directory as the model file.

Caution . Warn of Style Changes When Creating Scenes: Click the Warn of style changes when creating scenes if you want to be notified when a style has changed when adding scenes to your file. Check the system settings for your graphics card to see if it supports hardware acceleration (using the System Preferences on Macintosh OS X). Consequently. Automatically fix problems when they are found: Check the Automatically fix problems when they are found checkbox to have SketchUp fix problems found in your model automatically (without having to display a dialog box). Leave this checkbox unchecked if you want SketchUp to display a dialog box (with the Always fix my models. 2008
. A minimal amount of these artifacts is to be expected on most systems. allowing your model to perform optimally.
OpenGL
Use the OpenGL preferences panel to define how the OpenGL standard should be applied within SketchUp. OpenGL Settings The OpenGL Settings allow you to speed up OpenGL drawing.Hardware Acceleration might only be available on your system for certain resolutions and color depths. Disable this option if you are having problems with the 3D rendering of your models or if your video card is not 100% OpenGL compatible and does not support hardware acceleration. and can vary greatly with the quality of your OpenGL driver.
Page 766
Copyright Google Inc. Google strongly recommends checking this box to ensure that problems are corrected proactively. Unfortunately. Scenes and Styles The Scenes and Styles options allow you to enable warnings for style changes. You must manually check for problems using the Fix Problems button in the Statistics panel of the Model Info dialog box if you leave this checkbox unchecked. Caution . Fix it now.You might notice intermittent streaks or small spots of light within face shadows.Certain OpenGL drivers do not fully support casting shadows on faces. Note . and are rarely tested using other 3D programs. and Fix it later options) when a problem is found.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Automatically check models for problems: Check the Automatically check model for problems checkbox to check for minor problems with your model. Use Hardware Acceleration: Click on the Use Hardware acceleration checkbox to use the hardware acceleration features of a video card. These problems can occur given the infinite flexibility that SketchUp provides when designing in 3D. only a small percentage of 3D drivers in the consumer video card market are 100% OpenGL compatible and can use this feature (though many cards claim to be 100% OpenGL compatible). Most 3d drivers are designed for games.SketchUp's Shadow feature can have a severe performance impact on slower computers or those using software rendering. Note . numerous incompatibility problems can occur requiring a fix from the video card manufacturer. Your model is assessed for problems when it is loaded or saved.

or Option. Assigning Keyboard Shortcuts Keyboard shortcuts can dramatically speed up your drawing by allowing you to change tools while keeping the mouse cursor near the drawing area. Some context menu items become active only after performing another task. 2.
Shortcuts
Use the Shortcuts preferences panel to define keyboard shortcuts for most SketchUp commands. You can copy this file to other users or computers. however you will be warned by SketchUp that enabling this option could cause problems on your system if fast feedback is not supported. For example. Use Fast Feedback: Check the Use fast feedback checkbox to increase performance when editing large models. Existing keyboard shortcuts for this command will display in the Key column. Therefore. Type the keyboard shortcut key sequence in the text field at the bottom of the panel. Any key that can be used as a shortcut can also be assigned a modifier key like Shift. Video card device drivers are proprietary and are maintained solely by the manufacturer of the video card in your system. Refer to the OpenGL topic for further information. Google cannot guarantee that SketchUp will work with hardware acceleration on your system. Some keys are reserved for use by Mac OS X and can not be assigned as a keyboard shortcut. This option might result in a slowing of SketchUp unless your graphics card and computer can handle what is advertised. SketchUp will indicate when a key or key combination cannot be used or is already assigned.Keyboard shortcuts are saved to Home/Library/Application Support/SketchUp/Shortcuts. Note . You can also attempt to use this feature by checking the Use Fast Feedback checkbox manually. To assign a keyboard shortcut: 1.plist. Note . Shortcut keys can consist of any keyboard key. Control. select a face to activate the Reverse Faces command and then open Preferences > Shortcuts to set a keyboard shortcut for Reverse Faces. SketchUp runs a test to assess whether your video card can support this option on startup. SketchUp will activate (check) this option if fast feedback is supported. Use maximum texture size: Check the Use maximum texture size checkbox to use the maximum texture size supported by your graphics card.The list of commands available in the Shortcuts panel is dynamically generated and includes all menu items and active context menu items.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Google cannot control the quality of the OpenGL driver on your computer system.
SketchUp will prompt you before allowing you to assign a keyboard shortcut that is already assigned to another command. except number keys.
Page 767
Copyright Google Inc. Select the command to which you will assign a keyboard shortcut (within the Function list). with a few exceptions. 2008
.

The letters S.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The Measurements Toolbar and Keyboard Shortcuts Temporary focus is given to the Measurements Toolbar when you type a number while in the drawing area. Tip . For example. However.Do not use the spacebar or backspace keys as keyboard shortcuts to avoid conflict with values entered in the Measurements Toolbar. Therefore. R. numbers cannot be used as shortcut keys. X. 7s would be the correct entry to redefine a segmentation in the Measurements Toolbar.
Page 768
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. Add a prefix to any of these letters with a number in the Measurements Toolbar to ensure that a command with a corresponding keyboard shortcut letter is not invoked. and the symbols / and * can be used within keyboard shortcuts and as you enter values in the Measurements Toolbar. s7 will activate whatever command is invoked with the letter S as a keyboard shortcut.
Template
Use the Template preferences panel to designate a SketchUp file that you would want to use as a template for all of your subsequent models.

The Color Picker Dialog Box
The Color Picker dialog box contains a variety of different material and color controls providing several options for experimenting with color and materials in your SketchUp models. Note .
Toolbar The Toolbar at the top of the Color Picker dialog box contains icons representing each of the available color pickers. allowing you to use different pickers to create your colors. contains the current color selection. or by selecting the Paint Bucket Tool.Ensure that the Shaded or Shaded with Textures display style is selected to ensure applied colors and materials are displayed. for all operations in which you create.SketchUp supports the new system-wide Color Picker in OS X 10. You can drag and drop color swatches from this color well into your model or into any other visible color well. Switch between these color pickers by clicking one on of these icons. 2008
. Active Color Well The Active Color Well. modify and apply color. However.
Page 769
Copyright Google Inc. Activate the Color Picker by clicking on any color well in SketchUp's interface (such as in the Material Browser). by clicking on the Colors control in the Toolbar.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Color Pickers (OS X)
SketchUp on OS X uses the Apple System Color Picker. The contents of the Active Color Well are maintained as you switch between color pickers. below the Toolbar.2 (called "Jaguar"). SketchUp's Color Picker has been enhanced. with some enhancements for SketchUp. Note .

at the bottom of the Color Pickers. Drag and drop an empty swatch onto a color to remove a color from the User Palette. User Palette The User Palette. Color Picker Controls The Color Picker Controls. below the Active Color Well. You can also click and drag the cursor around the Color Wheel to quickly browse through many different colors. Note . Type an opacity value in the text field to the right of the slider if you prefer to set opacity levels more precisely. represented as a magnifying glass. Be sure to activate SketchUp's material transparency within the Edit tab of the Styles Browser before experimenting with the Opacity Slider. is an expandable palette of small color wells. Color Wheel Picker The Color Wheel picker allows you to select a color by Hue. Click and drag down on the size handle (a small circle) in the middle of the bottom edge of the palette to see more wells. See the Color Pickers section of this topic for additional information. 2008
. Note . Opacity Slider SketchUp supports adjustable (by material) transparency. and drop it over a User Pallet well to add a color to the User Palette. Saturation. and Brightness.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Screen Picker The Screen Picker. is used to adjust the opacity level. The Opacity slider.Ensure that the Shaded or Shaded with Textures display style is selected to see the colors that you have applied to entities. differ for each Color Picker. Note . To use the User Palette: • Drag and drop a color or texture swatch from any visible color well. is used to choose a color from any element currently visible on your Apple Macintosh screen.
Page 770
Copyright Google Inc.
• • •
Color Picker Types
SketchUp contains four color picker types used to select materials that do not have texture (just color).The colors and materials in the User Palette are saved in SketchUp and can be used between multiple modeling sessions. including the Active Color Well. Drag and drop a new swatch in the place of another color swatch to replace a swatch in the User Palette. Select the color you want by clicking your mouse over that color in the Color Wheel.Ensure that the Shaded or Shaded with Textures display style is selected to see the colors that you have applied to entities. and a materials picker (containing color/texture combinations that mimic realworld construction materials). below the Color Picker Controls. You will see a dynamic preview of the selected color in the Active Color Well at the top of the Color Picker.

RGB has a wide color gamut and is one of the most effective color spaces to use in SketchUp. CMYK is traditionally used to select colors intended for professional printing.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The Color Wheel arranges color hue radially around the wheel. Select the Color Slider picker from the pop-up menu at the top of the Picker control area to choose one of the Color Slider pickers. Gray Scale Slider: The Gray Scale slider allows you to select colors from the grayscale color range (shades of gray). with the highest saturation at the outer edge of the wheel. the background color of each slider will change as you modify values to help you predict how adjustments will change your color mix. Adjust the sliders for Hue. though it is also the least precise. 2008
. Color Slider Picker The Color Slider Picker contains four pickers: Gray Scale Slider.
Page 771
Copyright Google Inc. Adjust the slider until you see the color you want in the Active Color Well. green or blue in the value boxes to the right of the sliders to precisely match a color that you have specified elsewhere. To help you find an exact color. and HSB Sliders. to change the brightness of the color. RGB (Red. Switch to another color picker to make your rough color selection. then switch back to the HSB Color Picker to fine tune or mix desaturated colors. These color pickers differ only in the components they use to mix colors. Magenta. Green & Blue) Sliders: The RGB sliders allow you to select colors from the RGB (Red. The Color Wheel Color Picker is the simplest and most versatile of the standard Apple Color Pickers. Alternatively. Yellow and Black) color range. RGB colors are traditionally used when modeling color on a computer screen and represent the closest approximation of the actual range of colors recognizable by the human eye. Or. yellow and black) until you have the color you want to use. Yellow & Black) Sliders: The CMYK sliders allow you to select colors from the CMYK (Cyan. green and blue) to create the color that you want to use. up or down. you can type in exact numerical values for red. choose from one of the five preset gray values below the slider. RGB Sliders. Slide the value slider. You might want to use the Color Wheel picker to make a rough color choice. magenta. to the right of the wheel. RGB or HSB color pickers are generally sufficient for most work in SketchUp. Alternatively. Drag the sliders left and right for each of the component colors (red. CMYK (Cyan. HSB often gives you a more intuitive color model for selecting desaturated colors. CMYK Sliders. Magenta. where colors are usually specified in percentages of these four basic ink colors. HSB (Hue. Drag the sliders left and right for each of the component colors (cyan. Saturation & Brightness) Sliders: The HSB Color sliders allow you to pick colors from the HSB (Hue Saturation and Brightness) color range. Green and Blue) color range. Sometimes it is easier to mix de-saturated colors using the HSB Color Picker in conjunction with one of the other color pickers. Saturation and Brightness until you see the color you want in the Active Color Well. and then use one of the Color Slider pickers to fine tune your choice. you can select a color by typing a percent gray value directly in the text box to the right of the slider. The background color of each slider changes as you modify values to help you predict how adjustments will change your color mix.

modify and manage SketchUp-specific materials. The Color and List drop-down menu are below the Swatch Browser. Click on a swatch to load it in the Active Color Well for use in your model. 2008
. The Image Palettes Picker has a spectrum image loaded as a default. Use the Color menu to manage and create new materials and the List menu to manage and create new material lists.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Image Palettes The Image Palettes Picker allows you to load an image file into the Color Picker and select colors from anywhere in that image. to view all of the materials in your model. The contents of this library are generated automatically as you add materials to your SketchUp model. Drag and drop materials within the Swatch Browser to re-sort the materials. Double-click on a swatch to open the material for editing. You will be prompted to supply a name and dimensions for the material when you drag and drop an image file into the Swatch Browser. Texture Palette Picker The Texture Palette Picker is unique to SketchUp and is the picker that you use to create. The Crayon Picker is the simplest picker to use and is fairly limited in the range of colors available. Select the Colors In Model from the materials library drop-down menu. in which thumbnail images for all available materials from the currently selected materials List are displayed. Select the category of material you want to use to see several related materials. use the forward and backward arrows next to this pop-up to quickly step forward and backward through your previously selected material categories. within the Texture Palette Picker. Click on the crayon whose color you want to use to select a color with the Crayon Picker. These materials are grouped into categories. See the "Editing Materials" section for more information. Colors In Model The Texture Palettes Picker includes a special material library called Colors In Model containing all materials currently used in your model. Swatch Browser: The middle of the Texture Palettes Picker contains a Swatch Browser. Crayons Picker The Crayons Picker displays a graphic representation of a box of crayons with a small range of standard Apple colors. Or.
Texture Pallet Picker Options
SketchUp contains a library of predefined materials.
Page 772
Copyright Google Inc. See Material Libraries for additional information.
Drag and drop image files directly from the finder into the Swatch Browser. The crayon's color will be transferred to the Active Color Well. To use the Swatch Browser: • • • • • Drag your mouse over a swatch to see a tool tip with the texture's name. in the pop-up menu below the Active Color Well. or simply click on the icon shaped like a house.

. You will be prompted to provide a name for the duplicate library. type in the name for the new material followed by the dimension. This option is useful when your Colors In Model library becomes cluttered with materials that are no longer used in your model. but are not being used in the model. Duplicate. Remove: Click on Remove to remove a materials library.: Click on New. Note: SketchUp for OS X supports the alpha channel in image files that support transparency..Google SketchUp 7 Help
Color Menu The Color drop-down menu allows you to manipulate materials within the Colors In Model materials library. from within the Colors In Model library to remove any materials that appear in this library... remove. PICT. PSD. New. See Editing Materials below for further information. menu item to import an image file containing new material.: Click on the Duplicate. Remove: Click on the Remove menu item to remove the material from the Colors In Model materials library. Edit: Click on the Edit menu item to edit the material. SGI. You will be prompted to provide a name for the new library. duplicate. EPS. You will be prompted to provide a new name for the duplicate material. PNG. List Menu The List drop-down menu allows you to create. A flat color approximation of the removed image appears when the texture image is removed... cannot be removed. After you have selected the image file to import..: Click on New Texture.: Click on Duplicate.. in inches. 2008
.
Page 773
Copyright Google Inc.. menu item to duplicate a material within the Colors In Model materials library.
Edit Material Panel
The Edit Material panel allows you to modify the following material properties: Name: Enter a new name for a material to change the name of the material being edited.. to create a new materials library. to Duplicate the currently selected materials library. Supported Image file types include JPEG. SketchUp can place any image supported by Apple's QuickTime media layer as a texture. PSD and TIFF files. You will be prompted to click Remove or Cancel to commit this action. such as the Web Safe Colors library... Texture: This drop-down menu allows you to load a materials image file... and TIFF files. remove the texture portion of an image file that you are editing. New Texture. such as PNG. Purge Unused: Click on Purge Unused. Duplicate. You will be prompted to select the image file from a file system to import as a new texture. You will be prompted to replace the material with the default material if the material is currently used within your model.. PDF.. Certain standard Apple color libraries. and purge unused materials libraries. that comprise the size of the texture swatch that will be repeated when painted on your model. or reset any colorization applied to the material.

Note -If you have a texture image assigned to the material you are editing. To maintain the proportions of the material you are editing. Place a .SKM file in this directory to add a new materials library to SketchUp. 2008
.
•
Page 774
Copyright Google Inc. ensure that the chain icon to the right of the fields is unbroken. Click on the chain icon to toggle aspect locking on and off. Following are some details about materials files: • • .SKM file format.SKM files are stored in the directory ~/Library/Application Support/SketchUp.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Width/Size: Using the Width and Height text boxes.SKM files created on Mac OS X are identical to those created under Windows and can be shared transparently between platforms. . you can change the actual size of the texture material in your model. picking a color from any of the Color Pickers will colorize the texture image instead of replacing it with a flat color. . This is a great way to quickly and loosely experiment with variations in material color.SKM files are also created every time you use the Texture Palette Picker to create a new material library.
Using SketchUp Material Libraries
SketchUp stores materials in the cross-platform .

allowing you to use different pickers to create your colors. To use the Color Wheel. contains the current color selection. with the highest saturation at the outer edge of the wheel. HSB (Hue. HSB. You can activate the Choose Color dialog box by clicking on any color swatch in the SketchUp user interface (such as in the Colors section of the Model Info dialog box). HSB often gives you a more intuitive color model for selecting desaturated colors. To change the brightness of the color.
Page 775
Copyright Google Inc. used to select materials that do not have texture (just color).Google SketchUp 7 Help
Color Pickers (Microsoft Windows)
The Choose Color dialog box contains a variety of different color controls that combine to give you a versatile mechanism for experimenting with color in your SketchUp models.
Color Picker Types
SketchUp contains four color picker types. and Saturation) The HSB and HLS Color Pickers allow you to pick colors from the HSB (Hue Saturation and Brightness) color range. slide the value slider to the right of the wheel up or down. 2008
. Saturation & Brightness) and HLS (Hue. You can also click and drag the cursor around the Color Wheel to quickly browse through many different colors which will dynamically appear in the Active Color Well. HLS.
Active Color Well
The Active Color Well. which is below the Color Picker menu. Color Wheel The color wheel arranges color hue radially around the wheel. Click on the color picker that you want to use in the drop-down menu within the Choose Color dialog box. select the color you want by clicking your mouse over that color in the wheel. Note . Light.Ensure that the Shaded or Shaded with Textures display style is selected to see the colors that you have applied to entities.
Color Picker Menu
SketchUp allows you to choose between four color pickers: Color Wheel. and RGB. The contents of the Active Color Well are maintained as you switch between pickers.

You can type in exact numerical values for red.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Adjust the sliders for Hue. Sometimes it is easier to mix desaturated colors using the HSB or HLS Color Picker in conjunction with one of the other color pickers. RGB colors are traditionally used when modeling color on a computer screen and represent the closest approximation of the actual range of colors recognizable by the human eye. Green and Blue) color range.
Page 776
Copyright Google Inc. Green & Blue) The RGB Color Picker allows you to select colors from the RGB (Red. 2008
. green or blue in the value boxes to the right of the sliders if you want to precisely match a color that you have specified elsewhere. Switch to another color picker to make your rough color selection. Saturation and Brightness until you see the color you want in the Active Color Well. RGB (Red. green and blue) to create the color that you want to use. Drag the sliders left and right for each of the component colors (red. then switch back to the HSB or HLS Color Picker to fine tune your color. RGB has a wide color gamut and is one of the most effective color spaces to use in SketchUp.

dimensions. and lines. arcs. Entities are covered in alphabetical order. These entities include faces. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Entities
This section of the user's guide covers the various entities used to construct a model in SketchUp.
Page 777
Copyright Google Inc.

2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Group Entities
Groups are entities that can hold other entities. Use the Make Group menu item from the Edit menu to create a group from the currently selected entities. Groups are commonly used to combine several entities as a single entity for the purposes of performing a quick operation with the combination (such as a copy).
Page 778
Copyright Google Inc.

While inserting an image. 2008
. you can hold down the Shift key to de-constrain the proportions.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Image Proportions
By default.
Page 780
Copyright Google Inc. You can also use the Scale Tool to alter the image object's proportions after it is placed. Image Objects retain the proportions of the file from which they are derived.

Cylindrical surface. Polyface surfaces do not have special editable properties.
The following image contains the three types of surfaces. an arc surface. 2008
. A polyface surface is generated when a face with a Polyline Curve entity has one or more of its edges extruded (usually with the Push/Pull Tool). An arc surface is generated when a face with an Arc entity has one or more of its edges extruded (usually with the Push/Pull Tool). Polyface surface.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Surface Entities
Surface entities are a number of faces joined together to give the impression of roundness (using soft edges). but is generated when a circular face is extruded to form a cylinder. though the Entity Info dialog box will recognize each as just a Surface entity: • • • Arc surface. cylindrical surface. Although the individual planar faces that make up a curved face set are still separate entities. from left to right. and polyface surface. There are three types of surfaces. but respond to tool operations as a single entity. A cylindrical surface is similar to an arc surface. You can also create one manually by softening edges with the Erase Tool or using the Soften/Smooth Control. they can act like a single group when selected or painted.
Page 781
Copyright Google Inc.

2008
.
The items in this section are divided into the following categories: • • Importers and Exporters Presentations
• Printing The majority of the items in this section are found in the File menu. into your SketchUp file and outputting or presenting your model once it is finished.
Page 782
Copyright Google Inc. such as graphic images.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Input and Output
This section of the user's guide covers the various mechanisms for inputting items.

= Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 783
Copyright Google Inc. texture mapping. and camera position. Because 3DS preserves material assignments. it can often allow ideas generated in SketchUp to be transferred with greater fidelity than formats designed for CAD. Although obsolete in many ways.Google SketchUp 7 Help
3D Model (3DS) Export
The 3DS format is native to the original DOS-based 3D Studio modeling and animation application. the 3DS format is still widely used and offers a direct way to export simpler SketchUp models into a wide range of 3D modeling packages. 2008
.

complex projects or file libraries. Any layers you assign in SketchUp will be lost.
Page 784
Copyright Google Inc. Therefore. Additionally.jpg”." 02. SketchUp create unique names for each texture by adding unique suffixes to file names. are added.0 and 6. 2008
. 3DS is not capable of storing texture filenames that exceed the 8.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Known Issues and Limitations
2 Sided Faces
Faces are only visible from the front in some programs while both sides of a face are always visible in SketchUp. For example. The eye point will be moved as far away as is possible to yield the same width and height of the projection plane. which means that faces are output even if SketchUp is in wireframe mode. which might allow you to easily select and organize geometry in your model based on SketchUp layers once your model is imported into another application.3 DOS character limit. a file named “corrugated metal.
Multiple Cameras
3DS format can not store an orthographic camera. This issue can be a limitation to anyone who uses modern OS filename capabilities to manage large. Maya version 6." and so on. you can use the Export two-sided checkbox to correct this issue.5. however. you can export with the “Color by Layer materials" option enabled. if they are hidden or if they reside on a layer that is hidden.
Texture Map Names
The 3DS format was designed in an era when DOS-based systems were prevalent.
Visibility
Only entities that are currently visible in SketchUp are output to the 3DS file. Some importers might compute the normals incorrectly resulting in the appearance of flipped textures. Alternately. You an manually reorient your faces in SketchUp using the Reverse command or the Orient Faces command to make face directions uniform for a given set of connected geometry.
Flipped Textures
Textures and materials exported with the two-sided/geometry checkbox can appear flipped in certain applications (such as. Faces are not output. A 3DS mesh does not store any normal data so normals must be computed by the target system. The DWG format might be a better solution if you need layers to export.jpg” will be described in the 3DS file as “corrugat. For example. This format will be simulated through a perspective camera with a very small field of view or a very large lens length.
Layers
The 3DS format does not support layers. Any other files that use the same first six letters is truncated and the suffix "01.5). These two-sided faces can appear to be missing in other applications if not facing the correct direction. Maya does not read the field of view at all and only lets it become as small as 2. Rendering display options are not taken into account. Certain applications might have problems with a small field of view.

If you change the export units to centimeters. a 1 meter cube in SketchUp will export to 3DS with sides of length 1 when units are set to meters. resulting in considerable trial and error. Worse. This information allows an application that reads 3DS to automatically adjust the size of 3DS models to the correct "real world" size. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 785
Copyright Google Inc. the best work-around is simply to export files at the units setting expected by the 3DS importing application. it is not always clear in which unit 3DS files are saved. instead of at the same size. many applications ignore this extra unit scale information meaning that the centimeter cube imports as 100 times larger than the 1 meter cube. The 3DS format contains extra information that indicates the original units using a scale factor. For example. In these cases. 2008
. Unfortunately. This setting can affect the way geometry is described within the 3DS file. the same cube will export to 3DS with a length of 100.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Units
SketchUp exports 3DS files at the units specified in the 3DS export options dialog box.

if this limit is exceeded. that name will be used. All faces that are connected and have the same material will be grouped together in separate meshes.
Geometry
The Geometry section of the 3DS Export Options dialog box contains options for determining how geometry will be represented in a 3DS file.536 vertices and faces. These meshes will then be organized based on the layer to which they belong. This option allows you (using a tree view in AutoDesk 3DS Max. meshes for non-grouped entities based on the connection of faces. All faces that are connected and are on the same layer will be grouped together in separate meshes. The entire SketchUp model is exported when there is no selection. This option allows you (using a tree view in AutoDesk 3DS Max. These meshes will then be organized based on their materials. This option preserves the name of the component or group using the following rule for components: if an instance name exists. Additionally. for example) to select all objects with the same material using the organization scheme and then to drill down and select individual meshes having that material. Export (Single Object) The Export (Single object) item is used to export your SketchUp model as a single 3DS mesh. Export Only Current Selection The Export only current selection checkbox is used to export the currently selected geometry. This option allows you (using a tree view in AutoDesk 3DS Max. for example) to select individual components and groups with all their children and each connected face set as separate meshes.Google SketchUp 7 Help
3DS Export Options Dialog Box
The 3DS Export Options dialog box contains options for exporting 3DS files.
Page 786
Copyright Google Inc. Export (By layer) The Export (By layer) option is used to create separate meshes based on a combination of how faces are connected and what layer (from SketchUp) they are on. more than one mesh will be created with emphasis on keeping the number of meshes to the minimum amount necessary. No hierarchy will be created with this option. the definition name will be used. This single mesh will be simple to select and manipulate once imported into another application. Export (Full hierarchy) The Export (Full hierarchy) option is used to create meshes for each top level nested component and group and. Because there is a limitation in the 3DS format that meshes can only have 65. 2008
. if an instance name does not exist. These meshes will be organized based on where they fit in the component and group hierarchy. for example) to select all objects on a layer using the organization scheme and then to drill down and select individual meshes within that layer. the entire model is exported when this checkbox is not checked. Export (By material) The Export (By material) option is used to create separate meshes based on a combination of how faces are connected and what material they have. No hierarchy will be created with this option. additionally.

when two faces share the same vertex but have different UV mappings. Both faces will always render. Use “Color by Layer” Materials The 3DS file format does not support layers directly.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Export Two-Sided Faces The Export two-sided faces checkbox is used to export faces twice. The Use "Color by Layer" Materials checkbox is used to assign 3DS materials based on your model's layer assignments in SketchUp. and materials applied to front and back faces are preserved. Given this limitation of the 3DS format. The VRML format may better suit your needs if you need to export standalone edges. When this option is selected. Check this checkbox to export materials based on layers. and UV mappings are different. the exporter breaks up geometry so that each coplanar group of polygons has its own set of vertices. such as when exporting to other rendering applications. If UV mappings are identical. The Export standalone edges check box creates very thin rectangles that appear as standalone lines in the 3DS files.Use this option if the preservation of textures is of most importance.
Page 787
Copyright Google Inc. this option can result in invalid texture coordinates requiring UV mapping to be re-applied before the scene is rendered. the exporter will weld together vertices which will keep your geometry intact and allow smoothing to be preserved. Export Standalone Edges Standalone Line entities (lines not connected to any faces) are somewhat unique to SketchUp and not supported by many other 3D programs or the 3DS format. a tradeoff between preserving texture coordinates and welding geometry is sometimes necessary and reflected in the following two sub-options: Favor Preserving texture coordinates and Favor Welding Vertices. vertices will be welded. vertices will not be welded together and no smoothing of faces will be evident. Note . In this case. However. However. Favor (Welding Vertices) When the Welding Vertices option is selected. 2008
. this option will only allow one of the texture mappings to be preserved. this option ensures that your model will appear more like it appears in SketchUp. Favor (Preserving Texture Coordinates) When the Preserving texture coordinates option is selected. SketchUp will weld the vertices of the front faces together and the vertices of the back faces together according to the logic for texture mapping and welding outlined in the following Export texture maps option. Note . Also. certain exported standalone edge geometries can create invalid 3DS files altogether. Unfortunately. once for the front and once for the back. The 3DS format allows only one UV mapping coordinate per vertex.Use this option if the preservation of smoothing and welding is of most importance. This option doubles the number of polygons in the resulting 3DS file and can slow down rendering. meaning you can not have a different UV mapping on two faces that share the same vertex.
Materials
Export Texture Maps The Export texture maps checkbox is used to assign texture maps to 3DS materials whenever the corresponding SketchUp material uses a texture image.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Cameras
Generate Cameras From Scenes The Generate Cameras from Scenes checkbox is used to create a camera for the default view as well as any SketchUp Scenes which have been defined. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 788
Copyright Google Inc. The current SketchUp view is exported with the name “Default Camera.
Scale
Units The units drop-down list is used to determine the unit size in the 3DS output. 2008
." and other Scene camera definitions are output using their Scene Name.

SketchUp uses the current units set in the Units Panel of the Model Info dialog box as a reference for translation to a DWG or DXF file. duplicate line entities will not be created on top of a p-line entity. This conversion helps to simulate the appearance of your native SketchUp file. SketchUp will export the DWG file accordingly. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
•
•
Page 790
Copyright Google Inc. The following details apply to this export: • Faces in SketchUp are exported as a triangulated polyface mesh with interior splframe hidden lines (if applicable). even when all exported faces are triangular. When exporting.Google SketchUp 7 Help
3D DWG/DXF Export Details
The 3D DWG and DXF export is used to export SketchUp files for use in other CAD programs such as AutoCAD. AutoCAD must be set to decimal for the units to translate correctly as meters. For example. 2008
. if the current unit setting is Decimal and Meters.

Export two-sided faces The Export two-sided faces checkbox is used to export faces twice. Triangulate all faces The Triangulate all faces checkbox is used to break the output into triangles instead of multisided faces.
Page 795
Copyright Google Inc. However.
Scale
The Scale section of the DAE Export Options Dialog box is used to identify the scale used in the DAE output.
Materials
The Materials section of the DAE Export Options Dialog box is used to identify how materials will be exported. Export only current selection The Export only current selection only checkbox is used to export the currently selected geometry. Export texture maps Check the Export texture maps checkbox to export textures with your DAE file. the entire model is exported when this checkbox is not checked. this option ensures that your model will appear more like it appears in SketchUp. Additionally. 2008
. This option doubles the number of polygons in the resulting DAE file and can slow down rendering. Generate cameras from scenes: Check the Generate cameras from scenes checkbox to create a camera object in the DAE file for each default camera position from each scene in your SketchUp file. and materials applied to front and back faces are preserved. Both faces will always render.
Geometry
The Geometry section of the DAE Export Options Dialog box is used to identify the geometry that will be exported. The entire SketchUp model is exported when there is no selection.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The DAE Export Options Dialog Box
The DAE Export Options dialog box contains options for exporting DAE Files.
Cameras
The Cameras section of the DAE Export Options Dialog box is used to identify how cameras will be exported. once for the front and once for the back. Units: The Units drop-down list is used to determine the unit size in the DAE output.

the entire model is exported when this checkbox is not checked. Triangulate all faces The Triangulate all faces checkbox is used to break the output into triangles instead of multisided faces. once for the front and once for the back. this option ensures that your model will appear more like it appears in SketchUp. Export only current selection The Export only current selection only checkbox is used to export the currently selected geometry. The entire SketchUp model is exported when there is no selection. 2008
. This orientation is the default orientation for some applications.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The FBX Export Options Dialog Box
The XSI Export Options dialog box contains options for exporting XSI Files. Export texture maps Check the Export texture maps checkbox to export textures with your FBX file. Both faces will always render.
Materials
The Materials section of the FBX Export Options Dialog box is used to identify how materials will be exported.
Geometry
The Geometry section of the FBX Export Options Dialog box is used to identify the geometry that will be exported. However. and materials applied to front and back faces are preserved. Export two-sided faces The Export two-sided faces checkbox is used to export faces twice. such as Maya. Swap YX coordinates (Y is up) The Swap YZ coordinates check box is used to output the model with the vertical direction as Y. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 797
Copyright Google Inc. Units The units drop-down list is used to determine the unit size in the FBX output. Do not check this box if you want your model to be output with the Z axis in the vertical direction. This option doubles the number of polygons in the resulting XSI file and can slow down rendering. Additionally.
Scale
The Scale section of the FBX Export Options Dialog box is used to identify the scale used in the F BX output.

mtl file describes materials defined in the .obj file. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 798
Copyright Google Inc. An additional .Google SketchUp 7 Help
3D Model (OBJ) Export
The OBJ file format is a 3D file format created by Wavefront for use in their Advanced Visualizer™ product. These files text-based and support free-form and polygonal geometry. 2008
.

Flat set hierarchy
The OBJ output supports a flat set membership hierarchy meaning that the format identifies which objects belong to any set. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 799
Copyright Google Inc.
Maya and PNG or JPG files (Mac OS X)
PNG and JPG images included in an OBJ do not always appear in Maya. Use the Triangulate faces option to create additional polygons for importers that seem to have problems with the OBJ file exported from SketchUp. 2008
. Additionally. SketchUp outputs polygon faces only. SketchUp will replace any space with an underscore (_) when the file is saved. This issue appears to occur due to a Maya bug on the Macintosh platform. you can import the OBJ file into an application that does not have problems with the SketchUp faces-to-polygons ratio and then export that file as another file type to be used in the less-qualified application. This ratio of faces to polygons can create some problems for some OBJ importers (polygons might appear missing or reversed).
Triangulation errors
SketchUp will export one face entity as one polygon in an OBJ file.Google SketchUp 7 Help
OBJ Export Known Issues and Limitations
OBJ file names
OBJ files do not support spaces in their filenames.
NURBS
SketchUp does not output nurbs or any of the advanced OBJ entities. This limitation is a limitation of the OBJ format. This output does not support a tree hierarchy because it cannot identify if one particular set is actually a component of another set.

Export two-sided faces The Export two-sided faces checkbox is used to export faces twice. Export edges The Export edges checkbox is used to write SketchUp line entities as OBJ line entities. Both faces will always render.Google SketchUp 7 Help
OBJ Export Options Dialog Box
The OBJ Export Options dialog box contains options for exporting OBJ files. and materials applied to front and back faces are preserved.
Geometry
Export only current selection The Export only current selection checkbox is used to export the currently selected geometry. the entire model is exported when this checkbox is not checked. this option ensures that your model will appear more like it appears in SketchUp.
Materials
Swap YZ coordinates (Y is up) The Swap YZ coordinates check box is used to output the model with the vertical direction as Y. The entire SketchUp model is exported when there is no selection. Triangulate all faces The Triangulate all faces checkbox is used to break the output into triangles instead of multisided faces. such as Maya. such as when using 3D Studio Max. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 800
Copyright Google Inc. Edges are ignored when this checkbox is not checked. 2008
. Additionally. Do not check this box if you want your model to be output with the Z axis in the vertical direction. This option doubles the number of polygons in the resulting OBJ file and can slow down rendering. Units The units drop-down list is used to determine the unit size in the OBJ output. This orientation is the default orientation for some applications. However. once for the front and once for the back. The Model Units setting is used to select the units that are being used in SketchUp. Usually this checkbox is not checked because most applications will ignore edges on import.

and materials applied to front and back faces are preserved. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 802
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. Additionally. Export only current selection The Export only current selection only checkbox is used to export the currently selected geometry.
Geometry
The Geometry section of the FBX Export Options Dialog box is used to identify the geometry that will be exported. the entire model is exported when this checkbox is not checked. Swap YX coordinates (Y is up) The Swap YZ coordinates check box is used to output the model with the vertical direction as Y. Export two-sided faces The Export two-sided faces checkbox is used to export faces twice. This option doubles the number of polygons in the resulting XSI file and can slow down rendering. This orientation is the default orientation for some applications.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The XSI Export Options Dialog Box
The XSI Export Options dialog box contains options for exporting XSI files.
Scale
The Scale section XSI Export Options Dialog box is used to identify the scale used in the XSI output.
Materials
The Materials section of the XSI Export Options Dialog box is used to identify how materials will be exported. Units The Units drop-down list is used to determine the unit size in the OBJ output. The entire SketchUp model is exported when there is no selection. this option ensures that your model will appear more like it appears in SketchUp. Both faces will always render. such as Maya. However. Export texture maps Check the Export texture maps checkbox to export textures with your XSI file. Do not check this box if you want your model to be output with the Z axis in the vertical direction. Triangulate all faces The Triangulate all faces checkbox is used to break the output into triangles instead of multisided faces. once for the front and once for the back.

Text and Dimension entities that are partially clipped by the edges of the SketchUp Drawing Area are not exported.
Text and Dimensions
SketchUp will attempt to output text annotation and notes to your 2D drawing. shadows. Caution . smooth shading. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 804
Copyright Google Inc. Please note the following limitations: • • • Text and Dimension entities that are obscured (partially or totally) by other geometry in the SketchUp drawing area export on top of the geometry. including textures. cannot be exported to PDF and EPS.Some graphic features of SketchUp. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
2D PDF/EPS Export Details
The PDF and EPS export is used to export vector SketchUp files for use in other vector based editing programs like Adobe Illustrator. Certain fonts may not export exactly. and transparency. backgrounds.

Drawing Size
The Drawing Size section of the PDF/EPS Hidden Options Dialog box contains size and scaling options for your model. Full Scale (1:1) Full Scale (1:1) option is used to set your output to a 1:1 (real world) scale. Width/Height The width and height fields are used to enter a custom page size for your file. In Hidden-Line Output/In SketchUp In Hidden-Line Output/In SketchUp fields are used to scale your model for export. The first measurement, labeled In Hidden-Line Output, is the measurement of the exported geometry. The second measurement, labeled In SketchUp, is the actual measurement of the object in real scale. For example, for a scale of 1/4" = 1', simply enter 1 inch In SketchUp equals 4 feet In Hidden Line Output. Note - It is not possible to print a perspective image to scale. Ensure perspective is disabled and you are using one of the Standard Views in the Camera > Standard submenu, to enable this scale option.

Profile Lines
The Profile Lines section of the PDF/EPS Hidden Options Dialog box contains options for exporting profile lines. Show Profiles The Show profiles option exports any lines that are displayed in profile as thicker lines in the 2D vector file. All lines are output normally, without profile thickness, when this option is disabled (regardless of the screen display). Match Screen Display (Auto Width) The Match screen display (auto width) automatically sets the width of profile lines by matching the output to the proportions you see in the SketchUp drawing area. This option is only available when Show profiles is checked. Width The Width fields are used to specify an exact width for the profile lines. This option is only available when Show Profiles is checked and Match Screen Display (Auto Width) is unchecked.

Page 805

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Section Lines
The Section Lines section of the DWG/DXF Hidden Options Dialog box contains options for exporting section lines. Specify Section Line Width The Specify section line width option is used to adjust settings for Section Slice lines that are output. Match Screen Display (Auto Width) The Match screen display (auto width) automatically sets the width of section lines by matching the output to the proportions you see in the SketchUp drawing area. This option is only available when Specify section line width is checked. Width The Width fields are used to specify an exact width for the section lines. This option is only available when Specify Section Line Width is checked and Match screen display (auto width) is unchecked.

Extension Lines
The Extension Lines section of the PDF/EPS Hidden Options Dialog box contains options for exporting extension lines. Extend Edges Some CAD applications might have problems recognizing endpoints and intersections of lines with SketchUp extension lines. The Extend edges option is used to toggle the export of line extensions. Match Screen Display (Auto Width) The Match screen display (auto width) automatically sets the width of extension lines by matching the output to the proportions you see in the SketchUp drawing area. This option is only available when Extend edges is checked. Width The Width fields are used to specify an exact width for the extension lines. This option is only available when Extend Edges is checked and Match screen display (auto width) is unchecked. Always Prompt for Hidden Line Options The Always prompt for hidden line options is used to automatically display the Hidden Line Options dialog box when you export a 2D PDF or EPS file. Map Windows fonts to PDF base fonts This option is used to select PDF fonts that correspond to the Windows fonts used in the model. Defaults The Defaults button is used to return the items in the Hidden Line Options dialog box to the default settings. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7

Image Size
The Image Size section of the PDF/EPS Hidden Options Dialog box contains size options for your model. Match View Size Match View Size option is used to set your output to a 1:1 (real world) scale. Width/Height The width and height fields are used to enter a custom page size for your file.

Image Scale
The Image Scale section of the PDF/EPS Hidden Options Dialog box contains scaling options for your model. In Image/In Model In Image/In Model fields are used to scale your model for export. The first measurement, labeled In Model, is the measurement of the exported geometry. The second measurement, labeled In Model, is the actual measurement of the object in real scale. For example, for a scale of 1/4" = 1', simply enter 1 inch In Model equals 4 feet In Image. Note - It is not possible to print a perspective image to scale. Ensure perspective is disabled and you are using one of the Standard Views in the Camera > Standard submenu, to enable this scale option.

Line Quality
The Line Quality section contains a setting for exported line weights. Line Weight This option is used to apply a weight to all profile lines, or lines that have space behind them as they are displayed. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7

Page 807

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

3D Model (VRML) Export
VRML 2.0 (Virtual Reality Modeling Language) is a 3D scene/object description format often used to exchange data between 3D applications and to publish 3D information to the web. VRML files can store SketchUp geometry in the form of edges, faces, groups, materials and textures, transparency, camera views, and lights. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7

Page 808

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

The VRML Export Options Dialog Box (Microsoft Windows)
The VRML Export Options dialog box contains options for exporting VRML files. Appearance The Appearance section of the VRML Export Options dialog box contains options to configure the appearance of the exported VRML file. Output Texture Maps: If enabled, SketchUp will export texture information to the VRML file. When disabled, it will export colors only. When publishing VRML files to the web, you may want to edit the files so that textures read from the relative location rather than from your local hard drive. Also, VRML texture and material names cannot have blanks, so SketchUp will use the underscore character instead. Ignore Back of Face Materials: The Ignore Back of Face Materials checkbox is used to export both front and back faces with the front material. SketchUp exports VRML files with double faces so that files will be viewable from any viewpoint. Output Edges: The Output Edges check box exports displayed edges as VRML edge entities. Use “Color by Layer” Materials: The VRML file format does not support layers directly. The Use "Color by Layer" Materials checkbox is used to assign VRML materials based on your model's layer assignments in SketchUp. Check this checkbox to export materials based on layers, such as when exporting to other rendering applications. Use VRML Standard Orientation: The Use VRML Standard Orientation checkbox is used to export a file that conforms to the VRML standard. The VRML standard considers the XZ plane to be horizontal the ground plane) whereas SketchUp considers the XY plane to be the ground plane. Generate Cameras: The Generate Cameras checkbox is used to create a camera for the default view as well as any SketchUp Scenes which have been defined. The current SketchUp view is exported with the name “Default Camera”, and other Scene camera definitions are output using their Scene Name. Allow Mirrored Components: The Allow Mirrored Components check box is used to export components that have been mirrored or resized so they are an opposite of the original component. Check for Material Overrides: The Check for Material Overrides check box is used to determine if any of the faces, edges, or components within this component contain references to the default material or default layer. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7

Geometry
The Geometry section of the VRML Export Options dialog box contains options to configure the appearance of the exported VRML file. Use VRML Standard Orientation The Use VRML Standard Orientation checkbox is used to export a file that conforms to the VRML standard. The VRML standard considers the XZ plane to be horizontal the ground plane) whereas SketchUp considers the XY plane to be the ground plane. Allow Mirrored Components The Allow Mirrored Components check box is used to export components that have been mirrored or resized so they are an opposite of the original component. Output Edges The Output Edges check box exports displayed edges as VRML edge entities.

Materials
The Materials section of the VRML Export Options dialog box contains options to configure the appearance of the exported VRML file. Ignore Back of Face Materials The Ignore Back of Face Materials checkbox is used to export both front and back faces with the front material. SketchUp exports VRML files with double faces so that files will be viewable from any viewpoint. Check for Material Overrides The Check for Material Overrides check box is used to determine if any of the faces, edges, or components within this component contain references to the default material or default layer. Output Texture Maps If enabled, SketchUp will export texture information to the VRML file. When disabled, it will export colors only. When publishing VRML files to the web, you may want to edit the files so that textures read from the relative location rather than from your local hard drive. Also, VRML texture and material names cannot have blanks, so SketchUp will use the underscore character instead. Use “Color by Layer” Materials The VRML file format does not support layers directly. The Use "Color by Layer" Materials checkbox is used to assign VRML materials based on your model's layer assignments in SketchUp. Check this checkbox to export materials based on layers, such as when exporting to other rendering applications.

Page 810

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Cameras
The Caeras section of the VRML Export Options dialog box contains an option to generate cameras for the exported VRML file. Generate Cameras from Scenes The Generate Cameras from Scenes checkbox is used to create a camera for the default view as well as any SketchUp Scenes which have been defined. The current SketchUp view is exported with the name “Default Camera”, and other Scene camera definitions are output using their Scene Name. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7

Page 811

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

2D Graphic (Epix) Export
Piranesi is a painting application that enables you to create stunning renderings from your SketchUp models. For more information, please visit the Piranesi Web Site: www.informatix.co.uk/piranesi.htm SketchUp allows you to export your models as Epix files for use in Piranesi. Export an Epix file using the Export > 2D Graphic menu item in the File menu. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7

Image Size
The Image Size section of the Export Options dialog box contains size and scaling options for your model. Use View Size The Use View Size option is used to set your output to the exact dimensions of your SketchUp drawing area. Width/Height The width and height fields are used to enter a custom page size for your file. Tip - SketchUp cannot export Epix files with compression enabled. Resaving your file in Piranesi can reduce file size considerably.

Resolution (Mac OS X)
The Resolution drop-down list is used to select the resolution for the exported image. For viewing images on the screen, 72-96 pixels/inch is adequate. For printing, you might want to increase the resolution to 150-300 pixels/inch. Remember, high resolution images take longer to generate.

EPIX
The EPIX section of the Export Options dialog box contains options for the contents of the exported file. Export Edges The Export Edges check box is used to maintain the edge rendering style from the drawing area when saving your drawings as an Epix file. Note - Edges will not appear in your Epix file if edges are disabled in your style. Export Textures The Export Textures check box is used to maintain textures from the drawing area when saving your drawings as an Epix file. Note - The Export Textures option is only applicable when materials have been assigned to faces and SketchUp is in the Shaded with Textures display setting. Export Ground Plane The Export Ground Plane check box is used to create a ground plane in the Epix file without explicitly modeling a ground in SketchUp. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7

Page 813

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

2D Graphic Export (Microsoft Windows)
SketchUp allows you to export 2D raster image files in JPEG, BMP, TIFF, and PNG raster file formats. Export a file using the Export > 2D Graphic menu item in the File menu. Note - Shadows cannot be saved with a 3D model. None of the 2D vector output formats support rendering features such as shadows, textures, or transparency. The only export formats that will represent shadows as seen on your display are pixel-based raster images and animations.

Page 814

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

2D Graphic Export (Mac OS X)
SketchUp allows you to export 2D raster image files in JPEG, TIFF, PNG, and Epix formats. Export a file using the Export > 2D Graphic menu item in the File menu. Note - Shadows cannot be saved with a 3D model. None of the 2D vector output formats support rendering features such as shadows, textures, or transparency. The only export formats that will represent shadows as seen on your display are pixel-based raster images and animations.

Image Size
Use View Size The Use view size is used to set your output to a 1:1 (real world) scale. Width/Height The Width and Height fields are used to control the size of image as measured in pixels or specific units. Click on the chain icon to the right of the text fields to lock the aspect ratio of the export (Mac OS X).

Resolution (Mac OS X)
The Resolution drop-down list is used to select the resolution for the exported image. For viewing images on the screen, 72-96 pixels/inch is adequate. For printing, you might want to increase the resolution to 150-300 pixels/inch. Remember, high resolution images take longer to generate.

Rendering
Anti-Alias When enabled, SketchUp will smooth the exported image. This method can take longer, but it helps to reduce jagged lines and pixilated artifacts in images.

JPEG Compression
The slider bar for a JPEG export is used to define the level of JPEG compression quality. The level of quality becomes lesser and the file size is smaller as the slider is moved to the left. Conversely, the level of quality becomes higher and the file size is larger if the slider is moved to the right.

Page 816

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

2D Graphic (DWG/DXF) Export
SketchUp allows you to export your models as 2D vector drawings, including DWG and DXF. Export a file using the Export > 2D Graphic menu item in the File menu. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7

Drawing Scale & Size
The Drawing Scale & Size section of the DWG/DXF Hidden Options Dialog box contains scaling options for your model. Full Scale (1:1) The Full Scale (1:1) option is used to set your output to a 1:1 (real world) scale. In Drawing/In Model The In Drawing/In Model fields are used to scale your model for export. The first measurement, labeled In the Model, is the measurement of the exported geometry. The second measurement, labeled In Drawing, is the actual measurement of the object in real scale. For example, for a scale of 1/4" = 1', simply enter 1 inch In Model equals 4 feet In Drawing. Note - It is not possible to print a perspective image to scale. Ensure perspective is disabled and you are using one of the Standard Views in the Camera > Standard submenu, to enable this scale option. Width/Height The width and height fields are used to enter a custom page size for your file.

AutoCAD Version
The AutoCAD section of the AutoCAD DWG/DXF Export Options dialog box is used to select the version of exported DWG/DXF file.

Profile Lines
The Profile Lines section of the DWG/DXF Hidden Option Dialog box contains options for exporting profile lines. None The None option is used to export profile lines at standard width. Polylines with width The Polylines with width option is used to export profile lines as AutoCAD polyline entities. Wide line entities The Wide line entities option is used to export profile lines as AutoCAD wide line entities. This option is only available when saving AutoCAD 2000 or later DWG files.

Page 818

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Separate on a layer The Separate on a layer option is used to output profile lines onto their own layer. This option is useful if you would like to plot profile lines using a different pen weight or quickly change the line width of all profile lines in a separate CAD or Illustration program. Note - The Separate on a layer option creates a single additional layer for profile edges. SketchUp Layer assignments do not translate directly when exporting 2D hidden line vectors. Width The Width field is used to specify an exact width for the Polylines with width option. This option is only available when Polylines with width is checked and Automatic is unchecked. Automatic The Automatic option is used to set the width of profile lines by matching the output to the proportions you see in the SketchUp drawing area. This option is only available when Polylines with width is checked.

Section Lines
The Section Lines section of the DWG/DXF Hidden OptionsDialog box contains options for exporting section lines. None The None option is used to export section slice lines at standard width. Polylines with width The Polylines with option is used to export section slice lines as AutoCAD polyline entities. Wide line entities The Wide line entities option is used to export section slice lines as AutoCAD wide line entities. This option is only available when saving AutoCAD 2000 or later DWG files. Separate on a layer The Separate on a layer option is used to output section slice lines onto their own layer. This option is useful if you would like to plot section slice lines using a different pen weight or quickly change the line width of all section slice lines in a separate CAD or Illustration program. Note - The Separate on a layer option creates a single additional layer for section slice edges. SketchUp Layer assignments do not translate directly when exporting 2D hidden line vectors. Width The Width field is used to specify an exact width for the Polylines with width option. This option is only available when Polylines with width is checked and Automatic is unchecked. Automatic The Automatic option is used to set the width of section slice lines by matching the output to the proportions you see in the SketchUp drawing area. This option is only available when Polylines with width is checked.

Page 819

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Google SketchUp 7 Help

Extension Lines
The Extension Lines section of the DWG/DXF Hidden Options Dialog box contains options for exporting extension lines. Show extensions Some CAD applications might have problems recognizing endpoints and intersections of lines with SketchUp extensions. The show extensions option is used to toggle the export of line extensions. Length The Length field is used to specify an exact length for line extensions. This option is only available when Show extensions is checked and Automatic is unchecked. Automatic The Automatic option is used to set the length of extension lines by matching the output to the proportions you see in the SketchUp drawing area. This option is only available when Show extensions is checked. Always Prompt for Hidden Line Options The Always Prompt for Hidden Line Options is used to automatically display the Hidden Line Options dialog box when you export a 2D DWG or DXF file. Defaults The Defaults button is used to return the items in the Hidden Line Options dialog box to the default settings. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7

Drawing Scale & Size
The Drawing Scale & Size section of the DWG/DXF Hidden Options Dialog box contains scaling options for your model. Full Scale (1:1) The Full Scale (1:1) option is used to set your output to a 1:1 (real world) scale. In Drawing/In Model The In Drawing/In Model fields are used to scale your model for export. The first measurement, labeled In the Model, is the measurement of the exported geometry. The second measurement, labeled In Drawing, is the actual measurement of the object in real scale. For example, for a scale of 1/4" = 1', simply enter 1 inch In Model equals 4 feet In Drawing. Note - It is not possible to print a perspective image to scale. Ensure perspective is disabled and you are using one of the Standard Views in the Camera > Standard submenu, to enable this scale option. Width/Height The width and height fields are used to enter a custom page size for your file.

Profile Lines
The Profile Lines section of the DWG/DXF Hidden OptionsDialog box contains options for exporting profile lines. None The None option is used to export profile lines at standard width. Polylines with width The Polylines with width option is used to export profile lines as AutoCAD polyline entities. Wide line entities The Wide line entities option is used to export profile lines as AutoCAD wide line entities. This option is only available when saving AutoCAD 2000 or later DWG files. Separate on a layer The Separate on a layer option is used to output profile lines onto their own layer. This option is useful if you would like to plot profile lines using a different pen weight or quickly change the line width of all profile lines in a separate CAD or Illustration program. Note - The Separate on a layer option creates a single additional layer for profile edges. SketchUp Layer assignments do not translate directly when exporting 2D hidden line vectors.

Page 821

Copyright Google Inc. 2008

Separate on a layer The Separate on a layer option is used to output section slice lines onto their own layer. Show extensions Some CAD applications might have problems recognizing endpoints and intersections of lines with SketchUp extensions. This option is only available when Polylines with width is checked. This option is only available when saving AutoCAD 2000 or later DWG files. SketchUp Layer assignments do not translate directly when exporting 2D hidden line vectors. This option is only available when Polylines with width is checked and Automatic is unchecked. Width The Width field is used to specify an exact width for the Polylines with width option. Wide line entities The Wide line entities option is used to export section slice lines as AutoCAD wide line entities. Polylines with width The Polylines with option is used to export section slice lines as AutoCAD polyline entities. Note . This option is only available when Show extensions is checked and Automatic is unchecked. Length The Length field is used to specify an exact length for line extensions.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Width The Width field is used to specify an exact width for the Polylines with width option. This option is only available when Polylines with width is checked and Automatic is unchecked. This option is useful if you would like to plot section slice lines using a different pen weight or quickly change the line width of all section slice lines in a separate CAD or Illustration program. This option is only available when Polylines with width is checked.
Edge Extensions
The Edge Extensions section of the Export Options Dialog box contains options for exporting extension lines.The Separate on a layer option creates a single additional layer for section slice edges. The show extensions option is used to toggle the export of line extensions. 2008
.
Section Lines
The Section Lines section of the Export Options Dialog box contains options for exporting section lines. None The None option is used to export section slice lines at standard width.
Page 822
Copyright Google Inc. Automatic The Automatic option is used to set the width of section slice lines by matching the output to the proportions you see in the SketchUp drawing area. Automatic The Automatic option is used to set the width of profile lines by matching the output to the proportions you see in the SketchUp drawing area.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Automatic The Automatic option is used to set the length of extension lines by matching the output to the proportions you see in the SketchUp drawing area. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 823
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. This option is only available when Show extensions is checked.

for placement within your model. Import a file using the Import menu item in the File menu. such as DWG and DXF CAD files.Google is a member of the OpenDWG Alliance. Note . allowing SketchUp to offer the most reliable DWG file translation available.Google SketchUp 7 Help
3D Model (DWG/DXF) Import
SketchUp allows you to import 3D models.
Page 824
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.

arcs. hatching. 3D faces. For example. within your CAD application. faces. 2008
. if you need to import these elements into SketchUp. XREFs.
Page 825
Copyright Google Inc. and proprietary ADT or ARX objects. SketchUp does not support AutoCAD regions. CAD layers are also supported. circles. dimensions. you can explode ADT walls and extrusions in Autodesk Architectural Desktop so they will import as faces in SketchUp. You can change any unsupported elements into primitive CAD drawing elements. entities with thickness. Supported CAD elements include lines.Google SketchUp 7 Help
DWG/DXF Supported CAD Elements
SketchUp must translate the elements within a CAD file into SketchUp entities when importing a CAD file. Some elements might need to be exploded multiple times in your CAD package to be translated into SketchUp entities. These CAD elements will be ignored on import. and nested blocks. polylines. text.

001 square inches and larger. Check this box if you want to place the DWG/DXF file at the origin. such as DXF. Units Select the unit type used in the original CAD file to import geometry at the correct scale. 2008
. Resize the model as necessary after it is imported.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The Import AutoCAD DWG/DXF Options Dialog Box
Some CAD files might contain non-standard units. use a large unit type.SketchUp only recognizes faces of . or inconsistently oriented faces.
Page 826
Copyright Google Inc. coplanar faces. It is possible to create very small faces on import if you select millimeters as your SketchUp units but the model was originally intended to be displayed in feet. The Scale section of the AutoCAD DWG/DXF Import Options dialog box contains options to configure the units for the imported file. Do not check this box if you want the DWG/DXF file to be placed near the SketchUp origin. Orient Faces Consistently The Orient faces consistently option is used to analyze the direction of imported faces and orient these faces so that they are uniform in direction. Caution . Preserve Drawing Origin The Preserve drawing origin option is used to define where the DWG/DXF file will be placed when it is inserted into a SketchUp file. save data in generic units. The Merge coplaner faces option is used to have SketchUp automatically remove these lines. Therefore. as originally defined in the DWG/DXF file. such as feet or meters. Merge Coplanar Faces Planes can import into SketchUp with triangulated lines.
Scale
Some CAD formats. if you do not know the units used in the original file. You can force SketchUp to automatically analyze and repair these issues during the import process. Removing these lines manually can be tedious.
Geometry
The Geometry section of the AutoCAD DWG/DXF Import Options dialog box contains options to configure the appearance of the exported VRML file.

Therefore. A 1cm x 1cm face will import into SketchUp with dimensions of 1in x1in if you choose inches in the drop-down list. Sometimes this value is explicitly set in the 3DS file (such as millimeters) and sometimes it is missing and set to a generic value. Removing these lines manually can be tedious. A 3DS file has a field which indicates its units value. It is possible to have create very small faces on import if you select millimeters as your SketchUp units but the model was originally intended to be displayed in feet. The Merge coplanar faces option is used to have SketchUp automatically remove these lines.SketchUp only recognizes faces of . 2008
.
Scale
Units The Units drop-down list is used to import 3DS geometry at the correct scale. such as feet or meters. Resize the model as necessary after it is imported. a face that is 1cm x 1cm will be imported into SketchUp as 1cm x 1cm if your 3DS file has its units value set to centimeters and you select Model Units in this drop-down list. SketchUp will import your 3DS file at the unit you choose if you pick anything other than Model Units. if you do not know the units used in the original file. use a large unit type.
Page 828
Copyright Google Inc. Caution . For example. The Model Units list item will import your 3DS file with the unit value it finds in your 3DS file. SketchUp will import your file using inches if a units value is not set in the 3DS file.001 square inches and larger.Google SketchUp 7 Help
3DS Import Options Dialog Box
Geometry
Merge Coplanar Faces Planes can import into SketchUp with triangulated lines.

SDTS is a complex geographical data format. stored in a single directory. These files can have an extension of . SDTS models usually consist of 20 or more files.dem. However. Import a USGS DEM or SDTS file using the Import menu item in the File menu. You will have to add the .
Page 829
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. You can select any of the *.dem extension to your USGS DEM files if they do not have this extension. there is not a single standardized file format for digital elevation models. SketchUp supports the following two important file formats: USGS DEM and spatial data transfer standard (SDTS). Unfortunately. all with the extension of .ddf.Google SketchUp 7 Help
3D Model (DEM) Import
SketchUp allows you to import a digital elevation models (DEM) containing point data relating to terrain elevations. The USGS DEM file format is an ASCII format for storing geographical information.ddf files in a SDTS directory to import the entire set of files.

the fewer the points and subsequent faces. Note . This texture will be darker in lower areas of the model and lighter in high areas. the better the performance in SketchUp. The fewer the points and subsequent faces. the lesser the detail of the imported model. However. 2008
. The CAD files might contain non-standard units. SketchUp model.
Page 830
Copyright Google Inc.
Points and Faces
The Points and faces fields are used to identify the number of points. or inconsistently oriented faces. You can force SketchUp to automatically analyze and repair these issues during the import process. and subsequent faces.(2 * points) + 1 = approximate number of faces created upon import.Google SketchUp 7 Help
DEM Import Options Dialog Box
DEM files can contain thousands of points yielding a very detailed. coplanar faces.
Generate Gradient Texture
The Generate gradient texture field is used to apply a gradient texture to the imported DEM model. that will be created upon import. yet very slow.

section slice export has the advantage of preciseness. Export a section slice using the Export > Section Slice menu item in the File menu.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Section Slice Export
SketchUp can save the active Section Slice as its own 2D file in the DWG and DXF formats. As with all vector information. 2008
. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 833
Copyright Google Inc.

2008
. Full Scale (1:1) Select Full Scale (1:1) to output your section slice to CAD at a true 1:1 scale. Screen Projection (WYSIWG) This projects the section cut as you see it on your SketchUp screen. simply enter 1 inch in the output equals 4 feet in SketchUp. only faces whose normals are perpendicular to the view angle will be measurable. measurable slices.
AutoCAD Version
The AutoCAD section of the AutoCAD DWG/DXF Export Options dialog box is used to select the version of exported DWG/DXF file.
Projection
The projection section contains options for selecting the type of exported file. For example. In Drawing/In Model These controls allow you to specify a certain drawing scale.Google SketchUp 7 Help
2D Section Slice Options Dialog Box (Microsoft Windows)
The 2D Section Slice Export Options dialog box contains options for exporting 2D section slice files. Note . labeled 'In Drawing' is the measurement of the exported geometry.
Section Lines
The Section Lines section of the Section Slice Export Options dialog box contains options to configure the section cut lines of the exported section slice. The second measurement. The first measurement.
Drawing Scale & Size
The Drawing Scale and Size section of the Section Slide Export Options dialog box contains options to configure the scale and size of the exported section slice. None Outputs section slice lines at normal width. and follow architectural conventions. even if the view is a paraline projection.You cannot export a perspective screen projection to scale.
Page 834
Copyright Google Inc. labeled 'In Model' is the actual measurement of the object in real scale. True Section (Orthographic) This option outputs the section slice as a true orthographic drawing. and will update depending on the slice being exported and its scale. Width/Height These values represent the overall dimensions of the slice output. for a scale of 1/4" = 1'. This is useful for creating templates for CD drawings or any other time you want to generate accurate. This is most useful for diagrams that need not be measured. Also. including any perspective distortion.

the options dialog will come up each time you output a section slice. Note . Always Prompt for Hidden Line Options When enabled. SketchUp Layer assignments do not translate directly when exporting 2D hidden line vectors. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 835
Copyright Google Inc. If disabled. SketchUp will use whatever options were used the last time by default. This option is only available when saving AutoCAD 2000 or later DWG files. Wide line entities Select the Wide line entities to output lines as wide line entities. you can specify an exact width. This option is useful if you would like to plot profile lines using a different pen weight or quickly change the line width of all profile lines in a separate CAD or Illustration program. 2008
.The Separate on a layer option creates a single additional layer for profile edges.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Polylines with width Select the Polylines with width option to output lines as polyline entities. Separate on a layer The Separate on a layer option is used to output profile lines onto their own layer. this automatically sets the width of profile lines by matching the output to the proportions you see in the SketchUp display. Width/Automatic When enabled. When disabled.

and will update depending on the slice being exported and its scale.
Width/Height
These values represent the overall dimensions of the slice output.You can't export a perspective screen projection to scale. labeled 'In Model' is the actual measurement of the object in real scale. For example.
Page 836
Copyright Google Inc. labeled 'In Drawing' is the measurement of the exported geometry. only faces whose normals are perpendicular to the view angle will be measurable. even if the view is a paraline projection. This option is only available when saving AutoCAD 2000 or later DWG files. Note . The second measurement.
Section Lines
The Section Lines section of the Section Slice Export Options dialog box contains options to configure the section cut lines of the exported section slice. Full Scale (1:1) Use the Full Scale (1:1) option to output your section slice to CAD at a true 1:1 scale. Automatic/Width When enabled. 2008
. None Outputs section slice lines at normal width.
Drawing Scale
The Drawing Scale section of the Section Slice Export Options dialog box contains options to configure the scale of the exported section slice. simply enter 1 inch in the output equals 4 feet in SketchUp. this automatically sets the width of profile lines by matching the output to the proportions you see in the SketchUp display. Polylines With Width Use the Polylines With Width option to output lines as polyline entities. Wide Line Entities Use the Wide Line Entities option to output lines as wide line entities. you can specify an exact width. Also. If disabled. The first measurement. In Drawing/In Model These controls allow you to specify a certain drawing scale. for a scale of 1/4" = 1'.Google SketchUp 7 Help
2D Section Slice Options Dialog Box (Mac OS X)
The 2D Section Slice Export Options dialog box contains options for exporting 2D section slice files. and follow architectural conventions.

= Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 837
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. This is useful for creating templates for CD drawings or any other time you want to generate accurate.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Projection
The projection section contains options for selecting the type of exported file. including any perspective distortion. measurable slices. This is most useful for diagrams that need not be measured. Screen Projection (WYSIWG) This projects the section cut as you see it on your SketchUp screen. True Section (Orthographic) This option outputs the section slice as a true orthographic drawing.

Use the Animation Export feature when you need to provide a presentation of your model to a client who does not have SketchUp or the SketchUp viewer. Export an animation using the Export > Animation menu item in the File menu. one file for each frame per second of your presentation. export a video animation for post-processing in another presentation software package. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 838
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. Or. Use SketchUp for simple presentations or when the customer has the SketchUp viewer.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Animation Export
You can export animations as video animation files or as series of image file.
Tip .

Page 839
Copyright Google Inc. A setting between 8 and 10 is considered the minimum required for to produce smooth movement in your video animation. Note . The more frames per-second.
Width/Height
The Width and Height fields are used to control the frame size of the animation. in kilobytes. as measured in pixels. 25 fps for television in Europe. Tip .Most personal computers can transfer 5 to 7 megabytes of data per second from the hard drive. Note . Typical videos are created at an even lower frame size. the smoother the video animation. You might consider using a frame rate of 3 frames per-second while testing video animation export.
Frame Rate
The Frame Rate drop-down list is used to select the number of frames of animation per second (fps) of time in the presentation. 2008
. Large video animation files can slow down your computer resulting in skipping. However. 320x240 is yields acceptable data rates for CD-ROM. However. Values larger than 640x480 are not recommended unless specifically require such as when creating Full Quality Digital Video similar to that of professional videographers. the smaller the overall size. The larger the frame size. 640x480 pixels is considered a full-size video. such as 29.Most personal computers can transfer 5 to 7 megabytes of data per second from the hard drive. and transfers acceptably to videotape while 240x180 is acceptable for Web streaming. the larger the resulting video animation file. and so on. Large video animation files can slow down your computer resulting in skipping.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The Animation Export Options Dialog Box (Microsoft Windows)
The Animation Export Options dialog box contains options for exporting Animation files. Note . doubling the frame rate generally doubles the rendering time as well as the final size of the video. 24 fps for film. The larger the frame rate.
Aspect Ratio Lock
The Aspect Ratio Lock icon is used to maintain a fixed proportion of video at any frame size.97 fps for television in the United States. For example. The smaller the width and height values.
Loop to Starting Scene
The Loop to Starting Scene option is used to generate an additional video segment that animates from the last scene of your presentation to the first (forming a continuous loop of video).Computer screens can handle resolutions of 1024x768 pixels and above.There are frame rate requirements for certain mediums. the video animation file. Click on this lock to use a nonproportional frame size in your video animation. the larger the resulting video animation file.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Anti-Alias
The Anti-Alias option is used to smooth the exported image. 2008
.
Always Prompt for Animation Options
The Always Prompt for Animation Options option is used to display the Animation Export Options dialog box every time a video animation is created.
Codec
The Codec option is used to specify which codec. This option can increase the export time. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 840
Copyright Google Inc. to apply to your video animation.
Play When Finished
The Play When Finished option is used to start your default video player and play exported video animation file after it has been created. or compression plug-in. but helps to reduce jagged lines and pixilated artifacts in images.

in kilobytes. as measured in pixels. and transfers acceptably to videotape while 240x180 is acceptable for Web streaming. Note .Google SketchUp 7 Help
The Animation Export Options Dialog Box (Mac OS X)
The Animation Export Options dialog box contains options for exporting Animation files. the larger the resulting video animation file. the video animation file.
Settings
The settings section of the Animation Export Options dialog box contains options for controlling resolution and frame size for the video animation. However. frame rate.
Page 841
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
. Aspect Ratio Lock The Aspect Ratio Lock icon is used to maintain a fixed proportion of video at any frame size. The larger the frame size. CD ROM.Computer screens can handle resolutions of 1024x768 pixels and above. Large video animation files can slow down your computer resulting in skipping. Select Custom from the Format drop-down list configure your own custom Width/Height The Width and Height fields are used to control the frame size of the animation. the smaller the overall size. Email. For example. 320x240 is yields acceptable data rates for CD-ROM. The smaller the width and height values. 640x480 pixels is considered a full-size video. Values larger than 640x480 are not recommended unless specifically require such as when creating Full Quality Digital Video similar to that of professional videographers. For example. Format The Format drop-down list is used to select the combination of resolution. and so on. Typical videos are created at an even lower frame size.Most personal computers can transfer 5 to 7 megabytes of data per second from the hard drive. and codec based on your particular output medium (Web. Tip . the suggested combination of settings for streaming a video over the Web is 160x120 resolution at 10 frames per second using the Sorenson codec. Click on this lock to use a nonproportional frame size in your video animation.

25 fps for television in Europe. Large video animation files can slow down your computer resulting in skipping. Transparent Background The Transparent Background option is used to save the animation with a transparent background to aid in compositing. Expert Click the Expert button to launch the Compression Settings dialog box.There are frame rate requirements for certain mediums. The more frames per-second. but helps to reduce jagged lines and pixilated artifacts in images. However. the larger the resulting video animation file. This option can increase the export time. not all codecs are capable of storing transparency. This dialog box allows you to modify the settings used by a specific codec. Note . The larger the frame rate. However. You might consider using a frame rate of 3 frames per-second while testing video animation export. doubling the frame rate generally doubles the rendering time as well as the final size of the video. the smoother the video animation.
Rendering
The rendering section of the Animation Export Options dialog box contains options for rendering your video animation.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Frame Rate The Frame Rate drop-down list is used to select the number of frames of animation per second (fps) of time in the presentation. Loop to Starting Scene The Loop to Starting Scene option is used to generate an additional video segment that animates from the last scene of your presentation to the first (forming a continuous loop of video).Most personal computers can transfer 5 to 7 megabytes of data per second from the hard drive. 24 fps for film. 2008
. A setting between 8 and 10 is considered the minimum required for to produce smooth movement in your video animation. such as 29. and so on. Following is a list of codes that support transparency: = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 842
Copyright Google Inc. Anti-Alias The Anti-Alias option is used to smooth the exported image. Note .97 fps for television in the United States.

The number of files exported depends on the frame rate for the presentation. The following image shows the process of video compression on Microsoft Windows:
The following image shows the process of video compression on Mac OS X:
Each codec included with SketchUp implements a compression technique designed for a specific medium such as Web video.
Multiple Image File Animations
SketchUp also allows you to export an animation as a series of progressive image files. a 5 minute presentation exported at 10 frames per-second will yield 3000 files (60 seconds x 5 minutes x 10 frames per-second). or CD-ROM. 2008
. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 843
Copyright Google Inc. These files can be played using any compatible software video player or incorporated into a professional presentation using additional software presentation tools. Email.
Single Video File Animations
SketchUp allows you to export animation as a single video animation file (Audio Video Interleave or AVI on Microsoft Windows and QuickTime on Mac OS X). For example. SketchUp utilizes special thirdparty software called codecs (compressor/decompressor) to create these files.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Animation Types
SketchUp supports both single video animation file export (in the form of a Audio Video Interleave or AVI on Microsoft Windows and QuickTime on Mac OS X) and multiple image file export. Multiple image file animations are typically generated to use as input into video animation software products for post-processing.

Select the tray that contains the paper you want to use.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The Print Setup Dialog Box (Microsoft Windows)
The Print Setup dialog box is used to select and configure your printer and final output orientation. 2008
. Location The Location drop-down list contains different trays in your printer. Select the paper size that you want to use from this list. Size The Size drop-down list contains different paper sizes that are supported by your printer.
Paper
The Paper section of the Print Setup dialog box is used to select the paper size used for your output.
Orientation
The Orientation section is used to select the orientation (landscape or portrait) for your output. Click on the Properties button to configure the printer for printing (the properties dialog box is different for each printer-type).
Page 844
Copyright Google Inc. Select the printer to use from the Name drop-down list.
Printer
The Printer section of the Print Setup dialog box is used to select a specific printer and printer settings. Select File > Print Setup to invoke the Print Setup dialog box.

The only difference is that the Print Preview dialog box outputs your model to the screen instead of to a printer. Click on the Properties button to configure the printer for printing (the properties dialog box is different for each printer-type).Google SketchUp 7 Help
The Print Preview and Print Dialog Boxes (Microsoft Windows)
The Print Preview and Print dialog boxes contain the same series of options.
Printer
The Printer section of the Print dialog box is used to select a specific printer and printer settings. then several page twos.
Page 845
Copyright Google Inc. Select the printer to use from the Name drop-down list. Select File > Print Preview or File > Print to invoke the Print Preview and Print dialog boxes. or printing all models on all scenes in the file.
Copies
The Copies section of the Print dialog box is used to select the number of copies to print Click the collate button if you want each copy to be collate (instead of printing several page ones. and so on).
The Print Preview and Print dialog boxes contain several printing options to consider when printing a SketchUp model.
Tabbed Page Print Range
The Tabbed Print Range section of the Print dialog box is used to choose between printing the model in the current Draw Area. Items configured in one of these dialog boxes automatically appear in the other dialog box. 2008
.

Page Size The Page size fields are used to enter a custom page size for your output. to enable the scale option. You can also print selected page tiles within the set by entering a page number range in the Pages from fields. You can display a preview of tile Pages using Print Preview in the File menu. for a scale of 1/4" = 1'. Use Model Extents The Use Model Extents option is used to print only the model as viewed using the Zoom Extents Tool. For example. These pieces of paper can then be taped together to create the final scaled model. or a technique of shortening lines to create a 3D effect on a 2D medium such as paper. Fit to Page The Fit to Page option is used to size the model to fit on a single sheet of paper. is the actual measurement of the object in real scale. This issue is the result of SketchUp using foreshortening. Note . Tiling is available when you use the Scale fields to scale a model to be larger than the current paper size available in your printer. Note . such as a B size (11" x 17"). Printing large tiled output can be taxing on your computers resources. 2008
. tiling lets you print proofs of a large model. Page tiles are numbered top to bottom beginning at the top left of the drawing page. simply enter 1 inch In the Printout equals 4 feet In SketchUp.Even though paraline projection is used to get an output that is to scale. The second measurement.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Print Size
The Print Size section of the Print dialog box is used to adjust the physical size of your output. is the measurement of the exported geometry. This option might discard any surrounding empty background. the entire model can be printed by printing on several pieces of paper.It is not possible to print a perspective image to scale. The first measurement. not all angles will be measurable to a scale.
Page 846
Copyright Google Inc. on a printer that uses a smaller paper size. This option must be disabled in to specify a different size or scale. Tiling also lets you print banners that are made up of multiple pages.
Tiled Sheet Print Range
If the current Scale is larger than the paper size of your printer or plotter. Ensure perspective is disabled and you are using one of the Standard Views in the Camera > Standard submenu. Scale The Scale fields are used to scale your model for printing. such as an A size (8. labeled In the Model. labeled In SketchUp.5" x 11"). For example.

2D Section Slice Only The 2D Section Slice Only option is used to output only the section slice outlines in your model (if present).Google SketchUp 7 Help
Print Quality
You can expedite the printing of print jobs and rough drafts by selecting the appropriate print quality. Ultrahigh Definition The Ultrahigh Definition setting is used to produce the highest-quality output. High Definition The High Definition setting is used to produce high-quality output. but is best for measured drawings or ultra-fine prints. = Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 847
Copyright Google Inc. Draft The Draft setting is used to produces quick images (usually output has jagged lines). This setting is useful for plotters and tiled sheets. This setting can slow down your system. Standard The Standard setting is used to produce output with a the optimum balance of speed and quality. Resolution and line weights are set accordingly. Use High Accuracy HLR The Use High Accuracy HLR option is used to send the model information to the printer as vector information. Large Format The Large Format setting produces images that are optimized for large format output or that are meant to be viewed from several feet away. 2008
.

Even though paraline projection is used to get an output that is to scale. Use Document Setup to set the print size. and display it below. This issue is the result of SketchUp using foreshortening. not all angles will be measurable to a scale. labeled In SketchUp. or a technique of shortening lines to create a 3D effect on a 2D medium such as paper. Ensure perspective is disabled and you are using one of the Standard Views in the Camera > Standard submenu. For example. Note . The second measurement.
Print Size
The Print Size section of the Document Setup dialog box is used to determine the size of the page size for your output. is the measurement of the exported geometry. Tiling is available when you use the Scale fields to scale a model to be larger than the current paper size available in your printer. Width/Height The width and height fields are used to enter a custom page size for your output.
Page 848
Copyright Google Inc. Note . such as a B size (11" x 17"). to enable the scale option. Select File > Document Setup to invoke the Page Setup dialog box. the entire model can be printed by printing on several pieces of paper. In Drawing/In Model The In Drawing/In Model fields are used to scale your model for printing. The first measurement. SketchUp will print your drawing on multiple pages (tiles) that you can affix together manually after printing. 2008
.5" x 11"). Fit View to Page The Fit View to Page option is used to size the model to fit on a single sheet of paper. tiling lets you print proofs of a large model. SketchUp will calculate the number of pages required to print your drawing at that size automatically. on a printer that uses a smaller paper size. is the actual measurement of the object in real scale.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The Document Setup Dialog Box (Mac OS X)
The Document Setup dialog box is used to configure settings specific to the current SketchUp model.
Pages Required (Section Tiling)
If the current Scale is larger than the paper size of your printer or plotter. For example. If you define a size larger than the page size you selected in Page Setup. simply enter 1 inch In Drawing equals 4 feet In Model. print scale and to preview the number of pages required to print your drawing. such as an A size (8. Tiling also lets you print banners that are made up of multiple pagess. for a scale of 1/4" = 1'. labeled In the Model.
Print Scale
The Scale section of the of the Page Setup dialog box is used to override any SketchUpspecific scale settings.It is not possible to print a perspective image to scale. These pieces of paper can then be taped together to create the final scaled model. This option must be disabled in to specify a different size or scale.

2008
.
= Functionality only available in Google SketchUp Pro 7
Page 849
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
You can display a preview of tile pages by clicking on the Preview button at the bottom of the Print dialog box.

You can use this panel to troubleshoot difficult print jobs. Caution ..
Format for
The Format For drop-down list of the Page Setup dialog box is used to select a specific printer and printer settings.
Page 850
Copyright Google Inc. Summary The Summary panel contains a summary of all current page attributes.
Orientation
The Orientation section of the Page Setup dialog box is used to select the orientation (landscape or portrait) for your output. Its settings are defined below in detail. Note . This dialog box is the same as all standard Page Setup dialog boxes found in OS X applications.The Any Printer setting is a generic printer description that should set up a print job for any printer available. Select the printer to use from the Name drop-down list.
Paper Size
The Paper Size section of the Page Setup dialog box is used to select the paper size used for your output. or to verify all the current page attributes in one quick view.
Settings
The Settings drop-down list of the Page Setup dialog box contains a list of settings panels to appear in the Page Setup dialog box. 2008
.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The Page Setup Dialog Box (Mac OS X)
The Page Setup dialog box is used to set paper size and orientation specific to your printer. Custom Paper Size The Custom Paper Size panel allows you to define custom paper sizes not currently configured for your selected printer. Use this setting if you are preparing a PDF file for printing on a printer that is not configured on your system. Select File > Page Setup to invoke the Page Setup dialog box. Page Attributes The Page Attributes panel contains primary configuration settings for the Page Setup dialog box.You can define a paper size that your printer is not capable of using.
Scale
The Scale section of the of the Page Setup dialog box is used to override any SketchUpspecific scale settings.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
The Print Dialog Box (Mac OS X)
The Print dialog box is used to send your output to a printer. The settings drop-down list is in the middle of the Print dialog box and normally displays the Copies & Pages settings.
The Scheduler Print Dialog Box Panel
The Scheduler Print dialog box panel is used schedule the printing of your model for a later time.
The Paper Handling Print Dialog Box Panel
The Paper Handling Print dialog box panel is used alternate between printing odd or even numbered pages. 2008
. or Fax. PDF file. This dialog box is the same as all standard Print dialog boxes found in OS X applications. then several page twos. and so on). Copies The Copies section of the Print dialog box is used to select the number of copies to print Click the collate button if you want each copy to be collate (instead of printing several page ones.
Page 851
Copyright Google Inc. Page tiles are numbered top to bottom beginning at the top left of the drawing page. The Settings drop-down list displays various settings panels within the Print dialog box. Select File > Print to invoke the Print dialog box.
The Copies and Pages Print Dialog Box Panel
The Copies and Pages Print dialog box panel is used to control the number of copies and tiled output.
The Paper Feed Print Dialog Box Panel
The Paper Feed Print dialog box panel is used select the tray that contains the paper you want to use. Pages The Pages section of the Print dialog box is used to print selected page tiles within a set of tiled Pages by entering a page number range in the Pages from fields.
The Color Sync Print Dialog Box Panel
The Color Sync Print dialog box panel is used perform color conversion (if supported by your printer) and filters to your output.
The Layout Print Dialog Box Panel
The Layout Print dialog box panel is used to select the orientation (landscape or portrait) for your output.

This setting is useful for plotters and tiled sheets. This setting can slow down your system. Resolution and line weights are set accordingly. Use High Accuracy HLR The Use High Accuracy HLR option is used to send the model information to the printer as vector information.Google SketchUp 7 Help
The SketchUp Print Dialog Box Panel
There are a few SketchUp-specific settings in the Print dialog box that you can access by selecting SketchUp from the settings drop-down list in the middle of the dialog box. High Definition The High Definition setting is used to produce high-quality output. Ultrahigh Definition The Ultrahigh Definition setting is used to produce the highest-quality output. but is best for measured drawings or ultra-fine prints. 2D Section Slice Only The 2D Section Slice Only option is used to output only the section slice outlines in your model (if present). Standard The Standard setting is used to produce output with a the optimum balance of speed and quality.
Page 852
Copyright Google Inc. You can expedite the printing of print jobs and rough drafts by selecting the appropriate print quality. You can use this panel to troubleshoot difficult print jobs. or to verify all the current page attributes in one quick view. 2008
. Draft The Draft setting is used to produces quick images (usually output has jagged lines).
The Summary Print Dialog Box Panel
The Summary Print dialog box panel contains a summary of all current page attributes. Large Format The Large Format setting produces images that are optimized for large format output or that are meant to be viewed from several feet away.

2008
.
Page 855
Copyright Google Inc.
Toggle Formula View Button
Click the Toggle formula button to toggle the display of formulas with the resulting values in the Component Attributes dialog box. You will usually use this button if you manipulated a component with a SketchUp tool while the Component Attributes dialog box is open.
Functions Tab
The Functions tab contains a drop-down list of functions.
Refresh Button
Click the Refresh button to refresh values in the Component Attributes dialog box. Select a function name to view a brief description of the function.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Info Tab
Click on the Info tab to display information about the currently selected attribute at the top of the Component Attributes window.

and Z coordinates of the original. LenZ
The LenX. LenY. LenY. For example. Y. The Copies attribute is usually used in conjunction with the Copy attribute. The formula resolves to 11. and Z coordinates). in degrees. if Copies is equal to 3. and Z attributes contain the value for the component's X (red). not in the Component Attributes dialog box. Every copy will be created at the exact X.
Name
The Name attribute contains the name of the component as you would like it to appear in the Component Options dialog box.
Copy
The Copy attribute contains the copy number of a specific copy. So for example. Y.
LenX. or Z (blue) direction.
Copies
The Copies attribute contains the number of copies of the component to be created by SketchUp. Therefore. RotY. You can only see copies of a component in the Outliner (Window > Outliner). 2008
. Y (green). Z
The X.5)). Copy is generally used within formulas (so it's more of a variable than an attribute) to refer to a specific copy (usually to position that copy to different X. you might have a formula that positions copies of pickets on a fence horizontally along the X axis. one sentence summary of the component for the Component Options dialog box. you can never look at the attribute/value pairs for a copy.5 for the first copy (5+1*(4+2. RotY. 18 for the second copy (5+2*(4+2.5)).
Hidden
The Hidden attribute contains either a 1 (TRUE) to hide the component or 0 (FALSE) to unhide the component. and LenZ attributes contain the length of the component in the X (red).5)). or Z axis. Y.
X.
Page 856
Copyright Google Inc. Y (green).5". or Z (blue) coordinate. The formula for X would look like =5+Copy *(Fence!spacing+LenX) If Fence!spacing for the picket is 4" and the width (LenX) of the picket is 2. this formula resolves to 5" for the X value of the original component (5+0*(4+2.
RotX. RotZ
The RotX. Y.
Summary
The Summary attribute contains a brief.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Dynamic Component Predefined Attributes
Following is a list of all predefined attributes for use in creating your dynamic components. and so on for each copy of the picket. Y. and RotZ attributes contain the rotation about the X. Copy can contain 0 through 3 (0 being the original).

an alert box would display when a user clicked on the component. in pixels. then myimage. Refer to Hiding Scale Handles for further information. A three number list of RGB values (between 0 and 255).'. JPG. such as "Blue" (See ruby api docs for complete list of colors). The material also needs to have a custom name.com/myimage.gif image would appear. or PNG file on the Internet that you want to appear in the Component Options dialog box.
Material
The Material attribute contains the material to apply to the component. A material name that exists in the "in-model" material list. For example.
Creator
The Creator attribute contains the name of the developer of the dynamic component.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Description
The Description attribute contains a longer description of the component for the Component Options dialog box. For example. 128. in pixels. instead of the SketchUp-generated thumbnail. "0002_HotPink" won't work unless you rename it to be "0002_MyHotPink")
ScaleTool
The ScaleTool attribute allows you to toggle display of scale handles on the component (limiting how users can scale the component). 2008
. For example.
onClick
The onClick attribute contains a simple script identifying how the component will react to being clicked (using the Interact Tool). inside the Component Options dialog box. of the Component Options dialog box. of the Component Options dialog box. if ImageURL is equal to "http://mysite. 0.
ItemCode
The ItemCode attribute contains a manufacturer item code for the product represented by the dynamic component. such as "#FFFF00" or "3399A0" (the # is optional).
DialogWidth
The DialogWidth attribute contains the width. Your dynamic component needs to have a tiny swatch of the material you want displayed embedded somewhere on the component. The material can be in several formats: • • • • A named color. A hexadecimal string. 255.
ImageURL
The ImageURL attribute contains a URL to a GIF.gif".
DialogHeight
The DialogHeight attribute contains the width. For example. Refer to onClick Functions for further information. if the onClick attribute contained 'alert("Hello World").
Page 857
Copyright Google Inc.

Google SketchUp 7 Help
Page 858
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.

So.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Dynamic Component Attribute and Formula Rules and Conventions
Attribute Rules and Conventions
Following is a list of rules for attributes: • Attribute names cannot have spaces and must start with a letter.0 instead of 1. an attribute's value might be: ="This is the "\official\" retail price for this item:" & <variable name> • • Formulas that return numbers will return them as floating values. 2008
.
Formula Rules and Conventions
Following is a list of rules for formulas: • • Text must always appear in quotes in a formula.0) will return 1. to display a text string with quotes in the string. never as integers. All lengths are in inches and angles in degrees. Use the backslash character (\) to keep a quote inside of a text string. to display a text string with a calculated value. the formula if(5=5.
Page 859
Copyright Google Inc.1. For example. For example. You can concatenate a string with the value of an attribute by using the ampersand (&) sign. an attribute's value might be: ="I am a table with the cost of" & <variable name> • • The number sign (#) indicates an error in your formula.

1. ODD(number) The ODD function rounds the number up to the nearest odd integer.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Dynamic Component Supported Functions
Following is a list of all functions supported within your dynamic components.01. The significance argument is the value whose multiple of tenis the value to be rounded (. INT(number) The INT function rounds the number down to the nearest integer. LOG10(number) The LOG10 function returns the base-10 logarithm of the number.1. DEGREES(number) The DEGREES function converts the number (in radians) to degrees. FLOOR(number. significance) The CEILING function rounds a number to the nearest integer or multiple of significance. CEILING(number.
Math Functions
The following functions are for math-related use: ABS(number) The ABS function returns the absolute value of number.). If value is not a number. or FALSE if the number is even. the function evaluates only the integer part of the number. ISEVEN(number) The ISEVEN function returns TRUE if the number is an even integer. Many of these functions are identical to functions found in spreadsheet applications such as the spreadsheet application that is a part of Google Docs. EXP(number) The EXP function returns e raised to the power of number. 10. If the number is not an integer. or FALSE if the number is odd. PI() The PI function returns the value of PI to fourteen decimal places. . RADIANS(number) The RADIAN function converts the number (in degrees) to radians.
Page 860
Copyright Google Inc. EVEN(number) The EVEN function rounds the number up to the nearest even integer. etc. 2008
. significance) The FLOOR function rounds the number down to the nearest multiple of significance. LN(number) THE LN function returns the natural logarithm based on the constant e of the number. the function evaluates only the integer part of the number. ISODD(number) The ISODD function returns TRUE if the number is an odd integer.

and 0 for zero. 2008
. .13. The function returns the result 1 for a positive sign. For example.valueN) The CHOOSE function returns a value from a list of parameters at the location of the index value. or 200 depending on the material chosen in the Component Options dialog box. If the count argument is negative. Example: =ROUND(1. SIGN(number) The SIGN function returns the sign of the number. 200) The previous example returns 100."Red". The count argument is optional and represents the number of the places to round the number. Example: =RANDBETWEEN(1. Example: =CHOOSE(2.2) The previous example returns 1. The number must be positive. count) The ROUND function rounds the number to a certain number of decimal places according to valid mathematical criteria.. if the Component Options dialog box allows the user to choose different materials to assign to a component (and the price changes depending on material chosen). only the whole number portion is rounded.
Page 861
Copyright Google Inc." Use CHOOSE and OPTIONINDEX together as a mechanism to assign different values depending on a user's choice in the Component Options dialog box.
SketchUp Functions
The following functions are specific to SketchUp dynamic components: CHOOSE(index. 150.Google SketchUp 7 Help
RAND() The RAND function returns a random number between 0 and 1.3) The previous example returns a 1.value2. ROUND(number. top) The RANDBETWEEN function returns a whole number between the bottom and top number. 2. the formula for MSRP might be: =CHOOSE (OPTIONINDEX("Material"). SQRT(number) The SQRT function returns the positive square root of the number. 100. 150. This function allows you to create a single drop-down list that drives multiple attribute changes at once. 3.value1.12789. RANDBETWEEN(bottom."Green") The previous example results in "Red. -1 for a negative sign."Blue"..

value2. FACEAREA("materialName") The FACEAREA method returns the area (in square inches) of every "ungrouped" face that is painted with the materialName.
Page 862
Copyright Google Inc.24.36.value2. after scaling. or 10). NEAREST(originalValue.Google SketchUp 7 Help
CURRENT("attributeName") The CURRENT function accepts a string name of an attribute.36. This function allows you to do validation of Scale Tool or Move Tool actions. when entered into the LenX value field. and returns the target value that is closest to the originalValue.. EDGES() The EDGES function returns the number of "ungrouped" edges inside the component or group that this function is called within. Example: =FACEAREA("Oak") The previous example returns the square inches of Oak material inside the component or group. or 48 after scaling. The FACEAREA method returns the total area of all ungrouped faces when the materialName is not provided. . Example: =ROUND(CURRENT("LenX")/2)*2 The previous example. LARGEST(value1. Example: =LARGEST(CURRENT("LenX").valueN) The LARGEST function returns the largest of the values in a list. value1.valueN) The NEAREST function compares the originalValue with a list of target values. LAT() The LAT function returns the latitude of the current SketchUp model. will cause the component to snap to the nearest width of 24. 20.. 20. 2008
. when entered into the LenX value field.. 10) The previous example.. FACES() The FACES function returns the number of "ungrouped" faces inside the component or group that this function is called within. LNG() The LNG function returns the longitude of the current SketchUp model. constrains the component to the nearest width. and returns the size or position attribute that the SketchUp user just applied. within 2 inches. constrains the component so it cannot be scaled more than the largest of three numbers (either the value of LenX.48) The previous example. when entered into the LenX value field. Example: = NEAREST(CURRENT("LenX")..

or "Green=green".
Page 863
Copyright Google Inc. OPTIONLABEL ("attributeName") The OPTIONLABEL function returns the currently selected label form its option list given a string name of an attribute. For example. text2) The EXACT function compares two text strings and returns TRUE if they are identical.Google SketchUp 7 Help
OPTIONINDEX("attributeName") The OPTIONINDEX function returns the currently selected index from its option list given a string name of an attribute. The value argument can be a number. The value argument is the number to be converted to currency.. text2. SUNANGLE() The SUNANGLE function returns the angle (in degrees) between the sun and the current model's North direction. DOLLAR(value. SUNELEVATION() The SUNELEVATION function returns the elevation (in degrees) of the sun from the current model's shadow settings. If no match is found.valueN) The SMALLEST function returns the smallest of the values in a list... The text1.. . The text 1 and text 2 arguments are the text strings.textN arguments are text strings that are combined into one string. SMALLEST(value1. The decimals (optional) argument is the number of decimal places.. if an attribute can be "Red=red".20. this function returns "Blue". a reference to a cell containing a number. decimals) The DOLLAR function converts a number to an amount in the currency format. ." or "green.value2. For example. EXACT(text1. The text argument is the text for which the code of the first character is to be found. CODE(text) The CODE function returns a numeric code for the first character in a text string. if an attribute can be "red. The elevation is defined as the angle between a vector pointing at the sun and the ground plane." "blue. constrains the component so it cannot be scaled less than the smallest number (the value of LenX. 2008
. rounded to a specified decimal place. 0 is returned. If no decimals value is specified. This function is case-sensitive. CONCATENATE(text1. or 10). when entered into the LenX value field.textN) The CONCATENATE function combines several text strings into one string.. Example: =SMALLEST(CURRENT("LenX"). 10) The previous example.
Text Functions
CHAR(number) The CHAR function converts a number into a character according to the current code table. If no match is found. and blue is the current value. text2."Blue=blue".. an error is raised. 20. The currency format is set in the system settings." and blue is the current value. all numbers in the currency format will be displayed with two decimal places. The number argument can be a two-digit or three-digit integer number between 1 and 255 (representing the code value for the character). or a formula which returns a number. this function returns 2.

The findText argument is the text to be found. LEFT(text. position) The FIND function looks for a string of text within another string. The text argument is the text string. The text is the old text string. number) The LEFT function returns the first character (or characters) in a text string. LOWER(text) The LOWER function converts all uppercase letters in a text string to lowercase. searchText. SUBSTITUTE(text. The search is case-sensitive. MID(text. The length argument is the number of characters in the text to be replaced. The text argument is the text string containing the section to be replaced. The number (optional) argument is the number of characters to be returned. LEN(text) The LEN function returns the length of a text string including spaces. REPLACE(text. Any text containing numbers must be enclosed in quotation marks so it is not interpreted as a number and automatically converted to text. convert it back to a number using the VALUE function. The searchText argument is the segment in text to be replaced. The number argument is the number of characters to return. The text argument is the text string. The result of the function is always displayed as text. The number (optional) argument is the number of characters to be returned. The text argument is the text string. The text argument is the text to be repeated. The result can be a maximum of 255 characters. This function can be used to replace both characters and numbers (which are automatically converted to text). length. One character is returned if the number is not defined. If the occurrence is missing.Google SketchUp 7 Help
FIND(findText. position. The newText argument is the replacement text. The number argument is the number of repetitions. The start argument contains the position of the first character in the text to extract. The text argument is the string to be converted. The findText argument can be a number or any string of characters. new) The REPLACE function replaces part of a text string with a different text string. newText. 2008
. The occurrence (optional) argument indicates the number of occurrences of searchText to be replaced. RIGHT(text. occurrence) The SUBSTITUTE function substitutes new text for old text in a string. the search text is replaced throughout. REPT(text. The new argument is the replacement text. The text argument is the string whose length is returned. The position (optional) argument is the position in text where the search starts. number) The RIGHT function returns the last character or characters in a text string. The position function is the position within the text where the replacement will begin. start. To perform further calculations with a number which has been replaced by text. number) The REPT function repeats a text string. PROPER(text) The PROPER function capitalizes the first letter in all words of the provided text string. text.
Page 864
Copyright Google Inc. number) The MID function returns a text segment of a text string. The text argument is the text string to be searched.

Trig Functions
ACOS(number) The ACOS function returns the inverse cosine of the number in degrees. If any element is FALSE. 2008
. SIN(number) The SIN function returns the sine of the number in degrees. COS(number) The COS function returns the cosine of the number in degrees. TANH(number) The TANH function returns the hyperbolic tangent of the number in degrees. COSH(number) The COSH function returns the hyperbolic cosine of the number in degrees.Google SketchUp 7 Help
TRIM(text) The TRIM function removes spaces in front of a text string or aligns cell contents to the left. The logicalValue arguments are conditions to be checked. logicalValue2. ATANH(number) The ATANH function returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of the number in degrees.
Page 865
Copyright Google Inc. ATAN(number) The ATAN function returns the inverse tangent of the number in degrees. The text argument is the text to be converted to a number. VALUE(text) The VALUE function converts a text string into a number.logicalValueN) The AND function returns TRUE if all arguments are TRUE. All conditions can be either TRUE or FALSE. UPPER(text) The UPPER function converts a text string to uppercase. SINH(number) The SINH function returns the hyperbolic sine of the number in degrees.
Logical Functions
The following functions are for math-related use: AND(logicalValue1. ACOSH(number) The ACOSH function returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of the number in degrees. this function returns the FALSE value.. TAN(number) The TAN function returns the tangent of the number in degrees.. The text argument contains the lower case letters you want to convert to upper case. The argument contains text string or cell whose contents will be left-aligned. ASINH(number) Returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of the number in degrees. . ASIN(number) The ASIN function returns the inverse sine of the number in degrees.

elseValue) The IF function identifies a logical test.0. the function returns a 0. ANIMATE(attribute. stateN) The ANIMATE function starts an animation that will change the value of the attribute to the next value in a list of parameters every half a second. 1. . All conditions can be either TRUE or FALSE. stateN) The ANIMATESLOW function does the same thing as animate....
OnClick Functions
ALERT("message") The ALERT function displays the value of the message in an alert box. Example: =ALERT("You Clicked Me!") The previous example displays an alert box with the phrase ""You Clicked Me!. The elseValue (optional) is the value that is returned if the logical test is FALSE. . Default easing is 0. TRUE() The TRUE function turns the logical value to TRUE. logicalValue2.0. Easing is the speed of the animation (on a scale of 0 to 100. OR(logicalValue1.logicalValueN) The OR function returns TRUE if at least one argument is TRUE. . state2. if the ONCLICK attribute contains ANIMATE("X". thenValue. The FALSE function does not require any arguments. if the ONCLICK attribute equals ANIMATE("ROTZ". ANIMATESLOW("attributeName". state1. IF(test. The thenValue (optional) is the value that is returned if the logical test is TRUE. Easing is represented by two numbers. Otherwise.The logicalValue arguments are conditions to be checked.. state1. NOT(logicalValue) The NOT function reverses the logicalValue. the component would animate the value of the "X" attribute between 0 and 100.130." when inside the ONCLICK attribute. The first number (easein) identifies the speed at the start of the animation.
Page 866
Copyright Google Inc. For example. and the user clicks on the component. 0) The previous example returns a 1 if the test (5=5) is TRUE.100 (animation starts fast but slows down at the end). The second number (easeout) identifies the speed at the end of the animation. The test argument is any value or expression that can be TRUE or FALSE.Google SketchUp 7 Help
FALSE() The False function sets the logical value to FALSE. If more than two animate states are passed.100) the animation would go through each of the 4 values with each click... A subsequent click would animate back to 0 from 100. This function animates with default easing.10. state2. This function returns FALSE if all the arguments have the logical value FALSE. but slower (one second). The TRUE() function does not require any arguments. Example: =IF (5=5. 0 being fastest). then the value will toggle between them in order. The logicalValue argument is any value to be reversed. So.100). 2008
.

. ANIMATECUSTOM("attributeName". state2. easeout) The GOTOSCENE function moves to a scene identified by a name or number. Refer to the ANIMATE function for information about easing.
Page 867
Copyright Google Inc.Google SketchUp 7 Help
ANIMATEFAST("attributeName". SET("attributeName". .stateN) The SET function sets a given attribute to the next state in a list. time. GOTOSCENE("sceneName". . state1. state1. state2. Refer to the ANIMATE function for information about easing. stateN) The ANIMATEFAST function does the same thing as animate. but faster (a quarter of a second). but with an arbitrary time with easing. easein. easeout.stateN) The ANIMATECUSTOM function does the same thing as animate. state1.. 2008
. REDRAW() The REDRAW function redraws the component that contains this function... time.. . easein..

Page 871
Copyright Google Inc. The above information is all that we are collecting. A "stack trace" of the bug allowing us to see the exact line of code where SketchUp crashed. Your language setting. This dialog will give you the option to send us the information regarding the crash. BugSplat provides a mechanism for Microsoft Windows users to send information about all crashes to Google for troubleshooting.in this case Google – that the information on our crashes (e. Note .If you happen to look at the BugSplat Software website.. how many we have. (optional) A description of what you were doing before the crash. you will see a security statement that is aimed at assuring clients of BugSplat . Here is what is collected if you decide to send us the information: • • • • • • Your version of the SketchUp executable.g. A list of SketchUp code dependencies.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Bug Splat (Microsoft Windows)
BugSplat (www. similar to Microsoft Window's crash report dialog. BugSplat helps Google troubleshoot unrecoverable SketchUp errors or crashes.
How Does it Work?
In the rare event that SketchUp crashes you will see a dialog.bugsplatsoftware. and so on) will be protected. such as English. (optional) Your name and email address.com) is a third-party software application that is integrated in SketchUp for Microsoft Windows 2000 and XP to help improve the quality of the product. 2008
.

There are many different versions of DWG. and printed exactly as intended by anyone with free Adobe Acrobat® Reader® software.
PDF
Adobe® Portable Document Format (PDF) is the open standard for worldwide electronic document distribution. and color of the source document. graphics. PDF preserves all the fonts.Google SketchUp 7 Help
2D Vector File Formats
2D vector file formats have advantages over bitmap image export in that they produce drawings that are resolution independent and can be easily imported and modified in many other programs. DXF was created by AutoDesk as the method for exchanging CAD data between their AutoCAD application and other CAD applications. PDF files are compact and can be shared. Also. contains the color of each pixel. shadows. backgrounds. Epix embed additional information from the original 3D model. known as the Depth Channel. viewed.
DXF (Data Exchange File)
DXF is a 2D graphics file format supported by most all Macintosh and PC-based CAD applications.
The Anatomy of an Epix File
The native file format of Piranesi is referred to as an Epix (Extended Pixel) file. navigated. and r2004.
DWG (AutoCAD Drawing File)
DWG was created by AutoDesk as the file format for their AutoCAD program. scale objects. This information helps Piranesi understand the surface topology under the image and allows it to apply textures. including DWG r12. and transparency. and many other capabilities dependant on the 3D surfaces of your model. known as the RGB Channel. smooth shading. cannot be exported to PDF and EPS. or for import into vector illustration software for further refinement. (In fact. EPS is widely used in the graphic design and publishing industries. formatting. 2008
. stores the distance of each pixel from the eye point. Caution . including textures.
Page 872
Copyright Google Inc.Some graphic features of SketchUp. There are three "channels" of an Epix file: RGB The first. plotting a perspective in a large format. This information allows Piranesi's paint tools to intelligently render the image. lock orientation.) Depth The second. r2000. In addition to storing the actual rendered image. Epix files are readable in most image editors as TIFF files. a graphics description language developed by Adobe as a standard way for graphics programs and print devices to communicate. This is the same data typically stored in other raster image formats. These file formats are useful for creating a set of 2D construction documents. regardless of the application and platform used to create the document.
EPS
Encapsulated PostScript format is based on PostScript.

non-textured Epix file.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Material The third. In General.
Page 873
Copyright Google Inc. While adding support for Epix files in SketchUp. Piranesi expects a flat shaded. This lets you paint one part of your rendering loosely without having to worry about painting another by mistake. don't really work well for Piranesi. Other features of SketchUp. a Material Channel stores the material for each pixel. 2008
. yet may be desirable in many cases. are also different from that which Piranesi expects. we have tried to adhere to Piranesi's expectations whenever possible while retaining enough flexibility to accommodate the varying needs of different artists and renderers. and are disabled during export in favor of shaded output. such as edges and textures. such as Wireframe and Hidden Line. Some of the rendering modes in SketchUp.

and the ability to adapt to the available bandwidth. (Access to some of these requires software available separately from Intel. It is comparable in quality to the Cinepak codec. and will provide good file size compression.) Intel Indeo Video 5. videos compressed using Cinepack will work reliably on any platform. and flexibility with average image quality.5 This is a lossy codec that provides good compatibility. compression method. speed. transparency.) Full Frames Uncompressed This option allows you to export your animation without any compression. and the ability to adapt to the available bandwidth. Apple H. Some codecs are also designed specifically for a certain device. It is lossy. Advanced features include a quick compression option.2 This codec was designed for video playback from CD-ROM discs. Cinepak Codec by Radius This is the default codec for SketchUp. but Cinepack is preferable due to wider support.263 H.
Microsoft Windows Codecs
Following is an explanation of codecs that are included with SketchUp. you might want to choose a codec that provides higher quality at the expense of file size and compatibility. transparency.263 is a QuickTime codec designed for video conferencing at low data rates and may not be suitable for general-purpose video. Intel Indeo Video R3.
Page 874
Copyright Google Inc.1) and is low quality and rarely used today. 2008
. If you plan to edit your video. Codecs differ in their intended use. Although not as advanced as modern codecs.10 This is a lossy codec that provides good compatibility. Intel Indeo Video 4. if you plan to email your video or play it off a CD. and flexibility with average image quality. You can also choose to create uncompressed video by not using a codec. but a compression setting of 100% is lossless. keyframe control. keyframe control. Microsoft Video 1 This codec originally shipped with Video for Windows (Windows 3. a large uncompressed animation file might require a fast system and very large amounts of disk space.
Mac OS X Codecs
Animation This codec works well for images that use large areas of solid colors. Advanced features include a quick compression option. Conversely. and is great for SketchUp images that have no textures or background gradients. and handling pictures and sound. such as a digital video camera. (Access to some of these requires software available separately from Intel. speed.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Codec Lists
SketchUp's animation export feature uses codecs (COmpressor/DECompressor) to create the appropriately sized video depending on your needs. play smoothly from CD-ROM. Cinepak is asymmetrical and lossy. you might want to select a codec that provides lower data rates at the expense of quality. However.

H. Planar RGB This is similar to the Animation codec in that it is effective for images that use large areas of solid colors. or temporarily storing video. Component video This codec provides relatively little compression. Cinepak is asymmetrical and lossy. which means that it might not be well suited to playback from CD-ROM or the web. Although not as advanced as modern codecs.263 This codec is a modified version of H.263 is a codec designed for video conferencing at low data rates and may not be suitable for general-purpose video. but can also be used for editing and storage of high-quality video files. 2008
. PNG The PNG codec implements the lossless PNG compression .decompression algorithm used by many Web browsers. videos compressed using Cinepack will work reliably on any platform. MPEG-4 Video MPEG-4 is the new worldwide standard for interactive multimedia creation.261. however. None This option allows you to export your animation without any compression.263 for iChat Cinepak This is the default codec for SketchUp.261 H. Photo . JPEG 2000 Motion JPEG A and Motion JPEG B These codecs are designed for many video-capture cards. Graphics This provides a high quality. The MPEG-4 video codec is designed to provide the highest quality across a wide array of data rates over the Internet. and playback for the Internet. delivery. DV . which provide hardware acceleration for JPEG compression. It's useful for archiving.JPEG The Photo JPEG codec is built into QuickTime and implements the Joint Photographic Experts Group ISO version 9R9 algorithm for image compression. play smoothly from CD-ROM.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Apple Pixlet Video Apple VC H.
Page 875
Copyright Google Inc. and will provide decent file size compression. 8-bit color image that can work well with SketchUp output.PAL Used by PAL digital video hardware such as camcorders. This codec is generally used for storage of still images. The H. The compression ratio is low.263 requires half the bandwidth to achieve the same video quality as in the H. which means files can get large.

but provides better picture quality and smaller file sizes at the cost of lightly longer compression times. Video This provides high-quality playback from hard disk and moderate quality playback from CDROM.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Sorenson Video This is a very good codec for general video. It supports both spatial and temporal compression of 16-bit video.decompression algorithm. It is similar to Cinepak. TGA The TGA codec implements the lossless TGA compression . 2008
. Sorenson Video 3 Makes improvements over Sorenson Video in the form of higher quality video and better data compression. It also supports dynamic playback that automatically adjusts to available bandwidth and CPU resources.decompression algorithm. and is great for playback from CD-ROM the web. TIFF The TIFF codec implements the lossless PNG compression .
Page 876
Copyright Google Inc. Data can be recompressed or recompiled later for higher compression ratios with minimal or no quality degradation.

such as SketchUp. However. This performance enhancement is known as Hardware Acceleration.Google SketchUp 7 Help
SketchUp and OpenGL
3D applications. Google cannot control the quality of the OpenGL driver on your computer system. only some 3D drivers in the consumer video card market are 100% OpenGL compatible and can use this feature (though many cards claim to be 100% OpenGL compatible).
What is OpenGL?
OpenGL is the industry-standard. Aside from having a fast CPU and large amounts of RAM. Unfortunately. 2008
. Note . These chips significantly enhance OpenGL performance upward of 3000 percent.
Page 877
Copyright Google Inc. incompatibility problems can occur requiring a fix from the video card manufacturer. Check the system settings for your video card to see if it supports hardware acceleration (using the Control Panel on Microsoft Windows or System Preferences on Macintosh OS X). Most 3d drivers are designed for games. Google cannot guarantee that SketchUp will work with hardware acceleration on your system.If the Use Hardware Acceleration option is not available in SketchUp. require abundant system resources. verify that the control panel settings for your video card's device driver has hardware acceleration enabled (Microsoft Windows).
Hardware Acceleration
SketchUp will can take advantage of hardware acceleration if your computer has a 100% OpenGL compatible video card. your video card and video card drivers must be 100% OpenGL compliant. and are often not tested using other 3D programs.Google strongly recommends that you set your display colors to a 32-bit color depth (using Control panel > Display Properties) to assure that your SketchUp model will render accurately when using hardware acceleration (Microsoft Windows). These cards perform the rendering calculations using a specialized chip called the Graphics Processing Unit or GPU (instead of relying on the CPU). Many video card manufacturers have also built cards that support the OpenGL standard. Most Microsoft Windows and Apple OS X operating systems come with a software-based OpenGL driver. Video card device drivers are proprietary and are maintained solely by the manufacturer of the video card in your system. Consequently. Therefore. Tip . to draw 3D geometry. these drivers rely heavily on the CPU to perform the rendering calculations of OpenGL (a task that is not done efficiently by most CPUs). Disable this option if you are having problems with the 3D rendering of your models or if your video card is not 100% OpenGL compatible and does not support hardware acceleration. Note .Hardware Acceleration might only be available on your system for certain resolutions and color depths. used in numerous software applications and games.

Consult the Video Card Compatibility section of the Readme file (in the SketchUp installation directory) for additional details regarding compatibility issues for specific video cards. 2008
. an out-of-date video card driver. A temporary solution is to disable hardware acceleration in SketchUp while troubleshooting the problem. and rendering (such as mysterious graphics appearing on your screen) are usually the result of a video card not fully supporting OpenGL (despite claims by the manufacturer).
Page 878
Copyright Google Inc. performance. or incompatibility with 32-bit color depth.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Compatibility Issues
OpenGL incompatibility is a significant system configuration issue leading to problems with SketchUp. Difficulties with SketchUp tools.

this high-level of compression yields a lower image quality and therefore. sometimes resulting in blocky patterns of color referred to as artifacts. JPEG images are referred to as lossy because data is actually lost during the compression process and an uncompressed JPEG file will never be identical to the original file. such as PNG.Consider using JPEG if your image contains lots of textured areas or fine detail JPEG compression works so well because it analyzes an image. and then discards the information which the human eye does not readily perceive. 2008
. divides it into blocks. form some image. each of which has its own particular advantages and should be selected depending on the task you want to perform. However.
PNG (Portable Network Graphics)
The PNG format was developed for transferring images efficiently over the world wide web without data loss. using email or for viewing on the world wide web. The most prominent feature of JPEG is its compression scheme. Fortunately. when combined. before saving to JPEG for final output. and digital cameras.
Page 879
Copyright Google Inc.Resaving a JPEG image multiple times can result in compounded artifacts. you can adjust the amount of JPEG compression to suit your needs using the File > Export > 2D Graphic Options > Image Quality slider bar. which can reduce file size to a fraction of other formats. SketchUp supports several different raster image formats. but it is a non-lossy variety that is free from artifacts. Tip .
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
JPEG image files enjoy wide support across many applications. such as digital photographs. Tip . Work with original raster images in a non-lossy format.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Raster File Formats
Raster images are made up of individual square colored pixels that. computer platforms. Like JPEG. This compression scheme makes the JPEG format particularly useful for sending images.
The previous image shows the artifacts resulting from JPEG compression (in the right-most portion of the image). PNG does use compression.

and email use.
TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)
The TIFF file format is often used to exchanged files between applications and computer platforms (Mac and Personal Computers). TIFF files may require additional software to be viewed on some systems.
Page 880
Copyright Google Inc. are not compatible with SketchUp.Consider using PNG for models that have large areas of solid. 1-bit raster files. while formats such as PNG and JPEG are viewable by any web browser and can therefore be sent to virtually any other person with good chance of success. TIFF is primarily used for highresolution printing from desktop publishing applications. colors (such as non-textured SketchUp models).SketchUp does not support TIFF files at 1 bit per pixel. There are a large number of variations to the TIFF format available. Images compressed using RLE will expand to uncompressed sizes once imported into SketchUp. and therefore TIFF might not be as universally accessible as other formats such as PNG and JPEG. BMP does not use compression. Also. Note . SketchUp supports as wide a range of TIFF formats as possible.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Tip . However. 2008
. BMP tends to create very large files that are not suitable for archive. web. See Piranesi Epix Export for more information.
Epix
Epix is the native format of Piranesi which is an architectural painting application designed to work with images generated from 3D models. and you should test compatibility with other applications before exporting to TIFF file. uniform. BMP can be useful for creating temporary files to be further modified in other applications. or TIFF files with gif encoding.
BMP (Bitmap)
The BMP file format was created for Microsoft Windows operating systems primarily as the format used for the Microsoft Windows clipboard and for viewing (especially as wallpaper). Therefore.

and other macros. Google reserves the right to change this policy at any time. We encourage posting Ruby API questions to our SketchUp Ruby API Forum.com. SketchUp also includes a Ruby console which is an environment where you can experiment with Ruby commands or methods.ruby-lang.rubycentral. visit www. Google does not offer technical support for the Ruby Application Programmers Interface (API) or for any Ruby scripts created by third parties. menu items. 2008
. Click on "Help" > "Ruby Help" for additional information on SketchUp Ruby API.Google SketchUp 7 Help
SketchUp Ruby API and Console
SketchUp contains a Ruby application programming interface (API) for users who are familiar with (or want to learn) Ruby scripting and want to extend the functionality of SketchUp. This interface allows users to create tools.org/en/. Currently.
Page 881
Copyright Google Inc. In addition to the API. General Ruby information may be obtained at http://www. such as automated component generators. to be included in the menus within SketchUp. For additional information on the Ruby programming language.

A software implementation of the user's point of view.Meaning "measurable from the axes.The value in the Measurements Toolbar that is displayed when measuring an angle with the Protractor Tool. Component Instance . Component Definition . Component Collection .See Point of View. Context . such as a component collection of doors or windows.The Components Browser is used to instance Component entities from component definitions. such as the Unhide All command. Camera Tool . Certain commands or operations.An entity that contains other entities. Camera Angle . including those components that you create and a variety of pre-built Components that you can use in your models.
Page 882
Copyright Google Inc.The distance between the starting point and the ending point of an Arc entity.The blueprint that defines the appearance and behavior of all component instances.A series of related component definitions. such as an a single instance of an office chair component.Tools used to create construction geometry and prepare physical documentation.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Glossary
A
Angular Rotation Value .A software tool used to alter the user's point of view of a SketchUp model.The process of skewing.An isolated realm that separates geometry within from anything outside. or folding geometry by selecting a specific point on an edge or face and moving the points.See Computer Assisted Design Camera . When you edit groups or components you are in the group or component context. You can have multiple component instances from the same component definition. Components Browser . When you make a Group or Component you are essentially creating other contexts inside of the model context. and lines have a length that is to some scale. See also Sticky. Autofold . Chord Length . (for example 1? in SketchUp = 1? in the real world).An instance of a component definition. When you start a SketchUp model you are working within the model context." An axonometric projection is a view of a model in which lines appear parallel in both 3 dimensional and 2 dimensional space. See also Point of View. Computer Aided Design .
B C
CAD . Axonometric .Software used for precision design. CAD is traditionally rigid and is often used for creating construction documents from which you would create the actual item you are designing. scaling using the Measure Tool. Guide Tools . Component definitions are created and stored in the Components Browser either as part of a component collection or when you create a component. Components are models that are saved as SketchUp files for reuse in other SketchUp files. Component entity . distorting. 2008
.

Context Menu .A menu of menu items or commands available in a particular context. Extrude .A software tool used to create entities and geometry from scratch. Face entity . The component's cutting behavior is established when the component is initially created. Entities are used to create geometry which.Edges bound faces within geometry. you are essentially in the entity's context.Refers to entities that existing in the same plane.A planer entity bounded by 3 or more intersecting coplanar edges or lines.
D
Dialog Stack . and the Drawing Area. The term edge and line are used interchangeably Entity .The entire application window for SketchUp. the status bar. Drawing Tool .A form of modeling in which a surface is automatically created for 3 intersecting coplanar edges.A series of faces joined to make up a curved surface. Curved Face Set . See also drawing area. Toolbars. The default material is different for the front and back of faces.A material assigned to all newly created faces. underhangs or caves.The area within the Drawing Window where you create your model. when you create and select other entities.
F
Functional Terrain . Additionally. such as a tube or arch. See Extrude. Geometry in SketchUp usually refers to a indistinguishable portion of a component or model.Shadows projected onto horizontal faces by vertical faces based on the sun's angle in the sky.
Page 883
Copyright Google Inc. Distort -Twisting out of natural shape. Cutting Plane . Extrusion -A from that has been extruded. are limited to a particular context. Edge entity .Google SketchUp 7 Help
and placing active Section Planes.The smallest graphical building blocks in SketchUp.
G
Geometry .The ability of component entities to cut holes in faces.
E
Edge-Based Modeling . Drawing Window .A plane defining the exact location where the component will cut into a face. Default Material .Terrain that has no portion of itself bending back upon itself creating overhangs. The Drawing Window contains menus. Cutting Behavior . Coplanar . such as when a line or component is selected. See also Drawing Window. 2008
.The combination of 3 or more entities. is used to create models. Face Shadows .Dialog boxes arranged such that they form a stack.The action of thrusting out or growing a form. in turn. Drawing Area .

These relationships are identified and pointed out to the user by the inferencing engine and can be used as references for drawing in 3D space. For example. the midpoint of a line. the ground plane is represented by the exact location of the red and green axes.Layers are used to control the visibility of geometry within large models.
H
Healing .Functionality built into SketchUp to locate or infer points from other points in your model.
Page 884
Copyright Google Inc. a point on an edge. Groups are commonly used to combine several entities into a single entity for the purposes of performing a quick operation. The Inference Engine notifies you of these points by using both color indicators and on-screen messages indicating the location of the cursor as you draw an entity.The concept of splitting faces and edges to create additional independent faces and edges by intersecting the face or edge with a line. Inference Engine .Google SketchUp 7 Help
Ground Plane .The concept of joining two faces by erasing. such as "Layer0.see Component Instance.An entity that contains other entities. Gluing Behavior .The point where the cursor will grab and insert the component in to a model from the Components Browser. In SketchUp. a point on a face. A SketchUp layer is an attribute with a name. Creating one face from two." "Layer9.
I
Inference . a line that is perpendicular to the ground plane." Elements can be assigned different layers. Layers Manager .The identification of relationships between entities in the drawing area. and so on. SketchUp displays the string ?From Point? when the line you are drawing is in plane with another point." or "Chairs. or "healing" a line that intersects a face. such as the center of a circle.Shadows projected onto the ground plane by vertical faces based on the sun's angle in the sky. Ground Shadows .A dialog box used to store and manipulate a specific aspect of SketchUp functionality such as scenes. components.The ability of component entities to align to faces in a specific orientation. Group entity . Instance .A dialog box used to apply and manage layers in your model
M
Manager . The component's gluing behavior is established when the component is initially created. Intersection . 2008
. such as a copy and paste. or materials.A flat or level surface representing the ground.
J K L
Layer . Insertion Point .

Move Point .A dialog box that temporarily prohibits the user's interaction with the application.
Q R
Page 885
Copyright Google Inc.Tools that tend to be used most often in SketchUp. each derived from irregularly spaced points. Model .The process of reshaping a your model by expanding a portion away from its starting point and along a single axis.A surface comprised of polygons. Modal dialog boxes usually require the user to perform some action prior to returning to normal application use.
O
One-Point Perspective . POV . Pulling . Modeless Dialog Box .A dialog box that does not prohibit the user's interaction with the application.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Material . Modification Tool .The user's view of the model. This is not determined by our view.see Point of View.A flat or level surface. Principal Tools . Plane . entities are not to scale). which is located straight in front of the viewer: it is the vanishing point for the direction of view. See also component.Software-simulated paints that have both color and texture attributes. Perspective .A software tool used to modify existing entities or geometry.See Axonometric.The point where the Drawing Axes start or originate. See also Modal Dialog Box. Polygon Mesh .The process of reshaping your model by shrinking a portion of your model back toward its starting point along a single axis.In central perspective or one point perspective there is only one vanishing point (vp). Modal Dialog Box .
P
Pan .A camera movement in which the camera turns side to side. but the flat faces and tunnel walls of all objects within view.The contents of a SketchUp file.The point where you click on the entity with the Move Tool.Geometry or models that have a hand-made or custom appearance. Point of View . Pushing . Paraline .A distortion of the Camera Angle such that it represents the model as though you were standing at a fixed position and looking at it without moving (certain items appear closer while other items appear to be far away. 2008
. Organic Shape . Origin . For example. All lines drawn in the blue axes are exactly perpendicular to the ground plane and all of the lines drawn in the red and green axes are exactly perpendicular to the blue axes when viewing a 2 or 3 dimensional drawing viewed in one point perspective. a brick material might contain the color of red and a rough appearance or texture similar to real brick.

allowing you to construct a form in any orientation.A series of joined faces.
T
Three-Point Perspective .The concept of creating two faces from one by dividing the face with a line. Split . See also Autofold.See Triangulated Irregular Network.Ruby console which is an environment where you can experiment with Ruby commands or methods.A small program.
S
Sandbox . Section Cut Effect . Three-point perspective is usually used to represent three dimensions in a three-dimensional medium such as SketchUp. Surface . that adds functionality to SketchUp.The result of slicing through your model to see inside and optionally modify its inner working. such as a specific point of view. form an arc. The more segments an entity has.An object oriented scripting language.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Ruby Console . See also Triangulated Irregular Network.To place at an angle.A thin slice allowing for folding. orientation.Special entities that are used to control the selection. Segment . Skew . display setting.
Page 886
Copyright Google Inc. these surfaces can be sculpted using a special set of tools called sandbox tools. Tilt . or polygon. a scene consists of your model and a series of scene-specific settings. Section Plane . placement. written in the Ruby programming language. the smoother it appears. shadow.Surfaces created with the Sandbox from Scratch and Sandbox from Contours are referred to as sandboxes because like sand in a sandbox. Score . direction. This surface is also referred to as a Sandbox and Mesh. Triangulated Irregular Network . Ruby Console .Similar to a slide in presentation software. and section cut. Other terms for sandbox are terrain or Triangulated Irregular Network. entity. TIN . each derived from irregularly spaced points.A camera movement in which the camera tilts up or down. when combined.A segment is a single line that.A surface comprised of triangles.The edges created by the intersection of geometry at a section plane. moving one entity might move or alter the another. Scene . circle.The orientation of triangles in a TIN (horizontal or vertical).in three-point perspective there are three vanishing points (vp). Ruby Script . 2008
.Entities are said to be "sticky" in that when connected to another entity. Stickiness . Ruby Programming Language .Ruby console which is an environment where you can experiment with Ruby commands or methods. attached. of the section slice. Section Slice . Triangulation . Scene can be combined to form animations in SketchUp.

the inner workings of your model
Y Z
Page 887
Copyright Google Inc. 2008
.
W
Walkthrough Tools .A display setting whereby all faces have an applied global transparency.Two-point perspective is usually used to represent three dimensions on a two-dimensional medium.Google SketchUp 7 Help
Two-Point Perspective . which are located to the left and right of the viewer. and sometimes editing.Tools used to view your model as through walking around and in your model
X
X-Ray Mode . You can also enter values into the Measurements Toolbar to manipulate the selected entity.In two-point perspective there are two vanishing points (vp).
U V
Measurements Toolbar . All lines drawn in the blue axes are exactly perpendicular to the ground plane when viewing a 3 dimensional drawing viewed in 2 point perspective.The Measurements Toolbar displays dimensional information while you draw. XRay mode is useful for seeing.